Volume 2 - Part 4 - MEP Electrical Specifications

JBR
5-STAR HOTEL
STAGE 4 - REVISED
DETAILED DESIGN
-TENDER ISSUE
VOLUME - 2
PART 4 OF 7
ELECTRICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
7 SEPTEMBER 2015
JBR 5 Star Hotel

Tender Documents - Package A
(Architecture, Structure and MEP)
Master Index
-
Volume 1: Condition of Contract
Volume 2: Specification
o Volume 2 - Part 1 of 7: Architectural Specifications
o Volume 2 - Part 2 of 7: Structural Specifications
o Volume 2 - Part 3 of 7: Mechanical Specifications
o Volume 2- Part 4 of 7: Electrical Specifications
o Volume 2- Part 5 of 7: Interior Design Specifications (Future Package)
o Volume 2- Part 6 of 7: Elevator Specifications
o Volume 2 - Part 7 of 7: Landscape Specifications (Future Package)
Volume 3: Bill Of Quantities
Volume 4: Drawings
o Volume 4 - Part 1 of 5: Architecture Drawings
o Volume 4 - Part 2 of 5: Interior Design (Future Package)
o Volume 4 - Part 3 of 5: Structure Drawings
o Volume 4 - Part 4 of 5: MEP Drawings
o Volume 4 - Part 5 of 5: Landscape Drawings (Future Package)
Volume 5: Other Documents

o Volume 5 - Part 1 of 5: Construction Phasing Strategy
o Volume 5- Part 2 of 5: Dubai Properties Group, Safety Management
System, Construction HSE Guide (DPG/HSE/SMS/03), 15/06/2012
o Volume 5 Part 3 of 5: Geotechnical Report
o Volume 5 Part 4 of 5: Edition - Hotel Technical Standards, June 2013
o Volume 5 Part 5 of 5: Module 14, Fire Protection & Life Safety,
Marriott Design Standards, UAE: January 2015
Proposed 2B + G + 10 Storey Hotel Building on Plot No. 3920529

at JBR, Marsa, Dubai, for M/s. Dubai Properties Group
DIVISION 13 & 16 - ELECTRICAL

INDEX
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
MEP Final Specification
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Description of Revision
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

DIVISION 13 & 16 - ELECTRICAL
INDEX
Sr. No.
Section No.
Description
Revision
1.
13850
Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm System
2.
16010
General Requirements of Electrical Services
3.
16080
Pre-commissioning and Commissioning
4.
16120
Conductors and Cables
5.
16130
Raceway and Boxes
6.
16140
Wiring Devices
7.
16150
Electronic Soft Starters
8.
16160
Variable Frequency Controllers
9.
16222
Electrical Motors
10.
16230
DIESEL GENERATOR SETS
11.
16260
UPS SYSTEM
12.
16280
Automatic Power Factor Improvement Plant
13.
16440
Low Voltage Switchboard
14.
16450
Enclosed Bus Assemblies
15.
16510
Lighting Fixtures
16.
16530
Central Emergency Lighting
17.
16570
Lighting Control and Dimming System
18.
16580
Ballasts
19.
16605
Lightning Protection System
20.
16645
Earthing System
21.
16521
Exterior Lighting
Division 13 & 16 - Electrical

Index
July 2015
Page 1 of 1
DIVISION 13 - SECTION 13850

ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
Work Included ............................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
Description of Work ...................................................................................................................................... 3
1.3
Quality Assurance......................................................................................................................................... 4
1.4
Codes And Standards .................................................................................................................................. 5
1.5
Submittals...................................................................................................................................................... 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS................................................................................................................................................. 7
2.1
System Description ....................................................................................................................................... 7
2.2
Peripheral Devices...................................................................................................................................... 18
2.3
System of Wiring ......................................................................................................................................... 23
2.4
Civil Defence Remote Monitoring System................................................................................................. 23
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................................... 24

3.1
Installation ................................................................................................................................................... 24
3.2
Type of Cables ............................................................................................................................................ 24
3.3
Cabling and Wiring ..................................................................................................................................... 24
3.4
Testing and Commissioning ....................................................................................................................... 25
3.5
Warranty ...................................................................................................................................................... 27
Division 13 - Section 13850

July 2015
Page 1 of 26

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Work Included
1.1.1
Compliance with sections of Division I, General and documents referred to therein.
1.1.2
Conform to General Requirements for Electrical Services of Division 26.
1.2
Description of Work
The scope of works shall includes supply, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance
during guarantee period of an integrated analogue addressable fire alarm system with emergency
voice evacuation for the entire project as specified herein and as indicated in the related drawings.
The system shall consist of but not limited to the following:
Analogue addressable fire alarm control panels, fire alarm repeater panels, photo electric smoke
detectors, heat detectors, duct mounted detectors, line isolators, various addressable interfacing
modules, manual break glass call units, fire alarm bells/sounders, speakers, speakers with strobe,
power supplies, fire fighters telephone system, fire fighters smoke control station, voice evacuation
system etc.
The fire alarm system shall consist of all necessary hardware equipment and software to perform
the following functions:
a)
Fire detection and alarm operations
b)
Control and monitoring of elevators, smoke control equipment, and other systems and equipment
as indicated in the drawings and specifications
c)
Two-way supervised firefighters phone operations
d)
Supervised automatic voice alarm operations

The main fire alarm control panel shall be installed in the facility management office at retail
building. All fire alarm panels in townhouses, recreation buildings, duplex building and guard rooms
shall be connected to the main fire alarm panel through a cable network.
The contractor shall coordinate with the manufacturers/suppliers of the following systems in order to
interface the fire alarm system to these systems:
a)
Security and Door Access System
b)
HVAC system
c)
Fire fighting/sprinkler system
d)
Elevator controls
e)
Lighting Control system
f)
Central monitoring for emergency and exit lighting.
g)
All audio / visual systems in fire zone
h)
All kitchen hood fire suppression system
i)
All staircase pressurization system
j)
All smoke control (and make up air) system

July 2015
Page 2 of 26

The main fire alarm control panel shall be with a graphic operation station where all fire alarm
zones shall be graphically displayed.
Fire fighters telephone system and emergency voice evacuation system shall be provided in the
main fire alarm control panels located in the ground floor of the building.
Fire fighters telephone shall be provided at each staircase landing at all floors as indicated in the
drawing.
All guest room smoke detectors shall have sounder bases as shown in the design drawings.
Audible and visual notification appliances such as ceiling speakers, wall mounted speakers, and
speakers with strobe, etc shall be installed at all corridors/common areas for emergency voice
evacuation as indicated in the drawings, in accordance with the relevant codes and standards, and
to the approval of relevant local authorities.
The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labour,
equipment, materials, and performances of all operations in connection with the installation of the
Fire Alarm system as shown on the drawings and as herein specified for the related items.
The complete installation is to conform to the applicable sections of MFPA-70, NFPA-72, NFPA101, Local Code Requirements, National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 760, and
Fairmonts guidelines and requirement.
All fire alarm panels and devices shall be of UL listed.
The work covered by this section of the specifications is to be coordinated with the related work as
specified elsewhere under the project specifications.
1.3
Quality Assurance
1.3.1
Items of the fire Alarm system shall be from the approved list of Dubai Civil Defence (DCD) and
listed as a product manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
(UL), Loss Prevention Certificate Board (LPCB) and all other equivalent bodies as indicated in
Item-1.4.
1.3.2
The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification is to be provided by a
representative or by a certified distributor of the manufacturer, who has been engaged in production
of this type software driven equipment for at least ten (10) years and has an authorized
representative in LOCAL AUTHORITY.
Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished
under requirement of this specification shall conform to latest publications or standard rules of the
following:
a)
Local Electricity Authority regulations for electrical installation works.
b)
Department of Civil Defence requirements
1.3.3
Manufacturers Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems and with a record of

successful in-service performance, and a fully equipped service center within 50 Km of project site,
capable of providing training, spares and emergency maintenance and service and accepting
callout within 24 hours, 7 days a week.
1.3.4
Installer qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized and certified representative of

the fire alarm system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
project (minimum 5 years).

July 2015
Page 3 of 26

1.3.5
Demonstrate that installer has satisfactorily completed at least 2 system installations similar in
design and extent to that indicated for this project, and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
1.3.6
Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through 1 source from a single
manufacturer.
1.3.7
Compliance with local requirements: comply with applicable building code local ordinances and
regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the geographical location of this
project.
1.4
Codes And Standards

All equipment proposed and planned for use must have DCD approval in addition to the approval
from the nationally recognized agencies listed below:
a)
Module 14 of Rixos Guidelines.
b)
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
c)
FM
Factory Mutual
d)
FOC
Fire Officers Committee
e)
LPCB Loss Prevention Certification Board
f)
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
g)
NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code
h)
NFPA 101, Code for Safety to Life in Buildings and Structures
National Electrical Code, Article 760

Relevant UL standards:
UL 864/UOJZ,
APOU
Control units for Fire Protective Signaling systems
UL 268
Smoke detectors for Fire Protective Signaling systems
UL 268A
Smoke detectors for Duct applications
UL 521
Heat detectors for fire protective signaling systems
UL 228
Door Holders for fire protective signaling systems
UL 1480
Speakers for fire protective signaling systems
UL 1971
Standard for visual signaling appliances
UL 1711
Amplifiers for Fire protective signaling systems

July 2015
Page 4 of 26

The cables used for fire alarm system shall meet the following standards:
a)
BS6387
Fire and Mechanical Tests
b)
IEC 331
Fire Test
c)
BS4066-3/IEC332-3
Flame Propagation
d)
BS6425-2/IEC754-2
Acid Gas Emission Test
All the equipment shall operate reliably under the following environmental conditions:
a)
Ambient Temperature
4 to 520 C
b)
Relative Humidity
Max. 95%
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1
Manufacturers Technical Data

During the time of the contract and before substantial completion of the electrical installation, submit
to Consultant three(3) copies of descriptive literature, technical data, maintenance
recommendations(from the equipment manufacturer), catalogues etc
1.5.2
Installation Instructions
Submit the complete manufacturers installation instructions of all the products used.
1.5.3
Calculations
Forward calculations and data for:
1.5.4
a)
Battery sizing calculations for the power supply.
b)
Amplifier sizing calculation for the voice evacuation system
c)
Voltage drop and cable sizing calculation for the fire alarm system cabling including audible
and visual alarm notification circuits
Interfacing details
Details of interfacing with the various systems indicated in item 1.2 description of work and
sequence of operation in case of alarm activation/fire situations, cause and effect programme shall
be submitted for Consultant review / approval
The contractor shall obtain approval from the local civil defence authority having jurisdiction for the
fire alarm system installation for any changes that may be made to the original drawings as
approved for the project. Detailed shop drawings shall be prepared and submitted for consultant
approval prior to submission to the Local Civil Defence Authority. All shop drawings shall be
approved by the Local Civil Defence Authority prior to proceeding with the works.
1.5.5
Shop drawings
Shop drawings shall include, without being limited to, the following drawings prepared specifically
for this Works:
a)
Overall system diagrams, complete with catalogue numbers and wiring information. Identify
components, terminations and connections to agree with the identification used in the
panels, boxes and equipment.

July 2015
Page 5 of 26

b)
Front views of fire panels and mimic panels, showing lights, switches, pushbuttons and other
devices, identified to agree with the diagrams.
c)
As-built layouts marked on a set of building plans indicating panels, annunciators, detectors,
pull stations, signals, conduit routes, wiring information, junction boxes and pull boxes.
1.5.6
On completion of the installation and testing, submit to Consultant 3 copies of all shop drawings,
diagrams, operating instructions and descriptive literature, assembled in loose leaf binders and
identified by Works.
1.5.7
Special testing tools list and spare parts recommended for 2 year in accordance to Consultant
approval to be handed over to Consultant.
1.5.8
Provide necessary training for Consultant staff on the system installed by trained personnel of the
supplier by the systems manufacturer. Training period and no. of staff to be trained shall be as per
Consultant approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
System Description
2.1.1
Furnish and install a complete analogue addressable Fire Alarm system as described herein and as
shown on the plans to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition.
a)
The system consists of analogue addressable fire alarm control panel and a main fire alarm
command center located in the building control room. Communication between the main fire
alarm command center and the stand alone panels of the building shall be through an
independent fire alarm system network.
b)
The stand-alone fire alarm panel shall provide a local control for the system in the related
outlet whereof the panel is installed while the command centre shall provide a control for the
complete system. A system alarm resetting shall only be possible from the local fire alarm
panel.
c)
Any alarm or trouble from the peripheral circuits shall sound the buzzer, glow the alarm
/Trouble/LED provided for each sensor and the 80 character LCD shall display in plain
language the nature of event in the local stand alone panel and at the command centre, the
same shall be repeated at the repeater panel installed.
d)
The sounder circuits shall be programmed in the control panel to have primary or secondary
(or) sounder ringing. With time delays if necessary as instructed by the consultant during
commissioning.
e)
The (AHUs) Air handling units within the fire zone of incident and where not providing
smoke exhaust makeup air shall be interlocked with the fire alarm control panel for tripping
purpose during fire condition.
f)
The auxiliary circuits in the control panel shall be programmed to activate corresponding to
the nature of event. All equipment to be installed as shown in the layout drawings.
g)
The system shall be interlocked with the public address system.
h)
The system shall be interlocked with the security access control system to release the door
locks in case of fire, however exact sequence of operation/control shall be to consultant
approval.

July 2015
Page 6 of 26

i)
The system shall be Analogue addressable concept with closed loop initiating device
circuits, individual zone supervision, individual indicating appliance circuit supervision,
incoming and standby power supervision. Include control panel, manual pull stations,
automatic fire detectors, sounders, annunciator, remote control devices, all wiring,
connections to devices, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary material for a
complete operating system.
Audible alarm Notification:

Activation of any system fire, supervisory, trouble or status initiating device shall cause the following
actions and indications in the control panels:
2.1.2
a.
Sound a pre announce alarm tone for a maximum of five seconds followed by a field
programmable digitized custom evacuation voice message, on the floor of alarm, the floor
below and the floor above. At the end of the voice message, the alarm tone shall resume.
This sequence shall sound continuously until the alarm silence switch at the control panel is
activated
b.
A simultaneous message shall be delivered via all alarm speakers installed on the remaining
floors indicating the requirement for occupants of these floors to remain alert for further
instructions.
c.
An automatic announcement or tone evacuation signal shall be capable of interruption by

the operation of the system microphone to give voice evacuation instructions overriding the
pre programmed sequences.
d.
Status lights next to speaker selection switches on the control panel shall indicate speaker
circuit selection.
Fire Alarm Control Panel

General
Where shown on the plans, and as recommended by system manufacturer, provide and install a
Fire Alarm Control Panel. Construction shall be modular with solid state, microprocessor based
electronics with plug-in modules. It shall display only that primary controls and displays essential to
operation during a fire alarm condition.
Although the keypad can be used for control of the entire system, it shall only be used for
maintenance purposes. Keypads shall not be visible or required to operate the system during fire
alarm conditions.
A local audible device shall sound during Alarm, Trouble or supervisory conditions. This audible
device shall sound differently during each condition to distinguish one condition from another
without having to view the panel. This audible device shall also sound differently during each
keypress to provide an audible feedback (chirp) to ensure that the key has been pressed properly.
The fire alarm control panel shall allow for loading or editing special instructions and operating
sequences as required. The system is to be capable of on site programming to accommodate and
facilitate expansion, building parameter changes or changes as required by local codes. All
software operations are to be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm
control panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in
memory.
The ability for selective input/output control functions based on ANDing, ORing, NOTing, timing and
special coded operations is to also be incorporated in the resident software programming of the
system.

July 2015
Page 7 of 26

The system Initiating & Notification circuit to be provided with minimum of 20% spare for connecting
any future device as necessary.
2.1.3
Control Panel & Operation

Under normal condition the front panel shall display a "SYSTEM NORMAL" message and the
current time and date.
Should an abnormal condition be detected the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory, or Trouble)
shall flash. The panel audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steadily for trouble
and supervisory conditions.
The panel shall display the following information relative to the abnormal condition of a point in the
system:
a)
Custom location label
b)
Type of device (i.e.; smoke, pull station, water flow).
c)
Point status (i.e.; alarm, trouble).

These three characteristics relative to an abnormal condition of a point shall be displayed
simultaneously. A LED for alarm and one for trouble shall be provided for each room for
zone identification as backup to the LCD Displayed. LCD only Displays shall not be
acceptable.
Pressing the appropriate acknowledge button shall acknowledge the alarm or trouble
condition.
After all the points have been acknowledged, the LED's shall glow steady and the panel
audible signal will be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory, and trouble
conditions shall be displayed along with a prompt to review each list chronologically. The
end of the list shall be indicated.
Alarm Silencing: Should the Alarm Silence button be pressed all alarm signals shall cease
operation.
The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state after an
alarm condition has been remedied. The display shall stop the user through the reset
process with simple English language messages. Messages shall provide operator
assurance of the sequential steps (i.e.; "IN PROGRESS", "RESET COMPLETED", and
"SYSTEM NORMAL:) as they occur, should all alarm conditions be cleared.
Should an alarm condition continue to exist, the system shall remain in an abnormal state.
System control relays shall not reset. The panel audible signal and the Alarm LED shall be
on. The display shall indicate the total number of alarms and troubles present in the system
along with a prompting to review the points. These points will not require acknowledgement
if they were previously acknowledged.
2.1.4
Function Keys
Additional function keys shall be provided to access status data for all system points. As a
minimum the status data shall include Disable/Enable Status, Verification Tallies of Initiating
Devices, Acknowledge Status, etc.

July 2015
Page 8 of 26

2.1.5
History Logging
In addition to any required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum
of three hundred (300) events in an alarm log plus a minimum of three hundred (300) events in a
separate trouble log.
2.1.6
Walk Test With History Logging

The system shall be capable of being tested by one person. While in testing mode, the alarm
activation of an initiating device circuit shall be silently logged as an alarm condition in the historical
data file. The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the alarm.
The momentary disconnection of an initiating or indicating device circuit shall be silently logged as a
trouble condition in the historical data file. The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of
the trouble condition.
The walk test sequence shall have the capability of activating the alarm indicating appliances to
signal a unique code associated to the alarm zone.
The control panel shall be capable of supporting multiple numbers of testing groups whereby one
group of points may be in a testing mode and the other groups may be active and operate as
programmed per normal system operation. After testing is considered complete, testing data may
be retrieved from the system in chronological order to ensure device/circuit activation.
Should an alarm condition occur from an active point, not in walk test mode, it shall perform all
standard programmed alarmed sequences.
2.1.7
LED Supervision
All slave module LED's shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement. Should a problem
occur, the panel shall display the module and the LED location numbers to facilitate location of that
LED.
2.1.8
System Trouble Reminder

Should a trouble condition be present within the system and the audible trouble signal silenced, the
trouble signal shall resound at pre-programmed time intervals to act as a reminder that the fire
alarm system is not 100% operational. Both the time interval and the trouble reminder signal shall
be programmable to suit the users application.
2.1.9
Access Levels
There shall be a minimum of four (4) access levels. Authorized personnel shall only make changes
to passcodes. Systems not capable of password protected manual command operations shall
provide key operated switches for these functions. Function key switches shall be keyed differently
from any other keyed switches or locks used within the system.
In order to maintain security when entering a passcode, the digits entered will not be displayed. All
key presses will be acknowledged by local audible momentary tones.
When a correct passcode is entered, an "ACCESS GRANTED" message shall be displayed. The
new access level shall be in effect until the operator leaves the keypad inactive for ten (10) minutes
or manually logs out.
Should an invalid code be entered, the operator shall be notified with a message and shall be
allowed up to three chances to enter a valid code. After three unsuccessful tries, an "ACCESS
DENIED" message shall be displayed.

July 2015
Page 9 of 26

Access to a level will only allow the operator to perform all actions within that level and all actions of
lower levels, not higher levels.
The following keys/switches shall have access levels associated with them:
a)
Alarm Silence
b)
System Reset
c)
Set Time/Date
d)
Manual Control
e)
On/Off/Auto Control
f)
Disable/Enable
g)
Clear Historical Alarm Log
h)
Clear Historical Trouble Log
i)
Walk Test
j)
Change alarm Verification.

Acknowledge keys shall also require privileged access to acknowledge points. If the
operator presses acknowledge key with insufficient access, an error message will be
displayed. The points will scroll with each key press to view the points on the list, but the
points will not get acknowledged in the database.
2.1.10
Detection Operation
Smoke sensors shall be smoke density measuring devices having no self contained alarm set point
(fixed threshold). The control panel shall determine the alarm decision for each sensor. The control
panel shall determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored
values. Alternatively, sensors with builtin microship analysing smoke density is equally acceptable.
The control panel shall maintain a moving average of the sensors' smoke chamber value to
automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust and dirty conditions that could affect
detection operations. The system shall automatically maintain constant smoke obscuration
sensitivity for each sensor (via the floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors.
The smoke obscuration sensitivity shall be adjustable.
The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. When a
sensor's average value reaches a predetermined value, a "DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall
be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED
on the sensor base shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a "DIRTY
SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second predetermined value, an
"EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be indicated at the control panel for the
individual sensor. To prevent false alarms, these "DIRTY" conditions shall in no way decrease the
amount of smoke obscuration necessary for system activation.
The control panel shall continuously perform an automatic self-test routine on each sensor which
will functionally check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted to
the control panel. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble
condition with the sensor location at the control panel.

July 2015
Page 10 of 26

An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually
access the following information for each sensor:
a)
Primary status
b)
Device type
c)
Present average value
d)
present sensitivity selected*
e)
Peak detection values*
f)
Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
g)
Values shall be in "percent of smoke obscuration" format so that the operator requires no
interpretation.
At least 1000 individually identified sensors as well as conventional initiating device and indicating
appliance circuits shall be supported within a single control panel.
For increased smoke detection assurance, all individually addressed smoke sensors shall be
provided with alarm verification. Only a verified alarm shall initiate the alarm sequence operation.
2.1.11
LED Operation
The alarm LED shall flash on the control panel until the alarm has been acknowledged.
Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another
zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control panel and the panel display shall
show the new alarm information.
A pulsing alarm tone shall occur until acknowledge.
Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another
zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control panel and the panel display shall
show the new alarm information.
A pulsing alarm tone shall occur until acknowledge.
2.1.12
Alarm Verification
The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an Alarm Verification operation whereby
the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. If, within one (1)
minute after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the
system shall process the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within one
minute the system is to resume normal operation. The Alarm Verification is to operate only on
smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately. The
alarm verification operation is to be selectable by device.
The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times a zone has gone into a
verification mode.
Alarm verification zones shall have the capability of being divided into seven different groups
whereby only two verification zones from a group will confirm the first activation and cause the
panel to follow programmed alarm sequence.

July 2015
Page 11 of 26

2.1.13
Manual Evacuation
A manual evacuation switch shall be provided to operate the systems alarm indicating appliances.
Other control circuits shall not be activated. However, a true alarm shall be processed as described
previously.
2.1.14
Alarm & Trouble Conditions

Alarm and trouble conditions shall be immediately displayed on the control panel front alphanumeric
display. If more alarms or troubles are in the system the operator may scroll to display new alarms.
The system shall have an alarm list key that will allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles,
and supervisory service conditions with the time of occurrence. This shall allow for the
determination of not only the most recent alarm but also may indicate the path that the fire is taking.
2.1.15
Supervision
All auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that all switches must be returned to the normal
automatic position to clear system trouble, particularly for the AHU and pressurization fans.
Each independently supervised circuit shall include discrete panel readout to indicate
disarrangement conditions per circuit.
The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly
and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator A green "power on" LED
shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. The system batteries shall be
supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and
visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator.
The System Expansion Modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should a
module become disconnected from the controls, the system trouble indicator must illuminate and
audible trouble signal must sound.
The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance
or testing purposes.
2.1.16
Power Requirements
240 VAC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit shall be provided for each panel.
The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss
of normal 240 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of twenty-four (24) hours with
30 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to
the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be
automatic.
All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the
control panel.
Batteries shall be of the Sealed lead acid type with a minimum life expectancy of 10 years and
mounted in suitable enclosure.
Additional features shall be:
a)
Automatic dual rate charging
b)
Ammeter and Voltmeter
c)
Charger ON indication

July 2015
Page 12 of 26

2.1.17
d)
Charger failure indication
e)
High-rate indication
f)
Battery voltage test points
g)
Vents cabinet
h)
Battery over current protection
Stand alone fire alarm panel

This panel shall have the same features specified above but, it shall cater only for the circuits
connected to it and it shall be possible to acknowledge, silence and reset an alarm/trouble from the
panel through proper access level.
2.1.18
Main fire alarm command centre with graphic operation station

The main fire alarm command centre shall have the same features specified above, but it shall cater
for all the circuit connected to it and shall communicate with all the other stand alone panel with the
possibility to control all sensors in the complete system, acknowledge and silence an alarm.
The main fire alarm command centre shall be provided with a spare capacity allowing the
connection of a minimum of 1000 devices along with the related necessary control circuits for the
future construction phase.
Main fire alarm command centre shall also be connected to the BMS system for monitoring. The
main fire alarm command centre shall include a graphic operation station connected to the fire
alarm system network where all fire alarm zones shall be graphically displayed.
Graphic Command Centres (GCC) shall provide annunciation, starts display, and control for the
complete system using a Windows based graphical interface with a high resolution, colour display.
Response buttons with realistic icons provide control switches specific to the operation being
performed.
1.
Graphic Screen
A graphic screen shall provide easily recognizable site plan and floor plan information. The level of
detail can be customized for the specific facility to easily and accurately direct the operator to the
immediate area of interest.
Icons shall be added to identify the exact device of interest and travel keys can be used to directly
Zoom to predetermined screens for more detail.
In addition to test graphic information, the operator may select specific action messages that
provide emergency response information and directions. These messages are easily field edited to
customize for local requirements.
2.
Network Diagnostics
Automatic, built-in diagnostics shall provide graphical views of the exact network topology and
status. Missing communications links due to wiring breaks or shorts as well as inactive network
nodes are indicated clearly to guide in returning the system to normal Information screens shall be
available to provide detail about each specific network node.
Additional network node diagnostics shall be available for logging into the database of the node of
interest (with proper password access) information not normally public to the network, can be
accessed for further investigation or reprogram. For example, analog sensors that are grouped for
operator convenience can be individually investigated and reprogrammed as required.
July 2015
Page 13 of 26

3.
GCC Operation
When a network status change occurs, the screen shall display the type and location of the alarm
(or other activity). The operator then touches the screen area in alarm to access a more detailed
view of the alarmed zone or device. With the proper access code, the operator has the ability to
acknowledge alarm conditions, silence audible and extinguish visible notification appliances, and
perform system reset directly from the GCC screens.
Custom alarm and trouble messages shall be added and field edited to provide operator dispatch
assistance. Point specified information, such as hazardous material storage and lists of people to
notify shall be automatically or selectively displayed.
4.
GCC Historical Log Information
When details are required for network point information, historical log screens shall easily and
accurately focus on the data required. By selecting all types of information or specific categories,
data is selected as needed. Data can then be reviewed on the screen, and shall be printed at a
local printer, written to a 3.5 floppy disk for use in other locations. This information shall be
formatted to be completed with standard spreadsheet and data base programs. With this feature,
complete records, of the system history shall be kept by adding information such as problem
investigation details.
5.
GCC System Type
The graphic command centre shall be UL listed primary operated workstation with the following
minimum requirements:
-
Hardware
The system shall be capable of supporting limitless Operator Workstation connections using a
TCP/IP Local Area Network (LAN).
The Operator Workstation shall comprise the following minimum hardware:
Intel Core i7 microprocessor running at least at 2.5 GHz or latest.

4GB RAM DDR3
500 GB of HDD with SATA III
24 Super TFT monitor, HD Graphics
Standard keyboard and mouse
DVD Super Multi
Multimedia features
Software
Software at the Operator Workstation shall comprise of:
Windows 7 Professional
Graphic Display Building Editor
Application Software
TCP/IP Networking
Printers
Printers shall be available for printing reports and online alarms. Report printers shall be any
Windows compatible laser or inkjet printer. Alarm printers shall be 80 column dot matrix printers
to allow alarms to be printed as they occur. The printers shall not be connected to parallel port
of a a specific computer. They shall be connected on the Management Layer Network via Multi
Port Print Server.

July 2015
Page 14 of 26

The monitor shall be coloured 24" rack mount with touch screen and controller. Complete with UL
listed I/o card. Historical event log and graphics, network interface and all necessary travel screen
keys for graphics programming.
The software shall be custom built by the manufacturer.
The command centre shall monitor all alarms and troubles of each Fire Alarm Control Panel.
The command centre shall control each Fire Alarm Control Panel as listed in this specification.
All data communication wiring between the fire Alarm Control Panel(s) shall be supervised for
opens, shorts, and grounds.
The main fire alarm command centre shall have the same features specified above, but it shall cater
for all the circuit connected to it and shall communicate with all the other stand alone panel with the
possibility to control all sensors in the complete system, acknowledge and silence an alarm.
The main fire alarm command centre shall be provided with a spare capacity allowing the
connection of a minimum of 2500 devices along with the related necessary control circuits for the
future construction phase.
Main fire alarm command centre shall be connected to the BMS system for communication with the
stand alone fire alarm control panel of each building.
2.1.19
Fire alarm repeater panel

The fire alarm repeater panel shall consist of a LED and LCD display to annunciate all display on
the main fire alarm command centre, the panel does not require to have any control feature.
2.1.20
Addressable Peripheral Network

Communication with Addressable devices: The system must provide communication with all
initiating and control devices individually. All of these devices are to be individually annunciated at
the control panel.
Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point:
a)
Alarm
b)
Trouble
c)
Open
d)
Short
e)
Ground
f)
Device Fail/or Incorrect Device.
All addressable devices are to have the capability of being disabled or enabled individually.
Addressable devices may be multi-dropped from a single pair of wires. Systems that require factory
reprogramming to add or delete devices are unacceptable.

July 2015
Page 15 of 26

2.1.21
Format
The communication format must be a poll/response protocol to allow t-tapping of the wire to
addressable devices and be completely digital. A high degree of communication reliability must be
obtained by using parity data bit error checking routines for address codes and check sum routines
for the data transmission protocol. Systems that do not utilize full digital transmission protocol (i.e.;
that may use time pulse width methods to transmit data etc.) will not be acceptable since they are
considered unreliable and prone to errors.
2.1.22
Identification of Addressable Devices

Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code entered on each device at
time of installation. Hard wire addressable system shall be preferred in order to maintain the
integrity of the system.
Control pushbutton switches - for: alarm silence, alarm acknowledge, supervisory reset, display
time and up to (4) control keys for programmable operation duplicating the control panel switches.
A key enable deactivates the control switches.
Tone alert - Duplicates the control panel tone alert during alarm & trouble conditions:
System trouble LED
Power on LED
2.1.23
Fire Fighters Telephone System

System consist of Master Telephone set, Remote Telephone sets, Remote master telephone,
Telephone interface modules, power supply, all required cabling, control, pull boxes, terminations
etc
Master telephone set along with the required no. of telephone interface modules, LED/LCD
indication, control switches, power supply etc shall be part of the main fire alarm control panel
located in the ground floor.
One no. remote master telephone shall be provided at a location to consultant approval.
System shall provide two way communication between Master and remote fire fighters telephones.
It shall be a 100 % reliable system suitable for application during active fire fighting conditions, fire
alarm investigation, fire alarm system inspection and testing.
The Master telephone connects directly into a telephone interface module. A push to talk switch
provides the operator with voice input control. Master telephone uses local LED/LCD indication and
switch module to select telephone circuits and to silence any subsequent call ins until selected.
Remote telephone can call into the master by either being taken off hook or by plugged into a
telephone jack provided for the purpose.
There shall be ring in tone with a visible LED/LCD indicator for each telephone circuit, and a switch
control to select the calling telephone circuit.
Telephone circuits shall be supervised for opens, shorts, and overload conditions. The master
telephone shall be supervised for broken cord or off hook.
Remote telephones shall be provided as cabinet mounted. Each hears a ring tone when a call in is
selected and a hold tone when placed on hold.
System shall be wired in class A configuration. Size and type of cabling shall be as per system
manufacturers recommendations and to consultant approval.

July 2015
Page 16 of 26

2.1.24
Fire fighters Smoke Control Station (FSCS)

Fire fighters smoke control station (FSCS) shall be part of the fire alarm control panel and shall be
located at the fire control room.
The control station shall include the following features:
a)
The fire fighters smoke control station shall provide full monitoring and manual control
capability over all smoke control systems and equipment.
b)
Equipment shall include but not limited to the following:

i.
Smoke Extract Fans.
ii.
Staircase Pressurization Fans
iii.
Makeup Air Fans
iv.
Motorized dampers of the various sub system including makeup air ducts, smoke
extract ducts etc.
c)
The control station shall have the highest priority control over all smoke control systems
and equipment. Where manual controls are also provided at other building locations for
control of smoke control systems, the control mode selected from the FSCS should prevail.
FSCS control should override or bypass other building controls such as hand off auto and
start/stop switches located on fan motor controllers, and controls intended to protect
against electrical overloads, provide for personnel safety, and prevent major system
damage.
d)
The fire fighters smoke control station shall contain a building diagram that clearly
indicates the type and location of all smoke control equipment (fans, dampers, etc.). The
building areas affected by the equipment shall also be clearly indicated.
e)
The actual status of the systems and equipment that are activated or are capable of
activation for smoke control shall be clearly indicated at the fire fighters smoke control
station.
f)
Status indication shall be provided for on and off status of each individual fan used for
smoke control. ON status should be sensed by pressure difference as proof of airflow.
g)
Contractor shall install all the required control and monitoring modules, relays, for each
contactors and power supply etc every system components to be controlled.
h)
Fire rated cables shall be used for the system installation.
2.2
Peripheral Devices
2.2.1
General
The automatic fire detectors shall be fixed to the installation by mean of plug-in bases.
The two bases shall have a mechanical device enabling the base to be set to accept only one of the
four main type of detectors, i.e. ionisation smoke, optical smoke, infra-red flame and heat.
The bases shall incorporate the optional feature of being able to lock the detectors in place once
plugged in.
The addressable base must incorporate all the electronics circuitry required for communicating
detector status to the Control Panel.

July 2015
Page 17 of 26

Addressable detectors and addressable modules shall be able to transmit to the Control Panel a
pre-set and unique identifier to detect unauthorised changes in the system configuration.
The manufacturer shall have suitable equipment to test and replace all four main types of automatic
detectors.
The manufacturer shall have available intrinsically safe modules for automatic detectors, the plug-in
bases, line isolator & Interface modules.
Detectors with built in microchip complying with the performance specified hereafter is equally
acceptable.
All detectors shall be powered by the fire alarm control panel.
2.2.2
2.2.3
Photo Electric Detectors

a)
The photoelectric smoke detectors shall be capable of detecting smoke from fires. The
detectors shall have 360 degree smoke entry.
b)
The Photo electric smoke detectors shall be U.L listed
c)
The design of the optical smoke detectors sensing chamber shall be optimised to minimise
the effect of the dust deposits over a period of time
d)
The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate screens designed to prevent all but the very
small insects from entering the sensing chamber.
e)
The optical smoke detectors shall include RFI screening and feed-through connecting
components to minimise the effect of radiated and conducted electrical interference.
f)
The optical smoke detectors shall be incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to
provide indication of alarm actuation.
g)
The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate a magnetically operated functional test facility.
h)
The optical smoke detectors shall have EMI/RFI shielded electrons.
i)
The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate an LED clearly visible from the outside, to
provide indication of alarm and normal conditions.
j)
All smoke detectors for elevator recall functions shall be in compliance with ANSI / ASTM
A17.1, elevator code and NFPA 72.
Photo electric detectors with built-in sounder base:

In addition to the above photo electric detectors features, the following features shall be considered:
a.
Sounder must activate upon activation of the floors emergency evacuation alarm.
b.
Sounder shall provide minimum audible alarm of 85 dbA at 10ft, minimum of 75dbA at the
pillow.
c.
Activation of room smoke detector must immediately and automatically sound an alarm
(three pulse temporal pattern as per NFPA-72, paragraph 11.3.5) within the room of incident.
d.
In suites and other mixed sleeping spaces, multiple detector sounder bases located within
the same suit or unit must sound at the same time.

July 2015
Page 18 of 26

2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
Heat Detectors
a)
The heat detectors shall be capable of self restoring and providing rate of rise and fixed
temperature sensing.
b)
The heat detectors shall be U.L listed
c)
The heat detectors shall employ two heat-sensing elements with different thermal
characteristics to provide a rate of rise dependent response.
d)
The temperature sensing elements and circuitry of the heat detectors shall be coated with
epoxy resin to provide environmental protection.
e)
The heat detectors shall incorporate a magnetically operated functional test facility.
f)
The heat detectors shall have EMI/RFI shielded electrons.
g)
The heat detectors shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to provide
indication of alarm and normal conditions.
h)
All heat detectors for elevator recall functions shall be in complete with ANSI / ASTM A17.1,
elevator code and NFPA 72.
Manual Break Glass Call Point

a)
The manual call points shall monitor and signal to the Control Panel the status of a switch
operated by a break glass assembly with N.O/N.C contacts.
b)
The manual call points shall be U.L approved.
c)
The manual call points shall be capable of operating by means of thumb pressure and not
require a hammer.
d)
The manual call points shall be field programmable to be alert or evacuation.
e)
The manual call points shall be capable of being tested using a special key without the
need for shattering the glass.
f)
The addressable manual call points shall have built in electronics with dip switch for
addressing.
g)
The conventional manual call points shall be connected to addressable loop through
interface modules.
h)
The conventional break glass units to be provided in non-conditioned areas such as

workshop area and as shown on drawings.
i)
The manual call points shall evacuate the local fire zone compartment.
j)
The manual call point behind the reception desk will be the only manual call point that will
evacuate the entire complex.
Addressable Interface Modules

a)
The addressable contact interface module shall provide monitoring of the status of switched
input signals from either normally open contacts from conventional devices.
b)
The addressable contact monitoring module shall be capable of deriving its power directly
from the addressable loop or from the control panel.

July 2015
Page 19 of 26

c)
2.2.7
2.2.8
The addressable contact monitoring module shall be enclosed in a pre-fabricated enclosure.
Line Isolator Module

a)
The line isolator module shall provide protection on the addressable loop by automatically
disconnecting the section of wiring between two modules where a short-circuit has occurred.
b)
The line isolator module shall derive power directly from addressable loop
c)
The line isolator module shall be installed for every 15 devices and as shown in layout
drawings.
Circuit Protector
Circuit protector shall be provided on all fire alarm external wiring to protect the system against
lightning or high transient voltage. The protector shall be located as close as practicable to the point
at which the circuit leave or enter a building.
The circuit protector shall have line to line response time of less than 1 nano second and capable of
accepting greater than 2000 Ampere at 28 volt.
2.2.9
Photoelectric duct mounted detector

Photoelectric duct sensors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall operate on the light
scattering, photodiode principle. To minimize nuisance alarms, detectors shall have a 30 mesh
insect screen and be designed to ignore invisible particles or smoke densities that are below the
factory set point. No radioactive material shall be used.
2.2.10
Sounders
Sounders shall be provided for the project. Some sounders in some areas shall be equipped with
built-in strobes for audible and visual warning.
The sounders shall meet EN 54 Part 3 and features 14 tones model.
Features:
2.2.11
a)
Low current consumption
b)
High output upto 103 dB (A) @ 1.0m
c)
Tone and volume setting that can be site configurable.
d)
Red and white color to Architect / Civil Defense approval.
e)
Built-in xenon strobe as described in Part-20
f)
Low profile
g)
Sounders installed in outdoor areas shall be weather proof
Fire Alarm Bells

a)
The fire alarm bells shall be U.L listed
b)
The fire alarm bells shall be wired directly from the panel in Multi circuit.

July 2015
Page 20 of 26

2.2.12
2.2.13
c)
The fire alarm bells circuits shall be complete with end of line resistors for maintaining
purpose.
d)
The fire alarm bell shall be of the light weight Aluminium alloy construction, water proof and
painted red.
e)
The bell shall be vibrating type with low current consumption
f)
The bell shall be 6 heavy duty suitable for internal and external operation as required.
g)
It shall give a minimum sound level of 90 dB at 1 meter.
h)
The fire alarm bell shall be controlled from the loop. Sequencing of bell controls, shall be
determined during construction and can be programmed at control panel.
j)
Fire alarm bells shall be addressable wherever indicated in the drawing
Fire Alarm Bell with Strobe Light

a)
Audible/Visible notification appliance combines a high intensity strobe with a low current
electronic horn.
b)
Horn output shall be a steady harmonically rich sound that can be easily coded by the
controlling notification appliance circuit.
c)
24V DC operation
d)
UL listed.
e)
Strobe light shall be of xenon with impact resistant polycarbonate lens.
f)
Strobe light intensity shall be selected from manufactures standard product range depending
on the location where it shall be installed and the area coverage. It shall not be less than 30
candela.
g)
It shall be of surface mounting/semi flush mounting.
h)
Minimum sound level shall be as PE UL464.
i)
For hearing accessible guestrooms:

-
Visual alarms (strobes) are to be connected to, and function on activation of the
buildings fire alarm system, upon activation of the rooms smoke detector or any CO
detector in the room.
Provide 177 candela, if the strobe is within 61cm from the ceiling (NFPA 72, table
7.5.4.4.2).
Provide 110 candela, otherwise (NFPA 72, table 7.5.4.4.2).
Temperature
Control Panel
0 C to 48 C
Peripheral Devices
10 C to 50 C (For conventional devices).

0 C to 49 C (Addressable devices)

July 2015
Page 21 of 26

2.2.14
Humidity
95%
Outdoor Equipment
IP65.
Beam Detector
The projected beam type shall be a 4-wire 24V DC device.
The detector shall be listed to UL 268 and shall consist of a separate transmitter and receiver capable
of being powered separately or together
The detector shall operate in either a short range (30' - 100') or long range (100' - 330') mode.
The temperature range of the device shall be -22 degrees F to 131 degrees F.
The detector shall feature a bank of four alignment LEDs on both the receiver and the transmitter that
are used to ensure proper alignment of unit without special tools.
Beam detector shall feature automatic gain control which will compensate for gradual signal
deterioration from dirt accumulation on lenses.
The unit shall be both ceiling and wall mountable.
The detector shall have the ability to be tested using calibrated test filters or magnet activated remote
test station.
2.3
System of Wiring
2.4
The system shall be wired using FP200/FP400 cable or approved equal. The cable size for the
initiating device circuit shall be 1.5mm2 and 2.5mm2 for the indicating device circuit.
Civil Defence Remote Monitoring System
24 hours fire alarm remote monitoring system shall be provided as per Civil Defence requirements and
as described hereunder:
2.4.1
This system shall monitor the Fire services, Cooking Gas and Water Tanks in the building. It will
consist of Civil Defence Panel, installed in the Main Entrance or in an area close to the Main
Entrance of the building, and connected to the Building Fire Alarm Panel.
2.4.2
Contractor shall obtain this panel from the Civil Defence Department after submitting an application
signed by the Building Owner, and paying the appropriate fee to the Department.
2.4.3
The Technical information about the panel shall be as follows:
2.4.4
Civil Defence Panel (CDP) shall be located (preferably) next to the Building Fire Alarm Panel (BFAP)
in the Main Entrance area of the building. If this location is not possible, it can be located in any
Landlord room located close to the Main Entrance e.g. Control room, Watchman room, etc. for which
prior approval should be obtained by the Contractor from the Civil Defence Department.
2.4.5
The location of this panel must have GPRS signal coverage.
2.4.6
If the panel is required by the Architect / Owner to be installed recessed, then, a suitable recess, 800 x
800 x 500mm deep, shall be provided for this purpose. Otherwise, panel can be surface mounted.
2.4.7
Following functions need to be monitored on the CDP through open protocol (Bacnet IP, Bacnet
MSTP, Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU (RS 485) and LON) soft integration with the BFAP.
-
Alarm to each floor.
Common Fire Alarm fault.

July 2015
Page 22 of 26

-
Fire water tank low level.
Individual Fire pump running status.
Individual Fire pump trip status.
Fire water line low pressure alarm.
Gas Alarm per zone or floor.
Common Gas Alarm system fault.
Common Alarm for all specified Fire systems.
Interface units for all the above functions shall be made available to the BFAP.
2.4.8
In addition to the above, the following hard wired points also shall be provided to the Civil Defence
panel from the Main Fire Alarm Control panel.
-
Common Fire Alarm fault within the building.
Common Fire Alarm System fault.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes,
local authority requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be installed
in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC - Article 760 A and C, Power-Limited Fire
Protective Signaling Circuits or if required may be reclassified as non-power limited and wired in
accordance with NEC-Article 760 A and B. Upon completion, the contractor shall so certify in
writing to the Consultant and general contractor. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled
"Fire Alarm". Wiring colour code shall be maintained throughout the installation.
3.1.2
Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely
coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
3.1.3
The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm
equipment after completion of the installation.
3.1.4
The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on site supervision of installation.
3.2
Type of Cables
Fire resistant cables complying with BS 6387 Category CWZ shall be used for the wiring of the fire
alarm system. The cabling shall be carried out in class A configuration. Cable running through walls,
ceilings, roofs etc shall be provided with fire stops.
3.3
Cabling and Wiring
3.3.1
The installation of all wiring, cable and equipment shall be in accordance with NFPA 70. National
Electric Code and specifically with Article 760, Fire Protection signaling systems and in accordance
with the local codes and standards.
3.3.2
Wiring for the fire detection and alarm system shall be segregated from all lighting and power
systems.
3.3.3
Wiring within any control equipment shall be readily accessible without removing any components
or parts.
3.3.4
All internal fire alarm cabling shall be fire resistant cables.

July 2015
Page 23 of 26

3.3.5
Wiring for 240 V AC power to each FCP shall be minimum 2.5 mm2. Wiring for all bell circuits shall
be minimum 2.5 mm2 and wiring for all signaling circuits shall be minimum 1.5 mm2.
3.3.6
Wiring between FCPs and ACPs shall be minimum 2.5 mm2 and shall be armoured.
3.3.7
Wiring between FCPs for networking shall be 1.5 mm2 twisted pairs cables.
3.3.8
Wiring for the telephone circuits shall be minimum 1.5 sq.mm twisted.
3.3.9
Wiring for the speaker circuits shall be minimum 1.5 sq.mm twisted and shall meet UL 2196
requirements.
3.3.10
All cabling shall be concealed in the building fabric for all conditioned areas.
3.3.11
Fire alarm system cables shall be installed using PVC conduits embedded in the slab/wall. All
surface mounted installation shall be using GI conduits.
3.3.12
Exposed installation of fire alarm system cable is not acceptable.
3.3.13
Where cables pass through walls or floors, then shall be protected by galvanized steel sleeves.
3.4
Testing and Commissioning
3.4.1
Preliminary Tests
Upon the completion of the installation, the system shall be subject to functional and operation
performance tests including test of each installed initiating and notification appliance. Tests shall
include the meggering of all system conductors to determine that
the system is free from
grounded, shorted or open circuits. The megger test shall be conducted prior to the installation of
fire alarm equipment. If deficiencies are found corrections shall be made and the system shall be
retested to assure that it functions.
3.4.2
Acceptance Test
Provide the service of competent, factory trained Engineer or technician authorized by the
manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the
adjustments and commissioning of the system. Testing shall be in full accordance with NEPA 72
section 7.2.2 :
a)
Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short
circuits, earth faults, continuity and insulation.
b)
Verify activation of all flow switches.
c)
Open initiating device circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.
d)
Open signaling line circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.
e)
Open and short indicating appliance circuits and verify that fault signal actuates.
f)
Earth initiating device circuits and verify response of fault signals.
g)
Earth signaling line circuits and verify response of fault signals.
h)
Earth indicating appliance circuits and verify response of fault signals.
i)
Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.

July 2015
Page 24 of 26

3.4.3
j)
Check installation, supervision and operation of all intelligent smoke sensors during a walk
test.
k)
Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on
the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the Fire
Panel and the correct activation of the control points.
Conductor Testing
Prior to connection of the equipment all conductors shall be tested in the following manner.
Verify absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors.
Insulation test: To ensure that all conductor other than those intentionally connected together and
completely isolated.
3.4.4
System Testing
Verify that the control unit is in the normal supervisory condition as detailed in the manufacturers
manual.
Test each initiating device and indicating appliance for alarm operation and trouble indication.
Test the operation of control module for proper response
Test all primary power supplies.
Test all secondary power supply
Verify that each test signal is properly reported and received at the main fire alarm panel.
3.4.5
Functional tests to verify the interfacing details with all other systems as described in item
1.2.description of works and confirm whether the interfacing logic and sequence of operation is as
per Consultant approved programme.
3.4.6
Fire Alarm Schedule to be completed by the Vendor during tender. One schedule to be completed
for each panel
Control Panel Features
Response
Operators Panel:
LCD
Keypad
Programmable Control Keys
Supervisory LED
Printer
Total I/O Point Capacity
Conventional Circuits:
Initiating Circuits
Indicating Appliance
Auxiliary Relay with built in feedback
No. of Loops
Number
Distance (Style 4)
Addressable points

July 2015
Page 25 of 26

Control Panel Features
Response
Meters
System
Battery
Industry Listings
UL 864 (fire)
NFPA 72 Series
FM
Software Features
Field configurable
Passcode levels
Custom labels
Time Control
Alarm verification by group
One man walk test by group silent with log
with zone indication
Historical log alarm events
trouble events
Trouble reminder programmable
Addressable Devices Feature:
Detectors
Photoelectric
Heat
Duct
Analog
Address Location
Base
Interchangeable heads
W/alarm LED
W/remote LED output
W/auxiliary relay
W/sounder
Manual Station
Control Modules
Isolator Module
3.5
Warranty
3.5.1
The contractor shall warrant the completed fire alarm system wiring and equipment to be free from
inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of two (2) years from the date of taking over
certificate or from the date of first beneficial use.
3.5.2
The equipment manufacturer shall make available to Consultant a maintenance contract proposal
to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and tests per year in compliance with NFPA-72H
guidelines.
End of Section

July 2015
Page 26 of 26


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................4

1.1
WORK INCLUDED .........................................................................................................................4
1.2
SCOPE OF WORKS.......................................................................................................................4
1.3
EXAMINATION OF SITE ................................................................................................................5
1.4
RELATION TO WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS .............................................................................5
1.5
RULES AND REGULATIONS ........................................................................................................5
1.6
INSURANCE ..................................................................................................................................6
1.7
SITE ENGINEER ............................................................................................................................6
1.8
SHOP DRAWINGS.........................................................................................................................6
1.9
INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS AND CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS ...........................................6
1.10
RECORD DRAWINGS (AS-BUILT DRAWINGS) ...........................................................................7
1.11
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ............................................................................7
1.12
ELECTRICAL EXTRAS ..................................................................................................................8
1.13
CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY .............................................................................................8
1.14
HIGH VOLTAGE NETWORK .........................................................................................................9
1.15
MAIN SWITCHGEAR AND SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT ..........................................9
1.16
AUTHORITIES APPROVAL .........................................................................................................10
1.17
DEFINITIONS...............................................................................................................................11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................11
2.1
MATERIALS .................................................................................................................................11
2.2
NAMEPLATES AND IDENTIFICATIONS .....................................................................................12
PART 3 - EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................13

3.1
CONCRETE AND FORMWORK ..................................................................................................13
3.2
HANGERS, INSERTS, SLEEVES AND SUPPORTS...................................................................13
3.3
CUTTING AND PATCHING .........................................................................................................14
3.4
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ........................................................................14
3.5
EARTHING ...................................................................................................................................14
3.6
PHASE IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................................15
3.7
VOLTAGE DROP .........................................................................................................................15
3.8
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INTERFERENCE ..............................................................................15
3.9
SEGREGATION OF SERVICES ..................................................................................................15
3.10
BUILDER'S WORK .......................................................................................................................15

General Requirements
July 2015
Page 1 of 27

3.11
FOUNDATION BOLTS .................................................................................................................15
3.12
DESIGN AND STANDARDISATION ............................................................................................16
3.13
MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND SUPERVISION .................................................................16
3.14
SAMPLES ....................................................................................................................................17
3.15
STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................17
3.16
PAINTING (ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT)................................................................17
3.17
CLEANING AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................................17
3.18
SYSTEM COORDINATION ..........................................................................................................17
3.19
SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAM .............................................................................................................18
3.20
OPERATION, CARE AND MAINTENANCE .................................................................................18
3.21
PROVISION FOR FUTURE EXPANSION....................................................................................18
3.22
ACCESS DOORS.........................................................................................................................18
3.23
CONTRACT DRAWINGS .............................................................................................................19
3.24
COMPLETION OF CONTRACT ...................................................................................................19
3.25
DEFINITIONS...............................................................................................................................19
3.26
FIRE RATING ...............................................................................................................................19
3.27
MOUNTING HEIGHTS .................................................................................................................20
3.28
FIRE SEALS .................................................................................................................................20
3.29
WARNING SIGNS ........................................................................................................................20
3.30
WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT ......................................................................................................20
3.31
INSPECTION AND TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS - LOCAL......................................21
3.32
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ON SITE ...............................................................................21
3.33
SPECIAL TOOLS AND INSTRUCTION BOOKS .........................................................................22
3.34
GUARANTEE ...............................................................................................................................23
4.0
ELECTRICAL WORKS SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS ...................................................23

July 2015
Page 2 of 27

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Compliance with relevant General Requirements of Electrical Services.
1.1.2
Provide all materials, equipment, labour and services to complete the installation, wiring, testing
and commissioning of the complete and functioning electrical systems including but not limited to
the scope of work specified in this section.
1.2
SCOPE OF WORKS
The entire electrical installation shall be carried out in full compliance with operatoer Guidelines
(Contract date edition).
The contractor shall be responsible to read and understand fully the specification and the scope of
work. Further more, the contractor shall be responsible to provide all conduiting, wiring, power
supply, accessories and supplementary component, necessary for the safe and proper operation of
the various systems.
The contractor shall be responsible:
a)
To visit the site to familiarize himself with the scope of work.
b)
Preparation of shop drawings and obtaining approval from the various authorities prior to
execution of work.
c)
Obtaining all materials and workmanship approval during execution and on completion of
works.
d)
All costs and charges required by the various authorities and any related to the connection of
permanent power supply and KWH meter and all provisions for intelligent metering as per
DEWA requirements.
The Scope of works includes the design, supply, delivery to site, installation, commissioning, testing,
maintenance and guarantee of the various complete systems outlined briefly below, and as described
elsewhere in the specification documents and in the drawings.
Low Voltage Switchboards, submain distribution boards, distribution board.
Capacitor Bank and Harmonic Filters
Variable frequency drives, soft starters, star delta starters
Lighting
Wiring Devices
Disconnect Switches
Conduit/Trunking and Fittings
Cable Tray and Accessories
Wire and Cable
Lighting Control and Diming System

July 2015
Page 3 of 27

Earthing System
Analogue Addressable Fire Detection and Voice Evacuation System
Central Battery System for Emergency and Exit Lights.
All necessary power supplies terminating in an isolating switch located within 2 meters of the
mechanical equipment/panels.
All coordination with other substrade in regards to the routing and location of various services and
outlets and to supply and install data outlets and power supply to the various equipment including all
conduiting, ducts for the installation of the control wires by the equipment supplier.
All necessary volt free contacts and provisions to connect the various system to the BMS system
where specified in the BMS section.
Rerouting of any existing services within the site in coordination with the related authorities.
Contractor shall allow for installation of all light fixtures including final connections and terminations
using heat resistant flexible cables.
The work shall comprise the whole of the labour and, unless otherwise indicated, all the materials
necessary to form a complete installation and such tests, adjustments and commissioning as are
prescribed in subsequent clauses and as may otherwise be required to give an effective working
installation to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
1.3
EXAMINATION OF SITE
Examine the site to ascertain the existing conditions before submitting the tender.
No consideration will be given to any claims arising from circumstances which were visible upon, or
reasonably inferable from an examination of the site prior to submission of the tender.
1.4
RELATION TO WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS

Examine the Work of Other Divisions upon which the Work of this Division depends for proper
completion. Report any defect or variance to the Consultant. Do not commence work under this
Division until such defects have been corrected.
Coordinate the work of the Electrical Division with the Work of the Other Divisions in such a manner
that there is no interference. In areas where conduits and equipment called for in the Electrical
Division will be installed in conjunction with pipes, ductwork and equipment called for in Other
Divisions, coordinate the work to ensure the best use of the space.
Coordinate with other Divisions excavation, backfilling, form work, shoring and concrete work for
manholes, cable pits, equipment bases, concrete pads, earth wells and pits, lighting pole bases
and all other work of this Division, to be carried out under the appropriate Divisions of this
Specification. Refer to Article on "Excavation, Backfill and Concrete Work."
Verify in the field dimensions, locations and clearances affecting the work of this Division.
1.5
RULES AND REGULATIONS

Comply with the rules and regulations of the I.E.E., N.F.P.A., U.L., I.E.C, B.S and the Local
Authorities.
The standards established by the drawings and specifications shall not be reduced by any of these
codes and bodies.

July 2015
Page 4 of 27

1.6
INSURANCE
This division shall carry all necessary insurance to protect
claims.
1.7
the Consultant from any possible
SITE ENGINEER
Employ a Site Engineer for the work of this Division, satisfactory to the Consultant. Retain him at
the site throughout the construction period unless otherwise approved or directed by the Consultant
Provide site supervision of the Work, and visit the site as often as necessary to ensure work is
properly performed. Attend meetings as requested by the Consultant.
1.8
SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit data and workshop drawings for all system and equipment supplied under this Division,
including dimensioned layouts, schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams for components and
systems.
Provide additional copies of shop drawings at the Consultants request, for Other Divisions or
authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the materials and equipment being supplied, details of
construction, finish, accurate dimensions, required clearances, capacities and performance.
Drawings shall be certified correct for construction by the manufacturer, before submission.
Check and sign all copies of each shop drawing before submission, indicating that it conforms to
the requirements of the specifications and drawings, and that it has been properly coordinated with
related equipment as well as all other trades whether supplied under this or Other, Divisions.
Indicate comments, corrections and changes in green.
Each shop drawing for non-catalogue items shall be prepared specifically for this work. Brochures
submitted for catalogue items shall be clearly marked to specifically indicate the items to be
supplied.
Unless specific written permission is given, do not begin fabrication or installation until reviewed
prints of shop drawings have been returned approved by the Consultant.
All shop drawings shall be produced in accordance with the approved Consultanting procedures.
1.9
INTERFERENCE DRAWINGS AND CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS

Provide interference and co-ordination drawings as specified. Prepare detailed interference
drawings in conjunction with all contractors concerned to ensure that all electrical equipment and
materials can be installed where shown, without interference from other trades and with allowance
for adequate space for servicing.
Prepare additional interference drawings as directed by the Consultant.
If any discrepancies or interference with other equipment are found which will necessitate an
appreciable revision of or deviation from the Work indicated or specified, obtain directions from the
Consultant before proceeding further with that part of the Work or with the ordering of equipment or
materials.
Prepare drawings at a scale of 1:50 to show cable, conduit runs, bus ducts, panels and
switchboards in electrical rooms, ceiling spaces, and mechanical rooms.
Prepare drawings at a scale of 1:50 to show wires, conduit runs, trunking runs, cable trays runs and
circuit distribution for lighting, small power and low current circuits in all buildings.

July 2015
Page 5 of 27

The drawings shall include all details pertaining to clearances, access sleeves, electrical
connections, location, and elevation of pipes, ducts, conduit etc., obtained in consultation with other
contractors.
Forward all drawings, approved by all contractors, to the Consultant for review.
All drawings are to be prepared in ample time for review and implementation. Failure to do so, and
any problems that arise, will be the responsibility of the contractor of this Division.
All interference and co-ordination drawings shall be produced in accordance with the approved
Consultanting Procedures.
1.10
RECORD DRAWINGS (AS-BUILT DRAWINGS)

The contractor shall maintain one (1) record contract set of white prints to keep on site at all times.
Clearly mark on these contract prints in red, as the job progresses, all site changes and deviations
from the Consultants "issued for construction" documents, including the locations of panels, boxes,
equipment, underground services and feeders to lighting, distribution, communications and signal
panels, and all conduit runs for all systems.
In addition to the record contract set, keep one (1) up to date set of white prints on site at all times.
Indicate dimensions of buried services relative to the building column lines, and inverts relative to
finished floor levels or grades.
Record revisions or variations covered by authorized changes.
The record drawings will be reviewed at regular intervals by the Consultant, and will be taken into
consideration when reviewing the monthly application for Progress Payment.
Record drawings shall incorporate all change orders and the Consultant Instruction.
All record drawings shall be produced in accordance with the approved engineering procedures.
Submit six sets of prints, one reproducible and one set of disks to the Consultant for review.
1.11
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1.11.1
The following information shall be included in the maintenance manuals:

a)
Name and address of local suppliers for all items included.
b)
Details of design elements, construction features, component function and maintenance

requirements to permit effective start-up, operation, maintenance, repair, modification,
extension and expansion of any portion or feature of the installation.
c)
Technical data, product data, supplemented by bulletins, component illustrations, exploded

views, technical descriptions of items and pans list. Advertising or sales literature will not be
acceptable.
d)
Drawings, data, and shop drawings, reviewed by the Consultant. The non-approved
submissions of the shop drawings will not be acceptable.
1.11.2
Provide three (3) sets of operation and maintenance manuals. Provide separate binders for fire
alarm systems.
1.11.3
Bind information neatly, in hard covers bearing the name of the Works, names of the Consultant,
for submission to the Consultant.

July 2015
Page 6 of 27

1.11.4
Review information provided in the maintenance and instruction manuals with the Consultants
operating personnel to ensure a complete understanding of the electrical equipment and systems
and their operation for the Consultants continuing operation post contract.
1.11.5
A list of spare parts and consumable as recommended by the equipment supplier to cover an
operation period of two years shall be submitted listing the following:
1.11.6
Catalogue number, characteristics, quantity and price in UAE Dirhams of each Item, and validity
date.
1.11.7
Source and alternative sources of supply.

Details of required maintenance with suggested frequency of actions;
Details of each item of plant including the name and address of the manufacturer, type and model,
serial number, duty and rating.
Indicate on list items that should be stocked by the Consultant due to a long delivery period.
1.11.8
All above required documents shall be in English.
1.12
ELECTRICAL EXTRAS
Conform to the requirements set out in the Contract and the rates set forth in Bill of Quantity.
Submission will be scrutinized by the Consultant and, therefore, require complete detailed
breakdown of all materials, labour, unit prices and overhead and profit markups.
1.13
CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY
1.13.1
The appointed Contractor shall accept full functional responsibility for all electrical services to meet
the requirements of the Consultant generally in accordance with this specification, including but not
necessarily be limited to the following:a.
HV and LV site network in agreement with Local Electricity Authority.
b.
LV site cabling.
c.
All main, sub-main Switchgear and final distribution boards..
d.
All internal LV and Control Cabling.
e.
All lighting point and Small Power Distribution.
f.
Lighting fixtures.
g.
Wiring devices.
h.
All emergency and Escape Lighting.
i.
All general and special Purpose Power Installations.
j.
Analogue Addressable fire detection and voice evacuation system.
k.
Electrical services for mechanical systems.
l.
Lightning protection systems and earthing system.

July 2015
Page 7 of 27

1.13.2
m.
Lighting control and dimming system.
n.
Electrical services for telecommunication system and all low current sytsems as per the
system specialist requirements.
o.
Required containment for electrical, telecommuniation and all low current systems.
Design Parameters
The electrical system design and equipment selection shall comply with the particular requirements
listed hereunder.
1.13.3
Site Conditions
Work shall be executed under the following climatic conditions:
1.13.4
Maximum shade temperature
50 deg. C
Direct sun temperature
85 deg. C
Relative humidity max
100 %
Environment
AF2 (as per BS 7671)
System of Supply
The system of supply shall be TT at 400V 3Ph, 50HZ with a maximum short circuit capacity of 31
MVA at the main bus bar of the LV Switch Board.
The electrical system shall have following system variations at the sub-station:
Voltage
+/- 5%
Frequency
+/- 3%
Combined absolute voltage and frequency variations not more than 5%.
1.14
HIGH VOLTAGE NETWORK

The Contractor will be responsible for all negotiations with the Local Electricity Authority to ensure
that supplies are available to meet the construction programme. All costs associated with the
establishment of this HV network and acquiring permanent incoming mains supply, shall be
allowed for by the Contractor in his Tender submission.
1.15
MAIN SWITCHGEAR AND SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
1.15.1
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to execute all civil construction work connected with the
HV Distribution Network as required by Local Electricity Authority.
1.15.2
The low voltage supply to the site will be 400/230V 50HZ four wire with a declared fault level of 31
MVA. All switchgear and equipment shall be appropriately rated.
1.15.3
All distribution boards shall consist of adequately rated circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be
temperature compensated at the manufacturer's works to give the design current rating at 50
deg.C. Non-compensated breakers will not be approved and a formal certificate will be required
from the manufacturer confirming that the breakers have been suitably temperature compensated.

July 2015
Page 8 of 27

1.15.4
The Contractor will be responsible for ensuring that any necessary back-up (current limiting) fuse
protection is provided in circuit breaker switchboards as necessary. Any such current limiting fuses
shall be appropriately labelled to indicate their function. All Distribution boards shall be fitted with
an integral isolating switch, non-automatic MCCB or automatic MCCB as required by Local
Electricity Authority at the time of installation.
1.15.5
The Contractor shall supply and install voltmeters, ammeters and energy meters of a type that
meets with Local Electricity Authority approval.
1.16
AUTHORITIES APPROVAL
1.16.1
The contractor shall be responsible for liaising with the Local Authority and any other authorities
after obtaining the Consultant's approval, in order to :a)
Approve the detail Design and Working Drawings, before ordering any equipment, and
commencing with the installation.
b)
Approve any excavation prior to installation;
c)
Acquire main supply connection.
d)
Approve the LV and Fire Alarm drawings.
Arrange for inspection of all work by the Authorities having jurisdiction over the works. This is to occur
on an on-going basis throughout construction to avoid delays at the termination of the project. On
completion of the work present to the Consultant, for the Owner, final unconditional approval
certificates of the Inspecting Authorities.
Before commencing any work on site, submit the required number of copies to the relevant
Authorities (after coordination with present building Contractor) for checking and approval. Follow the
progress of such drawings to permit the timely approval of them by the Authorities. Comply with any
changes requested by the Authorities, but notify the Consultant immediately of any such change for
proper processing of these requirements. The Contractor, working on a regular basis with the
Authorities is expected to know which changes are likely at the time he bids the job, and no extra cost
will be allowed for such changes.
1.16.2
The Contractor will be responsible for the design supply, installation, connection and testing of the
main earthing network for the main low voltage distribution board(s) and the substation in
coordination with Local Electricity Authority.
1.16.3
The Contractor will also be responsible for connecting this earthing network to the Local Electricity
Authority earthing system, if required.
1.16.4
All lighting circuits shall be connected between phase and neutral, and circuits shall be equally
balanced as far as possible between phases.
1.16.5
The neutral shall be continuous throughout the system. No fuses shall be introduced into the
neutral conductor.
1.16.6
The contractor shall note that approval from Local Electricity Authority to be familiar with Local
Electricity Authority regulations and requirements. Accordingly, the contractor shall be responsible
to obtain the Local Electricity Authority approval and incorporate their requirement whether
included in the contract or not at no additional cost to the client. The Contractor shall be
responsible to check during the tender requirements and there shall be no cost, what so ever due
to incorporation of the authorities requirements.
1.16.7
Contractor shall take into consideration in his pricing the latest Local Electricity Authority regulation
and all amendments issued by the same prior to closing date of tender.

July 2015
Page 9 of 27

1.17
DEFINITIONS
For the purpose of this Specification:
1)
The definitions given in the IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations apply.
2)
The works "weatherproof" and "dust protecting" shall have the meanings ascribed to them in
the relevant BS.
3)
As applied to steel conduits and fittings with words "protection against corrosion in
accordance with class 2 (or with class 4) shall have the meanings defined in BS. 4568 as
follows :Class 2 Medium protection both inside and outside (e.g. stoved enamel; air drying paint).
Class 4 Heavy protection both inside and outside (e.g. hot-dip zinc coating, sheradizing).
4)
As applied to cable trunking (steel, surface) the words "protection against corrosion
according with class 3" shall have the meaning:Class 3 heavy protection both inside and outside (e.g. galvanised steel complying with BS.
2989, class 2A or 2B).
5)
The words "complete installation" shall mean not only the major items of plant and
apparatus conveyed by the Specification, but all the incidental sundry components
necessary for the complete execution of the works and for the proper operation of the
installation, with their labour charges, whether or not these sundry components are
mentioned in detail in the tender documents issued in connection with the contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.1.1
Materials and equipment shall be:

a)
New and free of all defects,
b)
Designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest issues of all applicable
U.L. BS, I.E.C. and industry standards,
c)
Certified by U.L. BS, I.E.C or acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction, including
special inspection if required.
d)
All electrical equipment shall be designed for operating in a 50C ambient temperature with
100% relative humidity. Copies of test certificates shall be provided prior to ordering
equipment.
e)
Equipment or material used in hazardous classified areas such as battery rooms shall be
certified for use in such locations from recognized authorities such as UL, Bassefd, PTB etc.
and shall be suitable for hazardous area classification Zone 2, IIC.
f)
Provide samples properly labeled of each material specified in this specification or requested
by the Consultant. Such samples shall be submitted to the Consultant for their approval at
their offices or elsewhere as directed with all parts left loose, so that they may be taken apart
for internal inspection by hand without the necessity of using spanners, screw drivers or
wrenches.

July 2015
Page 10 of 27

g)
Fire alarm equipment shall be UL or BS and LPC approved. Certificate proving the same
shall be provided.
h)
Where more than one of any item is required, all shall be of the same type and manufacture.
i)
The products of the specified manufacturers are acceptable only when these products
comply with or are modified as necessary to comply with the requirements of the contract
documents.
j)
Items of equipment or material which are not specifically defined herein shall conform to the
general standard of quality established herein.
k)
Indicate, which manufacturer is carried in the Tender.
2.2
NAMEPLATES AND IDENTIFICATIONS
2.2.1
Identify all electrical, telephone/data and wiring.
2.2.2
Nameplates for distribution boards shall indicate the panel designation and the mains, voltage,
phase and location of feed.
2.2.3
Nameplates for disconnect switches, motor starters and contactors shall indicate the equipment
being controlled and the voltage.
2.2.4
Nameplates shall be engraved black lamicoid with white letters, at least 19 mm high for
switchboards, switchgear, MCC'S transformers and panel boards, and 6 mm high for switches,
motor starters, contactors and panel board branch circuits.
2.2.5
Nameplates shall be mechanically attached to the equipment with round head screws.
2.2.6
Use labels for feeder conduits, power, lighting, security, and telephone/data cables and conductors,
and telephone/data outlets to indicate their full circuit number or identification.
2.2.7
Labels shall be PVC wires markers in carrier types as follows:
2.2.9
Black lettering on white background, for power and security conduit and cables
2.2.10
Green lettering on white background for distribution telephone/data cables
2.2.11
Blue lettering on white background for risers telephone/data cables and shall be located at each
end of the run at the junction and pull boxes.
2.2.12
Use colored paint dabs on the inside of outlet boxes and paint interior side of the panel covers as
they are installed. In ceiling spaces, provide color to outside of boxes.
2.2.13
Paint color to match system colors as defined in "Finishes ". Paint color code shall be as follows:
a)
Red - Life Safety System
b)
Pink - Intercom and Public Address System
c)
Black - Annunciator and Buzzer System
d)
Green - 230V IPH Circuits
e)
Purple - Telephone/data Communication System
f)
Blue - 230/400V Circuits

July 2015
Page 11 of 27

2.2.14
Use Plastic self-adhesive tape to identify incoming utility sources, feeders, sub-feeders and bus
work in each switchboard.
2.2.15
Unless otherwise specified, tape color code shall be as follows:

a)
Red - Phase A
b)
Yellow - Phase B
c)
Blue - Phase C
d)
Black - Neutral
e)
Green/Yellow Earth
2.2.16
Use stainless steel marker every 30 meter of cable run and at change of direction.
2.2.17
Complete all panel board and security directories with neat, type written list of circuit numbers and
item controlled.
2.2.18
For direct buried cables and duct runs under paved or grassed areas, identify location with
concrete markers having stainless steel plates on top of them, flush with grade on 30 m centers,
and at changes in direction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONCRETE AND FORMWORK

All concrete and formwork required for works shall be supplied and installed, with co-ordination and
the necessary supervision by the Consultant.
3.2
HANGERS, INSERTS, SLEEVES AND SUPPORTS
3.2.1
Provide hangers, inserts, sleeves and supports required to accommodate the equipment and
materials of this Division.
3.2.2
Do not use high velocity powder activated fastenings. Low velocity powder activated fastenings
may be used with the written approval of the Consultant.
3.2.3
Except for plywood backboards, do not use wood to fasten outlet boxes or electrical equipment,
except where wood forms a part of the building structure at the point of installation.
3.2.4
Metal supports, screws, bolts and hardware shall be galvanized, after fabrication sheradized Class
I, or stainless steel.
3.2.5
Apply cold galvanizing compound on all newly cut ferrous metal surfaces immediately after cutting.
3.2.6
Provide separate supports as required for electrical apparatus erected on or in any wall or partition.
All such supporting work shall be approved by the Consultant prior to installation.
3.2.7
Do not weld to or drill building steel without the written approval of the Consultant.
3.2.8
Electrical equipment mounted against the interior surface of exterior walls shall be mounted at least
25 mm away from the wall surface.
3.2.9
Electrical equipment mounted against interior walls in damp or wet locations or adjacent to liquid
piping shall be mounted at least 13 mm away from the surface.

July 2015
Page 12 of 27

3.2.10
All supports, screws and hardware in unconditioned areas shall be suitably primed and painted
with two coats of zinc enriched paint.
3.3
CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.3.1
Perform all cutting and patching required for the work of this Division.
3.3.2
Prepare drawings showing all cutting and patching required for the installation of equipment and
submit to the Consultant for approval.
3.3.3
Coordinate all openings with the work of other Divisions.
3.3.4
Return all surfaces to the condition encountered before the work. Acceptance of such work shall be
at the discretion of the Consultant.
3.3.5
Cutting of structural members shall not be permitted without specific written approval from the
Consultant. The Consultant reserves the right to dismiss from site any worker who cuts or drills
structural members.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
3.4.1
All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall conform to the highest standards
applicable.
3.4.2
Install equipment in accordance with the general arrangement drawings. Unless actual dimensions
are indicated, take such dimensions from final reviewed shop drawings and at the site.
3.4.3
Line up exposed conduit parallel or at right angles to building lines. Set, plumb and level equipment
accurately, install hanger rods plumb and without offsets, install rows of fixtures accurately in line
and level.
3.4.4
Flush-mount boxes, panels, cabinets and electrical devices in finished areas and provide suitable
flush trims and doors or covers, unless specifically noted otherwise.
3.4.5
All areas shall be considered finished unless indicated otherwise.
3.4.6
The locations of switches, thermostats, outlets and control devices are shown diagrammatically
only. Mount switches, thermostats and other controls as close to door jambs and other openings as
possible, maintaining a minimum of 100mm from trims of doors except where installed in door
frames of metal partitions. Ensure that these locations meet with the approval of the Consultant.
Check all door swings and install switches on opposite side door.
3.4.7
Where the location of any item is shown on the architectural details or elevations, this location shall
govern. No change to the contract sum shall be allowed for the relocation of any equipment
improperly installed because of the failure to check all such details prior to the installation of the
equipment. Notify the Consultant where details differ.
3.5
EARTHING
3.5.1
The whole of the installation covered by this specification shall be efficiently bonded back to the
main switchboards through the metal sheathing of cables, the steel conduit, the trunking system
and earth wires, all in accordance with the IEE Regulations and British Code of Practice. All prices
shall be inclusive of the cost of this bonding.
3.5.2
All earthing installations, size of earth wires and bonding shall be in accordance with the
Regulations for Electrical Installations as published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers and
BS 7340.

July 2015
Page 13 of 27

3.5.3
The earthing continuity of each metal sheathed cable shall be maintained by efficient bonding
between the cable sheath, the gland and the metal case of switchgear or other metal-clad
accessory or appliance at which the cable terminates.
3.5.4
All wires and cables shall be protected against mechanical stresses and corrosion.
3.5.5
All joints between wires and earthing metalwork shall be mechanically sound before soldering.
3.5.6
Where separate pieces of apparatus connected to different phase are, of necessity erected or
positioned less than two metres apart, an equipotential bonding strip 2.5mm x 35mm tinned copper
tape shall be installed between such pieces of apparatus.
3.5.7
The main earth electrode resistance shall be less than one ohm. If this value can not be obtained
by driving copper clad steel rods, the Contractor shall provide bore holes until the damp soil is
reached for installation of rods.
3.6
PHASE IDENTIFICATION
The cable connected to phase "R" shall be in all cases coloured Red; the cables connected to
phase 'Y' shall be coloured Yellow, and the cables connected to phase 'B' shall be coloured
Blue. The neutral conductor shall in all cases be Black. Any insulated earth wires shall be
coloured Green or Green/Yellow. These colours shall be continued up to the actual terminals or
cable lugs.
3.7
VOLTAGE DROP
The voltage drop between the incoming LV switchboard and the extremity of any circuit shall not
exceed 4% of the nominal supply voltage.
3.8
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INTERFERENCE
The whole of the electrical installation work shall be so designed that there is an absolute minimum
of interference with telecommunications, and the reception of broadcasting to BS 800 and any
other relevant BS.
3.9
SEGREGATION OF SERVICES
The armour of all cables, cable trays, trunking, ducts etc., shall be prevented from coming into
contact with non-electrical services by minimum spacing of 150mm. Where this is impracticable
they shall be bonded to the exposed metal of the other service subject to the requirement
contained in the IEE Regulations.
3.10
BUILDER'S WORK
To reduce the necessity for cutting away and the like, certain holes and chases will be provided in
the structure by the Contractor to the Consultant's instructions. The Contractor shall plan his work
so that full advantage is taken of these provision's but it is the Contractor's sole responsibility to
ensure that all holes and chases are in the required position and that any additional ducts, holes
and chases necessary for the execution of his work in the in-situ concrete walls, floor slabs,
columns and beams are executed in the early stage of construction of the building.
3.11
FOUNDATION BOLTS
The Contractor shall arrange for the supply of, in advance of the delivery of the equipment, all
necessary foundation bolts, nuts, plates, sleeves and anchorages as and when directed.

July 2015
Page 14 of 27

3.12
DESIGN AND STANDARDISATION
3.12.1
The Works shall be designed to facilitate inspection, cleaning and repairs for use where continuity
of operation is the first consideration. All equipment supplied shall be designed to ensure
satisfactory operation under working conditions. All plant containing rotating parts shall be capable
of operating at speeds up to the maximum duty specified without vibration or excessive noise.
3.12.2
All motors and other electrical equipment shall have a power factor of not less than 0.93 lagging,
and shall be complete with class F insulation, and Class B temperature rise.
3.12.3
Corresponding parts throughout the Contract Works shall be made to gauge and shall be
interchangeable wherever possible. The Contractor may be required by the Consultant to prove
interchangeability by actual interchanging of the various parts.
3.12.4
Suitable provision by means of eyebolts or other means are to be provided to facilitate handling of
all items that are too heavy or bulky for lifting and carrying by two men (70 kg).
3.13
MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND SUPERVISION
3.13.1
It is a requirement of the specification that the finished appearance of the plant in public areas is of
a high architectural standard and all panels, covers, trim panels, finishes and the like shall be
included to provide this required appearance to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
3.13.2
The whole of the equipment supplied shall be of the best modern design and of high class durable
finish and suitable for installation in a modern building which will be subjected to excessively
heavy usage.
3.13.3
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the components of each system are mutually
compatible and integrated to form fully efficient systems complying with the Drawings and
specifications.
3.13.4
All materials shall be, where applicable, in accordance with the IEE Regulations, British Standards
Specifications, Factories Act and Insurance Company requirements, where such exists, unless
otherwise specified or agreed by the Consultant in writing.
3.13.5
All articles and materials specified to conform to British Standards shall be clearly and indelibly
marked and stamped with the British Standard number specified and other details required by the
regulations, except where marking is impracticable when the relevant advice/delivery notes shall
include the British Standard number with which they are to comply.
3.13.6
All materials and workmanship shall be to the satisfaction of the Consultant, particular attention
shall be paid to a neat orderly well arranged installation, carried out in a methodical competent
manner.
3.13.7
The contractor shall produce dimensional layout showing the exact location and elevation for the
various outlets and shall be responsible to submit drawings/ proposed material in a format to
Consultants instruction.
3.13.8
The contractor will be required to maintain a competent supervising Engineer for the work on site
throughout the whole of the time for the completion of the Contract. The Consultant shall give prior
approval to the appointment of this supervising Engineer and shall have the authority to withdraw
this approval at any time.
3.13.9
No person shall be allowed to execute any type of work which is normally carried out by a skilled
tradesman unless he is thoroughly experienced and proficient in the trade concerned. The
Consultant shall have the option to require a tradesman to demonstrate his proficiency to the
satisfaction of the Consultant.

July 2015
Page 15 of 27

3.14
SAMPLES
If required, the Contractor shall provide a sample properly labelled of all lighting fittings, switches,
fittings and other like accessories described in this specification or as specified by the
Consultant.
Such samples shall be submitted to the Consultant for his approval at his offices or elsewhere as
directed, with all parts left loose, so that they may be taken apart for internal inspection by hand
without the necessity of using spanners, screw drivers or wrenches.
3.15
STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

All plant and equipment shall be stored off the ground under weather-proof cover until ready for
incorporation in the works. All electrical apparatus shall be examined and cleaned before
installation. All open conduit ends shall be fitted with plastic caps or suitable protective covering to
prevent the ingress of foreign matter. All drums with cables shall be protected from direct sunlight.
3.16
PAINTING (ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT)

Where it is the usual practice of the manufacturer of items such as electric motors, switchgear,
control panels, and similar equipment, to apply a high standard of protective paint work in the
shop before dispatch, this will be acceptable provided any damage to paint work on the plant
and equipment which occurs is made good by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the
Consultant.
The interiors of control panels, switchboards and switchgear, shall be finished white enamel
paint (two coats work) and shall comply with the appropriate BS. for enamel finish and the
exteriors of such panels shall be of a British Standard colour to give a minimum reflection value
of 42%.
Instruments shall be finished dull black and control handles, push buttons and similar fittings shall
be chromium plated or otherwise specially finished to the approval of the Consultant.
All items of equipment installed above the Intalite suspended ceiling shall be painted with a matt
black finish.
3.17
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.17.1
Store materials and equipment in a dry, clean air conditioned store and cover with polyethylene
covers as necessary.
3.17.2
Remove regularly from premises all debris, rubbish and waste material resulting from the work of
this Division.
3.17.3
Clean all electrical equipment and materials before final acceptance of the Work.
3.17.4
Replace damaged, lost or stolen materials and equipment at no cost to the Consultant.
3.17.5
Refinish equipment and building surfaces where damaged by the work of this Division.
3.18
SYSTEM COORDINATION
3.18.1
The switchgear manufacturer shall carry out a complete coordination study from the primary fuses
or breakers including the largest fuse or breaker in each distribution panel and to select breaker trip
units and fuses with characteristics to provide adequate coordination between all panels of the
system.

July 2015
Page 16 of 27

3.18.2
Submit to the Consultant a complete set of manufacturer's curves showing characteristics of

tripping devices for all breakers, and relays, and maximum let through current of all ratings
breakers which have been selected. All curves shall be on standard size log-log paper.
3.18.3
Prepare on standard size log-log paper a complete set of curves showing time current
characteristics of all breakers from the service over current protection down to the largest devices
in the distribution panels, for phase and ground fault conditions. Plot the damage curves for the
power transformers and cables on the same sheets. Submit 3 sets of curves to the Consultant for
approval.
3.18.4
Arrange for the manufacturer to carry out actual tests on the completed installation in the field to
ensure that the required coordination has been provided.
3.19
SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAM
3.19.1
Provide in all low voltage electrical room a single line or riser diagram of the complete electrical
system for the project or relevant building indicating protective and switching devices identified by
type, rating and catalog number where applicable.
3.19.2
Mount the diagram on the wall in a substantial frame with a glass cover.
3.20
OPERATION, CARE AND MAINTENANCE
3.20.1
Instruct the Consultants operating personnel in the proper operation, care and maintenance of the
complete installation, at the times arranged with the Consultant.
3.20.2
Where required, arrange and pay for the services of the applicable manufacturer's factory service
engineer to supervise the initial start-up of any part of the installation, to check, adjust, balance and
calibrate all components, including related wiring and controls, and to instruct the operating
personnel. Provide these services for such period and for as many visits as may be necessary to
put the applicable portion of the installation in complete working order, and to ensure that the
operating personnel are fully conversant with all aspects of the operation, care and maintenance,
all to the approval of the Consultant.
3.21
PROVISION FOR FUTURE EXPANSION

In each location where a space is indicated to be reserved for future equipment, leave such space
clean and install the conduit, wiring and other work pertaining to this Division in such manner that
the necessary connections can be made to the future buildings or equipment without dismantling
existing floors, walls or ceilings. Consult with the Consultant wherever necessary for this purpose.
Mark the locations of conduit terminations as directed.
3.22
ACCESS DOORS
3.22.1
Wherever any item of electrical equipment requiring accessibility, maintenance or, adjustments is
concealed, ensure adequate access, or provide an access door and arrange for its installation by
the Division in whose work it occurs.
3.22.2
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere access panels shall be 2.2mm stainless steel panel, rust
resistant concealed hinges and positive locking and self-opening screwdriver operated lock. Frame
shall be suitable for wall in which it is being installed and shall have integral keys for plaster walls.
Panels in tile wall shall suite tile pattern. Minimum size of panels shall be 300 x 450 mm. where
equipment is quite large, the access panel shall be sized to suit.
3.22.3
Submit for review by the Consultant, floor plans and shop drawings showing the size, type and
exact location of all access doors.

July 2015
Page 17 of 27

3.22.4
Each access panel shall be installed to provide complete access to equipment for maintenance and
servicing.
3.22.5
All access doors shall be shown on the record drawings. Notations, adjacent to each access door
shown on the drawings, shall indicate frequency of maintenance required for item or items above or
behind the door.
3.23
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
3.23.1
The drawings for electrical work are diagrammatic performance drawings only, intended to convey
the scope of work and indicate the general arrangement and approximate location of apparatus and
fixtures, and the approximate sizes and locations of equipment and outlets. The drawings do not
intend to show architectural, mechanical or structural details.
3.23.2
Do not scale or measure drawings, but obtain information regarding accurate dimensions from
dimensions shown on the architectural drawings or by site measurements. Follow the electrical
drawings for laying out the work.
3.23.3
Refer to the other Divisions' coordination drawings to become familiar with all conditions affecting
the work, and verify suitable spaces exist in which the equipment will be installed.
3.24
COMPLETION OF CONTRACT
3.24.1
All the equipment must be cleaned and tested before final acceptance by the Consultant.
3.24.2
From the date of issuance of the Taking over Certificate' all equipment, materials and
workmanship, other than lamps, must be unconditionally warranted for not less than one (1) year.
3.24.3
Replace, at no additional cost, all incandescent lamps burned out during a thirty (30) day period,
and all burned-out fluorescent and HID lamps for a period of ninety (90) days after date of issuance
of' Taking over Certificate' for the contract for the building.
3.24.4
Defects and deficiencies which originate or become evident during the warranty period, must be
repaired or replaced at no cost to the Consultant.
3.24.5
If, during the warranty period, transformers, ballasts or other noise and vibration producing
equipment are considered by the Consultant to exceed acceptable standards, then these must be
replaced without delay or additional cost to the Consultant. All work relating to the replacement of
defective items must be carried out after normal working hours and at a time which is acceptable to
the Consultant.
3.25
DEFINITIONS
Wherever the words "install", "provide", or "supply and install", are used in specifications, it shall be
understood to mean "provide and install, inclusive of all labour, materials, sundries, installation,
commissioning, testing and connections for the item to which referred.
3.26
FIRE RATING
3.26.1
Fire Alarm and emergency lighting system wiring shall be using fire resistant cables using PVC
conduits embedded in the slab/wall. All surface mounted installation shall be using GI conduits.
3.26.2
Wiring for the power and control of following equipment shall be using fire resistant cables
compying with BS 6387 Category CWZ; non armoured cables using PVC conduits embedded in
the slab/wall or GI conduits for surface mounted installation, armoured cables on cable tray:
a)
Circuits for life safety and Mechanical system devices required to operate in case of fire.

July 2015
Page 18 of 27

b)
Interface wiring to mechanical system such as FCU, AHU etc. which require to be switched
on or off in case of fire.
c)
Branch and control circuits for smoke control and dampers.
3.27
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
3.27.1
Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centre line of equipment, unless specified or
indicated otherwise. Exact mounting height shall be in accordance with Furniture layout and
Equipment layout and as indicated in the interior design document.
3.27.2
If mounting height of equipment is not indicated, verify with the Consultant before proceeding with
installation
3.27.3
Local switches: 1400 mm
3.27.4
Wall receptacles
Above floors: 400 mm FFL
In mechanical rooms: 1200 mm FFL
In kitchens : 1500mm FFL
3.27.5
Panel boards: Top of panel board shall not be higher than 2100 mm FFL. Height of operating
knobs/selector switches/push buttons shall be 1500 mm.
3.27.6
Telephone and data outlets above floor: 400 mm
3.27.7
Fire alarm break glass: 1200 mm
3.27.8
Wall mounted fire alarm bells - 2300 mm
3.27.9
Mounting level of other accessories not listed above shall be to the approval of the Consultant
3.27.10 Wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be 2000mm FFL, to the approval of the Consultant.
However all mounting heights to be finalized with the Consultant during execution and approval
obtained.
3.28
FIRE SEALS
Where cables, bus ducts, cable tray, or conduits pass through non-fire rated floors, walls or roof,
provide internal and external sealing thereto.
For non-fire rated locations, sealant shall be silicone.
For fire rated locations, the sealant shall be fire stop and shall meet the requirements of authorities
and to U.L, and BS standards with regard to the type of assembly and fire separation.
3.29
WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs as specified to meet requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the
Consultant.
3.30
WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT

Lubricant to be non-corrosive, and approved for the type of cable used.

July 2015
Page 19 of 27

Lubricants to be soap or wax based, depending upon application. Use soap based for short runs
(not greater than 20m) and for semi-conducting insulated wires, and wax based for long runs (20m
or further).
3.31
INSPECTION AND TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS - LOCAL
3.31.1
The Consultant shall have at all reasonable times access to the Contractor's premises to inspect
and examine the materials and workmanship of the plant and equipment during its manufacture
there, and if part of the plant and equipment is being manufactured on other premises, the
Contractor shall obtain for the Consultant permission to inspect as if the plant and equipment was
manufactured on the Contractor's own premises. Such inspection, examination or testing, if made,
shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation under the Contract.
3.31.2
All work, materials and the like rejected shall be corrected or replaced as necessary at the
Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
3.31.3
Where the plant and equipment is a composite unit of several individual places manufactured in
different places, it shall be assembled and tested as one complete working unit. All equipment will
be tested at the maker's works to the relevant BS. where applicable.
3.31.4
The aforementioned works tests carried out before delivery to the Site shall not in any way relieve
the Contractor of completing satisfactory site tests after erection as specified.
3.31.5
The contractor shall give the Consultant reasonable notice, at least seven clear days in writing of
the date on and the place at which any plant or equipment will be ready for testing as provided in
the contract and the Consultant shall thereupon at his discretion notify the contractor of his
intention either to release such part of the plant and equipment upon receipt of the works tests
certificates or of his intention to inspect such part of the plant and equipment and shall then, on
giving twenty-four hours notice in writing to the Contractor, attend at the place so named within
seven days of the date by which the contractor has stated in his notice the said plant and
equipment will be ready for testing. The Contractor shall forward to the Consultant six duly certified
copies of the test readings.
3.31.6
Whether at the premises of the Contractor or of any of his sub-contractors, the Contractor except
where otherwise specified shall provide, free of charge, such labour, materials, electricity, fuel,
water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably demanded, to carry out efficiently
such tests of the plant and equipment, in accordance with the contract and shall give facilities to
the Consultant to accomplish such testing.
3.31.7
Works tests shall also be carried out such that due consideration is given to the Site conditions
under which the equipment is required to function. The test certifications shall give all details of
such tests.
3.31.8
As and when any plant and equipment shall have passed the tests referred to in this clause the
Consultant shall issue to the Contractor a notification to that effect.
3.31.9
The Contractor shall not pack for delivery or transport to Site any part of the plant or equipment
until he has obtained from the Consultant his written approval to the release of such part for
delivery after any tests required by the Consultant in terms of this clause have been completed
to his satisfaction.
3.32
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ON SITE
3.32.1
Upon completion of the installation or part of the installation, the Contractor shall carry out and be
responsible for the testing and commissioning all plant, equipment and integral systems, in stages
if required, to ensure that it is in proper working order and capable of performing all of its functions
in accordance with the specification and to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

July 2015
Page 20 of 27

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all equipment until each item of plant, equipment or
system or part thereof has been tested, commissioned and accepted by the Consultant.
3.32.2
Any equipment damaged in commissioning shall be replaced by new plant by the Contractor at his
own expense and the plant, equipment or system concerned shall be re-tested and commissioned.
No instruction or action of the Consultant shall relieve the Contractor of this responsibility.
3.32.3
All testing and commissioning shall be carried out according to the requirements of the relevant BS.
BSCP, IEE Regulations or other standards and regulations as may be stated or implied in this
specification.
3.32.4
The Contractor shall give to the Consultant in writing at least ten days notice of the date after which
he will be ready to make the specified tests on completion of installation. Unless otherwise agreed
the tests shall take place within seven days after the said date on such day or days as the
Consultant shall in writing notify the Contractor. The tests shall as far as possible be carried out
under normal working conditions to the satisfaction of the Consultant and shall extend over such
periods as he may direct.
3.32.5
If in the opinion of the Consultant the tests are being unduly delayed, he may by notice in writing
call upon the Contractor to make such tests within ten days from the receipt of the said notice and
the Contractor shall make the said tests within the said ten days and notify the Consultant of the
days on which the said tests are to be made. If the Contractor fails to make such tests within the
time aforesaid the Consultant may himself proceed to make the tests. All tests so made by the
Consultant shall be at the risk and expense of the Contractor.
3.32.6
The Contractor shall provide all skilled labour, supervision, apparatus and instruments required for
commissioning and testing and within a reasonable time thereafter furnish to the Consultant six
certificates of all tests performed and accepted, signed by the Consultant, the Contractor and an
authorised person acting on behalf of the Local Authority, as prescribed in the appropriate
Regulations and Specifications.
3.32.7
If any part of the plant or equipment fails to pass the specified tests, further tests shall, if required
by the Consultant, be repeated. The Contractor shall, without delay, put in hand such
modifications as are necessary to meet the requirements as described in the Contract and
any expense which the Employer may have incurred by reason of such further tests may be
deducted from the Contract Price.
3.32.8
The Contractor shall include for submission of working drawings for the electrical installation to the
Local Electricity Authority for approval and shall allow for the procurement of the Local Electricity
Authority test certificate upon completion of the building following inspection of the electrical
installation by Local Electricity Authority. Acceptance shall not in any way absolve the Contractor
of his responsibility for the performance of the plant or equipment after erection as a complete
working system in all respects.
3.33
SPECIAL TOOLS AND INSTRUCTION BOOKS
3.33.1
Two complete sets of any special tools necessary for the operation, maintenance and dismantling
of the various sections of the plant and equipment shall be provided in a strong box or boxes
each fitted with a suitable padlock and two keys. Such tools shall not be used by the
Contractor during the erection of the plant of equipment. The cost of these tools will be
deemed to be included in the Contractor's price.
3.33.2
The Contractor shall provide three copies of :a)
Operating instructions and schedule of maintenance work.
b)
Fully descriptive instructions and maintenance handbooks.

July 2015
Page 21 of 27

c)
Schedule of maintenance work that will have to be carried out by the manufacturer or his
agent.
d)
Lubrication charts.
e)
Working instructions (suitable for mounting).
f)
Spare parts lists from the original manufacturers to cover a period of two years.
g)
Any other information required by the Consultant.
3.33.3
These shall be handed to the Consultant before final completion certificate is issued. The
information shall relate to the equipment exactly as installed and shall include makers' names
and addresses and catalogue numbers of all components used in the manufacture of the
plant.
3.33.4
Each of the above instruction books shall be bound in uniform bindings complete with detailed
index, the cover of which shall be finished with black water proof and grease proof material
and title printed in gold block lettering on the front and on the spine.
3.34
GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall guarantee all works for a period of twelve months after being put into normal
operation and acceptance by the Employer. In the event of a defect arising within this period
which, in the opinion of the Consultant is due to faulty workmanship or materials, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good such defects where instructed to do so, to the
satisfaction of the Consultant.
4.0
ELECTRICAL WORKS SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS
All the materials supplied under this contract shall be from one of the manufacturers listed below. No
alternate makes shall be accepted unless all the listed makes are unavailable. Materials proposed from
listed makes also must fully comply with Detailed Specifications. Country of Origin, where listed, must be
complied.
1.
MDBs / SMDBs / DBs / MCCs / Changeover Panel / Isolator / Control Panels

Component Country of Origin
Danway
Dynergy Technologies
Scientechnic
Western Europe
Western Europe
Western Europe
Assembled and tested only by the above respective Authorized Local Agent.
For wall mounted SMDBs, DBs and other smaller panels, RITTAL, HIMEL, GMC and ETA make
enclosures may be used, subject to Authority approval having jurisdiction.
2.
Cables and Accessories

Ducab
Riyadh Cables
Oman Cables
National Cable
Gulf Cables
July 2015
Page 22 of 27

3.
Cable Trays / Ladders / Wire Baskets
EMI
Delta
Electrotech
Thomas & Betts
TMI
PSI
4.
Cable Trunking
Barton
MK
OBO Bettermann
Legrand
Philip Grahame
5.
Wiring Accessories
S. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Make
MK (UK)
MEM (UK)
ABB (Swiss)
Clipsal (Australia)
Legrand (France)
White plastic
Avant
Spectra Grid
Traffic Classiq
Vivace
Model
Slimline Metal Finish

Aspect
Ultra
Alpha BS
Ultimate
Synergy Modern
6.
Fire Proof Cables (Power and Earth)
Fire Tuff (Draka)

FP 400 (Prysmian)
7.
GI Box
Barton
Decoduct
Power Centre
Clipsal
Eletra
8.
Industrial Sockets
Lewden
MK
Legrand
Clipsal
9.
PVC Conduits and Accessories
Decoduct
Marshall Tufflex
Clipsal
Egatube
10.
G.I. Conduit and Fittings
Barton
Fulter & Poulton
Walsal
WM Interface
MK
Legrand
11.
PVC Coated Flexible GI Conduit
Kopex
Adaptaflex
Lappcable
WM Interface
MK
Flexicon

July 2015
Page 23 of 27

12.
Fire Alarm System
Mircom ................ Canada

Simplex ............... USA
Edwards .............. Canada
Notifier ................. USA
Siemens .............. USA
Advanced ............ UK
Gent
Cooper
Bosch
13.
14.
Fire Alarm Cable
Prysmian
Firetuff
Firecel
AEI
15.
Earthing system, Lightning

Protection System, Electronic
Systems Protection, Surge Arrestors
Furse
A. N. Wallis
Erico
Euroearth
Galmar
16.
Emergency Lighting System
Prazissa .............Germany
Cooper CEAG ....Germany
Inotec .................Germany
Teknoware .........Finland
TM Lighting ........Poland
17.
Capacitor Banks
Merlin Gerin
ABB
Nokian Capacitors
Electronicon
Circuitor
Schneider
18.
Isolators
Eaton
ABB
Merlin Gerin
Siemens
Hand Dryer / Hair Dryer
Bobrick
Siemens
Anda
National
All
equipment /
materials
shall be UL
listed or FM
approved
and shall
also be
approved by
the Local
Authority
Having
Jurisdiction.
All
equipment /
materials
shall be UL
listed or FM
approved
and shall
also be
approved by
the Local
Authority
Having
Jurisdiction.
19.
20.
21.

July 2015
Page 24 of 27

22.
Dimmer rack
23.
Intelligent Lighting Control System
Siemens
Clipsal
ABB
Merten
24.
Variable Frequency Drives / Soft Starters
ABB
Siemens
Lenze
Danfoss
Toshiba
Emerson
26.
Generator
Dawson Keith ................... UK

Caterpillar ......................... USA
Cummins .......................... USA
SDMO .............................. France
27.
UPVC ducts & accessories for electricity

and telephone cables
Hepworth
Cosmoplast
Gulf Eternit
28.
Cable Glands / Lugs
BICC
Ducab Connect
HAWKE
CMP
29.
UPS System
Merlin Gerin...................... France

Liebert .............................. Italy
Chloride ............................ France
GE .................................... Swiss
Schneider ......................... France
30.
Active Filter / Harmonic Filter
ABB
Merlin Gerin
Nokian Capacitors
Circuitor
Schneider
31.
Aircraft Warning Light
Orga Aviation Lighting

Honeywell
Crouse Hinds
Thorn
Avaids
32.
Auto Transfer Switch
ASCO ............................... USA

Zenith ............................... USA
GE .................................... USA
33.
Indoor Light Fittings
EIB
C-Bus
EiB
EIB
25.
Make
Country of Origin
Arlus
Cooper
International
UK

July 2015
Page 25 of 27

Disano
Iguzzini
Philips
Prisma / klewe
Reggiani
Ridi
Krealuce
Sylvania (sli)
Thorn
Trilux
Whitecroft fugerholt
Wila
Marinos
Asd lighting
Indelague
Luxo
Siteco
Martini
Deltalight
Erco
Hoffmeister
Zumbotel
Siteco
Troll
Cree
Switch Made
34.
Italy
Italy
Holland
Italy
Italy
Germany
Italy
Europe
UK
Germany
Sweden
Germany
Greece
UK
Portugal
Sweden
Germany
Italy
Belgium
Germany
Germany
Austria
Germany
Spain
USA
France
Outdoor Lighting
Make
Country of Origin
Disano
Exterior Vert
Hess
Simes
Prisma
Siteco
Philips
Bega
Sill
Ros
Sylvania (sli)
Marinos
Ghidini
Aec
Luxeled
Moda light
Oldham
Color kinetics
Crescent
Hei lighting
Broadway
Illume
Tryka
Antrox
Motoluce
Ruud
Abacus
Salvi
Italy
Germany
Italy
Italy
Germany
Holland
Germany
Germany
Spain
Europe
Greece
Italy
Italy
Australia
USA
UK
USA
UK
Austria
UK
Canada
UK
Italy
Austria
USA
UK
Spain

July 2015
Page 26 of 27

Note:
All Fire related Materials e.g. Fire Alarm, Fire Fighting, Fire Stop Materials, Cables, Central / Group
Emergency Lighting, Fire Dampers etc., must have Local Civil Defence Department approval.
All Switchgears, Transformers, Busbards, Cables and related power equipment must have local
electricity distribution company approval.
- End of Section -

July 2015
Page 27 of 27


PRE-COMMISSIONING AND COMMISSIONING
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

PRE-COMMISSIONING AND COMMISSIONING
INDEX
PART 1 -GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK ......................................................................................................................... 3
PART 2 - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................. 3

2.1
GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................. 3
2.2
PRECOMMISSIONING AND COMMISSIONING CHECKS ................................................................................ 4
2.3
MDB / SMDB / MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE ............................................................................................ 6
2.4
FINAL DB LIGHT & POWER POINTS ......................................................................................................... 9
2.5
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM ................................................................................................................ 10
2.6
LV POWER AND CONTROL CABLES ....................................................................................................... 11
2.7
GROUNDING AND BONDING .................................................................................................................. 11
2.8
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... 12
2.9
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................... 13
2.10
EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... 14
2.11
LIGHTING ............................................................................................................................................ 14
2.12
OPTICAL FIBRE .................................................................................................................................... 15
2.13
OTHER SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................. 15
PART 3 EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS SECTION. ............................................................... 15

July 2015
Page 1 of 14

PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1
Description of Work
Prior to acceptance, inspect, operate and test all electrical equipment, materials and components,
whether such tests are detailed in this specification or not. Tests will be witnessed by the
Consultant, to ensure that the operation of the systems and components satisfies the requirements
of the Contract Documents.
Include any specific testing required by the Authorities, or any other body having jurisdiction over
the installation, and as directed by the Consultant. Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) shall be
included wherever is required and/or indicated in the specification sections.
Include thermograpic study for the LV panels, motor control centres for chillers and busbar duct.
Provide all tools, equipment, labour and materials required to perform the electrical testing.
Provide three copies of the test reports to the Consultant.
The Consultant reserves the right to witness factory testing of all equipment. Coordinate with the
equipment manufacturers and notify the Consultant 21 days before any factory testing, to confirm
the presence of the Consultant.
Report any deficiencies in test results immediately to the Consultant.
Test in accordance with the applicable standards issued by the governing organisations (e.g. IEC,
UL, NFPA, IEE), and with the recommendations of the manufacturers.
Include the cost of all testing in the bid price, whether performed in the field or at the factory. Inform
the manufacturers of the factory and site testing requirements.
Make test records in a neat and legible manner, fully identifying the equipment or system being
tested, type of test equipment, calculation, and expiry date for the same, the test results and the
date of the test. Submit 3 copies to the Consultant at the end of each test.
Do not energize distribution or control equipment until the test results have been reviewed, passed
and approved by the Consultant.
Ensure that phasing and phase rotation is the same throughout the system. Ensure that all devices
are wired for the same polarity.
Test all electrical systems and installation in accordance to the related standards and in
accordance to the equipment manufacturers testing procedure.
Carryout all tests in accordance to an approved procedure by the Consultant and all necessary
data and results which may be requested by the Consultant.
The testing and commissioning for electrical system shall cover the following as a minimum:
PART 2 - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

2.1
General
The testing and commissioning shall be carried out in accordance with contract requirements, by a
firm specializing in this work, under no circumstances shall the Contractor be allowed to use his
own staff, affiliated companies or equipemnt supplier for the Capital plant such as switchboards,
power factor correction equipment, fire alarm system, lighting control system, and central
emergency lighting system, etc.

July 2015
Page 2 of 14

The contractor shall submit to the CONSULTANT for approval his schedule of program for the
works, the program shall address the following:
a)
Planned date of commencement of testing and commissioning.
b)
Expected date of completion of testing and commissioning.
c)
Power ON date.
d)
Fire alarm ON date.
e)
Actual testing and commissioning date and duration for each system.
The contractor shall submit for approval, a detailed method statement for each testing and
commissioning activity.
The contractor shall maintain written records of all tests.
Successful test records shall be counter signed by the CONSULTANT and bound into the
Operation and Maintenance Manual. Upon completion of the testing and commissioning the
Contractor shall demonstrate to the CONSULTANT the following:
a)
Voltage within correct tolerances in accordance with the contract Documents.
b)
Power factor and harmonics in accordance with the Contract Documents.
c)
Earthing in accordance with the contract Documents.
d)
Illumination levels in accordance with the Contract Documents.
e)
Correct control of all plant.
f)
Fire alarm system.
g)
Central Emergency Lighting System
An audit inspection at factory before dispatch and at site after receipt of the switchgear for any
manufacturing / transit defects.
2.2
Precommissioning and Commissioning Checks

Precommissioning/Commissioning check sheets for the following shall be submitted for the
Consultant review:
a)
MDB/SMDBs / MCC's
b)
DB / Final Light & Power Points
c)
Specified Lighting Controls
d)
Power And Control Cables
e)
Grounding and Bonding
f)
g)
Fire Alarm System

July 2015
Page 3 of 14

h)
i)
Programmable lighting control system
j)
Optical fibre system.
k)
Other systems.
Once the procedures are agreed up on, the Inspection and testing reports for the above systems
shall be submitted for Consultant review/approval.
The following inspections have to be carried out for any manufacturing defects/transit damages
and inform the supplier immediately if found any defects
2.2.1
2.2.2
Manufacturing Defects:
a)
Inspect the
inter locks.
b)
Ensure the bus bar supports and insulation are free from cracks and damages.
c)
Ensure that the correct rating of the components such as fuses, contactors and over load
relays are as per the approved drawings.
d)
Ensure that the physical condition of all meters, protection relays are good and ranges are
as per approved layouts.
e)
Ensure all components are properly installed including CTs.
f)
Ensure the over all dimension and colour of the cubicle is as per approved layout.
doors
of
cubicles
for
proper
opening/closing
including
door
Transit Damages
Inspect the external surface of the cubicle for any transit damages and paint scratches.
Inspect that batteries and chargers are not damaged during transit.
2.2.2
The following pre-requisites have to be ensured before pre-commissioning / commissioning of

the respective panels:
a)
Colour coding / ferruling
b)
Tightening all bus bar joints with torque wrench
c)
Tightening of all connections
d)
Termination of cables on the panels
e)
Interlocks as per approved drawings
f)
Inter panel wiring between various cubicles
g)
Operation of space heaters
h)
Control & power diagram of respective switchgear is readily available on the panel board
for reference
i)
No loose tools left inside the panel

July 2015
Page 4 of 14

j)
2.3
Availability of first aid / fire fighting equipment
MDB / SMDB / Motor Control Centre

Testing and commissioning shall be in accordance with respective specification and including the
following:
The contractor shall arrange for the witnessing of the following tests on the fully equipped
switchboard including primary bus bars and connections at the factory, in accordance with IEC
439-1:
1.
High voltage power frequency tests on main and auxiliary circuits
2.
Dielectric/insulation resistance tests
3.
Ground fault tests
4.
Electrical operation of circuit breakers control circuits at the appropriate voltage limits
5.
Mechanical operations tests and tests to certify correct functioning of interlocks.
6.
Primary injection tests
7.
Secondary injection tests
8.
Millivolt drop tests
9.
Any other tests required by the CONSULTANT
The following tests shall be carried out after the equipment has been completely erected and
connected up on site:
2.3.1
1.
Power frequency voltage tests on the completed switchgear
2.
Insulation resistance tests on all main and secondary circuits
3.
Secondary injection tests
4.
Calibration checks on ammeters, voltmeters and any other instruments
5.
Testing at normal voltage to prove that closing and tripping from local and remote control
points, tripping from relays and protective gear, interlocks, alarm and indications, etc are
satisfactory.
6.
Any other test required to prove compliance with the specification
7.
At the end of tests, the protective relays and breaker tripping times shall be set in
accordance with the CONSULTANT approved discrimination coordination.
8.
Contact resistance test for busbar by means of equipment with minimum 10A
Detailed Check List

a)
Effectiveness of mechanical actuating elements
b)
Door interlocks
c)
Interconnection conductor sizes, laying and clamping/screwing

July 2015
Page 5 of 14

d)
Visual inspection of degree of protection, creepage and clearance distances
e)
Labels for feeders and circuit indications
f)
Supply of operational instructions, wiring diagrams, technical data of equipment used.
g)
Inspection and operational testing of the factory built assembly
h)
Electrical controls and sequence of operation
i)
Physical verification of drawings, including front and internal layouts
j)
Single line diagrams & Control schemes
k)
Check for cracks on components and housings
l)
Correctness of sizes and terminations. Torque tables shall be followed.

Bolt size
Tightening torque
Nm
Tightening Force
kN
M6
M8
20
M10
40
13
M12
70
22
M14
110
26
M16
170
35
m)
Cable entry/tray provisions, top and bottom
n)
Ventilation, anti-condensation heaters, and fans
o)
Sealing/pad locking for meter cabinet
p)
Phase barriers for incoming and outgoing breakers
q)
Size of bus bars - neutral/earth
r)
Gland plates
s)
Colour codes for cables
t)
Ferrules, labels etc.
u)
Termination of ECCs with copper lugs
v)
Wiring connections of CT meter - load side of incomer
w)
Mounting height of Meter, max 2M min 0.8M

July 2015
Page 6 of 14

2.3.2
Dielectric tests (excluding components, lamps etc.)

All control fuses and electronic components shall be isolated
Test voltage of 2.5kV for 1 minute shall be applied between
Phase to phase
Phase to neutral
Phase to earth
Neutral to earth
2.3.3
Protective measures check/Electrical continuity of protective circuits

Capacity and continuity between:
2.3.4
a)
All metal parts and main earth bar
b)
Door and main earth bar
c)
Continuity test according to control circuit diagram
d)
Checking of indicator lamps (with transformers), voltmeter etc.
e)
Outgoing circuits check with hand lamp
Physical Check
Check general arrangements of the components, internal wiring and complete cleanliness.
Check the panel against approved shop drawing to ensure that right components (ACB, MCCB)
of correct ratings are installed.
Check the tray riser, cable drops cable overlapping and dressing of cable to MDB.
Check all the bolts / nuts and bus bar connection to ensure that all are in good and tight condition.
Check earth bonding of components and other related connection.
Check all meters and selector switches to ensure the correct selection & rating.
Check the phase barriers are properly fixed for separation of circuits.
Check all cables and panels are properly labelled and identified.
2.3.5
Insulation Resistance Check

Check and measure insulation resistance between phases, neutral and earth with 500 volts
megger (the values to be verified with the permissible limits).
Check the terminal insulation. cable gland termination and shrouding.

July 2015
Page 7 of 14

2.3.6
Functional Test (Panel to be temporarily energised)

Check the control circuit of each system for its correct operation.
Switch ON and OFF of all MCCBs, contactors, relays to verify for the desired operation.
Check draw out mechanism of main incomer ACB.
Check operation of the indication lamps & meters to ensure proper functioning.
Check functions of motor operated ACB/MCCBs
Check for any abnormal rise in temperature on bus bars. jumper cables, terminals and various
devices by using an infrared scanner.
2.3.7
2.3.8
Earth Leakage Test

a)
Check earth leakage circuit breakers by means of RCCB tester, selecting 50% 100%,
150% of the rated sensitivity currents and the respective trip time to be recorded.
b)
Check the rating of core balance CTS and EL relays for earth leakage protection.
c)
Tabulate the readings taken.
Earth Fault Loop Impedance Test

Measure the earth loop impedance across phase and protective conductor with earth loop
impedance tester.
Tabulate the reading taken and check with permissible values.
2.3.9
Polarity Test
Check the polarity of incomer supply by polarity tester before energising panels.
Check all fuses/circuit breakers and single pole control devices are connected to phase conductors
only.
2.3.10
2.3.11
Test on Capacitor Panels

a)
Check the operation and indications of contactors in manual mode
b)
Check the operation and indications of contactors in auto mode by setting various power
factor in the regulators.
Overall Performance Test - Check and ensure the satisfactory operation of the boards at full load.
Any other tests as requested by the CONSULTANT.
2.4
Final DB Light & Power Points
2.4.1
Physical Check
a)
Check the electrical components such as conduits, wires, trunking, light fixtures, socket
outlets are connected to the final circuit of the distribution board.
b)
Check the installation of distribution boards and internal wiring.

July 2015
Page 8 of 14

2.4.2
2.4.3
c)
Check the identification and labelling of each final circuits.
d)
Check that all metallic components are earthed/bonded.
e)
Check the terminal insulation, cable gland termination and shrouding.
Polarity Check
a)
Check the polarity of power / light points to ensure the light switches (single pole) are
installed in the line conductor.
b)
Check for screw type lamp holders. The outer or screwed conductor is connected to the
neutral conductor.
Continuity Check
a)
Check the continuity of the protective conductor from the farthest point to main earth
terminal of the DB for each final circuit by means of a DC ohm meter verify the values are
within permissible limit).
b)
Check the continuity between the open ends of each of the three rings of circuit (ie. phase,
neutral and earth) for all ring final circuits conductors with a multi meter and the value to be
within the permissible limit.
2.4.4
Insulation Resistance Test - Check and measure the insulation resistance between phase, neutral
and earth through a 500 Volts, Megger.
2.4.5
RCCB and Polarity Test
2.4.6
2.5
a)
Switch on and off all MCBs and Contactor relay to verify for the desired operation.
b)
Check earth leakage circuit breakers by means of RCCB tester.
c)
Check the circuit performance by switching on the MCB in the DB.
d)
Check the light and power points by operating all the switches connected in the circuits.
e)
Check all the sockets outlets of ring/radial circuits with 3 pin socket tester (13A)/test lamp.
f)
Tabulate the readings taken.
Earth Fault Loop Impedance Test

a)
Measure the earth loop impedance across phase and protective conductor with earth loop
impedance tester.
b)
Tabulate the readings taken and compare with permissible values.
Lighting Control System

following:
2.5.1
Physical Check
a)
Check the breakers are properly grouped to the appropriate contactors for on/off control.
b)
Check the system cables are properly terminated to the corresponding lighting group.

July 2015
Page 9 of 14

2.5.2
c)
Check the identification and labelling of different lighting groups are provided.
d)
Check the operation of override switch.
Function Test
a)
Check the system time channel settings required for night reduction.
b)
Monitor the system operation during time channel set time period.
c)
Check the operation of all presence inframed sensors (PIR).
d)
Check the time required for lights to turn on in response to PIR sensors.
2.6
LV power and Control Cables
2.6.1
Physical Check
Check the cable installation and ensure the following:
2.6.2
a)
Proper laying and dressing cable cleating /tying cable.
b)
Tray supports are adequate.
c)
Cable identification and labelling.
d)
Glanding and gland earthing termination is correct.
e)
No physical damage.
Insulation Resistance Test

a)
Conduct insulation resistance test as per cables manufacturer recommendations, and test
requirements.
b)
Measure insulation resistance between cores of all LV cable with a 500 V Megger and
tabulate readings, the readings to be verified with permissible limits (min. 10 Mega ohms)
c)
Measure insulation resistance between cores and ECC and earth terminal with a 500 V
Megger and tabulate readings. The readings to be verified with permissible limit.
2.6.3
Phase Rotation Test- Phase rotation at all points should be same other wise rectify.
2.6.4
Performance Test (to be energised temporarily)
2.7
a)
Switch on all isolators and run all equipment, for 2 hours and verify complete performance.
b)
Check for any unusual temperature rise in cables, terminals and switches and protective
devices.
Grounding and Bonding

following:

July 2015
Page 10 of 14

2.7.1
Physical Check
Check all the earth electrodes in earth pits for proper installation and connection.
a)
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.8
Check all the protective conductors from the earth electrodes to the MDBs and DBs for
proper installation and connection.
Earth Electrode Resistance

a)
Remove the protective conductor connection from the electrode.
b)
Measure earth electrode resistance by using an earth megger.
c)
Repeat the above for all pits and tabulate readings.
Continuity Test
a)
Check proper earth bonding by checking continuity of protective conductor by a D.C. ohm
meter.
b)
The above to be checked for all protective conductors to various equipment.
c)
Check the continuity resistance between the main earth terminal of the MDB/DB and the
farthest equipment by a DC ohm meter.

following:
Physical Check
2.8.1
2.8.2
a)
Check the proper jointing of copper tapes with accessories and earth electrodes.
b)
Clean and tighten all joints.
Earth Electrode Resistance

a)
Remove the lightning system continuity conductor connection from the earth electrodes.
b)
Measure the earth electrode resistance by using an earth megger.
c)
Repeat the above for all pits and tabulate readings.
Continuity Test
a)
Check proper connection by checking continuity between lightning protection conductor at

the selected farthest points and the earth electrode by using a DC ohm-meter.
b)
Check continuity resistance between the lightning protection conductor and the metallic
frame works bonded with the lightning protection system by using DC ohm-meter.
c)
Repeat the above for entire network and record the readings.

July 2015
Page 11 of 14

2.9
Fire Alarm System

following:
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
Visual Checks
a)
Check installation of fire alarm system cables for proper laying, termination, clipping,
labelling, identification.
b)
Check cable connection to the F.A.C.P. battery, repeater panel.

a)
Check insulation resistance between cores with a 500 V megger.
b)
Tabulate readings.
Functional Checks
Fire Alarm:
a)
Put the system into operation as per manufacturers recommendation.
b)
Simulate fire conditions by generating smoke/heat to activate the detectors.
c)
Check display of detector number check operation of LED on the detector

Check display on network.
Check the printer operation.
Fault Alarm:
2.9.4
2.9.5
a)
Simulate fault situations like power failure, battery on, open circuit.
b)
Check visual display in the panel.
Interlock Check
a)
Simulate fire conditions in each zone.
b)
Check that the FAHU/AHU in that zone cuts out.
c)
Check the operation of fire roller shutters pressurization fans & extract fans.
Monitoring Features
a)
Activate the sprinklers/fire hose reel
b)
Check panel monitoring facility for fire pumps/sprinkler pump/zone control valves.

July 2015
Page 12 of 14

2.10
2.10.1
Visual Checks
2.10.2
2.11
a)
Check the cable entries with regards to their tightness.
b)
Check the general arrangements of components and wiring.
c)
Rating and details of components.
d)
Labels and identifications.
e)
Earthing of components and related connections.
f)
Check the polarity.

a)
Disconnect and bridge the mains connecting lead.
b)
Disconnect and bridge the cable to the emergency lights.
c)
Carry out insulation measurement to PE.
d)
Remove the bridges after the insulation resistance measurement.
e)
Reconnect the mains connecting lead and cable the emergency lights.
Lighting
Verify the correct lamps, position, ballast and operation of all fixtures.
With all lighting in operation, measure the average illuminance on the floor/working plane by
establishing the maximum and minimum levels in the following locations:
Exits, public corridors, corridors leading to exits, electrical equipment rooms, elevator machine
rooms and hoistway pits, offices, storage rooms, service rooms, garages, washrooms and
stairways.
Guest rooms and linen rooms.
every place of assembly rooms and areas as directed by the Consultant.
With only the emergency lighting in operation, measure the average illumination at exits, public
corridors, floor areas where the public may congregate and other rooms and areas as directed by
the Consultant.
Take readings at night, with no outside light contribution.
Take readings with a cosine corrected portable digital illuminance meter, or with a video camcorder
with suitable software for illuminance measurements. Measuring instruments shall be tested,
calibrated and certified accurate to within 2%.
Submit technical, testing and calibration data as well as certification on the photometer.
All readings results should match the required luminance levels as specified in relevant sections.

July 2015
Page 13 of 14

Plot lighting results on a set of reproducible plans for review by DIRE Engineer or Operator before
submission to the authorities.
2.12
Optical Fibre
Verify the integrity of all optical fiber link including single mode and multimode fiber cables using
the following tests:
a.
Continuity test
b.
Attenuation test
Testing shall include but not limited to the following:

-
Link loss measurements
Fiber attenuation (dB/KM)
Splice and connector loss.
Refeflectance and optical return loss measurement.
Length measurement.
Test Equipment shall be:

-
Laser source and power meter.
OTDR
OTDR shall be a multi tester with built in power meter, equipped with laser source, suitable for any
field testing and shall be with data storage and PC emulation software.
All test equipment shall be from the manufacturer of structured cabling system or from Consultant
and DIRE approved test equipment manufacturer.
All test equipment shall be factory calibrated by the field test manufacturer and calibration
certificate shall be submited for Consultant and DIRE for approval.
2.13
Other Systems
The Contractor shall be responsible to be responsible for precommissioning and commissiong of all
other systems as per manufacturer rcomendations and Engineer instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE IN THIS SECTION.

- End of Section -

July 2015
Page 14 of 14


CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
REFERENCE .................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK ................................................................................................................... 3
1.3
QUALITY CONTROL/ASSURANCE....................................................................................................... 3
1.4
CODES AND STANDARDS .................................................................................................................. 4
1.5
SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................................... 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1
SERVICE AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS ......................................................................................... 5
2.2
SYSTEM PARTICULARS..................................................................................................................... 5
2.3
TEMPORARY WIRING ..................................................................................................................... 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION .............................................................................................................................. 10

3.1
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................ 10
3.2
FIRE BARRIERS ............................................................................................................................. 12
3.3
CABLES INSTALLED UNDERGROUND ............................................................................................... 12
3.4
CABLE AND CABLE TRENCH MARKER .............................................................................................. 13
3.5
JOINTING AND TERMINATIONS......................................................................................................... 13
3.6
TESTING & COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................................... 14
3.7
WARRANTY ................................................................................................................................... 14

July 2015
Page 1 of 13

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Reference
1.2
Description of Work
Supply and Installation of all power system conductors and cables.
1.3
Quality Control/Assurance
under requirement of these specification shall conform to latest publications or standard rules of the
following:
a)
Local Electricity Authority regulations for electrical installation works
b)
Regulations for Electrical equipment of building IEE, BS London
c)
British Standards.
The Quality Control/Quality Control/Assurance duties shall be performed by the Contractor. The
system of quality control verification shall be in accordance with ISO 9000 standards of Quality
Control/Assurance.
1.3.1
Cables are to comply with the following IEC or other equally approved Standards, and is to bear the
mark of identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured, cable size, voltage grade,
etc.
1.
IEC 60060:
High Voltage Test Techniques - Part I: General Definitions and Test

Requirements.
2.
IEC 60183:
Guide to the selection of high voltage cables.
3.
IEC 60228:
Conductors of insulated Cables.
4.
IEC 60230:
Impulse Tests on Cables and their Accessories.
5.
IEC 60502-2:
Power Cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
voltages from 1kV (Um = 1.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) -Part 2:
Cables for rated voltages from 6kV (Um = 7.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um =
36 kV).
6.
IEC 60502-4:
Power Cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
voltages from 1kV (Um = 1.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) -Part 4:
Test requirements on accessories for cables with rated voltages from
6 kV (Um = 7.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV).
7.
IEC 608 11:
Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials for

electric cables.
8.
IEC 60885:
Guide to the short circuit temperature limits of electric cables with a

rated voltage from 1.813 (3.6) kV to 18/30 (36) kV.
10.
IEC 60287:
Electric Cables - Calculation of the current rating.

July 2015
Page 2 of 13

1.4
Codes and Standards
1.4.1
The cables design, material and performance shall conform except where otherwise specified, with
the latest issues and amendments of the following codes and standards.
a)
IEC 227
Power and Lighting PVC insulated cable.
b)
IEC 228
Conductors of insulated cables
c)
IEC 502
up to 30 kV.
Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages from 1 kV
d)
IEC 331
Fire resisting characteristics of electrical cables (where specified)
e)
IEC 332
Tests on electric cables under fire conditions.
f)
IEC 811
Common test methods for insulating and sheathing of electrical cable.
g)
IEC 287
Calculation of the continuous current rating of cables.
h)
BS 4066
Test on electric cables under fire conditions.
i)
BS 6346
PVC insulated cables for electricity supply.
j)
BS 6004
PVC insulated cables (non armoured) for electric power and lighting.
k)
BS 801
Composition of lead and lead alloy sheaths of electric cables.
l)
EEMUA 133
Underground cable protected against solvent penetration and corrosive attack.
m)
BS 5467
XLPE insulated armoured cables for electrical supply
n)
BS 7211
LSF insulated non armound cables/wires.
1.4.2
Where conflicts exist between the requirements of this specification and other drawings, standards,
codes and specifications, the most stringent shall be applied.
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1
The Contractor shall submit the following drawings and documents related with each electrical
system for Consultant approval.
a)
Original catalogues for various proposed components.
b)
Schedule of Accessories and Fittings.
c)
Related work shop drawings and schematic diagrams.
d)
Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying capacities, derating factors for grouping and temperature.
e)
Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
f)
Joints and terminations

July 2015
Page 3 of 13

g)
Certification of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued by
manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, standards to which it
complies and test certificates. All test certificates are to comply with the test requirements of
the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Service and Installation Conditions

a)
The cable shall be suitable for continuous operation

temperatures and humidity. The atmosphere is to
dusty and with high concentrations of windburn
petrochemical installations in the Middle East.
experienced during large temperature fluctuations in
account.
in desert locations under high ambient

be considered saliferous, sulphurous,
sand as commonly encountered in
The possibility of condensation, as
humid atmosphere, shall be taken into
Cables shall be installed as stated below:
b)
Directly buried in the ground or in formed concrete trenches with backfill.
Fastened to cable ladder rack or tray in the open air exposed to direct sunlight or
within buildings.
In underground ducts.
Unless specified otherwise the following site conditions shall apply:
Design temperature (Outdoor)
+ 50o C
Surface temperature due to solar radiation
+ 85o C
Maximum ambient air temperature shade
+ 55o C
Minimum ambient air temperature
+ 5o C
Altitude not exceeding
1000m AMSL
Maximum relative humidity at 43oC
95%
Ground temperature
+ 35o C
Soil thermal resistively
2.5o C m/w
2.2
System Particulars
2.2.1
Cables covered in this specification will be used on 400 V 3 phase, 4 wire 50 Hz neutral solidly
earthed systems.
2.2.2
Cable Construction
a)
High voltage, XLPE insulated, PVC inner sheath, double layer galvanized steel tape
armoured PVC outer sheathed power cables.
Voltage grade Uo/U
10/11kV for 11 kV system
Um
11 KV
Conductors
Stranded annealed copper. Circular or shaped section.

Minimum size shall be 25mm2.

July 2015
Page 4 of 13

Conductors screen
Extruded semi conductive compound
Insulation
Cross linked polyethylene.
Core Identification
Colored red, yellow, blue
Insulation Screen
Extruded semi conductive compound, bedding of semi

conductive tape and earth screen of copper tape. Copper
tape screen shall be designed to carry the earth fault
current of the system for a period of one second without
exceeding the permissible temperature rise.
Additional copper wire for 25ka/0.5sec current capacity without steel tape armour.
Conductor Lay
Cores laid up with extruded PVC fillers to form a circular

cable.
Bedding
Extruded polyvinyl chloride.
Armouring
Double layer galvanized steel tape armoured single core

cables shall have aluminium wire armouring.
Outer Sheath
The outer sheath of cable shall be an extruded layer of

polyvinyl chloride intrinsically flame retardant and anti
termite protected and cables shall meet the requirements of
BS 4066 Part 1, and IEC 332-1.
Color of outer sheath Red RAL 2002

b)
Low voltage XLPE insulated, PVC inner sheath, SWA, PVC outer sheathed power and
control cables.
Voltage grades
0.6/1kV
Conductors
Stranded annealed copper. Circular or shaped section.
Insulation
Cross linked polyethylene.
Core Identification
Up to four cores colored (Red, Yellow, Blue, Black). All

control cables shall be colored white with black numbers
along the length of cores at 150mm intervals.
Core numbering shall be of the non-fading type. 3 core
cables used for lighting shall have (Red, Black, Green,
Yellow colors for the cores).
Conductor lay
Cores laid up with extruded PVC filler for up to 5 cores. For

6 cores or more wrapping of polyester tape.
Inner sheath/bedding
Extruded Polyvinyl Chloride
Armouring
Galvanized steel wire. Single core cables shall have

aluminium wire armouring.
Outer Sheath
The outer sheath of cable shall be an extruded layer of

polyvinyl chloride colored black, intrinsically flame retardant
and anti termite protected and cables shall meet the
requirements of BS 4066 Part 3, and IEC 332-3.

July 2015
Page 5 of 13

c)
d)
e)
PVC insulated single core cable (wire) for use in conduit

Voltage grades
450/750V (IEC)
Conductor
Stranded annealed copper.
Insulation
Extruded polyvinyl chloride (color red, yellow, blue, black

etc, as required).
Earthing Cable
Voltage grades
450/750V
Conductor
Stranded annealed copper.
Insulation
Extruded polyvinyl chloride (colour green, yellow)
General
Cables shall be drummed in maximum continuous lengths on non returnable cable drums.
Cables ends shall be sealed and fixed to the drum. Cable drums shall be fitted with battens,
fixed around the entire periphery of the drum.
All cable drums shall have their identification reference clearly stenciled on the outside of
both flanges.
Drum identification labels shall be attached on the outside and inside of the drum flange.
Labels shall be robust and non fading and give the following information:
Drum identification number
Voltage grade
Cable construction (i.e. XLPE, PVC, SWA, and PVC).
Number of cores and cross sectional area.
Cable length.
Purchase order number and item number
Manufacturers name
Drum weight.
In addition to the information required by the specified standards, the following
information shall be embossed every one meter along the entire cable length on the
external surface of the outer sheath.
Number of Cores
Size of Conductor
Voltage rating
Manufacturers name

July 2015
Page 6 of 13

Remaining cable length
Example: 4 Core 25 Sq.mm 1 kV grade. (XYZ Company).

2.2.3
Data to be furnished by the manufacturer

The following data shall be furbished by the manufacturers:
2.2.4
a)
Insulation thickness
b)
Diameter under armour
c)
Diameter over armour
d)
Overall diameter
e)
Current rating in air and ground for the ambient conditions specified.
f)
Resistance, reactance per KM.
g)
Maximum continuous drum length for each size of cable.
h)
Maximum pulling tension.
i)
Minimum recommended Bending Radius.
Application
a)
Wire and cable installed in conduits shall be of single core PVC/CU to BS 6004.
b)
All power cables shall be XLPE insulated, armoured type, PVC sheathed, as specified
copper conductor cables of 600/1000V grade (for size of cable 4 mm2 and above sizes) as
per BS 5467.
c)
All lighting distribution wiring shall be PVC insulated wiring cables non-armoured to BS 6004
enclosed in trunking/conduit.
d)
All control cables shall be XLPE insulated, armoured, PVC sheathed, 2.5 mm2 copper
conductor cables of 600/1000V grade as per BS 5467.
e)
Fire resistant FP200 cables shall be used for emergency services.
f)
No cables smaller than 1.5 mm2 shall be used and cables of 2.5 mm2 and above shall be
multi-strand.
g)
All earth cables shall be of similar size to the phase conductor.
h)
Home runs exceeding 25m in length to distribution boards shall be minimum 6 mm2 unless
otherwise stated.
i)
Color code phase conductors as follows:

- 3 phase
Red, yellow, blue
- 1 phase
Red,
- Control wiring
White with black numbers along the length of cores at 150mm

interval with cable marker to match the diagrams at each point
of connection and termination.

July 2015
Page 7 of 13

Neutrals shall be color coded black.
Earth wires shall be color-coded green/yellow striped.
k)
All conductors shall have the color impregnated into the insulation at the time of
manufacture.
l)
Painting of conductor insulation will not be accepted.
m)
Type and size of Cables shall be as indicated in the electrical schematic diagrams, electrical
load schedules and other related drawings.
n)
Unless otherwise indicated, the following final sub-circuit connection and wiring details shall
apply throughout the works :
i)
Lighting Circuits up to 1000 Watts:

10 amp breaker protection Wired with 3 x 2.5mm single core PVC insulated copper
wires.
ii)
Lighting Circuits 1000 to 1800 watts:

16 amp breaker protection Wired with 2 x 2.5 + 1x 2.5mm single core PVC
insulated copper wires.
iii)
High integrity earthed 13 amp socket outlets:

32 amp breaker protection on ring main basis wired with 4 x 4mm and 2 x 4.0mm
single core PVC insulated copper wires.
iv)
Clean earth 13amp socket outlets

16 amp breaker protection on radial basis wired with 2 x 2.5mm and 1 x 2.5mm
single core PVC insulated copper wires.
v)
Unit water heaters up to 3 KW rating:

20 amp breaker protection Wired with 2x4 mm and 1 x 4.0 mm single core PVC
vi)
Fan coil units each :

20 amp breaker protection wired with 2 x 4.0mm and 1 x 4.0mm single core PVC
vii)
Electric Hand dryers / hair dryers

20 amp breaker with 10 mA earth leakage sensitivity protection Wired with 2 x 4mm2 +
1 x 4.0 mm (2Kw rating) single core PVC insulated copper wires.
The above details for connections shall apply throughout the Works, except where the IEE
Regulations would be contravened in respect of permissible voltage drop. In such cases the
contractor shall utilize a larger conductor size as appropriate.
o)
Cable specification and manufacture must be consistent throughout each wired system. All
cable utilized must be continuously run from source to termination, without any through jointing
included.

July 2015
Page 8 of 13

p)
Cable must be adequately stored and protected from damage pending installation and also
during installation until permanent protection is effected.
q)
Cable reels must be supported on purpose formed support frames and under no circumstance
shall cable be drawn from reels laid on the ground. This shall be strictly enforced as the
Engineer's condemnation of any cable that is considered to have been abused will involve total
replacement at cost to the Contractor.
r)
The cross sectional area of every cable shall be suitable for carrying the maximum sustained
load current under normal conditions and shall be selected in accordance with IEE
Regulations. The cross sectional area of the neutral conductor for 3-phase circuits shall be
equal to the cross sectional area of the phase conductors. The cables shall be selected such
that the drop in voltage from the origin of the installation to any point in the installation does not
exceed 4% of the nominal voltage when the conductors are carrying the full load current, but
disregarding starting conditions. Voltage drop calculation shall be submitted for approval and
the cross sectional area of the cable shall be increased accordingly if required to meet the
above mentioned requirement without any extra cost.
s)
The cables connected in parallel shall be of the same type, cross sectional area, length and
disposition and be arranged so as to carry substantially equal load currents.
t)
Where cables are to be connected to bus bars, breakers etc. The insulation and/or sheath
shall be removed for a distance of 150mm from the connection and replaced by suitable
heat-resisting insulation.
u)
The wire armour of single core cables in the same circuit shall be bounded together at both
ends.
2.3
Temporary Wiring
2.3.1
No part of the new installations shall be connected temporarily to the Supply Authority's mains without
the approval of the Engineer and the Authority.
2.3.2
All temporary lighting and electric wiring which the Contractor may require, must be provided by the
Contractor who will be responsible for all charges for electricity consumed as stated in the Contract
conditions.
2.3.3
Temporary wiring and connections executed by the contractor to the instructions of the Engineer
shall be arranged in accordance with the IEE Regulations. Where the ambient air temperature is in
excess of 50C. heat resisting silicon rubber cables shall be used for temporary connection. Where
such cables may be subject to mechanical damage they shall be protected by conduit:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
All wiring of multi-point circuits shall be carried out in a 'looping-in' system and joints and
connections other than those required for the connection of switches, fuses, socket outlets, motors,
etc, shall not be allowed.
3.1.2
PVC cables shall not be in direct contact with any form of polystyrene used in the building.
3.1.3
PVC cables shall not enter any luminaire or heat-producing equipment. In the case of tungsten
luminaries, heat-resisting cables shall be installed from the luminaries to the lighting switches or
equivalent. In the case of fluorescent luminaries high temperature PVC cables shall be installed
from the lighting switch or equivalent. In the case of recessed tungsten and fluorescent luminaries
and heat producing/emitting equipment having final connections effected using flexible cables, final
connections shall be made using heat-resistant flexible cables.

July 2015
Page 9 of 13

Where cables are permitted to traverse channel-ways or similar on continuously mounted
fluorescent luminaries, heat-resistant cables shall be used throughout.
3.1.4
Soldered connections or lugs shall not be permitted. All conductors requiring bolted connection
shall be terminated with compression lugs using an automatic compression crimp tool which will
only release after the correct crimp depth has been obtained.
All bolted connections shall have spring washers. Pinch screw terminals may not be used for
conductors greater than 6.0mm.
3.1.5
All single strand cables shall be doubled back on themselves when terminations are made.
3.1.6
PVC cables shall not be used for final connections to any appliances containing a heating element
or any appliance emitting heat. Where flexible conduit is used a final connection wiring medium,
heat-resistant cables shall be used and these shall commence at the solid conduit end of the
flexible conduit provided it is not in a heated area. If this is not possible, heat-resistant cables shall
be run back to the first switch not in a hot area.
3.1.7
PVC cables shall not exceed the capacity of the conduit or trunking. The installations shall comply
strictly with the IEE Wiring Regulations regarding capacity of conduits and trunking for 450/750 V
cables, but a space factor of 40% shall not be exceededfor trunking.
3.1.8
Circuit protective conductors shall be used throughout the installation and these cables shall be the
same grade and temperature rating of the live conductors of the circuit.
The conduit and/or the trunking system shall not be used exclusively as a circuit protective
medium. Circuit protective conductors shall be colored green and yellow.
The cross-sectional area of protective conductors shall be in strict accordance with the
requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations.
3.1.9
Cables shall be drawn-in a careful and workmanlike manner.

Cables shall be 'combed' as drawing-in proceeds and the neutral and circuit protective conductor of
each circuit shall be run with the phase cable(s) of that circuit.
Cables of one circuit shall run in the same conduit.
Cables of a circuit when run in trunking shall be 'grouped' together with approved plastic binding
clips. Tape shall not be used.
3.1.10
Clip cables neatly to tray with cable separation and support spacing as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.1.11
Where more than two power cables are run together, provide a cable tray. Secure cables with
cleats, saddles or ties as appropriate for location and use spacers where more than one layer is
required.
3.1.12
Install cables in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and using the manufacturer's
approved terminating devices and considering the manufacturer bending radius.
3.1.13
Terminate all single conductor cables entering steel cabinets in a non-ferrous plate.
3.1.14
Where cables pass through a floor or fire barrier provide a cable transit or equivalent fire stop with
openings sized for the cables.
3.1.15
Run surface cables similar to exposed conduit installations. Run cables concealed above ceilings
in finished areas. Where exposed, run parallel to building lines. Avoid proximity to water.

July 2015
Page 10 of 13

3.1.16
All conductors requiring bolted connections shall be terminated with compression lugs using an
automatic tool which will only release after correct crimp depth is obtained. Soldered connections
or lugs are not permissible.
3.1.17
In surface installations, the cables shall run in a manner which shall be as inconspicuous as
possible. The runs shall be truly vertical and truly horizontal and parallel with the features of the
building.
3.1.18
After 'marking off' all cables shall be tested with a 1000 V 'Megger' before erection. All cables shall
be tested not less than 24 hours after completion. Nothing less than an infinity reading will be
acceptable between conductors or between any conductor and the cable sheath, and conductors
being disconnected from the apparatus. The Contractor shall provide evidence of these tests to
THE CONSULTANT.
3.1.19
In all cases where cables pass through floors or walls, steel pipes shall be Inserted in the floors or
walls to protect the cables as they pass through these structures. These pipes shall extend to a
height of 250 mm above finished floor level or 76 mm either side of any wall. In all cases these
pipes shall be so fitted as to blend into the building surfaces.
3.1.20
All cables shall be run either vertically or horizontally and where installed on the building surface.
The cable is to be concealed wherever possible, being run in false ceiling spaces and as approved
by the Consultant.
3.2
Fire Barriers
3.2.1
Where conduit, ducting and/or trunking pass through fire-resistant structural elements such as walls
and floors designated as fire barriers, the openings made shall be sealed according to the
appropriate degree of fire resistance. In addition to this external fire barrier, an internal fireresistant barrier shall also be provided to prevent the spread of fires.
3.3
Cables Installed Underground
3.3.1
Direct buried cables shall be bedded in 75mm of clean sand or riddled soil, covered with similar
material, then protected by concrete slabbing or interlocking tiles. The trench shall be backfilled
over a plastic identification tape laid for as detailed under cable and cable trench marking.
3.3.2
Prefabricated concrete troughs or preformed trenches in which cables are laid shall be filled with
clean sand to provide the top layer of cables with a minimum of 75mm cover, or be completely filled
with sand if this should be required by circumstances.
3.3.3
Prefabricated cable troughs, partly or wholly filled with sand shall be closed using prefabricated
concrete covers. Such covers shall be provided, by the contractor, to meet any particular load
bearing requirements but shall not be less than adequate for use as a footpath.
3.3.4
Preformed trenches shall be sand filled and closed by floating over with concrete of adequate
strength and thickness.
3.3.5
The use of chequer plating and other materials for closing cable troughs, trenches, etc. shall be
confined to those conditions where such special treatment is fully justified technically and
economically and shall be agreed by the Consultant.
3.3.6
Power cables operating at voltages of 400 volts and above shall not be routed below jacked-up
typed unfixed flooring systems in any internal area unless unavoidable for the purpose of supplying
equipment installed on the flooring system. In such cases the power cables must be totally
enclosed within a steel trunking, conduit, etc., over their entire route length below the flooring
system irrespective of the type of cable used.

July 2015
Page 11 of 13

3.3.7
Cable trench and prefabricated trough depths should not normally have less than 500mm. Direct
buried cables should not normally have less than 500mm of cover from cable to finished grade
level. The above shall be varied according to the requirements of actual site conditions and cable
routes to provide adequate safeguard against, for example, erosion, soft ground conditions and
mechanical damage, etc. The maximum thickness of any one group of cables shall not exceed
75mm unless otherwise agreed with the Consultant.
3.4
Cable and Cable Trench Marker
3.4.1
All cables shall be fitted with indestructible identification bands of stainless steel at each end and
then over their entire length at 30 meter intervals, at all points where they enter and leave ducts,
and at changes in direction, etc.
3.4.2
Concrete or slabs covering cable trenches shall be coloured for identification purposes. Similarly
where cables run under floors, markers shall be employed to clearly define the extent of the cable
way over the entire route.
3.4.3
The route of underground electric cables shall be marked at 30 meter interval by permanent
markers posts. They shall be reinforced concrete units fitted with 150 mm x 150 mm x 2.5 mm
thick stainless steel square plate inserts bearing electrical cable trenches or HV electrical cable or
similar to the present marking at site in English and Arabic. The marker post shall extend above
ground level or shall be flush with the final ground level according to the site and THE
CONSULTANTs requirements. Two or more markers shall be visible from any point on the route
and markers shall be placed at any divergence from the straight.
3.4.4
The location of all underground power cables shall be clearly identifiable throughout their route
length by means of a polyethylene board laid in the ground at 300mm below actual finish
ground/floor level and above each cable. The board shall be colored red and continuously marked,
with black indelible lettering of not less than 12mm high, to read the following message in both
Arabic & English:
CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE 300mm BELOW
3.4.5
A sample of the polyethylene board with detailed technical data shall be submitted to the
Consultant for approval prior to any cable laying works being carried out.
3.5
Jointing and Terminations
3.5.1
All cable conductor shall be fitted with a correctly sized cable socket or thimble and a means of
identification. The cable sockets may be of the sweated or crimped compression types. If for the
former the solder should have a melting point of not less than 185 Deg. C. and if for the latter they
must be the appropriate tools as specified by the manufacturers of the joint connectors. The cable
terminations shall be made following the positive identification of the conductors in accordance with
the specified phase rotation sequence.
3.5.2
Cable lugs shall be tinned copper compression type.
3.5.3
Cable glands shall be brass double sealed compression type with earth clamping features to IP 55.
3.5.4
Cable insulation/sheath shall be removed for a distance of 150mm from the connection and
replaced by suitable heat resisting insulation.
3.5.5
Joints in XLPE cable shall not be carried out without the written approval of the Consultant. Low
tension cable joints shall incorporate compression type ferrules with polyethylene tape insulation
housed in a plastic joint box and sealed with cold pouring resin fitting.
3.5.6
Joint in HV cables shall be carried out using heat shrinkable kit.

July 2015
Page 12 of 13

3.5.7
All cable joints/terminations

recommendations.
shall
be
strictly
in
accordance
with
cable
manufacturer
3.5.8
Termination kits shall be compatible to the cables used with and the
cable manufacturer.
3.6
Testing & Commissioning
3.6.1
All cable type shall have been subjected to Type Tests in accordance with the relevant IEC or
British Standards. Type test certificates shall be furnished.
3.6.2
All cables shall be subjected to routine tests at the cable manufacturers works in accordance with
the relevant IEC or British, tests shall be subject to the Consultant witness if required.
3.7
Warranty
same shall be confirmed by
Provide five (5) years warranty from the date of installation for the joints and terminations of cables
specified in this Section.
- End of Section -

July 2015
Page 13 of 13


RACEWAY AND BOXES
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

RACEWAY AND BOXES
INDEX
PART 1 -GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
REFERENCE .................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
RELATED WORK .............................................................................................................................. 3
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE ...................................................................................................................... 3
PART 2 -PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 3

2.1
UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS .......................................................................................................... 3
2.2
TRUNKING SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................................ 4
2.3
CONDUITS/TRUNKING AND FITTINGS ................................................................................................ 6
2.4
OUTLET BOXES ............................................................................................................................... 6
2.5
PULL BOXES.................................................................................................................................... 7
2.6
CABLE TRAY AND FITTINGS .............................................................................................................. 7
2.7
FLOOR BOXES ................................................................................................................................. 7
PART 3 -EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 8

3.1
UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS .......................................................................................................... 8
3.2
CONDUITS/TRUNKING AND FITTINGS ................................................................................................ 9
3.3
METAL TRUNKING INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 12
3.4
OUTLET BOXES ............................................................................................................................. 13
3.5
PULL BOXES.................................................................................................................................. 13
3.6
CABLE TRAY AND FITTINGS ............................................................................................................ 14

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 1 of 14

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Reference
1.2
Related Work
1.2.1
Refer to and co-ordinate with sections on Excavation and Backfill, and Concrete Work, and refer to
details of duct/pipe enclosures indicated on structural and electrical drawings.
1.3
Quality Assurance
1.3.1
Regulations and Standards: Conduits, wire ways, cable trays and fittings are to be designed,
constructed and installed to give safe installation and reliable mechanical protection for wires and
cables in accordance with the Regulations. Standards of products are to be as specified.
1.3.2
All products shall be sourced from Manufacturer approved agent/dealer in the UAE.
(Documentation to be provided).
1.3.3
All products shall carry permanent marking by manufacturer
1.3.4
Comply with the latest issue of:

a)
IEC 60269 Low voltage fuses
b)
IEC 60296 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and Switchgear.
c)
IEC 60521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 AC watt hour meters.
d)
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code).
e)
IEC 60947 Low voltage switchgear and control gear.
f)
BS EN 60529 Specification for classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Underground Duct Banks
2.1.1
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of UPVC duct banks as shown on the drawings
and as specified hereunder for the following systems:
a)
Electrical Power System (for LV and HV Cables)
b)
Electrical Lighting System
c)
Tel./Data Communication System
d)
Low Current Systems
e)
Spare Ducts at Road Crossings.
Concrete encased UPVC ducts shall be installed at locations wherever indicated on the drawings
including cable entry ducts to each building.
Size and type of ducts shall be as indicated in the related electrical system drawings.

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 2 of 14

2.1.2
Quality Control/Assurance/Assurance
under requirement of this specification shall conform to latest publication or standard rule of the
following:
Local Electricity Authority regulations for electrical installation works Department of Civil Defence
requirements
2.1.3
Codes & Standards

The following standards and specifications must be complied with:
2.1.4
BS3505 :
UPVC Ducts
BS:497 :
Manhole Covers
Submittals
system for Consultant approval:
a)
b)
Schedule of Accessories and Fittings
c)
Test Certificates.
d)
Shop drawings indicating also the following:
e)
i.
Routing of U/G ducts and their arrangement.
ii.
Sections indicating the crossings of other services.
iii.
Termination of UPVC ducts to Manholes.
iv.
Detailed drawing indicating Arrangement of Ducts, Spacing between Ducts etc.
v.
Internal arrangement within manholes.
Duct Sizing Calculations
2.1.5
Ducts shall be Type heavy duty uPVC complete with associated couplings, spacers and all
required accessories. Duct shall be suitable to withstand a minimum pressure of 6 bar.
2.1.6
Concrete, reinforced concrete, materials methods of construction and methods of test shall comply
with the requirements of this Division, as well as relevant civil specification section.
2.2
Trunking Systems
2.2.1
Description of Work
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the following trunking systems as specified
hereafter and as indicated in the related electrical system drawings.
a)
UPVC Skirting/DADO Trunking System

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 3 of 14

b)
Aluminium Skirting/Dado Trunking system
The Contractor shall provide all components necessary for a complete system.
2.2.2
Quality Control/Assurance/Assurance
under requirement of this specification shall conform to latest publication or standard rule of the
following:
2.2.3
Codes & Standards

BS 1004 1985
Zinc Alloy for Die Casting
BS EN 10142 1991
Continuously hot-dip zinc coated low carbon sheet steel.
BS 1474 1987
Aluminium Alloys for Extruded Sections
UPVC Conduits and Accessories
BS 6399 Pt1:1984
Loading for Building Code of Practice : Dead and Imposed

loads
BS 4578 Pt2 1973

(1991)
Steel Underfloor (Duct) trunking
BS 1706 1990
Electroplated Coatings of Zinc and Cadmium on Iron & Steel
BS2989
Requirements for HOT-DIP Zinc coated and Iron Zinc alloy

coated products
Non-metallic Conduits and fittings for Electrical Insulation
BS6099
Rigid Non-flame Propagating Conduits of Insulating Materials
BS476
Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures
BS4678
Part 4
Trunking made of Insulating Material
BS 6099 Part 1
1981 (1993) &
Part 2 (1988)
BS4607
Part 1,3
I.E.E.E. Wiring Regulations

All related Test reports for loading on Ducting, Service, Junction outlet boxes from a recognized
testing institution should be made available for final approval of materials.

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 4 of 14

2.2.4
Submittals
a)
Manufacturers data and installation instructions.
b)
Schedule of materials to be used.
c)
Shop drawings showing all layout, connections wall and floor boxes fixing methods and the
like.
d)
Trunking sizing calculation shall be submitted for the various areas along with shop drawing.
2.3
Conduits/Trunking And Fittings
2.3.1
Materials
a)
Surface conduits shall be heavy gauge hot dipped galvanized after fabrication rigid steel
Class 4 manufactured in accordance with BS 4568 Part 1.
b)
All conduits embedded in concrete, plaster and screed unles otherwise specified shall be
very heavy gauge high impact PVC type, minimum 1.7 mm wall thickness manufactured in
accordance with BS 4607 and BS 6099.
c)
Use flexible steel conduit with ground conductor for final connections to motors. Lengths
shall not exceed 500 mm.
d)
All metal cable trunking shall be manufactured from sheet steel in accordance with BS 4678,
galvanized to class 3. Body and cover thickness shall be as per BS 4678 Part- 1.
e)
Protection against corrosion shall be hot dip zinc coating after fabrication.
f)
All conduit and trunking in unconditioned and unfinished areas eg. plant rooms, electrical
rooms, etc. shall be painted with one coat of metal primer after installation.
2.4
Outlet Boxes
2.4.1
Materials
a)
Outlet boxes shall be manufactured of galvanized sheet steel, unless otherwise specified.
b)
Use metal clad weatherproof boxes outdoors or in damp locations.
c)
Use metal clad boxes where surface mounted in unfinished areas.
d)
Ceiling boxes shall be 75 mm circular or square, and 50mm deep complete with fittings
where required to support fixtures.
e)
Outlet boxes in walls, ceilings or floors shall be of an approved type suitable for the
construction.
f)
Provide gang boxes at locations where more than one device is to be mounted.
g)
Provide combination boxes with barriers for wiring of more than one system.
h)
Provide panel mounted fixing frames where outlet boxes are installed in paneling.
i)
Brass earth lead shall be provided for the outlet box to allow connection of earth wire.
j)
Outlet box shall be of adjustable grid type.

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 5 of 14

k)
All circular PVC boxes where used to support light fittings shalll be provided with steel insert
clips.
2.5
Pull Boxes
2.5.1
Materials
a)
Junction and pull boxes shall be sized to accommodate the conduits indicated and to
facilitate pulling in the conductors required. Minimum depth shall be 50mm.
b)
Junction and pull boxes shall be of steel with covers attached by screws and shall be
provided with earth terminal and screws.
c)
All junctions on lighting, power, signaling, communications, alarms and control wiring shall
be provided with terminal strips. Terminal strips shall have screw type terminals and cable
identification strip.
2.6
Cable Tray And Fittings
2.6.1
Materials
a)
The cable tray system shall be complete with all necessary trays, risers, elbows, supports,
end plates, drop outs and fittings required for the installation.
b)
Cable trays shall comply with BS EN 61537 norms and shall be heavy duty perforated
sheets, Hot dip galvanized after manufacture to BS EN 1501461. All heavy duty trays
supporting power cables shall be of folded edge with return flange. Thickness of tray shall
not be less than:
Width of tray/accessory (mm)
Up to and including 300
Above 300 up to and including 900
Minimum Thickness (mm)

1.5
2.0
c)
Loading of cable tray and of cable ladder shall be in accordance with NEMA VE1.
Contractor shall submit loading calculation for CONSULTANT review and approval.
d)
All supports and fixings shall be hot dip galvanized after manufacture to BS EN 1501461.
e)
All fixation hardware (bolts, nuts, washers shall be stainless steel grade 304).
f)
Cable ladder shall be produced of 2mm hot dip galvanized mild steel.
g)
The cable tray/ladder shall be sized such that a minimum spacing of twice the cable
diameter is kept between two adjustment cables.
2.7
Floor Boxes
2.7.1
Service outlet boxes and Junction boxes shall be three-compartment type of the size 300x 300
x75-90mm and shall be constructed from high-pressure Zinc Alloy die casting base frame pillars.
This shall be fixed on to heavy gauge galvanized steel base plate for support by support frame.
Other materials adequate in strength and performance shall be used and these shall be protected
against corrosion. The boxes shall be constructed with provisions for ducting or conduit access on
all four sides. Unwanted entries shall be blanked off with detachable side blanks.
2.7.2
Covers for service outlet boxes shall be made of high pressure Zinc Alloy die casting with 12mm
recess to receive ceramic tiles or carpet tiles. They shall be lifted by suction cups as and when
required giving access at all times to the power, telephone and ELV outlets. Counter sunk screws
as in junction boxes shall secure the covers of service boxes. All exposed portions of the boxes
shall be epoxy coated in grey color.

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 6 of 14

2.7.3
All boxes shall have extra wide gaskets in order to minimize water seepage. Gaskets shall be
made of material that is durable in order to withstand loads.
2.7.4
All boxes shall be adjustable in height independently of the ducting system to take account of
difference in floor thickness.
2.7.5
Adequate segregation shall be provided between service runs within junction boxes by using crossover bridges and rigid compartments.
2.7.6.
Cables emerging from service boxes shall be protected against damage by means of nylon cable
exit grommets or equivalent and approved material and shall be reversible to close position when
not in use.
Circuit protective conductors shall be provided between the covers and the boxes.
2.7.7
The boxes shall be adequate in strength to take in a ceramic tile, and withstand loads normally
seen in airports and pubic locations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Underground Duct Banks
3.1.1
Construction
a)
Build duct banks on undisturbed soil or well compacted granular fill not less than 150 mm
thick, compacted to 95% of modified Proctor.
b)
Excavate and backfill in accordance with the Excavation and Backfill Section.
c)
Provide underground pipe bridges to support the duct bank where it crosses previous
excavations or other excavations which are part of this contract.
d)
Where additional excavation below the trench bottom is required, slope the walls at 45 Deg.
along the direction of the trench, and backfill with granular material compacted to 95% of
modified Proctor.
e)
The trench bottom shall be flat or convex in cross section.
f)
Prior to laying ducts, construct a concrete skim slab not less than 50 mm thick. Provide
base spacers across the skim slab at 1500 mm intervals, levelled to the grades indicated for
the bottom layer of ducts.
g)
Construct a dry well of crushed stone at the low points of the ductbank, and where indicated
at manholes. Dry wells shall be pits not smaller than 500 mm square x 1200 mm deep
below the invert elevations of the low points of the duct banks or manholes.
h)
Lay ducts with configurations and reinforcing as shown, using plastic or other suitable
intermediate spacers to maintain the correct spacing. Maintain spacing between ducts of
not less than 40 mm horizontally and vertically. Use manufacturer's couplings pulled tight.
i)
Install ducts at the elevations and slopes indicated on the drawings, with a uniform grade of
not less than 250 mm per 1 00 m. The top of any duct bank shall not be less than 700 mm
below finished grade unless specifically indicated.
j)
Provide intermediate spacers at maximum 1500 mm centres, and stagger in adjacent layers.
Use anchors, ties and trench jacks as required to secure the ducts. Ensure that ducts are
not broken, damaged or disturbed during placing of the concrete. Remove weights or wood
braces before the concrete has set, and fill the voids.

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 7 of 14

k)
Reinforcing steel and metal ties may encircle all ducts, but shall not encircle any duct or
group of ducts in the duct bank.
l)
Place concrete carefully and spade continuously to ensure a flow between and under the
individual ducts and to provide a solid mass of concrete. Vibrators shall not be used.
m)
This Division shall ensure that not less than 75 mm of concrete are placed at the top, bottom
and sides of the duct bank.
n)
Make transpositions, offsets and changes in direction with 5 deg. bend sections or couplings
to provide turns of not less than 9 m radius.
o)
Cut, ream and taper ends of ducts in the field in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, so that duct ends are equal to factory-made ends.
p)
Provide bell ends at all duct terminations in manholes, trenches or buildings, except where
couplings and plugs for future extensions are indicated.
q)
Use rigid aluminium or galvanized steel conduit for bends and for all sections extending
above finished grade level. For ducts carrying single conductor cable, use only aluminium
conduit.
r)
Ensure that a responsible and competent supervisor is present during concreting operations.
Advise THE CONSULTANT in advance of concreting, so that he may inspect the ducts up to
placing. Be present during the pour and inspect the complete duct bank before backfilling.
s)
Clean ducts thoroughly before laying. During construction securely cap ends of ducts to
prevent the entrance of foreign matter.
t)
Immediately after placing of concrete, pull through each duct a mandrel not less than 300
mm long and of a diameter of 6 mm less than the internal diameter of the duct, followed by a
stiff bristle brush to remove all sand, earth and other foreign matter. Work the mandrel
through the ducts carefully to avoid disturbing or damaging ducts where concrete has not set
completely. Pull a stiff bristle brush and a swab to remove water, mud and fine sand through
each duct immediately before pulling in cables.
u)
Replace or repair to the approval of THE CONSULTANT any completed ducts which are
defective or unsatisfactory in any way, at no additional cost to the Contract.
v)
Ensure that concrete has attained 50% of its specified strength before backfilling.
w)
Provide a 6 mm nylon cord in each empty duct to facilitate pulling, and a removable plug or
cap to seal each end.
x)
Back opening in ducts with asbestos, braid packing and seal the asbestos packing with
permanently resilient silicon base non inflammable water proof compound.
3.2
Conduits/Trunking And Fittings
3.2.1
Installation
a)
Make bends and offsets with a hickey or power bender, without flattening or denting the
conduits.
b)
Surface conduits shall be supported by distance spacing saddles fixed at intervals not
exceeding that set out in the IEE wiring regulations.
c)
Attach clamps to masonry walls by means of expansion shields. Use beam clamps or Erico
'Caddy Fasteners' or equivalent to attach conduits to exposed steel work.

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 8 of 14

d)
Provide expansion couplings with bonding jumpers and clamps for all conduits crossing
building expansion joints. Expansion couplings shall be Crouse-Hinds Type XJ. or
equivalent Bonding jumpers and earthing clamps shall be Crouse-Hinds Type GC or
equivalent.
e)
Provide conduit fittings with suitable covers on runs of exposed conduit. Each conduit fitting
shall be of a type suitable for its particular use. Covers shall be located so that they will not
be blocked by the future installation of additional conduits.
f)
Running couplers with lock nuts shall not be permitted only three piece conduit unions shall
be accepted.
g)
Run conduit in finished areas concealed in building fabric and above suspended ceilings.
h)
Install conduits in block walls as the walls are being erected and not by cutting after erection
of the walls.
i)
Conduits shall not run exposed in any finished area. All areas shall be considered finished
unless indicated otherwise. Electrical Rooms and Mechanical rooms shall be classed as
unfinished areas.
j)
Run exposed conduits in groups, parallel to building lines, and accurately in line and level.
k)
Install conduits so that there is no interference with access openings in ceilings, removal of
ceiling tiles, or access to equipment in the ceiling space.
l)
Install conduit to avoid proximity to water or heating pipes. Do not run within 150 mm of
such pipes. Where crossings are unavoidable, maintain a minimum distance of 150 mm
from the pipe covering.
m)
Do not run conduit through structural steel members, concrete beams or columns except as
permitted by the Consultant.
n)
Requirements governing the installation of conduits apply equally to surface or exposed

cable installations.
o)
Do not run conduits larger than 25 mm in structural floor slabs. Do not run any embedded
conduit, in floor slabs less than 100 mm thick.
p)
Run conduits in floor slab. Where no topping secreed occurs.
q)
Protect conduit stub-ups from damage during construction, and seal the ends to prevent the
entrance of foreign material with plastic plugs or other approved devices. Taping or similar
protection is not acceptable.
r)
Where conduits pass through a waterproof membrane, install sleeves with a 50 mm wide
collar continuous welded all around, at membrane level. Ensure that the membrane is
dressed over the collar. Sleeves shall be sized large enough to allow free passage of the
conduits. Make the sleeves watertight sealer after the conduits are installed.
s)
Where conduits pass through other floor slabs or fire walls, seal into the concrete or pass
through a sleeve. Sleeves shall be high density plastic, with flange for attaching to form
work or structure. Pack the sleeve with fireproof packing and seal approved by the
Consultant safety department.
t)
Where runs of conduit are shown, only the general routing and location are indicated. Install
all conduits so as to provide a maximum head room and minimum interference with the
space. Install conduits as close to the structure as possible, so that furring can be kept to a
minimum.

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 9 of 14

u)
Take out and replace at no change to the contract price any conduit or cable which is not
installed properly in the opinion of the Consultant.
v)
Install a nylon fish cord in each empty conduit, complete with cap and bushing at each end.
w)
Where conduits are concealed in plaster walls, conduits shall have a minimum 15mm cover
along its whole length Horizontal runs shall be avoided.
x)
During construction identify all conduits with sprayed on color at both terminations
immediately after installation. The following color code shall be used:
y)
Electric power
black
Fire alarm and smoke detection
red
E.L.V. (Extra Low Voltage systems)
yellow
Isolated or ungrounded systems
orange
Earthing
green
Where conduits are connected to trunking, steel boxes, panels, switchgear, or any item not
having a tapped entry (or having a tapped entry of 6mm or less), the connections shall be
made by long threaded male brass bushes with a coupling and serrated spring washer after
removing a paint with a purpose made tool.
Bushes shall be tightened with a tool specifically designed for that purpose - pliers or
toothed wrenches shall not be allowed.
z)
Sufficient draw-in boxes shall be provided to permit easy wiring. The following shall also
apply:
No. of right-angled
Bends
NIL
1
2
Max. distance Between draw

boxes
10 m
10 m
6M
For the purposes of this Specification a double set constitutes the equivalent of one right-angled
bend.
Not more than two right-angled bends or 10m length of conduit shall be permitted between draw
boxes, and vertical conduit runs more than 3.0m shall provide cable support using a draw-in box.
Each bend, set, adaptable box, conduit box, etc, shall be supported at 150 mm (approx) from each
side.
Saddles and boxes shall be secured by sheradized class 1 or stainless steel screws of a minimum
size of 30mm x No.8 or equal.
A separate Green and yellow insulated protective conductor shall be installed within the trunking
system for each circuit and services.
Conduit capacity shall be in accordance with BS 7671/IEE wiring regulations such that the space
occupied by the wires shall not exceed 40% of the conduit area.
Separate conduit shall be provided for each circuit and for each system wire.

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 10 of 14

3.3
Metal Trunking Installation
3.3.1
Installation
a)
Trunking runs shall be installed neatly on the surface and be truly vertical, horizontal or
parallel with the features of the building.
b)
Trunking shall be sized in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulations for sub-main
distribution cables, ie. 600/1000 V grade, and a space factor of 45% shall not be exceeded.
c)
For sub-circuit wiring, i.e. 450/750 V grade to BS 6004, a space factor of 40% shall not be
exceeded.
d)
Trunking runs shall be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout their length.
Brass continuity links shall be fitted to all trunking joints exterior to the trunking, utilizing
brass bolts and shake-proof washers.
e)
Multi-compartment trunking shall be used where segregation of services is required, and

shall consist of earthed steel partitions of no less than 0.5 mm thickness greater than that of
the trunking and be a minimum of 1.0 mm thickness.
f)
Compartments shall be drilled to allow conduits to pass through to the compartment served.
g)
In the situations where tees and junctions are encountered, the multi-compartment fittings
shall be of such a depth as to allow for suitable pass-over connections.
h)
Fire barriers shall be proivded within the trunking at each crossing of fire wall or fire zone.
i)
Insulated pin racks shall be provided to support cables in vertical runs exceeding 3.0 m.
Removable cable restraining straps shall be 'sprung' into trunking at 600 mm centers where
trunking covers are fixed on the underside or side of the trunking.
j)
Trunking covers shall be of maximum length for the run, drip-proof, close fitting and of
similar protective coating as the trunking. Cover joints shall not coincide with trunking joints,
but be staggered, thus producing a more rigid construction. Covers shall only be installed
on the underside of trunking in unavoidable circumstances, and then only with agreement in
writing.
k)
Trunking shall Lie securely fixed to the building fabric at intervals not exceeding 1.5 meters.
l)
Trunking up to 50mm wide shall have only one screw at each fixing point, trunking over this
width shall have two screws. Screws shall be sheradised Class 1 or stainless steel, No. 12
for up to 75mm width, No. 14 for larger sizes.
m)
Manufacturer's standard fittings shall be used. Only where these are inadequate may
fabricated fittings be used. After getting CONSULTANT approval these shall be finished to
the same protective coating standard of the manufactured trunking. Bends and tees shall
have gussets or be radiussed.
n)
Connections to distribution boards shall be made by using flanges giving the full trunking
capacity, making due allowance for the future installation of cables from spare ways.
o)
Connections between trunking and apparatus shall be by means of a brass male bush
coupling and internally serrated washer or alternatively a standard flanged coupling.
p)
The cover shall be removable over the whole length of the trunking. Where trunking passes
through walls or floors a small length of cover must be provided on the section passing
through to form a sleeve for 25 mm on each side.

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 11 of 14

q)
All trunking and accessories shall be by one manufacturer.
r)
A separate green and yellow insulated protective conductors shall be installed within the
trunking system for all circuits and services.
s)
Trunking shall only be installed in lieu of multiple runs of conduit and in areas which are fully
accessible.
3.4
Outlet Boxes
3.4.1
Installation
a)
Provide outlet boxes for all lighting fixtures, receptacles or other devices in walls, ceilings, or
floors. Wire each fixture from an outlet box, with a maximum of four fixtures per box.
b)
Support boxes independently of the conduit system and mechanical ducts.
c)
Locate boxes in hung ceiling spaces so that they do not interfere with the removal of ceiling
tiles or equipment.
d)
Where outlet boxes are installed flush in exposed concrete blocks in finished areas, blocks
shall be cut by the Masonry Division on instructions from this Division. Ensure that openings
are cut to fit boxes so that edges of openings are not visible after installation of cover plates.
The use of mortar to patch oversize or ragged openings will not be permitted.
e)
Do not mount boxes between the same pair of studs, on opposite sides of sound-rated
partitions. Seal spaces between boxes and gypsum board with acoustical sealant.
f)
Adjust floor boxes so that closure plates are flush with the surface of the floor tile, or the floor
if carpeting is specified. Provide under floor duct fittings and outlets or single flush outlets
with waterproof covers, as indicated on the drawings.
3.5
Pull Boxes
3.5.1
Installation
a)
Locate junction and pull boxes so as to be accessible at all times. Boxes may be installed in
mechanical, electrical, storage or janitor rooms or in hung ceiling space.
b)
Provide access hatches for boxes installed in ceiling spaces unless ceiling tiles are of lay-in
or snap-in type.
c)
Locate junction and pull boxes so that piping, ductwork or equipment will not restrict or block
access.
d)
Cables connected to terminals or passing through boxes shall be identified on the strip and
by cable markers.
e)
Terminal strips may be omitted where there are less than 3 connections in a junction box,
but all conductors shall be identified by cable markers.
f)
Terminals may be omitted for through cables which are not broken at a junction box.
g)
Provide pull boxes in conduit runs where required to facilitate the pulling in of cable, as
specified.

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 12 of 14

3.6
Cable Tray And Fittings
3.6.1
Installation
a)
All accessories including bends, intersections, tees, risers and reducing sections shall be
purpose-made by the tray manufacturer. Only one manufacturer's tray and accessories
shall be used.
b)
Sizing of cable trays shall allow 30% spare capacity for future cables.
c)
Care shall be taken to avoid any electrolytic action between dissimilar metals. Under no
circumstances shall any copper cable or fitting be direct in contact with the galvanizing.
d)
Sets and bends shall be sized to allow for the minimum permissible radius of the largest
cable on the tray. Cables shall retain their relative positions on bends and sweeps.
e)
Earth continuity shall be maintained at all joints with suitable earthing links.
f)
Cable trays shall be cut along a line of plain metal and not through perforations. Burrs or
sharp edges shall be removed prior to the installation of tray sections or accessories.
Bushes shall be provided through all holes cut in the body of the tray.
The cable tray shall be made good at all joints or holes by first treating the surfaces with a
suitable rust proofing agent, then applying finishes comparable to the remainder of the
surface.
g)
A minimum space of 75 mm shall be allowed between the tray and the structure to provide
for securing the cable and general maintenance.
h)
Cable tray shall be carried on mild steel supports with suitable protective coating, fixed to the
structural at not more than 1.0m intervals, depending on cable tray thickness.
Mid span joints should be avoided. Joints should be positioned as close to the support as is
practical. Fixing of supports shall be by Rawlbolts" or equal.
Alternatively, proprietary steel channel may be used, permitting easy adjustment and
modification.
Proprietary clamps fixing onto the flanges of structural beams may be used.
i)
All metal work, fixing bolts, etc., shall be suitably primed and painted with two coats of zincenriched paint.
j)
Cables shall be installed on trays in a single layer and in accordance with the IEE Wiring
Regulations, using plastic coated, metal reinforced clips or saddles any by proprietary cleats
of a pattern recommended by the cable manufacturer.
k)
Not more than four cables shall be secured by a single clip or saddle. Binding tape fixings
must not be used. On vertical tray installations load-bearing cleats or saddles shall be used
and securely fixed to the tray.
l)
Provide cable tray expansion joints at all locations where the tray crosses a building
expansion joint and at other locations recommended by the manufacturer.
m)
Where cables in tray pass through a floor or fire barrier, interrupt the tray and provide an
Electrotray cable transit with openings sized for the cables.

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 13 of 14

n)
Cable trays shall be provided with standard stand and ventilated cover to protect cables from
sun radiation when installed outdoors and to protect cables form mechanical damage where
damage is likely to occur during maintenance activities. Also, wherever applicable indoor
and subject to the Consultant decision in this regard.
- End of Section -

Raceway and Boxes
July 2015
Page 14 of 14


WIRING DEVICES
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

WIRING DEVICES
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................ 3
1.1
WORK INCLUDED .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK .............................................................................................................................. 3
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................................... 3
1.4
SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................................................. 3
1.5
SHOP DRAWINGS .......................................................................................................................................... 3
PART 2- PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................................................. 4

2.1
SWITCHES ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2
SOCKETS OUTLETS ...................................................................................................................................... 4
2.3
FUSED SPUR UNITS ...................................................................................................................................... 5
2.5
FLEXIBLE OUTLET ......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.6
20A DOUBLE POLE SWITCH ......................................................................................................................... 5
2.7
HAND DRYER ................................................................................................................................................ 5
2.8
ISOLATORS .................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.9
FLOOR BOXES .............................................................................................................................................. 5
2.10
GI BOXES...................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.11
ACCESSORIES PLATE FINISH ....................................................................................................................... 6
2.12
MOUNTING HEIGHTS ..................................................................................................................................... 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................................. 7

3.1
INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................... 7

Wiring Devices
July 2015
Page 1 of 6

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Work Included
1.1.1
1.2
Description Of Work
Supply, Installation all line voltage wiring devices.
1.3
Quality Assurance
1.3.1
under requirements of these specifications shall conform to latest publications or standard rules of
the following:
a)
Local Electricity Authority, regulations for electrical installation works and Department of Civil
Defense requirements.
b)
Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings (IEe), (BS) London.
c)
British Standards.
The quality Control/Quality Assurance duties shall be performed by the Contractor. The system of
quality control verification shall be in accordance with ISO 9000 standards of quality assurance.
Codes and Standards
The following Codes and Standards to the extent specified herein, form a part of this specification.
When an edition date is not indicated for a Code or Standard the latest edition enforce at the time
of proposal submitted shall apply.
BS546
Specification, two pole and earthing pin, plugs, socket outlets and socket outlet adaptors.
BS646
Specification, cartridge fuse link
BS1363 13A plugs, socket outlets, connection units and adaptor.

BS3676 Switches for household and similar fixed electrical installation.
BSEN60309-2 Specification for industrial plugs, socket outlets and couplers for AC and DC
supplies.
BS5733 Specification for general requirements for electrical accessories
1.4
Submittals
system for Consultants approval:
1.5
a)
b)
c)
Test Certificates.
Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings as specified in relevant section of specifications.

Wiring Devices
July 2015
Page 2 of 6

PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1
Switches
2.1.1
Local lighting switches shall be to the manufacturer, rating and type as specified.
2.1.2
Light switches shall comply to BS 3676.
2.1.3
All switches shall be installed in boxes with adjustable lugs to ensure front plate is true, and square.
Flush boxes shall finish flush with the wall surface and overlapping front plates shall be used.
Boxes shall be suitable for the wiring system used.
2.1.4
All switches shall be 6 Ampere or 15/20 Ampere grid type as shown on the plans.
2.1.5
Where switches are mounted in Class 4 installations in situations exposed to weather or continual
dampness they shall be watertight pattern with approved gaskets. Enclosure shall comply with BS
5420 1977 with ingress protection to IP 54.
2.1.6
Switches shall be suitable for back and side wiring with 4.0 MM2 or 2 x 2.5 MM2 standard
conductors.
2.2
Sockets Outlets
2.2.1
5A, 13A and 15A Socket outlets shall comply to BS 1363 and BS 546 as appropriate switched and
shuttered and mounted in ring or multiple assemblies and shall be of the type and rating as
specified/indicated on the drawing.
2.2.2
Unless otherwise stated 13A switch socket outlets and spur boxes shall be wired on ring main
circuits when more than two outlets is connected to a circuit.
2.2.3
All floor mounted socket outlets shall be fixed as part of the under floor service boxes.
2.2.4
All 13A switched socket outlets shall have two earth terminals to provide high integrity earthing.
2.2.5
Socket outlets shall be complete with boxes not less than 47mm deep and the box shall have a
suitably mounted brass protective conductor terminal.
Socket outlets installed in flush installations shall have overlapping front plates.
In surface installations front plates shall be flush with the sides of the box and shall be metal clad
unless otherwise specified.
2.2.6
Where socket outlets are installed on perimeter paneling, metal frames for panel mounting shall be
provided.
2.2.7
The earth pin of the socket shall be connected to the box earth terminal with a green and yellow
PVC-insulated protective conductor. Cover screws are not acceptable for earth continuity.
2.2.8
In Class 4 protection areas, where installed in exterior locations or in areas of continual dampness,
outlets shall be watertight pattern with watertight caps and approved gaskets. Socket outlets shall
be to BSEN 60309-2 weather proof with minimum IP 44.
2.2.9
Socket outlets for voltages other than 230V for single phase and 400 for three phase supply shall
be color coded in accordance to be BSEN60309-2 and shall allow plugging of only similar rated
voltages plugs.
2.2.10
Socket outlet shall be suitable for back and side wiring with 1 x 6.0 mm2 or 2 x 4.0 mm2 standard
conductors.

Wiring Devices
July 2015
Page 3 of 6

2.3
Fused Spur Units
2.3.1
These shall be to BS 5733, double-pole, switched with neon indicator as specified, insulated
pattern.
Where used as a flexible outlet to an appliance, they shall be of the flexible outlet pattern with cable
anchoring clamp. Fuses shall be provided with each connection unit.
2.5
Flexible Outlet
Flexible outlet shall be rated 20A or 45A as shown on the drawing. The flexible outlet shall be
complete with 3 pair of terminals each suitable for 4mm2 conductor and 10mm diameter cord outlet
for the 20 A flex outlet and with 3 pair of terminals each suitable for 10mm2 conductor for the 45A.
The flexible outlet shall be provided with moulded cover and cable clamp.
2.6
20A Double Pole Switch

The 20A double pole switch shall be manufactured to BS 3676 Part 1 1989 and shall be fitted with
neon indicator. The double pole switch supplied for the water heaters shall be engraved Water
Heater.
2.7
Hand Dryer
Hand dryer shall be suitable for both hand and face drying and shall be of the recessed type with die
cast aluminium polyester powder coated housing. The dryer shall be operated through photocell and
automatic cutout for 30 seconds cycle.
The fan shall have an appropriate airflow and the heater shall be provided at the inlet side of the fan.
2.8
Isolators
All external isolators must have IP-65 protection with aluminium alloy or die-cast aluminium
housing with bolt on drip proof canopy. Isolators must be derated for 50 deg. Ambient temperature.
Internal isolators shall be IP 54 / IP 65 depending on the location with polycarbonate housing for
non-armoured cables.
2.9
Floor Boxes
Service floor boxes shall be constructed from high pressure Zinc Alloy die casting base frame and
fixed to heavy gauge galvanized steel base plate adequate in strength and performance and to be
protected against corrosion. The design of the base frame shall cast the whole unit in one piece
without any joints/fabrication to prevent corrosion, concrete slippage into the box during casting of
concrete or screeding. The boxes shall be constructed with provisions for conduit access on all four
sides. Unwanted entries shall be blanked off with detachable side blanks.
Cover for service floor boxes shall be made of high pressure Zinc Alloy die casting with recess to
accept the same floor finish and provided with suitable hinges designed to enable the trap cover to
open through 180 degrees and giving access at all times to the power, telephone and ELV outlets.
The boxes shall be adjustable in height independently of the ducting system to take account of
difference in floor thickness.
Cables emerging from floor boxes shall be protected against damage by means of nylon cables exit
grommets or equivalent and approved material and shall be reversible to close position when not in
use. The lifting handle and cable grommets shall be provided in opposite sides of the trap cover to
allow easy access to lifting handle and to avoid damage of the cable insulation.
Floor boxes shall be complete with waterproof gasket and circuit protective conductors between the
covers and the boxes.

Wiring Devices
July 2015
Page 4 of 6

2.10
GI Boxes
GI boxes to be provided with brass earth terminal to facilitate earth wire connection. The boxes to
have sufficient number of 20mm and 25mm knockout. The boxes thickness shall be 1.1mm
minimum and shall comply with BS 4662. Boxes to have adjustable lug for proper installations of
wiring accessories. Extension ring to be used alongwith GI boxes, in places where the box is deep
inside the wall, marble or concrete.
2.11
Accessories Plate Finish

All the wiring accessories shall be vandal proof. The accessories plate shall have the following
finishes depending on the location where it is installed and on the feeding arrangement.
Switches to comply with BS 3676:2000, and sockets to BS 1363, ceiling rose to BS 67 : 1999.
2.12
a)
All external outlets and outlets in pumproom shall be weatherproof to IP-66.
b)
Weatherproof range should be suitable for semi recessed mounting and supplied with back
boxes.
c)
All outlets above false ceiling, shall be white plastic.
e)
All outlets in back of house areas and back of house offices shall be of white plastic.
f)
All outlets in front of house areas and guest rooms shall be as per interior designer
requirements.
g)
Outlets in Electrical rooms, Mechanical floors, Tel. Rooms, etc shall be metal clad.
h)
All switch plates including SSOs are to be coordinated with tiling layouts by prior agreement
with the Architect on site.
Mounting Heights
The mounting heights for the electrical equipment and accessories shall be coordinated with the
furniture layout and shall be as per site requirements to Engineer's instruction and approval. In
general the mounting heights are as follows:
Above FFL
1.
Switches, fire alarm break glass
1200 mm (Top)
2.
Switch socket outlets, Pull Box
450 mm (Bottom)
3.
Switch socket outlets in plant rooms / car parking.
1200 mm (Top)
4.
Fire alarm control panel, MCB Distribution Boards
1800 mm (Top)
5.
Socket outlets for extract fans in ceiling
Adjacent to units
6.
Flexible outlets for water heaters and other

equipment
Adjacent to units
7.
The centre of socket outlets in kitchen / pantry shall be a minimum of 150mm above the
workspace.
Note: Socket shall not be installed within 300mm from edge of sink.

Wiring Devices
July 2015
Page 5 of 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
Install single throw switches with lever in "UP" position when switch is closed.
3.1.2
Install switches in gang type outlet boxes with ganged cover plate when more than one device is
shown in one location.
3.1.3
Cover plates shall be installed after all painting has been completed.
3.1.4
Provide phase barriers where more than one phase enters a lighting switch, panel.
3.1.5
All electrical accessories (switching, sockets, etc) shall be provided with tag to Consultants
approval indicating, feeding circuit reference and the related distribution board number.
3.1.6
Samples of all accessories shall be provided for approval by the Consultant prior to ordering.
- End of Section 16130 -

Wiring Devices
July 2015
Page 6 of 6


ELECTRONIC SOFT STARTER
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

ELECTRONIC SOFT STARTER
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
Section Includes ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
References ................................................................................................................................ 3
1.3
Submittals.................................................................................................................................. 3
1.4
Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................... 3
1.5
Delivery, Storage, and Handling ............................................................................................ 4
1.6
Maintenance Service ............................................................................................................... 4
1.7
Codes and Standards ............................................................................................................... 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................................................. 4

2.1
Construction ............................................................................................................................... 4
2.2
Control Module Design Features ........................................................................................... 5
2.3
Control System .......................................................................................................................... 7
2.4
Power Structure Design Features........................................................................................... 8
2.5
Energy Saver ........................................................................................................................... 10
2.6
Phase Rebalance .................................................................................................................... 10
2.7
Environmental Ratings ........................................................................................................... 10
2.8
Harmonic Filters ...................................................................................................................... 11
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................................ 11

3.1
Examination ............................................................................................................................ 11
3.2
Installation ............................................................................................................................... 11
3.3
Field Quality Control .............................................................................................................. 11
3.4
Manufacturer's Field Services .............................................................................................. 11
3.5
Adjusting .................................................................................................................................. 11
3.6
Demonstration ........................................................................................................................ 12

Electronic Soft Starter
July 2015
Page 1 of 11

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Section Includes
Variable frequency controllers.
1.2
1.3
1.4
References
A.
NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and
Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2000.
B.
NEMA ICS 7 - Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable Speed Drives; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2000.
C.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
D.
NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2003.
E.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
Submittals
A.
Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and over current protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and
enclosure details.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions and
weights shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated

by testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
E.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up inspection findings.
F.
Operation Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include instructions for starting and operating controllers,
and describe operating limits that may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions.
G.
Maintenance Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include routine preventive maintenance schedule.
Quality Assurance
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified

in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities
within 160 km of Project.
C.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.

July 2015
Page 2 of 11

1.5
1.6
Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A.
Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
B.
Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided
for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.
Maintenance Service
A.
1.7
Provide service and maintenance of controller for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
Codes and Standards
The controller shall be designed to meet the applicable requirements of :
EN
IEC
UL
CSA
NEMA
IEEE
VDE
These standards shall include :
Creep distances and clearances 600V (UL/CSA ) and 500V (IEC)
Power terminal markings per EN 5005 and EN 60947
Dielectric withstand per UL508 and IEC947
Noise and radio frequency (RF) immunity per NEMA ICS 1 - 109
Surge withstand per IEEE587 and IEC 801 - 5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
Construction
The open - type device shall be modular, consisting of a logic component and a power structure.
The logic component shall be a self-contained control module, compatible with the full range of
power structures. The control module shall mount directly to the power structure without the use of
wiring.
The power structure shall consist of three power modules mounted on a heatsink for ratings up to
and including 135 Amps. For ratings 180 Amps to 1600 Amps, the power structure shall consist of
three power poles with integral heatsinks.

July 2015
Page 3 of 11

Soft starters should have line reactor and isolating bypass contacts.
2.2
Control Module Design Features
2.2.1
Mechanical
2.2.2
The control module shall consist of a power supply, logic control circuitry, silicon controlled
rectifier (SCR) firing circuitry, I/O circuitry, a digital programming keypad, a backlit LCD
display, and a serial communication port.
The control module shall be designed for integral mounting on the power structure and shall
be compatible with the full range of current ratings 24 Amps to 2500 Amps.
The control module shall be easily removed from the power structure, without the need to
disassemble associated printed circuit board assemblies.
Control terminals shall be easily accessible, and located on the front top of the device. The
terminals shall be UL rated for 300 Volts, 10 Amps maximum and accept a maximum of two
wires, 0.75 - 2.5 mm2 (#18-#14 AWG).
Digital parameter adjustment shall be provided through a built-in keypad. Analog

potentiometer adjustments are not acceptable.
A built-in alphanumeric, backlit LCD display shall be provided for controller set-up,
diagnostics, status, and monitoring. The display shall be two-line, 16-characters minimum.
A serial communication port shall be provided as standard. Optional communication protocol

interface modules shall be available for connection to Remote I/O, DH485, DeviceNet and
RS 232/422/485.
A minimum of three auxiliary contacts shall be provided for customer use. These shall be
programmable as follows :
Two form C SPDT: normal (instantaneous) or up-to-speed
One SPDT: normal or fault ; N.O or N.C
Table A Ratings
Configuration
Form C
SPST
2.2.3
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. /N.C.
NEMA
Rating
B300
C300
C300
Continuous
Sealed
Inrush
Voltage
5A
2.5A
2.5A
360VA
180VA
180VA
3600VA
1800VA
1800VA
240 V AC max.
Electrical
The control module shall provide digital microprocessor control and supervision of all
controller operation, including SCR pulse firing control.
The control modules power supply shall be self-tuning to accept control power input from
100 to 240 VAC, 50 Hz.
The SCR firing circuitry shall incorporate an RC snubber network to prevent false SCR firing.
The logic circuitry shall incorporate a latch circuit for three wire control.

July 2015
Page 4 of 11

2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
User Adjustments
The acceleration ramp time shall be adjustable from 0 to 30 seconds.
The initial torque setting shall be adjustable from 0 to 90% of locked rotor torque.
Current limit starting shall be adjustable from 50 to 600% of the motors full load current.
A selectable kick start feature shall be available to provide a current pulse at 550% of the
motors full load current rating. The time period shall be adjustable from 0.0 to 2.0 seconds
Monitoring
The controller shall provide the following monitoring functions indicated through the built-in
LCD display:
Phase-to-phase supply voltage
Three-phase line current
Watts in kW
kWh
Elapsed time
Power factor
Motor thermal capacity usage
Protection and Diagnostics
The following protection shall be provided as standard with the controller:
Power loss ( with phase indication ; pre-start)
Line fault ( with phase indication ; pre-start ) advising:

Shorted SCR
Missing load connection
Line fault ( running protection ) advising

Power loss
Shorted SCR
Missing load connections
Voltage unbalance*
Phase reversal*
Undervoltage*
Overvoltage*
Stall*
Jam*

July 2015
Page 5 of 11

Overload*
Underload*
Excessive starts/hour*
Open gate (with phase indication)
Controller overtemperature
*These protective features shall be defeatable.
Overload protection shall be as follows :
Meets applicable standards as a motor thermal protective device.
Three-phase current sensing shall be tilized ; the use of two current transformers
shall be unacceptable.
Overload trip classes of 10,15,20 and 30 shall be provided and user-programmable.
Electronic thermal memory shall be provided for enhanced motor protection
Overload protection shall be available through the controller, even in a bypass

configuration.
When fault conditions are detected, the controller shall inhibit starting or shut down
SCR pulse firing.
Fault diagnostics shall be indicated in descriptive text on the built-in LCD display.
The exclusive use of fault codes shall be unacceptable.
An auxiliary contact that is programmable for fault indication shall be provided for
customer use.
2.3
Control System
2.3.1
Soft Stop
2.3.2
The Soft Stop option shall provide a voltage ramp-down for extended motor stopping times.
Soft Stop shall be initiated by a dedicated Soft Stop input. A coast-to-rest stop shall still be
possible with a separate stop input.
The Soft Stop time shall be user adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds.
Pump Control
The Pump Control option shall be implemented to provide closed loop control of a motor to
match the specific torque requirements of centrifugal pumps for both starting and stopping.
This shall aid in the eliminating the phenomena commonly referred to as water hammer.
Methods utilising Soft Start with Soft Stop shall not be acceptable.
Closed loop control shall be achieved without using external sensors or feedback devices.
Pump Stop shall be initiated by a dedicated Pump Stop input. A coast-to-rest stop shall still
be possible with a separate stop input.

July 2015
Page 6 of 11

2.3.3
2.3.4
The Pump Stop time shall be user adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds.
Preset Slow Speed
The Preset Slow Speed option shall provide two jog speeds in the forward direction : high
(15% of base speed ) and low ( 7% of base speed ).
Two jog speeds shall also be available in the reverse direction : high (20% of base speed)
and low (10% of base speed).
Reverse operation of the motor shall be achievable in the jog mode without the use of a
reversing contactor.
The starting current for the slow speed operation shall be user adjustable from 0 to 45 0% of
the motors full load current rating.
The running current time for the slow speed operation shall be user adjustable from 0 to
450% of the motors full load current rating.
SMB Smart Motor Braking
The SMB Smart Motor Braking option shall provide braking torque to the motor to shorten
the time period for the motor to come to rest.
Braking shall be achieved without using additional equipment such as resistors or

contactors.
The controller shall bring the motor to rest and automatically shut it down when zero speed
is sensed.
Additional equipment, such as tachometers, encoders or speed switches, shall not be

required for sensing a zero-speed condition.
Braking shall be initiated by a dedicated brake input. A coast-to-rest stop shall still be
possible with a separate stop input.
The strength for the braking torque shall be user adjustable from 0 to 400% of the motors
full load current rating.
2.4
Power Structure Design Features
2.4.1
Mechanical: 24 Amps to 135 Amps
The power structure shall consist of three plug-in modules for controllers rated 24 Amps to
135 Amps.
The three power modules rated 24 Amps to 135 Amps shall be mounted in a single heatsink.
The heatsink shall be isolated from the power modules and shall have a grounding
provision.
Power modules rated 24Amps to 135 Amps shall be encapsulated and shall include two
power-switching semi-conductors and control module interface pins. Integral lugs for power
wiring terminations shall be provided for controllers rated 24 Amps to 54 Amps.

July 2015
Page 7 of 11

2.4.2
2.4.3
Mechanical: 24 Amps to 135 Amps
The power structure for controllers rated 180 Amps to 1600 Amps shall consist of three
power poles with a clamped pair of hockey puck style power switching semiconductors.
The individual power poles for controllers rated 180 Amps to 1600 Amps shall have integral,
power-conducting heatsinks that mount to the controller-mounting flange. The controllermounting flange shall have a grounding provision.
For controllers rated 180 Amps to 1600 Amps, a printed circuit board shall be provided to
interface the control module with the power structure. Interface pins shall be located on the
printed circuit board for direct mounting of the control module.
Electrical
Back-to-back SCR pairs shall be the only power-switching semiconductor means

acceptable. Diode-SCR combinations shall not be acceptable.
There shall be separate power sections to operate from 200V to 480V and 200V to 600V,
50/60Hz.
SCRs shall have the following minimum repetitive peak inverse voltage ratings:
2.4.4
2.4.5
200 - 480V:
1400V
200 - 600V:
1600V
The power section shall have a minimum thermal capacity rating of 600% of the controllers
current rating for 10 seconds.
Transient Protection:
24 Amps to 360 Amps
For controllers rated 24 Amps to 360 Amps, transient protection with separately mounted
protective modules shall be available.
Protective modules shall consist of metal oxide varistors (MOVs) in combination with
capacitors to protect the power components from electrical transients and/or electrical noise.
The capacitors shall be provided to shunt noise energy away from the controllers
electronics.
The MOVs and capacitors shall be encapsulated in a clear material for easy inspection.
The protective modules shall be mounted so that they will not cause damage to the power
components upon absorbing an electrical transient.
The MOVs shall be rated for a minimum of 220 joules.
Transient Protection:
500 Amps to 1600 Amps
For controllers rated 500 Amps to 160 Amps, transient protection shall be provided as
standard.
The MOVs shall be rated for a minimum of 220 joules for 200 - 480V rated controllers and
300 joules for 200 - 600V rated controllers.
Integral fusing shall be provided for additional protection.

July 2015
Page 8 of 11

2.5
2.6
Energy Saver
The Energy Saver feature shall operate to automatically cause the output voltage from the
controller to be reduced when a motor is unloaded or lightly loaded.
Customer adjustments shall not be required.
The energy Saver feature shall be defeatable.
Additional mounting space or wiring shall not be required.
Phase Rebalance
When the Phase Rebalance feature is enabled, the controller shall regulate the individual
phase output voltages from the controller to maintain equal three-phase currents to the
motor.
Customer adjustments shall not be required.
The Phase Rebalance feature shall be defeatable.
The additional mounting space or wiring shall not be required.
2.7
Environmental Ratings
2.7.1
Temperature Ratings
2.7.2
Humidity Range
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.6
The controller shall be operable in relative humidity of 5 to 95%, non-condensing.
Shock & Vibration
The controller shall withstand a 30G shock for 11 ms in any plane without malfunction.
The controller shall withstand a 2.5G vibration for one hour in any plane without malfunction.
Altitude Rating
2.7.5
The open-type device shall deliver its rated current in ambient temperatures ranging from
0C to + 50C.
The ambient storage temperature shall range from - 20C to +75
The controller shall be suitable for operation up to altitudes of 2,000 meters without derating.
Noise and RF Immunity
The controller shall perform without malfunction from showering arc tests of 500V to 1500V
(NEMA ICS 2-230).
The controller shall perform without malfunction when subjected to 3000V surges at a rate of
100 bursts per second for 10 seconds (IEEE STD 472).
Dielectric Withstand
The controller shall be tested to withstand 160V + 2x (voltage rating) at a rate of 200V per
second (held for 60 seconds, then gradually reduced) between live parts and ground.

July 2015
Page 9 of 11

2.8
The controller shall be subjected to an additional test at the previous voltage level plus 20%
for one second (UL 508) (CSA std. C22.2).
Harmonic Filters
Filters shall be provided for Soft Starters to avoid any harmonic feed back into the Network. The soft
starter panel shall be assured of THD levels of less than 5% so that the harmonic value at the main
panel should not exceed 5% of the system voltage. Any compensations required to be provided at
starter panel shall be provided by the panel assembler to limit the THD in voltage to les than 5%.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Examination
A.
Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation.
B.
Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service
conditions required by the manufacturer.
C.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
Installation
A.
Install in accordance with NEMA ICS 7.1 and manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.
C.
Provide fuses in fusible switches.
D.
Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
E.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates.
F.
Neatly type label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate
horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Place
in clear plastic holder.
Field Quality Control

A.
Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01400.
B.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
C.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.17.
Manufacturer's Field Services

Provide the service of the manufacturer's field representative to prepare and start controllers.
3.5
Adjusting
Make final adjustments to installed controller to assure proper operation of load system. Obtain
performance requirements from installer of driven loads.

July 2015
Page 10 of 11

3.6
Demonstration
Demonstrate operation of controllers in automatic and manual modes.

July 2015
Page 11 of 11


VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 3
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES ..........................................................................................................................3
1.2
REFERENCES ..................................................................................................................................3
1.3
SUBMITTALS ....................................................................................................................................3
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................................................3
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ...............................................................................................4
1.6
MAINTENANCE SERVICE ...................................................................................................................4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................... 4

2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................................4
2.2
OPERATING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................4
2.3
COMPONENTS .................................................................................................................................5
2.4
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL.............................................................................................................5
PART 3 - EXECUTION .............................................................................................................................................. 5

3.1
EXAMINATION ..................................................................................................................................5
3.2
INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................................................6
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .................................................................................................................6
3.4
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES ..................................................................................................6
3.5
ADJUSTING ......................................................................................................................................6
3.6
DEMONSTRATION .............................................................................................................................6

July 2015
Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Section Includes
Variable frequency controllers.
1.2
1.3
1.4
References
A.
NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and
Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2000.
B.
NEMA ICS 7 - Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable Speed Drives; National Electrical
C.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
D.
NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2003.
E.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
Submittals
A.
Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and over current protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and
enclosure details.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions and
weights shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated

by testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
E.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up inspection findings.
F.
Operation Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include instructions for starting and operating controllers,
and describe operating limits that may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions.
G.
Maintenance Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include routine preventive maintenance schedule.
Quality Assurance
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified

in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities
within 160 km of Project.
C.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.

July 2015
Page 2 of 5

1.5
1.6
Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A.
Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
B.
Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided
for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.
Maintenance Service
A.
Provide service and maintenance of controller for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
System Description
A.
2.2
Variable Frequency Controllers: Enclosed controllers suitable for operating the indicated
loads, in conformance with requirements of NEMA ICS 7. Select unspecified features and
options in accordance with NEMA ICS 3.1.
1.
Employ microprocessor-based inverter logic isolated from power circuits.
2.
Employ pulse-width-modulated inverter system.
3.
Design for ability to operate controller with motor disconnected from output.
4.
Design to attempt five automatic restarts following fault condition before locking out
and requiring manual restart.
B.
Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, suitable for equipment application in places regularly open
to the public.
C.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
Operating Requirements
A.
Rated Input Voltage: 400 volts, three phase, 50 Hertz.
B.
Motor Nameplate Voltage: 400 volts, three phase, 50 Hertz.
C.
Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over entire range of operating
speed and load.
D.
Operating Ambient: 0 degrees C to 50 degrees C.
E.
Minimum Efficiency at Full Load 98 percent.
F.
Volts Per Hertz Adjustment: Plus or minus 10 percent.
G.
Current Limit Adjustment: 60 to 110 percent of rated.
H.
Acceleration Rate Adjustment: 0.5 to 30 seconds.
I.
Deceleration Rate Adjustment: 1 to 30 seconds.
J.
Input Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC.

July 2015
Page 3 of 5

2.3
2.4
Components
A.
Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate output voltage, output frequency, and
output current.
B.
Status Indicators:
Separate indicators for overcurrent, overvoltage, ground fault,
overtemperature, and input power ON.
C.
Furnish HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch and manual speed control.
D.
Include undervoltage release.
E.
Control Power Source: Separate circuit.
F.
Door Interlocks: Furnish mechanical means to prevent opening of equipment with power
connected, or to disconnect power if door is opened; include means for defeating interlock
by qualified persons.
G.
Safety Interlocks: Furnish terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both manual
and automatic mode.
H.
Control Interlocks: Furnish terminals for remote contact to allow starting in automatic mode.
I.
Manual Bypass: Furnish contactor, motor running overload protection, and short circuit
protection for full voltage, non-reversing operation of the motor. Include isolation switch to
allow maintenance of inverter during bypass operation.
J.
Emergency Stop: Use dynamic brakes for emergency stop function.
K.
Disconnecting Means: Include integral fused disconnect switch on the line side of each
controller.
L.
Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
Source Quality Control

A.
Shop inspect and perform standard productions tests for each controller.
B.
Make completed controller available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to

packaging for shipment. Notify Owner at least 7 days before inspection is allowed.
C.
Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer's test facility. Notify Owner
at least 7 days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
A.
Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation.
B.
Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service
conditions required by the manufacturer.
C.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

July 2015
Page 4 of 5

3.2
3.3
3.4
Installation
A.
Install in accordance with NEMA ICS 7.1 and manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.
C.
Provide fuses in fusible switches.
D.
Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
E.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates.
F.
Neatly type label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate
horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Place
in clear plastic holder.
Field Quality Control

A.
Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01400.
B.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
C.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.17.
Manufacturer's Field Services

Provide the service of the manufacturer's field representative to prepare and start controllers.
3.5
Adjusting
Make final adjustments to installed controller to assure proper operation of load system. Obtain
performance requirements from installer of driven loads.
3.6
Demonstration
Demonstrate operation of controllers in automatic and manual modes.

July 2015
Page 5 of 5


ELECTRICAL MOTORS
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

ELECTRICAL MOTORS
INDEX
PART 1 -GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................3

1.1
REFERENCE ..........................................................................................................................................3
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK ........................................................................................................................3
1.3
QUALITY CONTROL/ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................3
1.4
CODES AND STANDARDS .......................................................................................................................3
1.5
SUBMITTALS .........................................................................................................................................4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................................................................................................4
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................................................................4
PART 3 - EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................................6

3.1
INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................................6

Electrical Motors
July 2015
Page 1 of 6

PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1
Reference
Conform to the general conditions of the contract, the contract particulars and any other relevant
sections of specifications.
1.2
Description of Work
Supply and installation of electrical motors as per mechanical drawings and related specification
requirements and as specified here after.
1.3
following:
1.3.1
1.4
a)
b)
Department of Civil Defence requirements.
c)
Motors shall be of the energy efficient design.
d)
Two speed motors shall have 8/4 poles, Dahlander connection Y/YY with power rating as
per specified schedules.
e)
Three and Multi-speed motors shall be of the variable speed type.
f)
Frequency Rating: 50 Hz, unless otherwise indicated.
g)
Service Factor: According to IEC 60034 and 60072, unless otherwise indicated.
h)
Index of Protection (IP): Motors shall be IP55for outdoor use.
Quality Control:
a.
Perform the following routine tests according to IEC
b.
Measurement of winding resistance.
c.
No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
d.
Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
e.
High-potential test.
f.
Alignment.
Codes and Standards

The assemblies and the associated equipment shall conform to the requirements of the latest
edition of the following standards and codes where applicable:
a)
IEC 60034 rotating electrical machines.
b)
IEC 60072 dimensions of rotatiing electrical machines.

Electrical Motors
July 2015
Page 2 of 6

1.5
Submittals
1.5.1
The Contractor must submit all technical description, data sheets, catalogues, calculations and
other supporting material with the offer to enable the engineer to fully evaluate the proposal of its
compliance with the specifications.
1.5.2
Material submissions for all electric motors shall be in accordance with the section and article 'Shop
drawings' and shall also incorporate the following information:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
Horsepower
Voltage
Frequency
Speed
Starting Current and Torque Characteristics
Full Load Current
Class of Insulation
Enclosure Type
Service Factor
Ambient Temperature Reference
Type of Bearings
Locations of Connection Box
Manufacturer
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
Unless otherwise specified in the equipment specifications, all motors supplied and installed as a part
of mechanical works shall conform to the following requirements:
2.1.2
Motor shall be squirrel cage induction type with service factor of 1.15, Unless specified otherwise.
2.1.3
Motor characteristics shall match the load characteristics (compressor, fans, etc).
2.1.4
Mounting shall be foot, flange, face or combination as per application requirements.

Motors shall include thermistor or RTD type sensors embedded in the stator windings.
2.1.5
Efficiency class: Higher efficiency for rating above 90KW

Efficiency 1 for rating upto 90 KW
Housing
Fans
Speed
Base
:
:
:
:
Cast Iron
Cast Iron
1450 unless otherwise noted
Cast Iron or steel
2.1.6
Starting: The motors shall be suitable for direct on line starting and it shall be possible to start the
motor even at 80% of the rated voltage during starting.
2.1.7
Noise: Shall not exceed beyond values recommended in IEC 60034-9
2.1.8
Bearings
Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals and rated life of 200,000hours.

Electrical Motors
July 2015
Page 3 of 6

2.1.9
Frame
Motors shall be horizontally mounted cast iron TEFC construction. Optimum physical protection
shall be provided and good accessibility for inspection shall be allowed.
2.1.10
Windings
Windings shall be insulated with a non hydroscopic class F varnish and suitably vacuum
impregnated and dipped to provide full protection against humid conditions.
The end windings and terminal leads shall be suitably braced to prevent movements under heavy
starting conditions.
Motors shall be wound for service at a single voltage with a single connection point per phase in
the motor termination box.
2.1.11
Factory Tests
Each motor shall be subject to routine tests in accordance with the relevant codes and standards.
Motor no load overall sound level shall not exceed 85 dBA at meter away.
The manufacturer shall provide gurantee for the motor losses quoted in the motor data sheet.
Motors which fail to meet the guaranteed losses shall be replaced with motors which meet or
exceed the efficicency at no extra cost.
2.2
Electric Motors
2.2.1
Motors shall be constructed and type tested in compliance with relevant sections of IEC 60034.
These shall be of totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type to IP54 either with foot-mounting or
flange-mounting suitable for its application. Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be designed for
continuous running duty type S1 for operation during 3 years without maintenance. They shall be of
such size as to drive adequately their associated equipment under the range of operating conditions,
without overloading.
2.2.2
Windings shall be insulated with Class F insulation material to BS. 2757, and temperature rise of
windings shall be class B (I.E. maximum of 80 deg.C. as measured by resistance method).
2.2.3
Electric motors up to and including 0.37 Kw shall be suitable for operation at 230 volts single phase.
Motors rated above 0.37 Kw shall be of the 3 phase squirrel cage induction type. Motors located
directly in air streams shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled. All motors and equipment shall be
tropicalized.
2.2.4
Motors above 1 Kw shall have three thermistors, one embedded in each stator phase winding.
These thermistors shall be suitable for connecting into an overload relay designed to prevent the
motor windings from exceeding a safe working temperature thermistors shall be of the normally
closed circuit type.
The cables from the thermistors shall each be brought to a separate section of the terminal bar and a
series of connections shall be made at this point. The connection shall be adequate to accept the
external circuit connection.
2.2.5
All motors shall be fitted with a power factor correction capacitors rated at 85% of the motor
magnetizing KVA. Providing a power factor of not less than 0.93. This connection shall be in
accordance with the B.S. Code of Practice. The capacitors shall be directly connected to the motor
terminals. This connection shall be made by the equipment manufacturer. The capacitors shall be
complete with discharge resistors.

Electrical Motors
July 2015
Page 4 of 6

2.2.6
All the motors shall be provided with a substantial earthing terminal tapped into the frame or clamping
device located on the cable end box side of the motor. When air inlets are protected by a screen,
such a screen shall be of corrosion resistant material.
2.2.7
Terminal connections shall be constructed in such a way that direct contact between screws, bolts or
nuts and the conductor is avoided.
2.2.8
The terminals shall be alphabetically or numerically marked in such a way that the cyclic phase
sequence in time of the supply corresponds to the sequence of terminal markings, the direction of
rotation is clockwise when facing the driving end.
2.2.9
The terminal box shall be of sturdy construction with ample space for connecting cables. An earthing
bolt of adequate size shall be provided inside the terminal box for connecting to the cable earthing.
This will be in addition to the earthing bolt provided in the motor enclosure The terminal box shall be
adequately weather proofed with a suitable non sticking reusable non-hygroscopic gasket material.
These terminal boxes also shall be provided with suitable cable sealing end boxes or cable glands.
2.2.10
The rating plate or plates shall be made of a corrosion resistant metallic material, fixed to a
non-removable part of the frame, and shall be marked with the appropriate items in accordance with
IEC 34-1, whereby the values given shall be those actually measured.
2.2.11
In addition to these items the following information shall be indicated:

a)
Type of enclosure in accordance with IEC 34-5 (IP classification).
b)
Locked rotor torque on % of rated torque

Locked rotor current in % of rated current
c)
Allowable running-up time in seconds (ART) bearing type, size, fit, re-greasing period and type
of grease.
d)
Net weight.
e)
Purchase order number.
2.2.12
All motor shafts shall be provided with a key way unless the motor is of the flange mounted type in
which case they shall be complete with adjustable rails.
2.2.13
The frame shall be painted in accordance with manufacturer's standards. However, the painting shall
at least consist of one coat of primer and two coats of oil-resistant finishing paint.
2.2.14
Motor shall be of explosion proof suitable for the hazardous zone classification when to be installed in
hazardous areas.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
Each electric motor shall be complete with a lamacoid name plate securely fastened in a
conspicuous place on the motor. The name plate shall be 2.5 mm thick laminated phenolic plastic
90 mm long x 40 mm wide with black face and white centre, 5.5 mm high letters shall be engraved
through to the white lamination with the following:
a)
Motor No.
b)
Mechanical Equipment Driven
c)
Circuit No.

Electrical Motors
July 2015
Page 5 of 6

d)
Panel No.
e)
Panel Location.
3.1.2
Drive between any motor and driven equipment shall be provided with a guard, except where
casing acts as a guard. Guards for belt-driven equipment shall have a hole for tachometer reading
on each shaft. Design of belt guards shall comply with local municipal safety standards and codes.
3.1.3
Maximum starting current shall be:

a)
1-15 HP: Five times full load current.
b)
15 to 50 HP: Two times full load current.
c)
50 HP and above: 1.5 times full load current.
3.1.4
Where an external control voltage is wired into a starter, provide a warning nameplate and mylar
barriers or a door switch to interrupt the control circuit.
3.1.5
Starters and control devices shall be of one manufacturer (for equipment where starters are part of
the package).
3.1.6
Select overload relays according to the codes and the recommendations of the manufacturer,
based on motor full load current.
3.1.7
Select overload relays with characteristics to permit accelerating the load to full speed without
unnecessary tripping.

Electrical Motors
July 2015
Page 6 of 6


Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

INDEX
PART 1- GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
WORK INCLUDED .................................................................................................................3
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK..................................................................................................... 3
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................................... 3
1.4
SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS............................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 5
2.2
TYPE OF DIESEL ENGINE AND OPERATING CONDITIONS .......................................... 6
2.3
FUEL ........................................................................................................................................ 6
2.4
ENGINE LUBRICATION......................................................................................................... 7
2.5
GOVERNOR ........................................................................................................................... 7
2.6
STARTING SYSTEM ..............................................................................................................7
2.7
COOLING SYSTEM ...............................................................................................................8
2.8
SAFETY GUARDS.................................................................................................................. 8
2.9
SILENCERS ............................................................................................................................ 8
2.10
AIR FILTERS ........................................................................................................................... 8
2.11
GENERATOR.......................................................................................................................... 8
2.12
VENTILATION .......................................................................................................................10
2.13
VOLTAGE REGULATION ....................................................................................................10
2.14
PULLEY BLOCK ...................................................................................................................10
2.15
ENGINE/GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH .10
2.17
SET MOUNTINGS ................................................................................................................15
2.18
SPARE PARTS & TOOLS....................................................................................................15
2.27
BMS INTEGRATION ............................................................................................................15
PART 3 -EXECUTION ...........................................................................................................................................15

3.1
INSTALLATION.....................................................................................................................15
3.2
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING......................................................................................15

Diesel Generator Sets
July 2015
Page 1 of 19

PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
Work Included
1.1.1
Compliance with sections of Division 01, General and documents referred to therein.
1.1.2
Conform to General Requirements for Electrical Services.
1.2
Description Of Work
1.2.1
This Specification covers the supply, installation and commissioning of diesel generating plant
consisting of diesel generator sets and along with all related control panels and accessories
supplied in accordance with the specification as follows:
Number and location of generator sets shall be as indicated in the related electrical drawings.
a)
The generating set shall be provided complete with all ancillary plant and apparatus,
associated control and alarm panels, switchgear, interconnecting wiring, cabling, and
all other equipment required for the operation of the set.
b)
The rating of the sets shall be adequate to meet the estimated load as shown on the
drawing while taking into consideration the ambient temperature conditions of 50 deg.
C and 100% humidity.
c)
The generators shall also be capable of handling the starting current of the connected
equipment with the voltage dip within units acceptable to the equipment (connected)
manufacturers.
d)
While taking into consideration the ambient temperature conditions referred to in this
specification:
The generator rating indicated on the drawings is the prime power rating of the diesel
generator set after applying the derating factors to compensate for the ambient
temperature and humidity indicated in the specification.
The Schematic Single Line Diagram shows the equipment required to be supported by
the generator.
e)
1.3
The Contractor shall provide all details of these equipment to the Generator
Manufacturers to ensure that they consider the characteristics of these loads (such as
power factor, harmonic content, etc.) when selecting generator components. The
Contractor shall verify the manufacturers selection and offer to the Consultant for
approval. A complete selection strategy shall be prepared detailing step loads and
timed delays to ensure minimal droop etc.
Quality Assurance
under requirement of these specification shall conform to latest publications or standard rules of
the following:
Regulations for electrical installation works by the Local Electricity Authority.
Standards and requirements of Local Telephone Authority.
The following are relevant IEEE, ANSI, NEMA, BS Specification recommendations except
where modified by this specification:-

July 2015
Page 2 of 19

NEMA-ICS
Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA-MG1
Motors and Generators
NEMA-PB2
Dead Front Distribution
NEMA-RI2
General Purpose and Communication
NFPA-30
Flammable and Combustible Liquid Code
NFPA-37
Stationary Combustion Engine and Gas Turbine
NFPA-70
National Electrical Code
ANSI-C39.1
Electrical Analog Indicating Instrument
DEMA
Standard Practice for Stationery Diesel and Gas Engines
IEEE-20
Low Voltage AC Power Circuit used in enclosures
IEEE-5G
Semi Conductor Rectifier Components
IEEE 472
Guide for Surge Withstand Capability Tests
IEC34, BS5000 Part 99
Rotating electrical machines
IEC 51, BS89
Indicating Instruments
BS 5514
Performance of Reciprocating Compression Ignition Engines
IEC 95, BS3911
Lead Acid Starter Batteries
Local Representation
It should be noted that all equipment manufacturers shall have authorised representation in the
region supported with maintenance Consultants and adequate stock of spare parts.
1.4
Submittals
1.3.1
Drawings, Operating and Maintenance Instructions

a)
All drawings shall be to scale and fully detailed. All important dimensions shall be given
and the material of which each part is to be constructed shall be indicated.
b)
Drawings for approval shall be submitted in duplicate as prints and, after having been
approved by Consultant, the Contractor shall supply any further copies required by the
Consultant as per the contract requirements.
c)
The following is a list of the drawings which should be submitted by the Contractor with
his Tender:-

1.
Layout (dimensioned) of diesel generating set, fuel storage tanks etc.
2.
Proposed layout (dimensioned) of the Generator Room.
3.
Proposed layout (dimensioned) of control cubicle and Auto Transfer Switch
4.
Proposed layout of generator circuit breaker cubicles.

July 2015
Page 3 of 19

d)
The following list of drawings to be submitted by the Contractor for approval within two
months from the commencement date or such other period as may be agreed with the
Consultant:
1.
Drawings corresponding to all drawings submitted by the Contractor with his

Tender.
2.
Foundation block of diesel generating set.
3.
Foundation details for diesel generator house floor, including cable and pipe
trenches.
4.
Detailed drawings of all components of equipment, including fuel tanks, exhaust

and silencers , fuel pumpset etc.
5.
Detailed layout of the control cubicles and Auto Transfer Switch.
6.
Details and schematic of any integral part of each unit.
7.
Complete schematic diagrams of:-
Protective gear (both mechanical and electrical).
Diesel set control, indication and alarm circuits.
AVR's.
Circuit breaker control and indication circuits.
e)
Complete wiring diagrams.
f)
Detail of protective relays, accessories and current transformers including particulars of

wiring and drilling dimensions.
g)
Details and arrangements of all auxiliary plant and kiosks.
h)
Instrument scales.
i)
Materials lists.
j)
Layout and schedule of main and multicore cables.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
System Description
Standby power generation will be provided in the form of 400 volt three-phase and neutral, 50
Hz diesel driven alternator set located adjacent LV room to serve emergency services load only.
Emergency services will receive standby power under fire conditions and failure of the incoming
mains only and will include all loads in full compliance with module 15C.5.D figure 15C-2 of
Marriott Guidelines.
Standby generator will incorporate its own diesel fuel tank to provide up to 9 hours of
emergency standby power generation at full emergency services load.
Separate fuel tank shall be provided for 24 hours fuel storage.

July 2015
Page 4 of 19

Exhaust system will be extended to upper ground level via appropriate risers from lower ground
level
2.2
Type of Diesel Engine and Operating Conditions
2.2.1
The engine shall be turbo-charged and after-cooled and shall be capable of giving prime rated
power at site not less than the specified output and an excess 10% overload capacity for one
hour in every 12 hours of operation.
2.2.2
Engine shall operate at a maximum speed of 1500 rpm. The site rating shall be based on the
specified site operating conditions. If the site rating is less than the stated catalogue rating a
detailed explanation of the de-rating shall be submitted for approval.
2.2.3
The site rating of the generator, irrespective of engine rating shall also be stated and the rating
of the set will be based on the lower of the two.
2.3
Fuel
The engine to be supplied shall operate on fuel of the light distillate type.
2.3.1
Fuel Handling System

Fuel Oil Pipework
2.3.2
2.3.3
a)
Pipes shall be seamless black steel conforming to ASTM A53 Sch 40.
b)
Pipework shall be all welded construction with socket weld fittings.
c)
Pipework installation shall comply with the relevant clauses of the air conditioning
specifications.
Fill Connections
a)
Fill connection coupling shall be quick lock to suite local diesel supply vehicles.
b)
The fill point shall include an overfill alarm unit with muting switch operated by a float
switch within the storage tank.
c)
Fuel Oil Transfer Pumpset
d)
The fully package pumpsets shall be complete with isolating and non return valves,
pressure release valve, pressure gauge and suction strainer all assembled on a
bedplate. The pumps shall be self priming and shall operate on flooded suction
systems. In addition to the manifold relief valve each pump shall have an integral relief.
Diesel Oil Storage Tank

a)
Diesel oil storage tanks shall comply with the requirements and shall be installed in
accordance with the local Civil Defence requirements.
b)
Tank construction shall be of minimum 6mm thick plate steel complying with ASTM A
283.
c)
Tappings shall be provided for fill, vent, suction and drain. Vents shall include a flame
arrestor.
d)
A tank mounted oil level gauge shall be provided to monitor fuel level locally and at a
remote location close to the fuel fill point. Remote indicator shall be housed in a
cabinet to the approval of the Consultant.

July 2015
Page 5 of 19

e)
Installation of tank shall be level on minimum 300mm high legs.
f)
A bulk fuel storage tank with capacity to cover 24 hours consumption at full load shall
be provided in addition to a daily fuel storage tank with capacity to cover 8 hours
consumption.
2.4
Engine Lubrication
2.4.1
Lubrication of the engine shall be by means of an engine driven integral pump. The pump shall
have on the suction side a course strainer.
2.4.2
The Contractor shall ensure that the lubricating oil system capacity shall be sufficient to enable
the engine to run continuously for 12 hours at any load without replenishment.
2.4.3
A semi rotary pump, glob valve and end cap shall be provided to discharge the oil during
maintenance.
2.5
Governor
The governor shall be of the electronic type. It shall control the speed within the limits laid down
in the respective standards and be capable of adjusting the engine speed to a minimum of 5%
above and below the rated speed. The engine shall be fitted with a device, which will shut off
the fuel supply to the engine when any of the specified alarm conditions occur. The device shall
be fitted with one normally open and one normally closed contact, which will trip and lock-out
the generator circuit breaker in the event of the automatic device operating. Micro switches
shall not be used in any direct current circuit nor in any inductive circuit.
2.6
Starting System
2.6.1
Electric starting equipment shall be provided and so designed that:a)
At engine speeds in excess of the minimum firing speed, it shall be impossible to

complete the starting circuit, and
b)
Not more than two consecutive attempts to start may be made in any period of 1
minute, each starting period and the period between such consecutive attempts being
automatically time controlled by equipment. At the failure of the second attempt the
starter circuit shall be locked out pending manual re-setting.
2.6.2
The equipment shall include an adequately rated maintenance free lead/acid starter battery
together with a charger. The battery charger will be supplied from the mains and an engine
driven dynamo is also required. Battery rack shall be provided for the battery and the battery
shall be protected against accidental, mechanical or electrical damage.
2.6.3
The battery charger shall have a continuous output rating sufficient to recharge the battery from
1.8 V to a fully charged condition in a period of 8 hours allowing for any steady load on the
battery. The characteristics shall be such as to ensure an automatic voltage charge at 2.3
V/cell provided the input voltage and frequency shall remain within +/- 6% and +/- 2%
respectively of normal value. The charger, shall be mounted remote from the engine and shall
include a battery charge fail alarm. Battery charger shall have automatic switch to disconnect
the charger during engine starting.
2.6.4
Without power supply to the charger, the battery shall be capable of providing no fewer than
four starting cycles within a period of 1 minute. Upon restoring power supply to the charger
immediately thereafter, the charger shall be capable of restoring the battery, within 30 minutes,
to a condition in which one more starting cycle can be completed.

July 2015
Page 6 of 19

2.7
Cooling System
The engine shall be provided with a tropical water radiator capable of dissipating the heat from
the jacket water and the lubricating oil. The radiator must be generously sized to permit
operation at full load and overload in the specified ambient conditions. The radiator shall be
mounted on the engine and shall be cooled by an axial flow fan. A calculation for the
backpressure on the fan shall be forwarded for approval. The contractor shall upgrade the fan
capacity or to provide alternative accessories in order to achieve a back pressure on the fan
within the manufacturer's recommendation range. A centrifugal pump shall be supplied to
circulate the coolant. All necessary ducting between the radiator exhaust and external louvre to
be supplied and installed by the contractor to suit the generator set requirements.
Contractor shall be responsible to provide any additional fans with all its accessories in case
required by generator manufacturer to ensure proper cooling of the generator room.
2.8
Safety Guards
All moving parts shall be adequately guarded, to the satisfaction of the Consultant, in order to
prevent danger to personnel.
2.9
Silencers
2.9.1
Engine shall be efficiently silenced with residential grade silencer complete with interconnecting
exhaust pipe and fitting. Supports for each complete system shall be of the anti-vibration type
and shall be so arranged that no weight is carried by the engine set. Due allowance for
expansion of the exhaust system shall be made by the inclusion of expansion bellows if
necessary. Silencer shall be supplied complete with a drain off point. The complete system
including brackets shall be supplied galvanized and shall be insulated within the building.
2.9.2
The silencers and exhaust pipework shall be insulated within the building as follows:The silencers and exhaust pipes shall be provided with 25mm stools, welded on, to accept
extruded mesh to provide a 25mm air gap between the hot surface, and insulation to be
applied. The insulation shall be 75mm thick preformed rigid insulation wired on and then
covered with hammered aluminium sheet.
2.9.3
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing stainless steel fittings and wall
plates necessary to carry the tail pipe through the building walls.
Provide flap valve at the external end of the exhaust pipe, suitable of the high temperature
range and as per manufacturers recommendation.
2.10
Air Filters
Air filters shall be suitable for use in the environmental conditions, which are likely to arise
occasionally, with the atmosphere highly polluted by blown sand and the same shall be
confirmed by manufacturer in writing.
2.11
Generator
2.11.1
General
Generator shall be brushless, salient pole, revolving field self-regulating alternator of fabricated
steel construction throughout. It shall have ball and roller bearings, a dynamically balanced
rotating field, salient pole construction with heavy damper winding. The machine shall have an
a.c. exciter and liberally rated silicone diode assembly with a self contained excitation system
with automatic voltage regulator (AVR), and an efficient cooling system using a centrifugal fan.

July 2015
Page 7 of 19

It shall have screen protection and be drip proof with a large terminal box for outgoing
connections.
2.11.2
The generators shall be star connected, floor mounted panel with suitable capacity ACB shall
be provided adjacent to the generator.
2.11.3
The generator shall be capable of maintaining it's maximum rated output in addition to 10%
overload capacity for one hour in every 12 hours of operation when operating within +/- 5% of
rated voltage, and at rated power factor of 0.8 (minimum).
2.11.4
The critical speed shall exceed twice the overspeed test value.
2.11.5
All windings shall be tropicalised and suitably impregnated to withstand the site ambient
conditions. Minimum of class H protection will be required.
Stator
2.11.6
The stator core shall consist of high permeability, low loss steel stampings, tightly clamped and
securely located within the machine casing.
2.11.7
The windings shall consist of electrolytic copper conductors insulated throughout with Class 'H'
materials.
2.11.8
The windings shall be effectively braced to withstand the maximum forces arising from any
short circuit that may occur at the stator winding terminals. Any material that is liable to shrink
in service shall not be used for bracing, packing or wedging. The ventilating circuit shall be
designed to avoid hot spots and to permit adequate cleaning by a portable centrifugal blower.
2.11.9
Tubular low-temperature thermostatically controlled heaters of sufficient rating to maintain the

windings in dry conditions during long periods of standstill shall be fitted in the stator casing and
wired out to a terminal box on the bedplate. They shall be suitable for operation from the local
single phase a.c. supply.
2.11.10
Both ends of each stator winding shall be brought out to terminal positions on the stator casing,
the phase and terminal box being arranged for 3-phase and neutral connection. The terminal
box shall be designed to accept the cables detailed on the schematic diagram.
2.11.11
All current transformers, including the associated primary connections and secondary circuit
terminal blocks, required for any instruments and/or protection relays specified or for excitation
circuit compounding or compensation, together with the generator neutral earthing connection
shall be supplied and accommodated within a substantial dust-proof sheet steel enclosure
mounted at the generator neutral terminal position.
Rotor
2.11.12
The rotor shaft and hub shall be of forged steel preferably in one piece. The rotor poles shall be
constructed of steel laminations, keyed and securely fixed to the rotor hub and fitted with
interconnected damper windings to absorb the cyclic irregularity of the engine.
2.11.13
The field winding shall consist of electrolytic copper conductors insulated throughout with Class
'H' materials. They shall be fully insulated at all positions of support, and shall be securely
located against movement due to thermal and rotational cycling and the forces arising during
over-speed testing.
2.11.14
Where a separate exciter is provided, the exciter rotor shall be mounted on the extended main
shaft at the free end of the generator.

July 2015
Page 8 of 19

2.11.15
The minimum factor of safety of the rotating system shall be not less than 1.5, based upon the
yield point of the part most highly stressed at the stated over-speed or during a stator 3-phase
terminal short-circuit at normal voltage whichever is the greater.
2.11.16
Exciters
The core and poles of the exciter shall be made of high permeability low loss steel stampings
tightly clamped and secured to minimize magnetic noise. The characteristics of the exciter shall
comply fully with the operational requirements of the alternator in matching the required loading
conditions.
2.12
Ventilation
The generator and exciter shall incorporate shaft mounted fans of sufficient capacity to provide
the machine cooling effect necessary to comply with the temperature requirements of the
specification when operating in the specified ambient conditions.
2.13
Voltage Regulation
2.13.1
Continuously active, quick acting automatic excitation control equipment responsive to the
generator line to line voltage and loading conditions shall be provided to maintain the alternator
voltage within the prescribed limits. Preference will be given to equipment based wholly or
mainly on static state devices.
2.13.2
The equipment shall include all selector switches, indicating instruments, rectifiers, resistors and
any other auxiliary components necessary for the satisfactory operation of the plant.
2.13.3
A voltage setting device capable of adjusting the required voltage in steps of 1% between the
limits of 95% and 105% of normal voltage at any load within the rating of the machine shall be
mounted on the control panel.
2.13.4
When the generator maximum continuous load at rated power factor is rejected, the regulator
equipment shall be capable of limiting the generator momentary over-voltage to a value not
exceeding 120% rated voltage and shall restore the voltage to within 2% of the nominal preset
value within three seconds.
2.13.5
Over-voltage protection shall be provided, the voltage setting range being 105% to 125% in
steps of 5%, the time setting range being adjustable within the range 1 second to 5 seconds in
steps of 1 second.
2.14
Pulley Block
A hand-operated lifting block and chain shall be provided for the generator, capable of lifting the
largest item that has to be removed from the plant for routine maintenance and overhaul.
Detailed shop drawing showing the lifting block, chain arrangement and calculations for the
same shall be submitted for Consultant review and approval.
2.15
Engine/Generator Control Panel and Automatic Transfer Switch
2.15.1
A rigid free-standing, dust protecting sheet steel cubicle shall be provided as the
engine/generator control cubicle. All instruments, control switches, alarm equipment and relays
shall be mounted and wired on the front sheet. All necessary remote alarm and indication
facilities shall be provided. The cubicle shall be part of the automatic generator paralleling and
load shedding panel and the emergency power supply distribution panel which shall be
constructed to BSEN 60439 Part I Form 4b type 6 as specified for the switchgear and
distribution equipment in section 16440.
2.15.2
All indicating instruments shall be rear connected and shall comply with the relevant standards.

July 2015
Page 9 of 19

2.15.3
The switchboard shall be constructed of electro-galvanized steel coated with high solid enamel
polyester electrostatic spray and oven baked with minimum thickness of 2mm and shall be
complete with adjustable gland plates, clamps, cable boxes for the incoming and outgoing
circuits. There shall be adequate channel frames, drilled or slotted for ease of assembly, to
support cable tails, clamps and terminations within the cubicles. The compartment partition
shall be made of Aluzinc or electro galvanized steel coated with high solid enamel polyester
electrostatic spray and oven baked of at least 1mm thickness and suitable to contain the arc
fault within the same. All entries and openings shall be vermin-proof. All live conductive parts
either on the incoming or outgoing side shall be shielded in such a manner that they cannot be
accidentally touched when the doors are open.
2.15.4
Busbars
The busbars shall be made of hard drawn high conductivity tinned copper and rated for
continuous operation. The main bus bar rating shall be the same throughout the entire length
of the switch board and a provision shall be made in the busbars system to allow for expansion
and contraction caused by temperature variation.
The busbar shall be sized taking into consideration the ambient temperature and the specified
temperature rise.
The neutral busbar shall have the same size as the phase busbars while the earth bar shall
have a minimum size of half the phase busbar.
The busbars shall be sized to handle the maximum current passing through the same with a
maximum temperature rise of 35 deg.C. The contractor shall forward all the necessary
calculations to prove sizing of the busbars to engineer's approval.
2.15.5
The genset control panel shall have following meters, switches, controls, gauges and indication
lamps for each generator set.
a)
Indication Lamps:
High engine water temp, high winding temperature, low oil pressure, overspeed, fail to
start, not in auto mode, battery charger ON, set on standby, set in service, set faulty,
low fuel in storage tank, 3 lamp for each mains and emergency supply indication (all
indication lamps shall be as specified in the related section of the specification).
b)
Meters/Gauges:
Oil pressure, water temperature, RPM meter, hour run meter, battery charging
ammeter, battery charging voltmeter, generator's and mains voltage meters with
selector switch, generator current and mains current for each phase. Generator's
frequency meters, KW meter, power factor meter (all meter shall be as specified in the
related section of the specification).
c)
Switch & Relays:

For jacket water heater, for anti condensation heater, emergency stop, generator
voltage adjusting rheostat, speed adjusting rheostat, over voltage protection setting
rheostat manual/test/auto/off selector switch, generator.
A programmable
microprocessor shall provide control and programming for the following:

1.
Start attempts
2.
Crank time
3.
Cool down
July 2015
Page 10 of 19

2.15.6
d)
Suitable control and sensors shall be provided to protect the engine/alternator set
against low oil pressure, high coolant temperature, crank over speed, crank over
torque, stator/rotor winding temperature rise thermistor out of phase paralleling and
reverse power relay, an inhibit circuit to avoid simultaneously closing of the two
generator breaker.
e)
All auxiliary contact, switches and relay necessary to repeat necessary indication
measurement and functions listed above at the control room through the BMS system.
The following controls shall be provided as part of the main switchgear.

a)
Mains failure sensing device
b)
Delay time starter adjustable to ensure mains failure is not for very short period.
c)
Alternator voltage timer adjustable to allow generator set output to stabilise before
feeding the load.
d)
Overrun timer adjustable providing off-load cooling run before shutting down the
engine.
e)
Restoration delay timer adjustable providing on load run to ensure permanence of

mains supply before shutting down the engine.
f)
Engine start controls
g)
Start fail timer.
h)
Manual synchronizing
j)
Autochangeover on fault conditions allowing replacement of faulty generator by healthy

generator set.
k)
Auto synchronizing.
The automatic transfer and bypass switch shall be four pole complying with IEC 947-61 with rating as shown on the drawings:
The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The electrical
operator shall be a momentarily energized, single solenoid mechanism. The switch
shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only two possible positions, normal or
emergency.
The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages, so that
contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and contact temperature rise is
minimized for maximum reliability and operating life.
All main contacts shall be silver composition and shall have segmented blow on
construction for high withstand and close on capability and be protected by separate
arching contacts.
Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without
disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors.
Switches shall have front removable and replaceable contacts. All stationary and
movable contacts shall be replaceable without removing power conductors and/or bus
bars.

July 2015
Page 11 of 19

A two way bypass isolation switch shall provide manual bypass of the load to either
source and permit isolation of the automatic transfer switch from all source and load
power conductors. All main contacts shall be manually driven.
A microprocessor controller and accessories shall be provided to achieve the required
operation as indicated hereunder.
2.16
Mode of Operation
2.16.1
Standby
At all times, except during maintenance periods, the battery charger unit and any engine or
panel heaters shall be set at ON.
2.16.2
Automatic Operation
The AUTO position of the control mode switch is pre-selected for automatic standby against
failure of the main supply.
2.16.3
a)
A main failure detection unit shall be provided for each mains feeding essential load
and shall monitor the mains supply and will automatically initiate the start sequence if
the voltage of any phase of the main supply falls below the pre-set limit.
b)
In the event of a main supply failure the generator set will start, and run up to speed.
After a short delay as set on timer the generator set will assume the load. The delay
ensures that the alternator output has stabilised before feeding the load.
c)
The microprocessor provided for the load shedding shall continually measure the
kilowatt load being drawn from the bus and shall operate the minimum number of
generator sets needed to carry the loads and at its optimum running conditions. As
the load further increase or decrease the generator control will automatically add or
remove generator sets to match load changes through the auto synchronizer and the
load sharer unit.
d)
Should a generator set malfunction, the switchgear shall disconnect that set and
replace it with another if available.
e)
When the main supply is restored, the generator set will continue to run and supply the
load for the duration of the time set on timer, the load is then transferred back to the
main supply and the generator set shuts down to resume the standby condition.
Manual Operation
a)
The manual setting enables pushbutton start and stop control of the generator set.
Start the set by pressing and releasing the START button at the control panel. The set
will start and run up to speed.
b)
The generator set will continue to run until the STOP/RESET push button is operated,
or the control mode switch is set to OFF.
c)
Should a mains supply failure occur during a manual run, the generator set will
automatically assume the load. Before terminating a run check that the MAINS TO
LOAD indicator is lit, if not, then stopping the generator set will cause a break in supply.
d)
A manual synchronizing shall be carried out using double voltmeter, frequency meter
and the synchroscope, shall be of the electronic type with LEDs to indicate phase
difference. For obtaining phase accordance the LEDs at 12O clock position must
indicate for the generator main ACB to be able to close.

July 2015
Page 12 of 19

2.16.4
Test
The TEST setting simulates a main supply failure condition to enable testing of the generator
auto-start circuits.
The mains fail timer starts when the TEST setting is selected, engine cranking will commence
when the timer times out and the generator set will then start and run.
No interruption of the mains supply to load will occur, and with the mains supply healthy (mains
breaker closed), breakers interlocks will prevent operation of the alternator breaker.
Terminate the TEST run by re-setting the Control Mode switch to AUTO. The engine will run-on
for the duration of both the restoration delay and the overrun timers as set on timer before
shutting down and resuming the standby state.
To shut down the engine without an overrun period, set the control mode switch momentarily to
OFF and then to AUTO.
2.16.5
Fault Shutdown
The control include circuits designed to automatically shut down the equipment in the event of a
fault condition and to replace the same with a healthy set available.
In the event of automatic fault shut down, the engine shuts down immediately. An appropriate
warning lamp is lit at the control panel, the engine controls are locked out and indication persists
until the controls are manually reset.
2.16.6
Reset Procedure
Check the relevant system and rectify the fault before attempting to restart the set. To cancel
the fault indication and release the engine control circuit press and release the RESET
pushbutton. The generator set will assume the standby condition.
If the control mode switch is at the AUTO setting and the mains supply has failed or if the
control mode switch is at the TEST setting; engine cranking will start immediately the RESET
pushbutton is operated.
2.16.7
Failure to Start
In the event of the engine failing to start within the pre-set cranking period, the control circuit is
automatically latched as in the case of a fault shutdown and the START FAIL indicator is lit.
When the fault is rectified, press the RESET button to return the set to the standby condition. If
the mains supply is still failed, the automatic engine start sequence should resume immediately.
2.16.8
Automatic Testing
In addition to manual test facility, it shall be possible to provide once a week automatic testing
facility (20 minutes) of the emergency sequence except for the transfer of load. In case of mains
failure during testing period the normal emergency sequence shall be carried out.
2.16.9
All the indications, meters and alarms shall be duplicated as provided for on the generator
control panel also on the main L.V. switchgear (change-over panel).
2.16.10
All cabling and connections to be carried out under this section contract.
2.16.11
Generator supplier shall ensure that all necessary and appropriate sensors and contacts are
provided for the proper operation in the LV switchgear.

July 2015
Page 13 of 19

2.17
Set Mountings
2.17.1
To achieve simplicity in foundation work, the set shall be mounted on a welded steel common
bedplate.
2.17.2
Suitable anti-vibration mountings shall be supplied for the diesel generator and all set-mounted
ancillary apparatus.
2.17.3
Flexible connections shall be provided to all exhaust, air, fuel and water piping to avoid fracture
due to vibration and to minimise conduction of noise.
2.18
Spare Parts & Tools

Recommended Spares / Consumables for 5 Years of Operation
(Calculated at one service for each of operation) of 250 hours or 6 months
Sr. No.
Description
Qty Per Genset
1.
Air filter element
10
2.
Oil filter element
20
3.
Fuel filter element
10
4.
V-Belt set
5
5.
Engine oil
3150 L
6.
Coolant for top up
200 L
Sr. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.27
List of Tools per Genset

Tool List
Combination spanner set
Socket set
Screw driver set
Plier set
Hammer
Strap wrench (for filter removal)
Size
3/8 to 1/14
3/8 to 1/14
With tester
BMS Integration
Generator set shall be integrated with BMS system as detailed in BMS specification Section
15935, Clause 4.27.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturers specification approved shop drawings
and the contract document.
3.2
3.2.1
Inspection and Testing at factory.

a)
Static load test

During this test the generator set shall run for at least four hours under the following
conditions:

30 minutes at 25% rated output.
30 minutes at 50% rated output.
Two hours at 100% rated output.

July 2015
Page 14 of 19

-
One hour at 110% rated output.
During the load test all engine and generator parameters shall be recorded. These
shall include, but not be limited to:
-
Generator power output
Generator phase currents
Generator voltages and variations
Generator power factor
Generator frequency
Engine oil pressure
Cooling water temperatures
Fuel consumption
Noise level
Engine speed and variations
Vibration levels
b)
The frequency and voltage regulation of the generator shall be verified . Voltage and
frequency variations shall be recorded on oscillograms. The requirement for special
dynamic load tests to simulate motor starting will be indicated in the requisition.
c)
Functional test
Functional tests shall be performed on the complete generator set including the
generator and engine control panels.
The functional tests to be performed shall be subject to approval by Consultant and
shall include, but not be limited to the following tests:

Engine start up system, including measurement of the starting time.

minimum of two start and stop tests shall be performed.
Automatic start up system.
For emergency generator sets verification of the time between initiation of a

start command and acceptance of the nominal load for a cold start.
All generator alarm and trip functions, including the verification of protection
relay operation.
Operation of the battery charger.
The status /alarm/trip/shutdown indication of the control panels.
Local manual start/stop/emergency stop functions.
Remote start/stop/emergency stop functions (input signals).
July 2015
Page 15 of 19

d)
The remote signalling contacts for Principals use
Operation of the AVR
Operation of synchronising equipment
Calibration of measuring and protective devices.
Insulation resistance tests

These tests shall be performed on the generator, exciter, space heaters, temperature
detectors, control panel and skid cabling.
e)
Hydrostatic testing
All pressure containing parts, including auxiliaries, shall be factory tested hydrostatically
in accordance with the relevant design codes.
f)
Final Inspection
The following inspection and checks shall be performed:

Verification against the approved drawings
Overall dimensions of the skid and the location of all equipment
Location of all piping and electrical interfaces
Enclosure degree of protection of all equipment concerned
Accessibility of components
Lifting arrangement, including spreader bar, if applicable.
Non interference of the lifting arrangement
Availability of eye bolts for lifting heavy components
Terminal and wiring marking
Available space for cable termination, the size and number of terminals, the
cable supporting devices.
Earthing and bonding
Marking of components according to the relevant drawings
All rating plates of main components.
Construction materials of auxiliaries, such as base plate, piping, fittings,

coolers, fuel day tank (for diesel engines) and control panels.
Hook up of local instruments.
Packagers welding procedures and welder qualifications
Welding by non destructive testing, where specified.
July 2015
Page 16 of 19

3.2.2
3.2.3
Weld inspection reports
Quality assurance documentation.
Work test
a)
The following site tests shall be carried out in order to determine whether the material
and apparatus comply with this specification at site.
b)
Not less than seven days notice in writing shall be given to the Consultant in order that
they may arrange to present if they so desire. The Contractors shall arrange to
conduct as many tests together as are possible in the opinion of the Consultant and
shall submit three copies of the records of such tests to the Consultant within seven
days of completion. Two copies shall be in English and one copy in Arabic language.
c)
The contractor shall supply to the site the necessary load bank to test the generator at
full load.
Type Tests
a)
3.2.4
Tests shall be carried out on generator set using resistive load bank. For the purpose
of these tests the rated power shall be as specified. All apparatus, instruments, fuel
and lubricating oil for these tests shall be provided by the Contractor. Tests at various
loads shall be made for the following periods and in the same sequence:1/2
hour at ... ... ...
25% rated load
hour at ... ... ...
50% rated load
hour at ... ... ...
75% rated load
hours at ... ... ...
100% rated load
hour at ... ... ...
110% rated load
b)
Governor tests in accordance with an appropriate national standard and to check the
drop.
c)
Cold and hot starting tests.
d)
Tests on trips and alarms incorporated in the engine.
e)
When type tests have previously been carried out, the Contractors may submit
accredited copies of the results instead of carrying out the tests again.
Routine Tests
The engine shall be run in the works to demonstrate satisfactory performance and the correct
operation of all control ancillary apparatus.
The engine shall be run at full load for a sufficient period of time to enable steady conditions to
be obtained, following which a run at 110% load shall be carried out.
3.2.5
Ancillary Plant Tests

Performance tests on individual units shall be carried out where practicable to prove correct
functioning of the plant and its compliance with the Specification Operating conditions shall be
simulated where possible.

July 2015
Page 17 of 19

3.2.6
3.2.7
Electrical
a)
Load tests shall be carried out on the diesel generator unit complete to prove the
efficiency at the loads stated in Schedule.
b)
A full load rejection test shall be carried out on the set to prove the capability of the
excitation system in limiting the transient voltage swing.
c)
Type test certificate shall be submitted for Consultant approval to prove compliance
with IEC recommendations or agreed National Standards.
d)
Routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC recommendation or agreed
National Standards.
e)
Consultant reserves the right to call for such additional tests on any equipment as may
be necessary to prove compliance with the specification.
Site Tests
Such tests as are required by the Consultant to prove compliance with Specification
independently of any tests which may already have been carried out at the manufacturers
works including circuit continuity, phasing, insulation resistance and earth resistance tests.
Testing shall include static load tests, functional tests and visual inspection as specified.
Load banks shall be used for full load testing of the generator at site without cost variation.
Load Banks
Load banks shall be permanent, outdoor, weatherproof, remote-controlled, forced-air-cooled,
resistive and reactive unit capable of providing a balanced three-phase, delta-connected load to
generator set at 100 percent rated-system capacity, at 80 percent power factor, lagging.
Unit shall be composed of separate resistive and reactive load banks controlled by a common
control panel.
Unit shall be capable of selective control of load in 25 percent steps with minimum step
changes of approximately 5 and 10 percent available.
The resistive load elements shall be corrosion-resistant chromium alloy with ceramic and steel
supports.
Elements shall be double insulated and designed for repetitive on-off cycling.
Elements shall be mounted in removable aluminized-steel heater cases.
The reactive load elements shall be epoxy-encapsulated reactor coils.
The Load-Bank heat dissipation shall be carried out by an Integral fan with totally enclosed
motor providing uniform cooling airflow through load elements.
Airflow and coil operating current shall be such that, at maximum load, with ambient
temperature at the upper end of the specified range, load-bank elements operate at not more
than 50 percent of maximum continuous temperature rating of the resistance wire.
Power input circuits to load banks shall be fused, and fuses shall be selected to coordinate with
generator circuit breaker.

July 2015
Page 18 of 19

Cooling airflow and over temperature sensors shall automatically shut down and lock out load
bank until manually reset.
Safety interlocks on access panels and doors shall disconnect load power, control, and heater
circuits. Fan motor shall be separately protected by overload and short-circuit devices.
- End of Section -

July 2015
Page 19 of 19


UPS SYSTEM
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

UPS SYSTEM
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 3
1.1
WORK INCLUDED.................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK ..................................................................................................... 3
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................................... 3
1.4
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ......................................................................................... 4
1.5
SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................ 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................... 5

2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................... 5
2.2
MAIN UPS SYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 5
2.3
BMS INTEGRATION .............................................................................................................. 17
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................................ 18

3.1
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ...................................................................................... 18

UPS System
July 2015
Page 1 of 20

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Work Included
1.1.1
Compliance with sections of Division 01, General and documents referred to therein.
1.1.2
1.2
Description Of Work
1.2.1
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of parallel redundant un-interruptible power

Supply systems of capacities as shown on the related drawings. The system shall operate in
conjunction with the building electrical system and the generator to provide high quality power
for critical equipment loads such as computer servers and related equipment, power outlets
feeding main controllers of BMS, security system, Fire alarm system etc. for a period of 30
minutes until the generator power is available. This will hereafter be referred to as the UPS,
and shall provide continuous, regulated AC power to the loads under normal and abnormal
conditions, including loss of the utility AC power. The UPS shall be completely solid-state
except for maintenance bypass switches which may be mechanical.
All UPS shall have interface cards to have the following and shall be complete with system
software:
1)
Required input and output dry contacts for reporting alarm and status.
2)
RS232 port for serial communication for advanced remote monitoring and control
through computer network.
3)
Communication port with appropriate protocol for connection to BMS system.
All UPS systems shall be based on latest IGBT (insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor )
technology with PWM (Pulse Width Modulation).
Rectifier configuration shall be such that THDI (Total Harmonic Distortion Current) at
upstream shall be minimum.
The following shall be furnished along with the equipment:
Factory testing.
Documentation.
The UPS shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1.3
Quality Assurance
The UPS shall be manufactured under quality assurance in accordance with ISO 9001 The
manufacturer shall have a quality assurance program with checks on incoming parts,
modular assemblies and final products.
The UPS shall be tested at full rated load without failure for a minimum of 24 hours.
A final test procedure for each UPS shall include a check of performance specifications
before and after the 24-hour full load test.
An on-site test procedure shall include a check of controls and indicators after installation of
the equipment.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 2 of 20

The UPS shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable
portions of the following standards:
Safety
EN50091-1, IEC-950/EN 60950
EMC
EN50091-2, IEC-61000-2-2,
IEC61000-3-4 & IEC-61000-3-5
Performance standards
EN50091-3, IEC-146-4 and 146-5
Marking
CE, TUV/GS
Design Production Logistics & Service
ISO 9001
Applicable local laws and regulations

1.4
Environmental Conditions
The UPS system shall be capable of withstanding any combination of the following
environment conditions in which it must operate, without mechanical or electrical damage or
degradation of operating characteristics:
1.5
a)
Ambient temperature:
0 to 40 degrees C.
b)
Relative humidity
Upto 95% (non condensing)
c)
Interference
The UPS equipment shall be provided with EM/RFI

suppression following EN-50091-2/IEC 62040
Submittals
Catalogue cuts and/or data sheets describing the proposed equipment shall be submitted. A
user's listing shall be furnished giving company names, locations and UPS models installed.
All deviations to this specification shall be listed and included with the submittal.
A minimum of three sets of submittals shall be sent to the Consultant. Submittal shall also
include the battery sizing calculation.
One certified copy of the factory test reports shall be furnished.
After Installation of Equipment:
Three operations and maintenance manuals shall be furnished and shall include as a
minimum the following:
General information.
Safety precautions.
Installation instructions.
Operating instructions.
Maintenance and troubleshooting guidelines.
Recommended spare parts list.
A signed service report describing start-up and on-site testing shall be furnished after startup of the equipment.
Spare parts required for initial start-up and commissioning shall be provided to the
Consultant.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 3 of 20

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
System Description
Uninterrupted power supply (UPS) system shall be provided to maintain continuous power
supply during main failures and to protect connected systems from damage.
The UPS system shall comply with the Operator Guidelines.
30 minutes duration parallel redundant UPS system (N+1) shall be considered to feed the
following loads:
Point of sale.
Gas control panel.
PCs at reception desk and operator room.
CCTV and access control system.
Computer room and servers.
PABX and telephone system power supply.
Building Management system power supply.
Power outlets in all administration areas and execurtive office suites.
2.2
Main UPS System
2.2.1
Unit Rating
The rated output of the UPS shall be based on standard duty Class II of IEC publication 146.
The UPS shall have 3-phase and neutral output. The neutral of the A.C. output shall be
earthed.
It shall be of VFI (Voltage and Frequency Independent) Technology to EN 50091-3.
The UPS unit shall be rated to continuously energize the load at a load power factor of 0.8
lagging while maintaining an output voltage at the terminals of the unit within the permissible
tolerances, and while satisfying the operation requirements specified in this document. The
unit shall also be capable of energizing, within its kW/kVA rating, similar loads having power
factors between 0.7 lagging and unity, while operating within the specified tolerances.
2.2.2
UPS Electrical Loads

The electrical loads energized by the UPS shall comprise principally of computer and/or
digital electronic equipment incorporating switched-mode power supply units.
2.2.3
Electrical Characteristics:
a)
Rectifier Input
Voltage
Admissible Voltage variation :

UPS System
4005V AC 3 phase, Neutral and earth.

+ 15%
July 2015
Page 4 of 20

Frequency
50 Hz + 10%
Output Voltage
400 VAC, 3 phase Neutral and earth.
Voltage Tolerance
+ 1%
Frequency
50 Hz + 1%
Power factor
0.7 to unity
Total harmonic distortion

downstream (THDU)
<3% at both linear and non linear loads.
Overload Capacity
125% for 10 minutes.
Crest Factor
3:1 or better
Efficiency
>90%
Inverter:
Limitation of harmonics at upstream of the UPS:

UPS system shall not draw a level of harmonic currents that could disturb the
upstream AC system. It shall comply with the relevant standards and shall be in
accordance with ADDC requirements. However it shall not be greater than 5%.
THDI (Upstream) < 5%.
It shall be achieved using suitable configuration of rectifier circuits, active filters and other
advanced technology system components from manufacturer standard product range.
The extremes of voltage and frequency variations are not to be considered to coincide.
Inverters shall not changeover to their bypass supplies during any one transient as defined
above.
In addition to the above variations, the input voltage may be subject to transient comprising
of voltage depressions up to 20% of the nominal voltage during motor starting, and to voltage
interruptions during system short circuits. Transient, high frequency voltages of up to 2 kV
may also be superimposed on the input voltage as a consequence of system switching
operations etc.
2.2.4
UPS Configuration and Tie-in

Cables connecting the batteries to AC UPS units shall be single core, flexible, 600/1000V
grade EPR insulated. These shall be sized and supplied by UPS supplier.
A suitable molded-case circuit breaker shall be provided with the UPS unit to facilitate onload isolation of the battery for the purpose of performing battery maintenance. Molded-case
circuit breakers shall be category B, in accordance with IEC 947-2. The switching device
shall be installed adjacent to the battery, inside the battery room.
A manual bypass switch, make before break, shall be provided to enable the load to be
connected to the bypass circuit.
The manual bypass switch shall at the same operation disconnect the inverter and static
changeover switch to ensure safe operating conditions for maintenance purpose.
A warning label shall be provided to warn the operator against operating the manual bypass
switch if the out of synchronization warning indicator is showing. Isolation of the inverter
shall only be possible if an alternative supply is connected to the load bus.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 5 of 20

The bypass transformer/stabilizer output rating shall match the inverter output rating.
The transformer shall be a double wound air cooled type with an earthed screen between the
primary and secondary windings.
2.2.5
Rectifier
Batteries shall be valve regulated sealed lead acid type with 12 years service life unless
specified otherwise.
The rectifier design shall include charge voltage compensation for the battery operating
temperature. This is to ensure that the recommended minimum and maximum charge
voltages are maintained over the operating temperature range to achieve optimum battery
service life.
The rectifier shall operate according to the constant voltage, current limiting principle and
shall incorporate a soft-start feature to gradually accept load on initial energizing. The
rectifier shall restart automatically upon restoration of the mains power supply following a
mains supply interruption.
The rectifier shall be rated to simultaneously:
Fulfill the inverter input requirements when the inverter is delivering its rated output at
0.8 power factor lagging.
Recharge the battery, within a period of 8 hours, from the partially discharged condition to a
capacity that will enable it to fulfill the inverter input power requirements, for the duration as
specified hereafter when the inverter is delivering rated output at 0.8 power factor lagging.
The above recharge performance shall be achieved irrespective of the type and method of
battery recharging employed.
The rectifier shall perform battery charging only at the single-rate corresponding to the
battery float-charge mode of operation. No rapid-charge facilities shall be provided.
Switched diodes or supplementary battery cells as a means of limiting D.C. voltage variations
are not acceptable. The D.C. supply shall not be utilized to energize loads other than the
inverter.
2.2.6
Battery Float-Charge Operation

The rectifier steady-state D.C. output voltage variations shall be controlled to within plus 1%
and minus 1% of the set value (corresponding to the battery float-charge voltage) during load
variations between zero and the rated output of the rectifier, and during steady-state input
voltage and frequency variations specified.
Short-time mains supply voltage depressions of not more than 20%, which may be the result
of motor starting activities, shall not result in a trip of the rectifier or the initiation of battery
discharge.
On-line adjustment of the set value of float-charge voltage shall be possible by means of a
potentiometer on the relevant control circuit card, or by an appropriate menu driven software
change.
The D.C. output current of the rectifier, when operating under constant current-limiting
conditions, shall be controlled to within plus 2% and minus 2% of the set value.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 6 of 20

2.2.7
Battery and D.C. Circuit

The battery voltage and capacity shall be such as to fulfill the inverter input power
requirements when the inverter is delivering its rated kVA output at 0.8 power factor lagging,
for the duration of thirty minutes.
The battery discharge performance shall be fulfilled:
Throughout the range of service conditions specified, including that corresponding to the
minimum cell temperature specified,
Repeatedly, each discharge performance being preceded by restoration of the battery to the
required capacity by means of a recharge operation not exceeding eight hours, following a
prolonged period (i.e., not less than one year) of battery float-charge operation.
The nominal ampere-hour capacity of the battery supplied with the UPS shall include all
necessary allowances required to compensate for aging effects that result in the progressive
loss of capacity. However, the nominal ampere-hour capacity of the new battery shall be not
less than 110% of the nominal ampere-hour capacity required to fulfill the performance
criteria stated above.
The UPS shall be capable of energizing loads between zero and its rated output, and of
performing load transfer switching, in accordance with the requirements of this specification,
without the battery being connected.
The current ripple limits specified by the battery Manufacturers, for the battery supplied with
the UPS, shall not be exceeded during at least normal standby operating conditions.
2.2.8
Inverter
The inverter shall be transistorized (IGBT) type PWM (Pulse Width Modulated) with
microprocessor based controls. The inverter shall be of the current limiting type (short circuit
proof) and have nominal output voltage and frequency as specified. The inverter output
voltage and frequency shall not exceed the operational tolerances, as measured at the
output terminals of the unit, during the following conditions of UPS loading:
Load variations between zero and the rated output of the UPS
Load power factors over the range 0.7 lagging to unity.
Load current waveform having a relative harmonic content varying between zero and 50%,
the latter waveform having a crest factor not exceeding 2.5 and individual harmonics not
exceeding the following values:
3rd harmonic
5th harmonic
7th harmonic
9th harmonic
11th harmonic
44% of fundamental
33% of fundamental
18% of fundamental
7% of fundamental
10% of fundamental
D.C. input voltage over the range corresponding to battery rapid charge and battery
discharge operation during the specified discharge times.
The inverter shall control the output voltage of the UPS such as to maintain synchronism with
the mains bypass voltage during variations in mains frequency up to the limits specified.
During variations in mains bypass frequency exceeding these limits, the inverter shall revert
to internal frequency control.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 7 of 20

Automatic synchronizing to maintain output frequency within +/-5 degrees of the external
reference signal, (provided the reference frequency stability is within +/- 1 Hz), shall be
supplied.
Upon failure of this reference, the inverter shall maintain the frequency within the tolerances
quoted until the external reference returns. The inverter shall then automatically resynchronize to the external reference. The rate of frequency change during synchronizing
shall not exceed 0.1 Hz per second when changeover is by the static switch.
Loss of synchronizing signal between the inverter and the bypass supply shall:
Not block automatic actuated transfers from normal to bypass supply.
Not block automatic actuated transfers from bypass to normal supply.
For solid-state transfer switches, block manually actuated transfers to either supply.
Output Voltage Static Regulation
The output voltage static regulation shall be maintained within plus 2% and minus 2% of
rated output voltage. When the load current in any two phases differs from the rated output
current by up to 50%.
Output Voltage Dynamic Response
The dynamic output voltage variations shall not exceed plus 10% and minus 10% of rated
output voltage in the event of instantaneous load changes of 100% rated output. The output
voltage shall be restored to within the steady state limits of plus 5% and minus 5% of rated
output voltage within 0.1 seconds.
Frequency Deviation
The frequency of the output voltage shall be maintained within plus 1% and minus 1% of
rated frequency when operating on internal frequency reference.
Output Voltage Waveform
The waveform of output voltage shall be sinusoidal. Inverters shall provide power from zero
to full rated output without exceeding the specific 3% total harmonic distortion of the output
voltage wave shape. The load typically includes nonlinear loads which can introduce
harmonics in the inverter output current. Inverters shall be capable of supplying the load
without sustaining damage to any of their components due to such harmonics.
Output Voltage Symmetry
The angular displacement of the phase voltages shall not exceed 120 1% when supplying
a balanced, linear load at rated output, 0.8 power factor lagging, and 120 1% when the
load current in any two phases differ by 50% from the rated output current.
Short Circuit Current
The inverter shall be capable of delivering sufficient short circuit current to cause main output
circuit fuselinks/circuit breakers, rated nearest to 10% of the UPS rated output current, to
interrupt the short circuit current within 3 millisecs when the UPS is not synchronized with the
mains bypass supply. The main output circuit fuselinks shall be of the slow-acting type g1, in
accordance with IEC 269.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 8 of 20

2.2.9
Static Bypass Switch

Circuit rating and load transfer criteria
2.2.9.1
Circuit Rating
The load transfer switching devices may comprise of either continuously rated static
elements in both inverter and bypass circuits, or continuously rated electromechanical
switching devices with short-time rated static elements. The bypass circuit shall have a
continuous current rating equivalent to the rated output of the UPS unit and be capable of
conducting a current of ten times the rated output for not less than two seconds.
In view of electronic components involved, reliability in terms of high Mean Time Between
Failure (MTBF) factors is essential. To achieve this objective, Manufacturer is required to
examine the rating factors applied to all components used in manufacturing, and guarantee
that the ratings for this application will be modified as necessary to ensure long term
reliability.
2.2.9.1
Load Transfer Criteria

Facilities shall be provided to manually and automatically initiate transfer of the load from the
inverter to the bypass circuit, and from the bypass circuit to the inverter. Facilities shall also
be provided to manually and automatically transfer the load from one UPS to the second one
in case of failure of the mains power and one of the UPS units and to retransfer the load
incase of power restoration. The combined detection and switching time required to transfer
the load from the inverter to the bypass circuit in the event of instantaneous loss of inverter
output voltage shall not exceed 0.5 millisecs.
When the inverter is running with its internal reference frequency and the static switch is
blocked, any failure of inverter shall initiate a transfer to bypass supply after a time delay
which can be adjusted from 50 to 500 milliseconds.
The criteria for load transfer shall be as follows:
a)
Transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains bypass.
Load transfer shall only be possible when:

The mains bypass voltage is within 15% of rated UPS output voltage.
The mains bypass frequency is within the tolerances specified.
The inverter output and mains bypass voltages are synchronized.
Automatic transfer of the load shall be initiated when:
The inverter output voltage drops below 95% of the nominal output voltage. Transfer should
be accomplished before the voltage reaches 85% of the nominal value, or
The inverter output voltage exceeds 105% of the nominal output voltage. Transfer should be
accomplished before the voltage reaches 115% of the nominal value.
The inverter output current limit is exceeded.
b)
Retransfer of the load from the mains bypass to the inverter.
Load retransfer shall only be possible when:

The inverter output voltage in within 10% of the nominal output voltage for more than
5 seconds, and the inverter output and mains bypass voltages are synchronized.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 9 of 20

Subject to fulfilling the above criteria, retransfer of the load from mains bypass to the inverter
shall be initiated automatically following automatic transfer of the load from the inverter to the
mains bypass. The automatic retransfer of the load to the inverter shall be inhibited following
four automatic transfers of the load to the bypass, if these take place within an interval of
5 minutes. An annunciation shall be provided under this condition.
Subject to fulfilling the above criteria, automatic retransfer of load back to the inverter(s) from
the bypass shall operate as follows:
A two-position AUTO-STANDBY retransfer selector switch shall be provided for each
changeover switch to control the automatic retransfer operation.
When the retransfer selector switch is in the AUTO position, retransfer back to the inverter
supply shall occur automatically whenever the conditions of Item (b) above are met.
When the retransfer selector switch is in the STANDBY position, retransfer back to the
inverter supply shall occur automatically only if the bypass supply has been lost and normal
voltage is present on the inverter supply.
All transfer switches and the actuating devices for these controls shall be so located or
guarded to prevent accidental operation.
2.2.10
Noise Limits
EEMUA Specification No. 140: Noise Procedure Specification, formerly OCMA NWG-1,
shall be adhered to with regard to definitions, notations, measuring equipment, procedures,
reporting and calculation methods.
The sound pressure level measured at one meter distance form the UPS unit, at any
position, shall not exceed 75 dB(A) at any load between zero and the rated output of the unit.
If tonal components are present, the noise limit shall be 5 dB(A) less, i.e. 70 dB(A).
In the event that more stringent limits apply, these will be indicated in the requisition.
The manufacturer shall submit the guaranteed sound power levels and/or sound pressure
levels of the equipment, together with any other relevant information, as requested in the
requisition.
If the above values are unobtainable without the use of absorptive materials, precautions
shall be taken to limit their effect on cooling, dust depositions and fire hazards.
2.2.11
Radio Frequency Interference Limits

The production of radio frequency interference voltages shall not exceed the values of
suppression grade N, as defined in VDE 0875 and EN 50091-2
The performance of the UPS unit shall not be affected, or in any way degraded, by the use of
portable radio transmitters/receivers operating in the frequency range 27-170 Mhz, at
460 Mhz, and at 800 Mhz when the severity of the electromagnetic radiation environment
corresponds to Class 2, in accordance with IEC 801-3 /IEC 62040-2.
2.2.12
Construction Requirements
a)
Unit Enclosure
The rectifier, inverter and static switch shall be installed in one or more freestanding, selfsupporting steel cabinets forming an enclosure. Each cabinet shall be suitable for operation
and maintenance with its rear panel against a wall and with similar units located immediately
on both sides.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 10 of 20

All cubicles and equipment shall be fully tropicalized. Enclosure protection shall be not less
than IP41 per IEC 529, without considering the floor as part of the enclosure.
Each cubicle shall be fitted with breaker which can be operated externally.
With the breakers in the off position the unit shall be fully isolated for maintenance
purposes. Any live terminations which cannot be isolated such as bypass supplies, which
must remain on to maintain the supply to the load, shall be fully shrouded and adequate
warning markings fitted. The terminals shall, as far as possible, be segregated from the
isolated circuits.
The distribution section shall be provided within a cubicle unit. The number of ways and the
rating shall be as detailed in the data sheets or single line diagram.
b)
Cooling
Internal cooling of the unit shall be by natural or forced air ventilation. The unit shall be
capable of continuously delivering its rated output with any one forced air ventilation fan out
of service. Under the latter conditions, the maximum continuous temperature of components
shall not be exceeded.
The unit shall not incorporate cooling air filters that require periodic cleaning and/or
replacement.
c)
Accessibility
Equipment and components located within the enclosure shall not be mounted directly on the
walls of the enclosure. The location and grouping of components and auxiliary equipment
shall permit easy identification and access for operational, maintenance and repair purposes.
Suitable partitioning between individual items shall be provided where necessary to allow
adjustment and inspection to be carried out safely.
All live terminals of door-mounted equipment having a maximum (peak) voltage of greater
than 24 volts shall be shrouded on otherwise protected by barriers to a degree of protection
of at least IP30. Barriers shall be of rigid transparent insulating material to enable the
screened components to be identified. Protection relays which can cause tripping of the unit
shall not be mounted on the door.
All bare busbars and all live terminals of equipment and components located within the
enclosure shall be similarly protected by barriers or shrouds to a degree of protection of at
least IP 20, unless adequately recessed within the enclosure to prevent inadvertent contact
or short circuit by personnel when performing control circuit adjustments or when
resetting/replacing protective devices etc.
d)
Battery Enclosure
Batteries shall be installed on freestanding support racks in a separate battery room. Battery
enclosures shall be naturally ventilated to disperse gaseous products. The battery shall be
positioned such that possible leakage of electrolyte or emission of gaseous products shall
not cause damage to other equipment, components, or adjacent cells.
Separate, freestanding support racks for batteries having plastic cell containers may be steel
or solid wood. All wood should be retreated to render it nonhygroscopic and acid resistant.
Steel racks shall have a plastic or epoxy coating to provide suitable protection against the
effects of electrolyte spillage.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 11 of 20

2.2.13
Converter Components
Printed Circuit Boards (PCB) shall be installed in standardized electronic equipment frames
and be fitted with handgrips for easy removal. The frames shall incorporate card guides to
facilitate the correct insertion of PCBs, and allow access to the wiring side of connectors.
PCBs shall include visual LED status indications and test connections on the front to
facilitate fault diagnosis.
Main circuit switches (mechanical) shall comply with IEC 408 and be of the independent
manually operated air-break type of continuous duty. They shall comply with utilization
category AC23 and DC23 for A.C. and D.C. switches respectively.
Contactors shall comply with IEC 158-1 and be rated for uninterrupted duty and intermittent
duty of at least Class 0.1. The utilization category for D.C. contractors shall be not less than
DC-4 and for A.C. contractors not less than AC-3.
Transformers and reactors shall be of the air-cooled type and comply with the relevant parts
of IEC 146.
2.2.14
Wiring and Terminations

Internal wiring shall be single core, 600/1000V grade PVC insulated, and have stranded
copper conductors. Conductor size for Power circuit shall be 2.5 mm2. Wiring between
terminals shall be continuous and without joints. Wires shall be held in position by means of
insulating tubes, channels, cleats or plastic strips, and be routed such as to avoid mechanical
damage. Wiring between fixed portions and hinged doors shall be mechanically protected
against abrasion or entrapment and not be carried over or bent around sharp edges.
Individual wires or scales terminating in fixed (nonplug-in) components which require to be
disconnected for the purpose of component testing or replacement, shall be identified by
means of color or by ferrules of insulating material marked in accordance with the
Manufacturers drawings.
Terminals shall be provided for all external connections. External connections shall not be
made directly to component terminals. Terminals shall be of the rail mounted type and have
screw connectors suitable for a minimum of 2.5 mm2 conductors. Only one conductor shall
be terminated in each terminal. Links shall be provided where more connections are
required at one point. Insulating shields shall be used to separate terminals belonging to
different circuits. For control wiring, preinsulated crimped terminals shall be used and for
power wiring crimped lugs with heat shrink Pre-shrouds shall be used.
Additional load circuit terminals shall be provided to facilitate connection of a temporary load
to test the UPS unit while the permanent load is energized via the external bypass circuit.
The UPS enclosure shall have facilities for the entry of cables from above or below, as
specified in the requisition. Cable entries, cable glands and terminals shall be suitable for
the type and size of cables shown in the single line diagram. Cable glands shall be of the
compression type and mounted on a removable gland plate.
The proximity of terminals and gland plates shall be such that ample space is available for
terminating the cores of external cables.
2.2.15
Earthing
An earth rail, with a suitable number of earthing bolts or screws, shall be provided in a
position close to the external cable glands to facilitate termination of cable earth braids or
armoring. Individual connections for all earth wires shall be provided.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 12 of 20

A threaded brass earth stud of not less than 6 mm diameter, with nuts and spring washers,
shall be provided within the enclosure to facilitate termination of a separate, single-core,
earth cable.
Electrical conductivity between the exposed, noncurrent carrying conductive parts of the UPS
unit components and the enclosure, and between the enclosure and the earth rail/earth stud,
shall be such as to maintain effective continuity of protective circuits. Earth bonding
conductors shall be utilized between enclosures and doors, and where required to achieve
effective protection. The neutral of the inverter output shall be earthed by a connection to the
earth rail/stud within the enclosure.
2.2.16
Battery Cells and Containers

The batteries shall be VRLA type with 12 years life.
Cell containers of plastic material are preferred, subject to the material being nonflame
propagating and mechanically shock resistant.
Protective covering to prevent inadvertent short circuiting.
VRLA battery cells are delivered and filled charged. These cells must receive a
commissioning charge within 3 months of leaving the factory. Air-freighting of cells shall be
considered as an alternative to delivery by sea-freight if the above commissioning
requirements cannot otherwise be met. Care shall be taken to store the VRLA batteries at
site in air conditioned rooms. During installation and thereafter battery room temperature
shall be maintained not exceeding 25C.
2.2.17
Marking
All external operating, measuring and indicating components shall be clearly identified with
permanent descriptive labels that facilitate easy recognition by the operator. All components
shall be identifiable by labels inscribed in accordance with the system of identification used
on the Manufacturers reference drawings and documents.
Rail mounted terminals of equipment and components shall be identifiable by numerical or
alphabetical markings in accordance with the Manufacturers drawings. Terminals of input
and output supply cables shall be clearly and uniquely marked to indicate the nominal
system voltage and the phase/polarity of the supply.
The identification of terminals shall be in accordance with IEC 445.
The following information shall be inscribed on a nondestructive, corrosion-resistant, indelible
name/rating plate attached to the unit enclosure:
Purchasers order number and equipment No.
Year of manufacture
Name of Manufacturer
Type and serial number of unit
Weight of cubicle
Dimensions of cubicle
Nominal input current and voltage
Nominal output current, voltage and frequency
All labels/nameplates shall be of corrosion resistant material (3 ply white black white
Trafolyte) with indelible inscriptions in the English language fixed by stainless steel screws or
rivets.
All switches, instruments (meters), transformers, fuse holders, push buttons and indicating
lamps shall have labels fixed adjacent to them. The label shall carry a functional description
and all essential data including, but not limited to, the following information as applicable:

UPS System
July 2015
Page 13 of 20

Fuse size
Ratings (voltage, current, frequency);
Accuracy (instruments)
Switch duties
2.2.18
Finish
The treatment and protection of metalwork may be in accordance with manufacturers
standard but shall include cleaning, degreasing, rust resisting primers and paint finishes that
provide effective protection against corrosion under the functional and climatic conditions
specified. Color shade shall be green RAL 6021.
2.2.19
Mimic
Each unit shall have front of panel Mimic/Graphic Diagram showing all major components.
2.2.20
Anti-Condensation Heaters
Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided within the equipment enclosures to limit the
effect of changes in temperature and humidity. Supply shall be 240V single phase 50 Hz.
An On/Off switch and thermostat shall be provided.
When the heating system is live, this shall be indicated by means of a prominently situated
red light.
2.2.21
Measurement, Protection and Control Equipment

a)
General
The UPS unit shall incorporate all the necessary equipment to enable operation, protection
and control of the UPS in accordance with this specification, and to safeguard the unit and its
components from the consequences of internal and external short circuits, over voltages and
any main or control circuit malfunctions, howsoever caused.
Operating, status and diagnostic indications of light-emitting diodes (LEDs) or iquid crystal
displays (LCDs) shall be provided.
Each LED/alarm circuit shall have built-in test facilities. Failure of an LED/LCD shall not
cause UPS maloperation or affect the correct functioning of the remote common alarm
signal. Indication by means of filament lamps is not acceptable.
Microprocessor based protection, control and metering package with serial communication
capability shall be provided for remote control and monitoring of the UPS from the control
desk within the office buidling.
b)
Status Indications
At least the following indications, in the form of LED/LCDs and/or measuring instruments,
shall be provided on the front outside panel of the unit to enable verification of the
operational status of the UPS. The indications shall be superimposed on a mimic diagram of
the UPS unit to identify the relevant component or circuit.
A.C. input supply available
Alternative/bypass supply available
Rectifier on
Inverter on
Load on inverter
Load on bypass
Inverter/bypass synchronized
UPS System
July 2015
Page 14 of 20

Battery on boost charge (not required for VRLA type)
c)
Measurement
Measuring instruments may have digital or analogue display.

The following measuring instruments shall be provided on the front outside panel of the unit:
D.C. ammeter measuring battery charge and discharge current.
D.C. voltmeter for measuring Inverter DC Input voltage.
A.C. voltmeter measuring UPS output voltage.
A.C. ammeter measuring UPS output current.
Frequency meter measuring UPS output frequency.
Power factor meter for measuring UPS output Power factor.
Voltmeter/ammeter/frequency meter for measuring bypass circuit voltage/current/frequency.
The accuracy of all measuring instruments shall be not less than that orresponding to
Class 1.5 of IEC publication 51 and shall be of long scale (240 movement).
d)
Protection and Alarms
The status of the alarm and protection functions shall be visually verifiable by appropriate
indicators with first failure feature. Alarms associated with trip functions shall be hand reset.
The following alarm and protection functions shall be provided as a minimum:
(1=alarm; 2=alarm and trip rectifier; 3=alarm and trip inverter)
A.C. input phase undervoltage
Rectifier failure
D.C. overvoltage
D.C. undervoltage
Charge failure/battery discharging
Battery disconnected
Inverter failure
Inverter overcurrent
Inverter output voltage deviation
Inverter/bypass not synchronized
Cubicle fan failure
Cubicle/inverter stack overtemperature
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2
2
3
3
1
1
3
3
3
1
1
3
The above mentioned alarm contacts shall be wired to a terminal block such as to provide
one normally open and one normally closed, potential-free, contacts for remote cabling to a
common alarm. The operation of the common alarm contacts shall have an adjustable time
delay with a range of not less than 4 seconds.
An inverter over temperature alarm shall be provided to give a two-stage alarm indication.
The temperature sensors shall be located at the position of highest temperature within the
equipment to ensure full protection. The operating level of the alarms shall be determined by
the Manufacturer and set to ensure that adequate time is available for corrective measures
on operation of the first alarm level.
Operation of the second alarm shall cause the load to be transferred to the bypass circuit
and shall isolate the inverter. An alarm indicator shall be provided for both stages.
An alarm indicator shall be provided to indicate that the inverters output and the bypass
circuit are out of synchronism.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 15 of 20

In addition, a white source synchronized pilot light shall be provided adjacent to the
operating handle of the manual bypass switch. The light shall be energized when normal
and bypass sources are in synchronism.
Operation of any of the above alarms relays shall initiate a common fault alarm relay with two
sets of changeover contacts wired out to terminals for external connection.
When fault diagnostic modules are available, they shall be made visible through a
transparent panel let into the front of the equipment door.
e)
Controls
The following adjustment and control facilities shall be provided:

Rectifier input MCCB.
Rectifier on/off control switch.
D.C. output voltage adjustment.
D.C. current limit adjustment.
Inverter on/off control switch.
A.C. output voltage adjustment.
Synchronizing range adjustment.
Load transfer initiating control switch.
Battery isolation switch.
2.2.22
Parallel Redundant Configuration

Where two or upto eight systems are to operate in parallel the system will operate in
Redundant Parallel Architecture or RPA. The following principles are to be met in totality in
order to achieve the highest levels of reliability.
Two or more UPS systems to be linked in Peer to Peer configuration concurrently supplying
the load.
Decentralized by-pass concept.
Decentralized control electronics.
Redundant (n+1) operation and control for critical functions such as Synchronization and
Bypass operation.
Redundant communication link between individual units.
Redundant MICROPROCESSORS for no Common point of Failure.
Intelligent Energy Management (IEM) for power saving. Refer Section 12.4.
In the event that the system is to operate as separate standalone units then disconnection of
the RPA system should be possible without any changes in the existing architecture of the
system.
2.3
BMS Integration
UPS system shall be integrated with BMS system as detailed in BMS specification Section
15935, Clause 4.35.

UPS System
July 2015
Page 16 of 20

PART 3 - EXECUTION
The equipment shall be installed in accordance with local codes and the manufacturers
recommendations.
3.1

a)
General
Prior to dispatch, the manufacturer shall verify by test that the operation of the assembled
UPS unit complies with the requirements specified and shall submit a report incorporating
measurements and results of all tests performed.
All equipment shall be subject to shop tests in accordance with applicable engineering
standards and codes. Compliance with the requirements of this specification and associated
documents shall also be demonstrated.
The equipment shall not be dispatched by the Manufacturer/VENDOR until material and
equipment test certificates have been approved at the time of the shop test acceptance.
Unless otherwise specified, testing of the assembled UPS unit at the manufacturers works
will not include the battery that forms part of the purchase order. UPS tests shall be confined
to verifying the performance of the rectifier, inverter, static switch assembly and related
auxiliaries (hereafter referred to as the converter).
Tests shall, however, be performed using a D.C. supply of equivalent capacity to the battery
that will be supplied with the converter. Tests to verify the capacity of the purchased battery
shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR as part of the commissioning procedure after site
erection.
Prior to the commencement of tests, the Manufacturer shall make all relevant adjustments to
the protection and control circuit components of the converter, as necessary to fulfill the
requirements of this specification. The rectifier output voltage and current limits shall be set
to the appropriate values for the type and number of battery cells to be supplied with the
converter, and to the relevant cell temperatures specified.
b)
Performance Tests
Insulation Tests
The voltages specified in the following table shall be applied for one minute to the circuits
indicated
Table of
Withstand
Voltages
To earth
To control
electronics
To power
electronics
To auxiliary
Circuits
Control
Electronics
< 60 V
700V D.C.
--
Power Electronics
Un1
Auxiliary Circuits Un2
2 x Un1 + 1000V
2 x Un1 + 1000V
2 x Un2 + 1000V
2 x Un2 + 1000V
2 x Un1 +1000V
--
2 x Un1 + 1000V
2 x Un2 +1000V
2 x Un1 + 1000V
--
D.C. test voltages may be applied instead of A.C. The magnitude of D.C. test voltages to be
applied shall be 2 times the above mentioned A.C. (r.m.s.) values.
Load-Duration Test

UPS System
July 2015
Page 17 of 20

All converters to be supplied as part of the purchase order shall be subjected to a loadduration test performed at rate voltage for a period of not less than 48 hours prior to the
execution of functional tests.
At least one converter shall be loaded to its rated output, at 0.8 power factor lagging,
throughout the 48-hour test period. If an appropriate load is not available to conduct the test,
then it shall be carried out using a resistive load. The load resistance shall then be such that
the inverter D.C. input current is the rated value.
All other converter to be supplied as part of the purchase order may be energized under
partial load or zero load current conditions throughout the test period.
Manufacturers test reports shall state the dates and times on which the load duration test
was performed and shall record details of load currents and any circuit or component
malfunction identified during the test period.
c)
Functional Tests
Functional tests shall be performed on all converters. If, during the execution of functional
tests, an electronic component of the converter is required to be replaced, e.g. due to
converter malfunction or failure of the unit to fulfill the performance requirements of the
specification, then the converter load-duration test shall be repeated at rated current
following which the functional tests shall be carried out.
The manufacturers standard test protocol will be acceptable provided it is no less stringent
than that specified below.
Tests and measurements marked (**) may be omitted subject to the manufacturer submitting
tender, details of the availability of test records (including dates and location of tests) which
verify the specified performance values.
d)
Rectifier Load Test at Constant Output Voltage
Measurements shall be carried out in the rectifier float-charge operating mode. In each
mode, measurements shall be carried out at nominal A.C. supply voltage and at zero, 50%
and 100% of rectifier full load direct current. Measurements at 100% full load current shall
be repeated at 90% and 110% of nominal A.C. supply voltage.
Measurements shall comprise of:
Input phase voltage and frequency
Input phase current
Input power
D.C. output voltage
D.C. output current
Rectifier load test at constant output current limit.
Measurements shall be carried out in the rectifier float-charge operating mode.
Measurements shall be carried out when the rectifier is operating under D.C. output currentlimiting conditions with the D.C. output voltage between zero and the set value
corresponding to constant voltage operation.
D..C. output voltage
D.C. output current

UPS System
July 2015
Page 18 of 20

e)
Inverter static load tests
Measurements shall be carried out at zero, 50% and 100% of inverter rated output current
with the load being a balanced 3 phase load and shall be repeated for inverter D.C. input
voltages corresponding to battery float-charge operation and the rated maximum and
minimum inverter input voltage.
Input voltage
Input current
Output voltage, frequency and waveform distortion
Output phase current(s)
Output power
Balanced Load Test:
The static load test described in (a) for 1-phase inverters shall be carried out on 3-phase
inverter, the load being a balanced 3-phase load.
f)
Unbalanced Load Test:
Measurement shall be carried out under unbalanced load conditions such that the current in
one phase of the inverter differs from that in the other two phases by 50% of the rated output
current.
Measurements shall be carried out for inverter D.C. input voltages corresponding to battery
float-charge operation and the rated maximum and minimum inverter input voltage.
Input voltage
Input current
Output voltages
Angular displacement of output phase voltages
Output currents
g)
Inverter dynamic load tests (**)
Measurements of inverter output voltage variations shall be recorded in response to:

Instantaneous load changes of 100% rated output.
Measurements shall be recorded when the load is switched to/from the inverter via the static
bypass switch and via the load circuit switch.
Application of a short circuit to the inverter output via a slow-acting (type g1) fuselink having
a current rating nearest to 10% of the UPS unit rated output, the bypass circuit being
isolated.
h)
Static Bypass Switch Tests
Measurements shall be carried out to verify the correct functioning of the bypass circuit
voltage and frequency monitors, and the inverter/bypass synchronous operating controls.
Measurements of the load voltage waveform(s) shall be carried out during the following load
transfer tests which shall be performed with the UPS unit delivering any load between zero
and its rated output, and with the inverter operating in synchronism with the bypass circuit
supply:

UPS System
July 2015
Page 19 of 20

Load transfer bypass initiated by manual operation of load transfer switch.
Load transfer to bypass initiated by simulating inverter malfunction.
Load transfer to bypass initiated by short circuiting of fuse protected load circuit (**).
Load retransfer to inverter initiated automatically and manually.
Lock-out of automatic load retransfer on sustained and recurring fault.
Load transfer and retransfer from one inverter to the second inverter.
i)
Auxiliary Equipment and Control Circuit Tests
The correct functioning of all measuring instruments, alarms and indications, protection and
controls specified, shall be verified.
j)
Battery Discharge Test
A battery discharge test shall be performed at a current corresponding to the inverter input
current when the inverter is delivering its rated output kVA at 0.8 power factor lagging.
The following measurements shall be recorded:
Battery voltage after the specified discharge time.
Battery discharge duration at the instant of inverter shutdown initiated by the D.C. circuit lowvoltage monitor.
- End of Section -

UPS System
July 2015
Page 20 of 20


AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT PLANT
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT PLANT
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................3
1.1
REFERENCE .................................................................................................................................3
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK .............................................................................................................3
1.3
QUALITY CONTROL/ASSURANCE ..............................................................................................3
1.4
SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................................3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................................5
2.1
MATERIALS ...................................................................................................................................5
PART 3 - EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................................7

3.1
INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................7
3.2
TESTS AT WORK ..........................................................................................................................8

July 2015
Page 1 of 8

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCE
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.2.1
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of capacitor banks with microprocessor based
reactive power controller as specified here after and with ratings as indicated in the relevant
electrical drawings.
1.2.2
Capacitor Banks shall be sized for improving the power factor to 0.95 minimum.
1.2.3
3 phase series reactor shall be connected in series with each capacitor stage for harmonic current
suppression and to prevent resonance.
If the THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) limits are exceeded even with the use of the detuned
harmonic suppression capacitor bans, suitably rated active filters shall be provided with the
detuned capacitor banks to limit the total harmonic distortion to below the specified limits of the
IEEE519 and to Local Electricity Authority requirements.
1.3
QUALITY CONTROL/ASSURANCE
following:
a)
DEWA regulations for electrical installation works
b)
c)
Etisalat standards and requirements
Codes And Standards

Capacitors
IEEE 519, IEC 831-1,2
Series Reactors
IEC 76
Contactors
IEC 947-4-1
Fuses
IEC 269
Circuit Breakers
IEC 947 1,2
Degree of Protection
IEC 144
All such equipment shall be manufactured only by manufacturer having ISO 9001 certificates.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
1.4.1

During the time of the contract and before substantial completion of the electrical installation,
submit to Consultant three(3) copies of descriptive literature, technical data, maintenance
recommendations(from the equipment manufacturer), catalogues etc.

July 2015
Page 2 of 8

1.4.2
Test Reports
Provide test reports prepared in accordance with Local Electricity Authority requirements to the
CONSULTANT. Provide other tests reports necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety,
completed status, and suitable operation of each system.
1.4.3
1.4.4
Calculations
Forward the following calculations and data:
Calculations and charts proving that discrimination in the breaker characteristics is achieved.
Detailed short circuit level calculation to select the short circuit rating of the various switchboards.
Bus bar sizing calculation for each switchboard. Calculation for Temperature rise inside
switchboards
1.4.5
Shop drawings
The contractor shall furnish the following drawings and documents along this submittal for
approval:
a)
Dimensioned drawing showing outline of the switch boards arrangement and position of
important external features. These drawings shall show masses, crane lift necessary for
untanking and size of lifting lugs or eyes.
b)
Single line diagram showing all auxiliary devices.
c)
d)
Drawings of nameplate and all termination arrangements.
e)
Drawing giving typical mechanical and electrical details of the voltage control apparatus.
f)
Details of cable terminations and fittings.
g)
Foundation plan, including foundation loading.
h)
Schematic and connection diagrams covering all equipment pertaining to the switch board.
i)
Type and special test certificates as applicable
j)
Approved test certificate / test report
k)
l)
Technical Manual giving installation, operation and maintenance instructions
m)
Schedule of recommended spare parts.

July 2015
Page 3 of 8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.1.1

a)
The power factor correction capacitor shall be suitable detuned with a series reactor for each
step to prevent any resonance or resulting amplification of harmonics present in the network
and shall comply with the relevant BS and IEC standard and shall be double insulated dry
type with metallized polypropylene dielectric to IP 54. The capacitor shall be able to
withstand up to 130% of the rated current caused by harmonics and shall incorporate a
discharge resistance. Internal fuse combined with the secondary solid foil electrode or an
overpressure disconnector switch shall be fitted on each capacitor as an additional safety
measure.
b)
Capacitance variation due to ambient temperature shall be taken into consideration and the
capacitors shall be derated to give the required capacitance at 50 deg. C.
c)
When capacitors are not directly connected to the motors, these shall be protected by fuses
and wired through cables with capacity of 1.8 times the capacitor rating.
d)
A six terminal capacitor, switched at the same time as the motor shall be used for star delta
starting of the motor.
e)
Where multi steps capacitor bank is used the power factor shall be maintained at a set value
indicated by the reactive power regulator which shall control the opening and closing of the
capacitor switching contactors. The number of capacitors to be connected through the
regulator in the event of power failure or when the power is restored shall be in accordance
with the system reactive power.
f)
The high inrush current due to capacitor switching shall be taken into consideration by using
fast acting contactor designed for capacitor switching and which shall be able to handle 100
times the rated current. In addition to that, the cable connecting the contactor to the bus-bar
shall be installed in a way that self inductance is produced e.g. by coiling the cable into
necessary number of loops along the run.
g)
The capacitor banks shall be separated from the contactors and controls by housing the
same in a separate compartment. A ventilation fan shall be provided in order to ensure that
the temperature rise will not exceed 35 degree C.
h)
The automatic power factor improvement plant shall be provided with reactive power
controller commanded by microprocessor with working programs 1:1:1:.:1 and shall be
supplied with LED indicators showing the capacitors that are connected and also shall
ensure uniform ageing of magnetic contactors and capacitors by using a circular connection
sequence that takes into account the time that each capacitor has been switched on.
i)
The automatic power factor improvement plant shall be equipped with voltmeter, ammeter
with selector switches, digital cos (Power Factor) display module and shall have the
feature of automatic disconnection of all the capacitors in the case of a failure in the electric
power supply. The reactive power controller shall be able to measure the reactive power
needs of an installation and to give the necessary command for connecting and
disconnecting the capacitors in order to maintain the desired power factor.
j)
The panel shall be equipped with a relay and a blinking lamp with trouble acknowledged and
reset button incase the automatic power improvement plant does not achieve the desired
power factor due to failure of the capacitor banks.

July 2015
Page 4 of 8

k)
The 3 phase series reactors to be connected in series with each capacitor stage for
harmonic current suppression and to prevent resonance should be of iron cored type with
copper windings. The current rating of the reactors should be increased suitably to take into
account the effect of harmonics in the network which could be generated by variable speed
drives, elevators, UPS systems, fax machines, computers, fluorescent discharge lamps etc.
The offered reactors should undergo tests wherein the reactors should be subjected to
harmonic currents generated by harmonic generating test equipment. The magnitude of
these harmonic currents should correspond to the harmonic current magnitude in the
network.
The capacitors and the reactors combination should be tuned below the lowest harmonic
present in the network. With the capacitors and suitable series reactors connected it should
be proved through submission of relevant calculations that the Total Harmonic Voltage
Distortion is within the limits as specified in IEEE Std 519-1992, standards on IEEE
recommended practices and requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems.
l)
2.1.2
Three phase HRC fuses shall be provided for each capacitor step and mounted on fuse
bases. They shall be of modern industrial design, current limiting type and with a breaking
capacity of over 100 KA. They should have a current rating of between 1.7 to 2 times the
rated 3-phase capacitor unit current. They shall be tested as per IEC 269 with a test voltage
1.1x Un. The utilization category shall be gG. They shall be plug in type with suitable
handle to ensure safe operation to personnel. The fuses shall not be exposed under normal
operating conditions.
Harmonic Active Filter

a.
The contractor shall supply, install test and commission Harmonic Active Filter, if the total
harmonic distortion limits are exceeded even with the use of the detuned capacitor banks.
b.
The active filter shall work on the principle of measurement of harmonic currents and
generate actively a harmonic spectrum in opposite phase to the measured distorting
harmonic current thereby canceling the original harmonics.
c.
The rating of the Active Filters should be so selected that the Total Harmonic Voltage
Distortion at the point of common coupling is brought down to below the Total Harmonic
Voltage Distortion limits specified in IEEE 519.
d.
The active filter shall be of parallel configuration and shall monitor all three phases of the low
voltage line current in real time by means of a Digital Signal Processor (DSP).
e.
The output of the DSP unit in combination with a micro-controller based system shall
generate a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal to control power modules based on IGBT
(Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor) technology which act as a current source.
f.
The PWM signal shall be of fixed switching frequency.
g.
The system shall be operated under closed loop control and shall have a maximum
response time of not more than 40 milliseconds. The control system shall be such that the
active filter cannot be overloaded.
h.
Simultaneous filtering shall be provided for 20 individual harmonics that shall be individually
programmable per harmonic up to the 50th harmonic.
i.
The filtering efficiency shall be typically of better than 97%.
j.
The operating power factor of the active filter shall be programmable over the range 0.7
inductive to 0.7 capacitive. Both fixed and dynamic reactive power compensation shall be
available for selection by the programmer.

July 2015
Page 5 of 8

k.
The active filter shall be protected against over current, short-circuit, thermal overload and
IGBT bridge abnormal operation.
l.
The Active Filters shall be suitable for an ambient temperature of 50 deg C all necessary
deration shall be taken into consideration.
m.
The design of the active filters shall be such that the current rating of the filter system can be
increased by the addition of extra power modules.
n.
The filter shall be provided with microprocessor controller to allow direct control,
programming and monitoring without the use of a P.C. The controller shall allow the
programming of the basic filter operation such as harmonics to be filtered, degree of filtration
and shall indicate the percentage of filter capability used, the wave forms spectrum etc.
o.
The filter shall be free standing cubicle of the same construction as the other panel boards
and shall be factory assembled with all auxiliary apparatus and wiring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Installation, testing and commissioning shall be strictly in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations, Local Electricity Authority requirements and shall be as per the relevant item of
specification.
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.1.1
After installation and levelling, render the entire switchboard rodent proof by any means of steel
plates,
3.1.2
Provide full length rubber mat in front of switchboard
3.1.3
Installation of switchboard shall be fully in accordance with THE CONSULTANT requirements.

Switchgear and distribution boards shall be surface mounted/free standing type and shall be
mounted on the building structure by means of suitable mild steel straps or angle iron frames.
Where distribution boards or switchgear are required to be directly attached to brickwork etc., the
fixing shall be by means of grouted in bolts, or bolts of the expansion type.
Any live metal in the distribution board shall be screened with insulation material, so that circuit
breakers can be replaced without any danger to the operator.
3.1.4
The circuit breakers shall be situated to allow wiring to be carried out with sufficient slack to enable
them to be removed for inspection without disconnecting any circuit wiring.
3.1.5
All main, submain and final distribution boards shall have a spare capacity and shall also be
provided with enough spare breaker as shown on the drawings.
3.1.6
All panel board and distribution boards shall consist of adequately rated circuit breakers. Circuit
breakers shall be temperature compensated at the manufacturer's works to give the design current
rating at 50 deg. C. Non-compensated breakers will not be approved and a formal certificate will
be required from the manufacturer confirming that the breakers have b0een suitably temperature
compensated.
The contractor shall supply and install all panel board with the related voltmeters, ammeters and
energy meters of a type that meets with Local Electricity Authority approval.

July 2015
Page 6 of 8

Where single core cables enter or leave any item of metal clad switchgear, distribution gear, etc.,
the cable cores shall all pass through the same aperture in the enclosure or case of the unit
concerned, to avoid the setting up of eddy currents. Where separate holes are provided by the
manufacturer for the cables, the holes shall either be cut out to form a continuous slot, or
alternatively the holes shall all be joined together with saw cuts through the solid metal separating
the holes. In all cases end plates shall be of non-ferrous metal.
A special termination arrangement shall be provided to Engineer and Local Electricity Authority
approval at the submain and main panel boards wherever the cable size exceeds the breaker
terminal capacity.
3.2
TESTS AT WORK
3.2.1
Routine tests to standards shall be carried out. Evidence that type test have been carried out
provided they are relatively to the configuration of the equipment offered, may be acceptable to the
Consultant and shall be made available.
3.2.2
A full visual check and electrical functional test shall be carried out on all apparatus and every
circuit. All wiring shall be inspected. It shall be verified that the FBA is fully in accord with the
requisition. Circuit breakers shall be closed and tripped at their rated minimum and maximum trip
and close supply voltage. Primary and secondary injection tests shall be done on protection relays
and CT circuits and indicating and metering instruments. All labels shall be checked.
3.2.3
The test procedure shall be as follows:

Visual inspection to verify degree of protection creepage and clearance distances.
All conductors and cables are checked for proper routing and all devices for proper mounting.
Check effectiveness of all mechanical devices, e.g. handles, locks, interlocks, operating devices,
etc.
Check panel conformity to drawing and Engineers requirements.
Megger test all main circuit through to final terminals.
meghoms. Record all measurements.
Insulation resistance shall exceed 10
Flash test all main circuit at 2.5 KV for one minute. Record leakage current.
Repeat megger test to verify insulation resistance has not been affected by the dielectric test.
Function test of all circuit breakers switches, contacts, etc. and every circuit to verify correct
operation.
Primary and secondary injection tests of all relays, CTs and indicating and metering instruments.
3.2.4
Prior to energizing the switchboards, perform the following checks on site:

Operate the equipment through all design functions, including remote operation, actuation of alarm
and indicating devices, mechanical and electrical tripping and closing and operation of the
protective devices.
Insulation resistance measurements on the buses, phase to phase and phase to ground, with all
breakers in the fully connected position and contacts open.
Control circuit insulation resistance to ground.
Inspect all relays and protective devices, and verify settings in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions or the information in the Coordination study.

July 2015
Page 7 of 8

Inspect current transformers and relays for correct polarity of connections and the installation of
jumpers on unused current transformer circuits.
Simulate the operations for AVR relay and check the logic of interlocks.
Manually close and trip each breaker checking and adjusting the main contact alignment and wiring
action in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Check the phasing on each side tie breaker, before closing.
Test protective relay operation for incomer air circuit breakers.
3.2.5
Routine Tests
Following routine tests are to be carried out by the switchgear assembler,
Inspection of assembly including inspection of wiring and electrical operation
Dielectric test:
Checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the protective circuits.
Verification of insulation resistance.

July 2015
Page 8 of 8


LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD
INDEX
PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
REFERENCE .......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................................ 3
1.4
CODES AND STANDARDS ........................................................................................................................ 4
1.5
SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................................... 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS........................................................................................................................................ 8
2.1
MAIN LOW VOLTAGE SWITCH BOARD (MDB) .......................................................................................... 8
2.2
CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................................................................... 9
2.3
SUBMAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD (SMDB-FREE STANDING) .................................................................... 14
2.4
SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (SMDB-WALL MOUNTED). ................................................................ 15
2.5
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ........................................................................................................................ 16
2.6
DISCONNECT SWITCH .......................................................................................................................... 17
2.7
MOTOR STARTERS ..............................................................................................................................18
2.8
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC) ..................................................................................................... 20
2.9
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS ....................................................................................................................... 21
2.10
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB) ...................................................................................... 22
2.11
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............................................................................................................ 24
2.12
METERING ........................................................................................................................................... 25
2.13
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS .................................................................................................................. 25
2.14
CONTACTORS ...................................................................................................................................... 26
2.15
EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (ELCBS) ..................................................................................... 26
2.16
RCD+MCB/RCBO ............................................................................................................................. 26
2.17
TIME SWITCH CONTROL ....................................................................................................................... 27
2.18
OVERLOAD RELAYS .............................................................................................................................27
2.19
CONTROL RELAYS ............................................................................................................................... 27
2.20
INDICATION LAMP................................................................................................................................. 27
2.21
SELECTOR SWITCH ..............................................................................................................................28
2.22
ACCESSORIES ..................................................................................................................................... 28
2.23
ENERGY MONITORING UNIT ................................................................................................................. 28
2.24
SWITCHBOARD OPERATOR'S MAT......................................................................................................... 28
2.25
AUTO CHANGEOVER PANEL .................................................................................................................. 28
PART 3 - EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................................... 29

3.1
INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................................... 29
3.2
TESTS AT WORK .................................................................................................................................. 30

July 2015
Page 1 of 30

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
Reference
1.2
Description Of Work
Supply and installation of main
low voltage switch boards(MDB), sub main distribution
boards(SMDB),final distribution boards (DB), motor starters and motor control center (MCC) and
related accessories.
This specification section covers the design and fabrication of low voltage switch gear including all
items of equipment and materials necessary to complete the assembly and the information,
documents and data required to be supplied by the supplier.
Any separate panels shall be as detailed hereafter.
requirements of this specification section.
1.3
Separate panels shall comply.with the
Quality Assurance
following:
Product selection for restricted space : Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for the equipment,
including clearance between the equipment and adjacent surfaces and items. Switchgears having
equal performance characteristics and complying with indicated maximum dimensions may be
considered.
1.3.1
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer with minimum five years of successful
installation experience on projects utilizing main distribution boards units similar to those required
for this project. Personnel engaged in the installation shall be duly certified by the manufacturer for
the same.
1.3.2
Manufacturer Qualification: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of main distribution

boards, of types, sizes, and capacities required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than five years, and a fully equipped service center within 160Km of
Project site, capable of providing training, spares, and emergency maintenance and service and
accepting callout within 24 hours, 7 days a week.
1.3.3
Codes and Standards: Comply with the latest issue of:

1.
IEC 60439-1 : Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies: Type-Tested and
Partially Type-Tested Assemblies.
2.
IEC 60947-2: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Circuit Breakers.
3.
Relevant IEC Standards for other components, where not otherwise specified.
4.
IEC 6083 1-1 & 2 for power factor correction capacitors.
5.
IEC 61641 for internal arc faults.
6.
IEC 60204: Safety of machinery, Electrical Equipment of machines

July 2015
Page 2 of 30

7.
BS EN 60529 Specification for classification of degrees of protection provided by

Enclosures.
8.
Comply with IEC 61921 for PF correction capacitors.
9.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.3.4
Test certification for this range of switchboard from internationally recognized testing agency such
as ASTA, KEMA etc.
1.3.5
Products shall be sourced either directly from manufacturer or from manufacturer authorized
agent/dealer in DUBAI.
1.3.6
Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Energizing. (Special Warranty for Capacitor Cells: a written
warranty, signed by manufacturer and principal Installer, agreeing to replace capacitor cells that fail
in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period).
1.3.7
Manufacturer Qualifications: A fully equipped service center within 160Km of Project site, capable
of providing training, spares, and emergency maintenance and service and accepting callout within
24 hours, 7 days a week.
1.3.8
Comply with:
1.
IEC 60439-1 "Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies".
2.
ICE 60947-2 "Molded case circuit breakers".
3.
IEC60898 "Miniature circuit breakers".
4.
EC 60204 "safety of Machinery, Electrical equipment of machines".
5.
Other components where not specified are to comply with the relevant IEC standards.
6.
BS EN 60529 Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures.
7.
BS EN 60898 Specification for circuit-breakers for over current protection for household
and similar installations.
1.3.9
Type test certification from internationally recognized testing certification agencies such as ASTA,
KEMA etc..
1.3.10
Products shall be sourced either directly from the manufacturer or form the manufacturer's
authorized representative/builder/ assembler.
1.4
Codes and Standards

The assemblies and the associated equipment shall conform to the requirements of the latest
edition of the following standards and codes where applicable :
Low Voltage switchgear and Control Gear
assemblies
IEC 60439-1, IEC 60529, BSEN60439
Circuit breakers
IEC 947-1,BSEN60947-2,BSEN 60898
Isolators/switch disconnectors
IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-3
Current transformers
IEC 60185

July 2015
Page 3 of 30

Voltage transformers
IEC 60186
Measuring instruments
IEC 51, IEC 414
Contactors
IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4
Overload relays
IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-4
Control relays
IEC 337-1, IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5
Indication lamps, Push buttons, Switches
IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 337-1, IEC-60536
Tropicalisation
IEC 68-2-30, IEC 68-2-1 & 2, IEC 68-2-11
Automatic transfer switching
IEC 947-6-1
BSEN60051/IEC 51
Direct acting indicating analogue electrical-measuring

instruments and their accessories.
BSEN60079/IEC 79
Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres.
IEC 112
Method for determining the comparative and the proof

tracking indices of solid insulating materials under
moist conditions.
BS5992/IEC 255
BS5992/IEC 255
BS88/IEC 269
Low voltage fuses.
BS5685/IEC 521
Class 0.5,1 and 2 alternating current watt-hour meters.
IEC 664
Insulation coordination for equipment within lowvoltage systems, including clearances and creepage
distances for equipment.
IEC 688
Electrical measuring transducers for converting AC

electrical quantities to analogue or digital signals.
BSEN60947/IEC 947-3
Low-voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 3:

Switches, Disconnectors, Switch-Disconnectors and
Fuse-Combination units.
BSEN60947/IEC-947-4
Low-voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 4:

Contactors and Motor-Starters.
BS 6231/IEC 502
PVC Insulated cables for switchgear and control gear

wiring
BSEN 61008
Earth leakage circuit breakers
BSEN 61009
Applicable local laws and regulations.

All panel boards shall be manufactured only by manufacturer having BSEN ISO 9001 Certificates.
The Contractor shall also submit test certificates such as ASTA or as issued by any other
independent testing authority confirming the declared short circuit ratings of Switch Boards and
circuit breakers.

July 2015
Page 4 of 30

All mains and submain panel boards shall undergo the following test before dispatching and a test
certificate shall be forwarded for the same.
a)
Primary injection test for all circuit breakers and meters
b)
Secondary test for all protective relays
c)
Millivolt droptest
d)
Insulation test
e)
Function test
All such tests shall be witnessed by Consultant or it shall be carried out by an independent testing
authorities.
The contractor is responsible for complying with all codes, which apply to the equipment. Any
special certification requirements or inspection by other authorities arising from the above shall be
arranged by the contractor and the costs for the same included in this quotation.
The equipment to be provided by vendor must be in complete compliance with this specification
and reference codes. Exceptions or deviations if any, shall be listed separately, with the quotation
for THE CONSULTANT's approval. Any exception, which is not listed, shall not be considered.
Project Conditions:
a)
Verify dimensions by field measurements.
b)
Determine suitable path for moving switchgear into place considering project conditions.
c)
Verify clearance requirements. Locate switchgear to meet installation tolerances.
d)
Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit project conditions.
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1

recommendations(from the equipment manufacturer), catalogues etc
1.5.2
Test Reports
Consultant. Provide other tests reports necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety,
1.5.3
1.5.4
Calculations
Forward the following calculations and data:

July 2015
Page 5 of 30

Calculations and charts proving that discrimination in the breaker characteristics is achieved.
Detailed short circuit level calculation to select the short circuit rating of the various switchboards.
Bus bar sizing calculation for each switchboard. Calculation for Temperature rise inside
switchboards
1.5.5
Shop drawings
The contractor shall furnish the following drawings and documents along this submittal for
approval:
1.5.6
a)
Dimensioned drawing showing outline of the switch boards arrangement and position of
important external features. These drawings shall show masses, crane lift necessary for
untanking and size of lifting lugs or eyes.
b)
Single line diagram showing all auxiliary devices.
c)
d)
Drawings of nameplate and all termination arrangements.
e)
Drawing giving typical mechanical and electrical details of the voltage control apparatus.
f)
Details of cable terminations and fittings.
g)
Foundation plan, including foundation loading.
h)
Schematic and connection diagrams covering all equipment pertaining to the switch board.
i)
Type and special test certificates as applicable
j)
Approved test certificate / test report
k)
l)
Technical Manual giving installation, operation and maintenance instructions
m)
Schedule of recommended spare parts.
Submit data for approval including, but not limited to the following:
1.
Manufacturers' original catalog indicating specific equipment selected.
2.
Types of panelboards and circuit breaker characteristics including duties and ratings
compensation at and above 40 deg. C (104 F) ambient conditions and corresponding
temperatures within the enclosures.
3.
Dimensions of panels and specific contents of each panelboard.
1.5.7
Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer/

manufacture's authorized representative and the contractor.
1.5.8
Tests and certificates: Submit complete, numbered, certified manufacturer's type test and routine
test records in accordance with the Standards.
1.5.9
Field Test Reports: Submit typed, numbered and certified test reports and include the following:
1.
Test procedures used.
2.
Test results that comply with requirements including acceptable values.

July 2015
Page 6 of 30

3.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Main Low Voltage Switch Board (MDB)

The specification hereunder shall be applied to all panel boards referred on the drawings (power
layout, single line diagrams) as MDB.
2.1.1
The switchboards shall comply with IEC 61439 Part 1 and 2, Multicubicle type FBA, Form 4, Type
6, fully draw out type construction.
2.1.2
The switchboards shall be rated 400V three phase and neutral 4 wire 50HZ with neutral solidly
grounded. The equipment shall be suitable for operating on a system having a fault level of 50 KA
rms symmetrical. The switchboard shall be tested for internal arc withstand as per AS 3439/1.
The minimum short circuit rating of MDBs shall be 50KA for 3 seconds.
2.1.3
The switchboard shall confirm to fully type tested (TTA) design having passed all 12 tests
complying to the latest editions of IEC 61439-2. The Contractor shall submit valid test certificates
such as ASTA or as issued by any other independent testing Authority to the Consultant for
approval.
2.1.4
MDB enclosure shall be supplied from the same ACB/MCCB manufacturer.
2.1.5
Refer to the single line diagram for rating and type of feeder required.
2.1.6
Provide meters and CTs as shown in the single line diagram as specified in this document and as
required in accordance with Local Electricity Authority regulation. Meters shall be mounted in
separate compartment in each section.
2.1.7
Provide permanent lifting means on top of shipping sections.
2.1.8
Include an integral roll-along lifting device for any switchgear equipped with draw out devices.
Mount lifting device on top of switchgear.
2.1.9
Electrical characteristics
2.1.10
rated operating voltage
: 690V
rated insulation voltage
: 1000V
rated current
: 3000A
rated short circuit withstand current
: 50 KA, 3 Sec
rated peak withstand current
: 105 KA
Special Tools
The contractor shall provide a complete set of all special tools and devices necessary for the
operation and maintenance of the complete assembly.
The contractor shall provide a wall mounted panel to accommodate these tools and devices.
2.1.11
The switchgear assembler should have a valid ISO 9001 certification.

July 2015
Page 7 of 30

2.1.12
The switchgear system and devices shall originate from single reputed manufacturer.
2.1.13
In case of local assembly the authorized / approved assembler shall strictly follow the guidelines
and standards laid down by the manufacturer.
2.1.14
The contractor shall provide fault level calculations to substantiate proper selection of all devices.
2.1.15
The contractor shall carry out routine tests at their works with the valid testing equipment calibrated
by reputed laboratory.
2.1.16
The assemblies shall be of the dead front, multi cubicle type forming an enclosed F.B.A with air
insulated switching devices. Each incoming or outgoing circuit-switching device shall be housed in
its own enclosure. The switchgear shall be completely compartmentalized and metal enclosed in
accordance with Form 4 TYPE 6 separation described in IEC 439. Assemblies shall be
freestanding. All switchboards and MCC shall be single fronted and not double front.
2.1.17
All air circuit breakers shall be withdrawable type. The incoming air circuit breakers shall have
manually and electrically operated spring charge mechanism while the outgoing air circuit breakers
shall be manually operated.
2.1.18
All equipment and materials shall be new.
2.1.19
The assembly, including the framework, wiring, earth bar, etc., shall be suitable in all respects for
extension at both ends such that only the minimum of work will be required to make such
extensions.
2.1.20
The switchgear shall be painted inside and out. Unpainted galvanized coating of internal metal
work will not be acceptable.
2.1.21
A space of 100mm shall be provided at the bottom of each panel.
2.1.22
A vertical cable alley covering the entire height shall be provided.

minimum 250mm wide.
2.1.23
The panel shall be of uniform height of not more than 2450 mm.
2.2
Construction
2.2.1
The degree of protection, according to IEC 529, shall be minimum IP 44 with fixed front frame plus
overall plain door and gasket.
2.2.2
The switchboard shall be built-up of individual freestanding cubicles to allow easy installation on
site. The cubicles shall be made of electro-zinc coated sheet metal of 2mm thickness. The sheet
metal shall be coated with a thermosetting powder of any epoxy resin base modified by polyester
resin, which provide perfect finish and excellent protection against corrosion (standard "all climate"
protection). The color shall be to RAL 7032 /9002 and to CONSULTANT approval.
The cable alley shall be
The switchboard shall be:

a)
Provided with a metal sill frame made of structural steel channels section properly drilled for
mounting the switchgear along with necessary mounting hardware. Hardware shall be zinc
plated and passivated.
b)
Provided with labels on the front and rear indicating the switchgear designation.
c)
Provided with cable entry facilities at bottom with 3mm thick removable gland plates and
necessary cable glands. For 1 core cable these plates shall be nonmagnetic.

July 2015
Page 8 of 30

2.2.4
d)
Provided with gaskets all round the perimeter of adjacent panels, panel and base frame,
removable covers art doors.
e)
Provided with bus-bar running at the top or rear all along the Switchgear in a separate sheet
steel enclosure.
Operating devices shall be incorporated only in the front of the switchgear with a hinged door.
Only the handles of control and selector switches, push buttons, knobs and cutouts for lamps and
meters shall be arranged on the front doors of the respective compartments to permit operation
without opening the door. Protective relays shall be mounted on the front door of the compartment.
All other equipment pertaining to a circuit shall be mounted on the withdrawable chassis. All
cutouts shall be provided with gaskets for the purpose of dust proofing.
2.2.5
Current transformers shall not be directly mounted on the buses. Current transformers shall be
mounted on the fixed portion of the compartment.
2.2.6
Suitable barriers shall be placed between circuit breakers and all control, protective and indication
circuit equipment including instrument transformers. External cable connections shall be carried in
separate cable compartments for power and control cables.
2.2.7
After isolation of the power and control connections of a circuit, it shall be possible to safely carry
out maintenance in a compartment with the bus bars and adjacent circuits live.
2.2.8
The withdrawable chassis shall move on suitable guides and on stainless steel rollers or balls to
facilitate easy withdrawal.
2.2.9
Cable entry shall be from front from a separate cable alley provided adjacent to each vertical
section. Cable shall enter each module from the sides.
2.2.10
Cable alleys shall be provided with suitable hinged doors. The cable termination shall be
completely shrouded. It shall be possible to safely carry out maintenance work on cable
connections to any one circuit with the bus bars and adjacent circuits live. Adequate number of
slotted cable support arms shall be provided for cleating the cables.
2.2.11
The switchgear shall be divided into distinct vertical sections each comprising:
a)
A completely metal enclosed bus bar compartment running horizontally.
b)
Individual feeder modules arranged in multi-tier formation. It is essential that the modules
are integral multiples of the basic unit size to provide for flexibility in changes, if any, at site.
c)
Enclosed vertical bus-bars serving all modules in the vertical section for safety isolation of
the vertical bus-bars, insulating barrier with cut outs shall be provided to allow the power
stab contacts to engage with vertical bus-bars.
d)
A horizontal separate enclosure for all auxiliary power and control buses, as required, shall
be located so as to enable easy identification, maintenance and segregation from the main
power buses. Tap off connections from these buses shall be arranged separately for each
vertical section.
2.2.12
Each vertical section shall be equipped with thermostatically controlled space heaters, which may
be located in the cable alley and with internal light.
2.2.13
Open metal sheet shall be provided between two adjacent vertical sections running to the full
height of the switchgear except for the horizontal bus-bar compartment. However, each shipping
section shall have metal sheets at both ends.

July 2015
Page 9 of 30

2.2.14
All equipment associated with a single circuit shall be housed in a separate module compartment of
the vertical section. The compartment shall be sheet steel enclosed at the sides and the rear with
the withdrawable units in the position or removed. However, for front cable entry type
switchboards, a plate cover with a slot to permit wiring connections shall be provided on the side
corresponding to the cable alley
2.2.15
All doors shall be provided with concealed type hinges and captive screws.
2.2.16
All withdrawable chassis housing circuit breakers shall be of the fully draw out type.
2.2.17
It shall be possible to draw out the withdrawable chassis without having to unscrew or unbolt any
connections to the equipment mounted on the withdrawable chassis. The power and control draw
out type connections shall be of the slab-in or sliding type. All draw out contacts including for
auxiliary and control wiring shall be of self-aligning type.
2.2.18
All identical equipment and corresponding parts including chassis of draw out modules of the same
size shall be fully interchangeable, without having to carry out modifications. For trouble free
interchangeability, the draw out arrangement shall be designed such that normal dimensional
variations are taken care of by self-aligning feature of the modules.
2.2.19
All out-going breakers shall be fitted on prefabricated appropriate mounting plates and access to
their operating toggles shall be provided through an appropriate front cover, fixed to the front
frame.
2.2.20
The cable connection shall be made in a separate compartment. The access shall be possible
through hinged covers or doors.
2.2.21
The cubicle shall be divided into modules with a minimum of 15% of empty modules for extension.
2.2.22
All incoming cable entries shall be from bottom. Outgoing cable entries shall be from bottom or top
as per the requirement.
2.2.23
Compartments for future breakers shall be complete with bus onnections, plug-in base and
mounting plates, ready for the insertion of a breaker.
2.2.24
ACBs shall be draw-out with ratings, breaking capacity

specification and contract drawings.
2.2.25
Out-going MCCBs shall be draw out type, operated by door interlocked rotary handles with ratings
breaking capacity etc. as given elsewhere in this specification.
2.2.26
The draw out contact shall be only between copper/copper alloy faces,which are silver-plated.
2.2.27
All live parts shall be provided with suitable automatic shutter to cover all live parts when the
section is in withdrawn position.
2.2.28
No cast iron or cast aluminium shall be used in any part of the assembly which is subjected to
mechanical stress.
2.2.29
All incoming and outgoing switching devices shall have provision for locking in the off position.
2.2.30
Where the F.B.A is required to bridge one or more civil work expansion joints in the substation
construction, this requirement shall be detailed on the civil drawings.

etc. as mentioned elsewhere in this
July 2015
Page 10 of 30

2.2.31
Degree of Protection.
The degree of protection shall be a minimum of IP 44. IP 20 minimum shall apply within an isolated
compartment or cubicle while the remainder of the assembly is live. Metallic barriers shall provide
this protection. Unless otherwise approved this requirement shall apply to bus-bar shutters and to
devices energized from external supplies, such as motor heater auxiliary switches.
2.2.32
Incoming and sectionalizing units

Incoming and sectionalizing units shall be air circuit breakers and shall be mounted in separate
panels.
Air circuit breakers shall be four-pole or three-pole type as indicated in the single line diagram for
three phase and neutral systems. They shall be provided with In Service/Out of Service/Test
Point positions and suitable locking devices shall be provided for the Out of Service and Test
Point positions.
A dedicated compartment shall be included for metering on the incomers.
Supplier shall supply details for incoming units and bus-bar standard earthing arrangements.
2.2.33
Outgoings
They shall be ACB or MCCB with type and ratings as indicated in the contract drawings and as
specified in the relevant section of this specification.
Suppliers shall provide a minimum 160mm space between the base of the switchgear and the
underside of the lowest outgoers.
All incoming and out going circuit breakers shall be provided with a release to trip the breaker,
instantaneously if closed onto a fault.
All compartments shall occupy the full cubicle width; a semi module compartment or vertical
division between compartments is not acceptable.
Supplier shall ensure that the number of outgoing feeders in any vertical section of switchboard
shall be such that there is adequate space in the cable alley for all power, and all control cables
entering the panel. The number of feeders shall not exceed 8 numbers for each vertical panel.
2.2.34
Cable and Wire Terminations and Terminals

All internal control and auxiliary wiring shall terminate in suitable spring loaded, clamp type
terminals and shall be provided with a permanent, easily read numbering system at both ends in
accordance with the wiring diagram. Wires shall be identified by means of numbered and or
lettered sleeves.
Formal blocks shall be arranged and positioned to afford easy access for carrying out external
cabling, testing, inspection and maintenance.
Cable Glands shall be of the double sealed compression type with position armor bond suitable for
XLPE and PVC insulated cables.
2.2.35
Mechanical Indications
All main circuit devices other than contactors shall be provided with mechanically operated on
and off indicators which shall be positively driven in both directions and shall be visible from the
front of the assembly.

July 2015
Page 11 of 30

2.2.36
Safety Shutters
Where shutters are provided to maintain IP 20(minimum), they shall automatically cover all bus bar
and cable spouts or isolating contacts whenever removable or withdrawable units are removed.
The safety shutters shall be automatically opened and closed by action of the removable or
withdrawable unit movement. A positive drive to the shutters shall be provided in both directions.
They shall be capable of being padlocked in the closed position.
2.2.37
Interlocks
All units shall be provided with a complete set of electrical and mechanical interlocks to prevent
incorrect operation and to provide safety for personnel in addition to any external interlocks
specified for operational reasons.
On removal of withdrawable units, mechanical interlocks shall be provided to prevent the following
operations and any other operations which could cause danger or damage:-
2.2.39
a)
The unit being closed unless it is correctly located in the service, isolated or earthed
positions or unless it is removed from the fixed part of the assembly.
b)
The unit being withdrawn from or inserted into the feeder spouts or isolating device when it
is in the closed position.
c)
The unit being moved to any position other than that selected by means of the mechanical
selector.
d)
The unit being withdrawn or inserted into the fixed part unless it is in the correct state for
withdrawal or insertion.
e)
The unit being closed in the service position unless all auxiliary circuits between fixed and
removable parts have been completed.
f)
Means shall be provided to prevent opening of cubicle doors or covers before disconnection
of supply to exposed live parts within.
Interlocks and Transfer Functions

The general philosophy of the required inter-trips and interlocks shall generally be as indicated
hereunder. The vendor shall submit all logic diagram and interlocking line diagram to the
Consultant for approval.
The main switch board incoming transformer feeders, and the bus section circuit breaker shall be
provided with the required electromechanical interlock for auto transfer incase of failure of an
incoming supply facilities shall be provided for manual transfer.
The various interlocking schemes shall generally as indicated on the drawings and to the
consultant approval.
2.2.40
Nameplates shall be engraved on traffolite sheet, with white letters on black background.
Nameplates for main breaker, tie breaker, section and outgoers modules identification and for the
entire switchboard shall have letters not smaller than 13 mm high. Nameplates for branch breakers,
switches, push buttons, control devices, pilot lights and metering shall have letters not less than 3
mm high. All nameplates shall be mechanically fixed with non-ferrous metal screws.
2.2.41
Warning signs on doors and access panels shall be engraved traffolite with white letters on red
background.

July 2015
Page 12 of 30

2.2.42
Control contacts, auxiliary contacts, relays and small or light mechanisms shall be enclosed and
protected, and shall be accessible for repair or adjustment.
2.2.43
Engraved trafolite/aluminum mimic of the SLD shall be provided on the front face of the
switchboard. The same shall be mechanically fixed with non-ferrous metal screws.
2.2.44
Anti condensation heaters shall be provided within the assembly and shall be controlled by a panelmounted hygrostat with a 50% to 100% setting range.
2.3
Submain Distribution Board (SMDB-Free Standing)
2.3.1
Description
2.3.2
2.3.3
a)
The distribution panel(s) shall be of the free standing cubicle multitier type incorporating 3
phase, neutral and earth insulated tinned copper busbars, all necessary CTs, and the like
as required.
b)
Each cubicle shall be equipped with thermostatically controlled heaters which shall be 'on' all
the time and ventilation means.
c)
Switchboard shall be designed to operate on a 415/240V 3 phase and neutral 50HZ supply
and shall have a minimum short circuit rating of 50KA for one second, for the MDB's,
switchboards shall be constructed in accordance with BSEN 60439 Part 1 multicubicle type
FBA FORM 2b type 2.
d)
Main Distribution panel(s) shall be equipped with all necessary circuit breakers and
components with enough spare outgoing for any future use.
Busbars
a)
The busbars shall be made of hard drawn high conductivity tinned copper and rated for
continuous operation. The main bus bar rating shall be the same throughout the entire
length of the switchboard and a provision shall be made in the busbars system to allow for
expansion and contraction caused by temperature variation.
b)
The busbar shall be sized taking into consideration the ambient temperature and the
specified temperature rise.
c)
The neutral busbar shall have the same size as the phase busbars while the earth bar shall
have a minimum size of half the phase busbar.
Breakers
a)
All breakers rated 630 A and above shall be withdrawable type while breakers up to 630 A
shall be fixed type and all circuit breakers of the same type and rating shall be entirely
interchangeable.
b)
The cubicle shall be front operated with a mechanical ON/OFF position indicator and shall
be designed and tested in accordance with relevant standards.
c)
The main incoming supply shall be complete with a flush mounted ammeter for each phase,
CTs, phase to phase voltmeter. Volt meter shall have a phase selector switch and indication
lamps.

July 2015
Page 13 of 30

2.3.4
Enclosure
a)
The switchboard shall be constructed of a minimum 2mm thick electro-galvanized steel

coated with high solid enamel polyester electrostatic spray and oven baked. There shall be
adequate channel frames, drilled or slotted for ease of assembly, to support cable tails,
clamps and terminations within the cubicles.
b)
The busbars shall run in a separate compartment with the partition shall be made of Aluzinc
or of similar material as the enclosure of at least 1mm thickness. All entries and openings
shall be vermin-proof. All live conductive parts either on the incoming or outgoing side shall
be shielded in such a manner that they cannot be accidentally touched when the doors are
open.
c)
The degree of protection of the Switch Board enclosure should be IP 44.
d)
The contractor shall provide all necessary means of ventilation and forward the necessary
calculation in order to ensure that maximum temperature rise within the panel will not
exceed 35 deg at the operating ambient temperature of 55 deg C.
2.4
Sub Main Distribution Boards (SMDB-Wall mounted).
2.4.1
General
MCCB distribution boards shall comply with IEC 60439-1 Form 2b type 2
Enclosures:
a)
MCCB distribution boards must be totally enclosed.
b)
The degree of protection according to IEC 439.1 shall be IP 41 minimum for indoor
installation and IP 55 for outdoor installation.
c)
The enclosure shall be manufactured from minimum 1.5 mm thick electro-zinc coated sheet
steel with Epoxy polyester powder finish and color to CONSULTANT approval.
d)
A hinged door fitted with lock and key has to be opened for operating the switchgear. Access
to the cabling space and to the switchgear shall be obtained by removing a front cover
bolted fastener.
e)
Ample-wiring space shall be provided. Detachable blank gland plates shall be provided at
the top and bottom.
f)
Anti condensation heater shall be provided.

Pan Assembly:
a)
The pan assembly shall be completely independent unit that can be taken out of the
enclosure for maintenance purpose.
b)
All components are mounted on a strong chassis consisting of 2mm thick electro-zinc coated
folded sheet steel.
c)
Bus-bars shall run in separate compartment with metallic partition and shall be made of hard
drawn high conductivity tinned copper, air insulated and full neutral and earth bar included.

July 2015
Page 14 of 30

Breakers:
a)
Incoming and out-going breakers shall be MCCBs of fixed type. Breaking capacity of the
MCCBs shall be in line with the prospective fault level of the installation but shall not be less
than fault level calculation. Ratings and capacity shall be as given elsewhere in this
specification.
b)
Short circuit calculations shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.
c)
Breaker selection shall be made to achieve maximum discrimination between the upstream
and downstream breakers.
Electrical Characteristics:
a)
Rated insulation voltage : 600V (AC)
b)
Maximum rated current of bus-bars : up to 630 A
c)
Rated short time withstand current of bus-bars shall be as shown on the single line diagram.
d)
The short circuit capacity of the distribution boards shall be 30 kA minimum and shall be
rated to withstand the short-circuit level of the position it is installed. A short circuit level
calculation shall be submitted and the short circuit level of the distribution board shall be
upgraded accordingly.
AUXILIARIES AND ACCESSORIES:
2.5
a)
All MCCBs shall be provided with 2 number spare NC and NO contact.
b)
In addition the incomer shall be provided with ammeter and voltmeter and selector switches.
Distribution Boards
Description
The specification hereunder shall be all final branch circuit distribution board.
As a standard item, all distribution boards shall be provided with permanent circuit identification
charts to the approval of Consultant.
a)
Distribution boards shall comply with IEC 529. They shall be used to build up equipment
complying with IEC 439.
b)
The degree of protection according to IEC 529 shall be:

1.
IP 31 minimum for indoor application.
2.
IP 55 for outdoor application.
c)
Distribution boards shall be made of electrolytically zinc coated sheet steel phosphatized.
d)
The sheet metal shall be coated with a thermosetting powder of an epoxy resin base
modified by polyester resin which provide a perfect finish and excellent protection against
corrosion ("standard all climate "protection) and RAL color to CONSULTANT approval.

July 2015
Page 15 of 30

e)
The distribution boards shall be equipped with:

Screwed - on chassis allowing full access for wiring on the side. Standard parts allowing all
kind of construction full access between 2 distribution boards joined together, standard busbar supports tested in compliance with IEC 439-1.
f)
The distribution boards shall:

1.
Be equipped with components fixed to mounting plate on DIN rails.
2.
Be type tested complying to IEC 439-1
3.
Has branch devices screw on type.
General:
No. of ways from 4 to 14
Paint color : to CONSULTANT/Interior Designer approval
Rated current 100A/200A
Surface or flush mounted as per THE CONSULTANT approval.
Incomer should be MCCB, MCB or ELCB 100mA sensitivity, as per the approved load
schedules/SLD.
Out-going breakers shall be MCB for lighting and power circuits, however earth leakage protection
shall also be provided for water heater, hand dryer and kitchen equipment circuits as per the
approved load schedules. Breaking capacity of the MCBs shall be in line with the fault level of the
installation.
Short circuit calculations shall be submitted to the Consultant for approval.
The outgoing breaker shall have a type B tripping characteristic for circuit feeding power circuits
and type C tripping characteristic for circuits feeding lighting and inductive loads.
All circuit breakers shall be factory calibrated to ambient temperature of 50 deg.C.
2.6
Disconnect Switch
a)
Disconnect switches (isolators) shall be manufactured to IEC and British standards.
b)
Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty (AC23) with operating handle interlocked with the
switch cover, in general purpose rust proof aluminium enclosure and to IP44 finished in gray
stove finish.
c)
Switches shall be quick make, quick break action. Provision shall be made for padlocking in
either the On or Off position.
d)
Switch blades shall be fully visible when in the Off position.
e)
Operating handles shall be interlocked to prevent doors from being opened when switch is
closed. Provision shall be made to defeat this interlock with a screwdriver.
f)
Fuse clips shall be designed for HRC BS 88/IEC 269 fuses without adapters and shall reject
standard code fuses.

July 2015
Page 16 of 30

g)
Switches mounted outside, in damp or dusty locations and unconditioned areas shall be
supplied in weather resistant enclosures IP 65 made of aluminium with double wall
construction.
h)
Sample and catalogues with installation details shall be submitted for approval by THE
CONSULTANT prior to ordering.
i)
Provide a disconnect switch ahead of all motors, starters and electrical equipment where
shown on the drawings and where required to meet Code regulations and jurisdictional
authorities, whether the equipment is supplied or installed under the Electrical Division or
any other division.
j)
All disconnect switches shall be provided with tag to THE CONSULTANT approval to
indicate equipment connected to the switch. The feeding circuit reference and the related
distribution board number.
2.7
Motor Starters
2.7.1
Description
Starters shall be manufactured and type tested in accordance with IEC 947-4 and IEC 947-4-1
All motors shall be provided with heavy duty contactor type motor fuseless starters selected for
coordination type 2 in accordance with IEC 947-4 generally complying with the following and
protected through circuit breaker.
a)
3KW direct on line starting
b)
3KW to 25KW Star Delta starting
c)
25KW and above reduced voltage electronic soft starters.
Each starter panel shall be provided with a main incoming MCCB capable of carrying the full load
current.
Each starter shall comprise as a minimum:
a)
On load triple pole MCCB with two normally open and one normally closed auxiliary
switches. The MCCB to be mechanically interlocked with the starter component door and
capable of breaking the motor starting current and of making onto a fault at the motor
terminals.
Provision to be made for padlocking the MCCB in the 'OFF' position.
b)
three pole contactors to be fitted with three normally open and three normally closed
auxiliary contacts.
All the auxiliary contacts to be wired down to the starter terminal block.
c)
One triple pole thermal over current relay incorporating over current, phase sequence and
single phase protection with adjustable trip settings.
External mechanical hand reset to be provided.
d)
One control circuit MCB or fuse and one copper link.

July 2015
Page 17 of 30

e)
Each starter shall be fitted with one set of local start/stop push buttons and a
local/remote/auto selector switch or hand/off/auto switch as required. Each starter control
wiring terminal block shall include control terminals for connection of remote push buttons,
auto circuits and local and remote emergency stop push buttons.
f)
Where more than one motor with a duty/standby or duty/backup functions used, the starter
control wiring shall be arranged to automatically change duty upon the fault tripping of the
selected motor. A duty/standby or sequence selector switch shall be provided.
g)
Each starter shall be fitted with twin led indication lamps indicating:
Motor running (green)
Motor stopped (red)
Overload tripped (amber)
h)
Each starter shall be fitted with an ammeter and selector switch for motors 3 KW and above.
i)
Each starter to be equipped with labels in English and Arabic giving drive designation, plant
number and control operation.
j)
Each starter control wiring shall include control terminal and control relays as necessary to
achieve any interlocking specified else where or to achieve any control or monitoring through
the BMS where specified.
k)
Adjustable time delay devices for Star Delta Starters.
l)
Earth leak relays as required by Local Electricity Authority.

Starter units for manual operation shall have push buttons for starting and stopping, together
with auxiliary contacts for remote indicator lights where specified. Starter units arranged for
automatic operation shall have hand/off/auto controls and remote push buttons.
All Star Delta starter shall be provided with mechanical and electrical interlocks for star delta
contactor assembled to prevent short circuiting.
2.7.2
Enclosure
Panels shall be constructed of a minimum 1.6mm thick electro galvanized steel coated with high
solid enamel polyester electrostatic spray and oven baked and protected to IP 54.
Front access shall be arranged for all panels with hinged lift off doors. Dust and damp proof gasket
around the edge and fitted with lockable cam type chromium plated handle mechanically
interlocked with the starting MCCB.
The enclosure for the motor starters are divided into two types as follows:
a)
Single starter panel.
b)
Motor control centre.
Single starter panel

a)
This specification shall be applied for starter panels used for starting a single equipment with
a maximum of two motors.
b)
All equipment shall be mounted on sheet steel mounting plate with screws into tapped holes
and all live parts shall be shrouded to a minimum IP54.

July 2015
Page 18 of 30

c)
The minimum short circuit rating for the different components shall be 25kA. However, the
contractor shall forward a short circuit calculation and upgrade the same if found necessary.
Compensated Equipment
Any motorized valve or damper controlled via a compensated system, shall be arranged such that
a manual selector switch is provided to override compensated selection and enable manual
opening/closing or on/off control, as appropriate. Any compensator unit mounted within the control
cabinet shall remain in the manufacturer's purpose made enclosure and be installed strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
The panels shall contain devices for automatic restart of units after power failure where required.
2.8
Motor Control Centers (MCC)
2.8.1
Motor control centers shall be of similar construction to the main low voltage switchboard in
addition shall comply with the following specification:
2.8.2
a)
Motor control centers shall be in accordance with IEC 947-4-1 with type 2 coordination.
b)
All power and control devices shall be mounted in separate compartments. All power and
control wiring shall be segregated. Separate color-coded wires shall be used for power and
control wiring, the same shall be properly ferruled.
c)
Control wires shall be of flexible copper not less than 1.5 sq. mm.
d)
Chiller sequence controller shall be provided.
e)
Automatic controls for pump duty stand/by, duty selection, interlocking with chillers shall be
provided.
f)
All motors shall be provided with phase failure, under voltage, phase sequence over current
and earth fault protection.
g)
Run/Trip/Off indication shall be provided for all pump with lamp test facility.
h)
On/Off switch for chillers control panel shall be provided.
i)
Hand/Off/Auto selector switch and On/Off push buttons shall be provided for all motors.
j)
The degree of protection of the swithcboard enlcosure shall be IP 54 (minimum).
Outgoings
Motor starters and contactors shall have an utilization category of AC-3 (starting of squirrel-cage
motors, switching off motors during running) and AC-4 for motors with inching or reversing duties.
Motor starter components i.e breakers, contactors, relays etc. shall be selected in accordance with
IEC 947 947-4-1 type 2 coordination.
Ammeters shall be fitted to all starters for motors greater than 3.0kW. On-off fault indication of
contractors shall be fitted on the front of the starter compartment with a red light for ON, green
light for OFF and an amber light to indicate motor overload or fault conditions.
Suppliers shall provide a minimum 160mm space between the base of the switchgear and the
underside of the lowest outgoers.
All incoming and out going circuit breakers shall be provided with a release to trip the breaker,
instantaneously if closed onto a fault.

July 2015
Page 19 of 30

All compartments shall occupy the full cubicle width; a semi module compartment or vertical
division between compartments is not acceptable.
Supplier shall ensure that the number of outgoing feeders in any vertical section of switchboard
shall be such that there is adequate space in the cable alley for all power, and all control cables
entering the panel. The number of feeders shall not exceed 8 numbers for each vertical panel.
2.9
Air Circuit Breakers
2.9.1
General
2.9.2
2.9.3
a)
The circuit breakers shall comply with IEC947-2, 3pole or 4pole as mentioned in the single
line diagram. However the incomer and bus coupler ACBs shall be of 4 poles.
b)
The breaking capacity performance certificates shall be available for category B to the above
mentioned standards. The test shall be carried out with a breaking performance during
operation (Ics) equal to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu).
c)
All circuit breakers can be reverse fed without reduction in performance.
d)
Breaker shall be equipped with a grounding device to solidly ground the framework before
the main disconnecting contacts are engaged and to maintain the grounding until after the
contacts have separated.
e)
Breaker trips shall be completely self-powered with no external control power source
required. If external control power is required, 125V D.C. batteries and charger shall be
provided. Batteries to be Ni-cad type.
f)
Breakers shall be provided with overload, short circuit and earth fault protection and have
g)
Adjustable long time delay trip.
h)
Adjustable short time delay trip.
i)
Instantaneous trip,
j)
Ground fault trip.
k)
Breakers shall be suitable for operating at 55 deg. C ambient temperature and shall be
tropicalised.
Construction
a)
The air circuit breaker ratings shall be as shown on the single line diagram.
b)
All air circuit breakers main contact shall be encased in a reinforced polyester casing and
offer double insulation from the operators on the breaker front face. The circuit breaker also
shall offer total insulation between the control part and the power part.
Operating Mechanism
a)
The operating mechanism shall be the O-C-O stored energy spring type motor/manually
operated with a closing time of less than or equal 80 ms.
b)
Each breaker shall be provided with 3 nos. normally open and 3 nos. normally closed
potential free spare auxiliary contacts rated 10A at 240 V AC.

July 2015
Page 20 of 30

2.9.4
Arc Chutes
Arc chutes shall be common on the whole range and removable on site to allow inspection of arc
chutes and main contacts.
2.9.5
Electrical Auxiliaries
All electrical auxiliaries including the motor spring charging mechanism shall be field adaptable
without adjustment or the necessity for any tool (except a screwdriver).
2.9.6
Trip Units
The trip units shall be micro-processor based type and use digital programming technique for
highest protection accuracy against overload, short circuit and earth fault. They shall be integrated
as part of the circuit breaker. The trip unit shall have a wide adjustment range to allow flexibility of
the setting on site. The trip unit shall measure the true RMS value of any waveform of current. The
trip unit shall be equipped with a push to reset mechanical indicator, for anti-pumping function.
2.9.7
Control Unit
The control unit shall be microprocessor based type and shall make it possible to display the
electrical quantities relevant to the protected line, and the control of electrical devices through
power relays housed in the release case.
The control unit shall also provide the following :
Harmonic analysis and total harmonic distortion(THD).
Maintenance indications providing the wear and tear of the main power contacts of the breaker etc.
2.9.8
Dialogue Unit
The dialogue unit shall be microprocessor based type and shall give information on electrical
quantities, alarms and the circuit breaker condition. Besides it shall receive the operational
commands for the circuit breaker sent by centralized system. The dialogue unit shall be provided
with necessary interface for data transmission and data reception from the BMS system.
2.9.9
2.10
Auxiliaries And Accessories

a)
1 ammeter and volt meter with selector switch.
b)
Operation counter
c)
ON/OFF/Fault/Control Circuit fault indication light with lamp test facilities.
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)

Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest editions of BSEN 60947-2. The MCCB's
shall be withdrawable type when used at the MDBs and when used at the SMDBs it shall be fixed
type up to 630 A and it shall be withdrawable type for breaker size of 630 A and above.
The MCCB's shall have a minimum service short circuit capacity similar to the panel board where
the same is installed .
MCCB's shall be of the heavy duty quick make quick break type. Each breaker shall have
adjustable type thermal over current and magnetic release and also an instantaneous magnetic
trip.

July 2015
Page 21 of 30

Three pole breakers shall have a common trip with a single operating handle and designed so that
any overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Breakers shall be trip free and
each shall have a trip indication independent of ON or OFF positions.
The MCCB's at the MDBs shall be provided with the necessary number of change over auxiliary
switch and with signalling unit which shall be connected to the BMS system in order to provide
information on the breakers conditions and alarms where required.
Withdrawable MCCB's shall be provided with safety shutter to cover the live parts when the breaker
is withdrawn.
Wherever shown on the drawings or required by Local Electricity Authority, MCCBs shall be
provided with earth leakage alarm relay or earth leakage relay of fixed/adjustable sensitivity.
2.10.1
2.10.2
2.10.3
MCCB From 100 To 630 A

a)
The moulded-case circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 947-1 and 947-2 standards. They
shall be of category A with a rated service breaking capacity (Ics) equal to the ultimate
breaking capacity (Icu) - on all the operational voltage range for the ratings up to 630 A.
b)
The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be designed for both vertical and horizontal
mounting, without any adverse effect on electrical performance. It shall be possible to supply
power either from the upstream or downstream side.
c)
The moulded-case circuit breakers shall provide class II insulation (according to IEC 664
standard) between the front and internal power circuits.
Construction
a)
For maximum safety, the power contacts shall be insulated in an enclosure made of a
thermosetting material from other functions such as the operating mechanism, the case, the
trip unit and auxiliaries.
b)
The operating mechanism of the moulded-case circuit breakers shall be of the quick make,
quick-break type with fault tripping over ridding manual operation. All poles shall operate
simultaneously for circuit breaker opening, closing and tripping.
c)
The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be front operated by a toggle or handle that clearly
indicates the three positions: ON, OFF and TRIPPED.
d)
The moulded-case circuit breakers shall be equipped with a "push to trip" button in front to
test operation and the opening of the poles.
e)
Where required, motor operated mechanism, shunt trip, under voltage release, auxiliary
switches up to four change over contacts and a tripped signal contact shall be provided.
Each of these units shall incorporate a pre-wired terminal strip, which is accessible from the
front of the breaker without removing the cover.
Current Limiting
The moulded case circuit breakers shall be capable of greatly limiting currents. For short circuits,
the maximum thermal stress it shall be limited to
106 A2 s for ratings up to 250A.
5 x 106 A2 s for ratings between 400A and 630A.
A : Amps and S : Seconds

July 2015
Page 22 of 30

These characteristics will allow high cascading performance with moulded-case or miniature circuitbreakers.
2.10.4
2.10.5
2.11
2.11.1
Auxiliaries And Accessories

a)
The addition of motor mechanism or a rotory handle shall in no way affect circuit breaker
characteristics:
b)
Only three stable tripping mechanism positions (ON, OFF and TRIPPED) shall be possible
with the motor mechanism.
c)
Suitability for isolation shall be provided by positive contact indication (ON and OFF) in front
of the motor mechanism module.
d)
The moulded case circuit breakers shall be designed to enable safe on-site installation of
auxiliaries such as voltage releases (shunt and under voltage releases) and indication
switches.
e)
The addition of a motor mechanism, module or a rotory handle, etc., shall not mask or block
devise setting.
f)
It shall be possible to equip the moulded case circuit breakers with devices indicating faults
without tripping the circuit breaker.
g)
2 NO and 2 NC spare contacts.
Protection Function General Recommendations

a)
Moulded case circuit breakers with ratings up to 250A shall be equipped with inter
changable Thermal-magnetic trip units.
b)
Moulded case circuit breakers with ratings over 250A shall be equipped with electronic trip
units. The trip units shall not augment overall circuit breaker volume.
c)
Electronic trip units shall comply with appendix F of IEC 947-2 standard (measurement of
RMS current values, electromagnetic compatibility, etc.,)
d)
Electronic and thermal-magnetic trip units shall be adjustable and it shall be possible to fit
lead seals to prevent unauthorized access to the settings.
e)
Protection settings shall apply to all circuit breaker poles.
Miniature Circuit Breakers

a)
MCBs shall comply with BS EN 60898.
b)
MCBs shall be 35mm symmetrical rail mounted type and available n one, two, three or four
poles version.
c)
MCBs can be reverse fed without reduction in performance.
Construction
a)
The operating mechanism shall be mechanically trip free from the operating handle so as to
prevent the contacts from being held closed against short circuit conditions. It shall be of the
"automatic resetting type".
b)
The individual operating mechanism of each pole of a multi-pole MCB shall be directly linked
within the MCB casing and not by the operating handles.

July 2015
Page 23 of 30

2.12
c)
The operating handle shall be of the toggle type.
d)
Each pole shall be provided with bi-metallic thermal element for overload protection and
magnetic element for short circuit protection.
e)
Terminals shall be of the tunnel type (IP20) in order to minimize the risk of direct contact.
Metering
Indicating Instruments
a)
Meters (indicating instruments) shall be provided as shown in the schematic diagram.
b)
All meters shall be moving iron type, minimum of 72 sq. mm square shape and 90 deg.
scale.
c)
All meters (indicating instruments) shall be of class 1.5.
d)
Instruments shall temperature compensated to operate between -25 deg. C and + 55 deg. C
and shall be trophical version.
e)
All meters shall comply with IEC 51.
f)
3 ammeters and 1 voltmeter with selector switch shall be used for all MDBs and SMDBs with
630A rating and above.
Energy Meters
2.13
g)
The Contractor shall supply and install the required Kilowatt Hour metrs (KWH meters) and
Current Transformer Meters (CT meter) as indicated in the drawings and single line diagram.
h)
The meters shall be provided as required by DEWA regulations and must comply with
DEWA specifications.
i)
The meters inside the electical panels shall be moutned in separate compartment in each
section.
j)
All meters must be capable of remote data access and must have data logging capability.
All meters should be approved by DEWA.
k)
Each individual tenancy must have a sub-meter.
Current Transformers
a)
Current transformers shall comply with IEC 185.
b)
The conditional ratings of current transformers shall correspond with the switchboard rating
and shall be such as to maintain the overall metering accuracy as is necessary to operate
relays within the tolerances specified by the manufacturer.
c)
Current transformers secondary ratings shall be:
d)
1.
for protection 1A
2.
for metering 5A
Current transformers shall have the following accuracy as a minimum, for protection Class
5P (Except for REF Protection which will have PS class CT)

July 2015
Page 24 of 30

2.14
2.15
e)
for indication Class 1
f)
for metering Class 1
g)
The manufacturer shall ensure that the current transformers are such that the relays will
operate correctly when set at any point within their ranges.
h)
Current transformers secondary wiring shall be earthed on one side through a removable
link. Where current transformers are connected in star, the star point shall be earthed
through a removable link.
j)
Shorting links shall be provided for each current transformer.
k)
Current transformers shall be cast resin insulated.
Contactors
a)
All contactors shall comply with IEC 947-1, IEC 947-4.
b)
Duty category for lighting contactors shall be AC1 and for inductive load shall be AC3.
c)
Contactors shall be protected against direct finger contact, mechanical life shall be 15 to 20
million operating cycles. Shall be suitable for 1200 operating cycles per hour.
d)
The contactors shall be of 3 pole construction capable of handling high rush currents and
suitable for operating up to 55 deg. C ambient temperature without any derating.
e)
Coils shall operate between 85% to 100% of the nominal voltage.
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCBs)

Current operated earth leakage circuit breakers shall be in accordance with BSEN 61008 providing
the functions of isolation, switching and earth leakage protection of electrical circuits.
The ELCB's shall have a residual current operated electro mechanical release.
The ELCB's shall incorporate a filtering device to eliminate unwanted tripping due transient voltage.
A test push button is to prove operation.
A trip free mechanism is required to ensure that the unit can not be held closed against an earth
fault.
The tripping device is connected directly to the secondary of the current balance transformer.
No amplifiers or rectifiers are to be used.
The breaker shall be double pole when used for single phase and 4 poles when used for three
phase circuit protection.
The ELCB's sh
2.16
all have 30mA or 100mA sensitivity as indicated in the drawings.
RCD+MCB/RCBO
(Residual Current Operated Circuit Breaker With Integral Overcurrent Protection)
RCBO's shall comply with BSEN 61009 providing protection against earth leakage, overload and
short circuit protection.

July 2015
Page 25 of 30

RCBO's shall be used wherever indicated on the load schedules and whenever requested by Local
Electricity Authority.
RCBO's shall have 30mA sensitivity with type B tripping characteristic for power circuits except for
circuits feeding hand dryer it shall be 10mA sensitivity and shall have 30mA or 100mA sensitivity
with type C tripping characteristic for lighting and inductive load circuits.
For three phase circuits a three pole circuit breaker with residual current device clipped to the side
of the breaker can be used. The tripping characteristic shall be similar to what is described above.
The minimum short circuit rating of the breakers shall be 10 KA.
A test push button shall be incorporated to prove breaker operation.
2.17
Time Switch Control

Each time switch shall be of the quartz movement type with minimum 24 hour battery reserve or
operated by a 220 volt synchronous motor and of the type incorporating separate motor supply and
control switch terminals and be with a minimum of a 24 hour self winding clockwork spring reserve.
Unless more sophisticated operation is specified elsewhere, then each time clock shall be capable
of two 'on' and two 'off' operations every twenty-four hour period. Also, any control time switch
incorporated within the panel, shall be complete with an associated bypass selection facility to
manually override 'on/off'.
2.18
Overload Relays
These are to be used in conjunction with motor starters to provide protection against overloads,
phase sequence, phase failure (single phasing) and under voltage conditions.
The relays shall be selected such that the full load current of the equipment protected falls at the
centre of the relays adjustment range.
Incase of Star Delta starter, the overload relays shall be placed on the main's contactor.
2.19
Control Relays
Shall be of the encapsulated plug-in type and incorporate visual indication that the operating coil is
energised.
Bases for relays shall be mounted horizontally, to ensure relay is vertical above the base when the
control cabinet is in its intended location, with screw type terminals, suitable for receipt of spade
type crimped/soldered lugs.
Adjustable timer delay relays used for the star delta starter shall ensure precise reproducibility of
the timing function. The relay shall have a linear setting scale over a 350 deg. rotation by means of
knurled knob with timing guide marks. The relay shall be equipped with two electrically separated
time delayed contact one normally open and one normally close.
2.20
Indication Lamp
These are generally used to indicate main's presence, run, trip, fault and to give fault alarm or
indicate any other function.
Indicator lamps shall be of the low voltage 24 volt transformer with twin LED lamp type and accord
with the signalling colours laid down in BS. 4099. Minimum lens diameter shall be 12.5mm and all
lenses on a panel shall be of a matching size and appearance and removable from the front for
lamp replacement.

July 2015
Page 26 of 30

Terminations shall be screw grip to receive spade typing crimpled/soldered lugs.
2.21
Selector Switch
They shall be of the complete rotary cam type rated to suit item controlled and fitted with pointer
type switching knob. Terminations shall be screw grip to receive spade type crimped/soldered lugs.
Hand off auto selection switch shall have three positions with centre position off and shall be key
operated wherever necessary.
Selector switch when used along with the voltmeter it shall have 8 positions, i.e phase to phase, 3
phase and 2 off position.
2.22
2.23
Accessories
a)
Furnish the following accessories,
b)
Set of extension rails, if required
c)
Hoisting device for removing breakers
d)
Set of test plugs
e)
Levering out device, if required
f)
Manual maintenance closing lever, for electrically operated breakers
g)
Set of special tools and hardware
Energy Monitoring Unit

Digital energy monitoring unit with MODBUS or equivalent communication capabilities shall be
provided in each main LV Panel and as shown on drawings for integration with BMS.
2.24
Switchboard Operator's Mat

All electrical switch cupboards and plantroom switchboard shall be provided with a 1M wide carbon
free rubber mat or mats, having a ribbed upper surface and being of such length to suit the full
operating extent of each switchboard.
The insulating mats shall each be certified to have sustained, without failure, a one minute voltage test
at 2 KV.
2.25
Auto Changeover Panel

General
The Change over panel shall be of mechanically and electrically interlocked type to exclude any
possibility of coupling together the normal and emergency sources.
To ensure continuity of service both circuit breakers shall have two stable position, Closed and
Open. It shall be possible to manually operate each circuit breaker in the event of the absence of
control voltage.
For maintenance purpose, the changer over panel shall have a neutral position with both circuit
breakers in the Open position. It shall also be possible to lock each circuit breaker in the Open
position.

July 2015
Page 27 of 30

Each circuit breaker of the change over panel shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts and alarm
contacts (Tripped status indication).
Construction
Operations of the circuit breakers shall be by individual momentarily energized motor on each
breaker.
The mechanical interlock for 2 circuit breakers side by side may be achieved with two cables.
Changeover panel switch shall be equipped with microprocessors / PLC based controller to carry out
a.
Switching from one source to another depending on the presence of voltage on the
transformer / generator.
b.
Control of engine generating set.
c.
Load shedding and reconnection of non priority circuits.
d.
Switching to the generator source in the event of failure of normal source.
e.
Circuit breaker status indications shall be displayed in front of the controller (On / Off fault).
f.
Test push button shall be provided on the front of the controller to check the transfer from
normal to emergency and return to normal source.
g.
Controller shall be equipped with adjustment of time delays infront.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
After installation and levelling, render the entire switchboard rodent proof by any means of steel
plates,
3.1.2
Provide full length rubber mat in front of switchboard
3.1.3
Installation of switchboard shall be fully in accordance with the Company requirement.

Switchgear and distribution boards shall be surface mounted/free standing type and shall be
mounted on the building structure by means of suitable mild steel straps or angle iron frames.
Where distribution boards or switchgear are required to be directly attached to brickwork etc., the
fixing shall be by means of grouted in bolts, or bolts of the expansion type.
Any live metal in the distribution board shall be screened with insulation material, so that circuit
breakers can be replaced without any danger to the operator.
3.1.4
The circuit breakers shall be situated to allow wiring to be carried out with sufficient slack to enable
them to be removed for inspection without disconnecting any circuit wiring.
3.1.5
All main, submain and final distribution boards shall have a spare capacity and shall also be
provided with enough spare breaker as shown on the drawings.
3.1.6
All panel board and distribution boards shall consist of adequately rated circuit breakers. Circuit
breakers shall be temperature compensated at the manufacturer's works to give the design current
rating at 50 deg. C. Non-compensated breakers will not be approved and a formal certificate will
be required from the manufacturer confirming that the breakers have b0een suitably temperature
compensated.

July 2015
Page 28 of 30

The contractor shall supply and install all panel board with the related voltmeters, ammeters and
energy meters of a type that meets with Local Electricity Authority approval.
Where single core cables enter or leave any item of metal clad switchgear, distribution gear, etc.,
the cable cores shall all pass through the same aperture in the enclosure or case of the unit
concerned, to avoid the setting up of eddy currents. Where separate holes are provided by the
manufacturer for the cables, the holes shall either be cut out to form a continuous slot, or
alternatively the holes shall all be joined together with saw cuts through the solid metal separating
the holes. In all cases end plates shall be of non-ferrous metal.
A special termination arrangement shall be provided to Engineer and Local Electricity Authority
approval at the submain and main panel boards wherever the cable size exceeds the breaker
terminal capacity.
3.2
Tests at Work
3.2.1
Routine tests to standards shall be carried out. Evidence that type test have been carried out
provided they are relatively to the configuration of the equipment offered, may be acceptable to
THE CONSULTANT and shall be made available.
3.2.2
A full visual check and electrical functional test shall be carried out on all apparatus and every
circuit. All wiring shall be inspected. It shall be verified that the FBA is fully in accord with the
requisition. Circuit breakers shall be closed and tripped at their rated minimum and maximum trip
and close supply voltage. Primary and secondary injection tests shall be done on protection relays
and CT circuits and indicating and metering instruments. All labels shall be checked.
3.2.3
The test procedure shall be as follows:
3.2.4
a)
Visual inspection to verify degree of protection creepage and clearance distances.
b)
All conductors and cables are checked for proper routing and all devices for proper
mounting.
c)
Check effectiveness of all mechanical devices, e.g. handles, locks, interlocks, operating
devices, etc.
d)
Check panel conformity to drawing and CONSULTANT requirements.
e)
Megger test all main circuit through to final terminals. Insulation resistance shall exceed 10
meghoms. Record all measurements.
f)
Flash test all main circuit at 2.5 KV for one minute. Record leakage current.
g)
Repeat megger test to verify insulation resistance has not been affected by the dielectric
test.
h)
Continuity tests of each circuit.
i)
Function test of all circuit breakers switches, contacts, etc. and every circuit to verify correct
operation.
j)
Primary and secondary injection tests of all relays, CTs and indicating and metering
instruments.
Prior to energizing the switchboards, perform the following checks on site:

a)
Operate the equipment through all design functions, including remote operation, actuation of
alarm and indicating devices, mechanical and electrical tripping and closing and operation of
the protective devices.

July 2015
Page 29 of 30

3.2.5
b)
Insulation resistance measurements on the buses, phase to phase and phase to ground,
with all breakers in the fully connected position and contacts open.
c)
Control circuit insulation resistance to ground.
d)
Inspect all relays and protective devices, and verify settings in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions or the information in the Coordination study.
e)
Inspect current transformers and relays for correct polarity of connections and the
installation of jumpers on unused current transformer circuits.
f)
Simulate the operations and check the logic of interlocks.
g)
Manually close and trip each breaker checking and adjusting the main contact alignment and
wiring action in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
h)
Check the phasing on each side tie breaker, before closing.
i)
Test protective relay operation for incomer air circuit breakers.
j)
Contact resistance of all busbar branches for all MDBs and SMDBs.
Routine Tests
a)
Following routine tests are to be carried out by the switchgear assembler,
b)
Inspection of assembly including inspection of wiring and electrical operation
c)
Dielectric test:
Checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the protective circuits.
d)
Verification of insulation resistance.


July 2015
Page 30 of 30


LIGHTING FIXTURES
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

LIGHTING FIXTURES
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................3
1.1
Work Included ................................................................................................................................3
1.2
Description Of Work .......................................................................................................................3
1.3
Quality Assurance ..........................................................................................................................3
1.4
Codes and Standards.....................................................................................................................3
1.5
Samples and Shop Drawings .........................................................................................................3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................................................................................................4
2.1
Schedule of Light Fixtures ..............................................................................................................4
2.2
General Notes ................................................................................................................................4
PART 3 - EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................................4

3.1
Installation ......................................................................................................................................4

Lighting Fixtures
July 2015
Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Work Included
1.1.1
1.2
Description Of Work
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of various light fixtures as described in the schedule
of light fixtures and as shown on the electrical lighting layout drawings and related typical
installation drawing including all fixings , accessories, ceiling roses/socket outlets, heat resistant
flexible cables for final connections and terminations.
1.2.1
Supply rings for recessed fixtures, and install in conjunction with the ceiling.
1.2.2
Coordinate with other Divisions to ensure the correct location and installation of the plaster frames
and rings.
1.3
Quality Assurance
following:
a)
b)
Regulations for Electrical equipment of building IEE, BS London
c)
British Standards.
The Quality Control/Quality Assurance duties shall be performed by the Contractor. The system of
1.4
Codes and Standards

CIBSE
Lighting Guides
BS 7671
Requirements for electrical installation.
BS7430
Earthing system
BS6141
Insulated cables and flexible cords for use in high temperature zones.
1.5
Samples and Shop Drawings
1.5.1
Submit shop drawings as specified in relevant section of specifications.
1.5.2
Submit schedules and samples of each fixture specified to the Consultant for approval. No
additional fixtures shall be manufactured until the sample has been approved.
1.5.3
Each approved sample will be retained on the job site until the final completion of the project.
Fixtures which do not match quality and workmanship standards of the sample will be rejected.
1.5.4
Provide with each sample the photometric data.
1.5.5
The lighting layouts shall be carried out based on the recommendation of the Chartered Institution
of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE):

Lighting Fixtures
July 2015
Page 2 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Schedule of Light Fixtures

For the lighting in the back of house areas, please refer to lighting layout drawings and legend
drawing. For the lighitng in the front of house areas and guest rooms, please refer to lighting
specialist documents.
2.2
General Notes
a)
All the tubular fluorescent lamps shall be triphospheric type.
b)
The color temperature of flourescent lamps at chalets, guest room and public areas shall be
as per the interior design requirements.
c)
Dimmable ballasts shall be provided for all fluorescent light fixtures connected to dimmer
control switches/modules.
d)
All ballast for fluorescent tube, compact fluorescent and metal halide of 150W and less shall
be electronic type with international agency approval. Each lamp shall be provided with
separate ballast.
e)
All light fittings brought to site without country of origin certificate shall be rejected
completely.
f)
Fluorescent luminaire dimension and fixing arrangement shall match false ceiling type.
g)
Access panel shall be provided for the battery pack/conversion kit of emergency lighting
wherever required.
h)
All exterior light fixtures must be shielded so that all the light emitted by the fixture, either
direcly or indirectly by reflection or refraction from any part of the fixture, is projected below
the horizontal plan passing through the lower par of the fixture.
i)
Architectural accent lighting must be aimed or shielded to prevent the lighting of the night
sky. Wall washing lights must spill to more than 10% of the lighting past the building faade.
j)
Downward directed lighting must be used for lighting of signage.
k)
The average lighting power density (LPD) should not exceed those values given in DM
Green Buidling regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible to propose high efficient
lighting fixtures to meet the same.
l)
The average lighting power density (LPD) for the exterior lighting shall not exceed the vlaues
given in DM Green Buidling regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible to propose
high efficient lighting fixturs to meet the same.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
Install rows of lighting fixtures accurately in line and level. Any fixtures which are not in the opinion
of the Consultant installed properly shall be taken down and reinstalled to his satisfaction at no
change to the contract sum.
3.1.2
Install surface mounted fixtures tight to the ceiling without showing a space or light leak between
the frame and the ceiling, except where fixtures have an upward light component.

Lighting Fixtures
July 2015
Page 3 of 5

3.1.3
Support suspended fixtures on mild steel threaded rod as recommended by the manufacturer with
a minimum number of two supports.
3.1.4
Where fixtures are chain hung, the chain shall be of No. 10T single jack chain, galvanized, 20 kg
working load limit. Run wires down chains to fixtures in heat resistant cable and attach to chains
with cable clips.
3.1.5
Attach fixtures, boxes or supports to concrete slabs with minimum 6 mm dia. bolts and metal
expansion anchors. Submit samples of anchors for approval before installation.
3.1.6
Locate hangers on the tile centres or intersections. Mount recessed incandescent, troffers and
surface-mounted fixtures in or on full tiles.
3.1.7
Do not mount fixtures above pipes, ducts or ceiling mounted equipment. In the event of
unavoidably tight locations, provide hangers to clear the obstructions. Check layouts of all other
trades on the job and plan cooperatively. Hang fixtures in any room at one height unless indicated
otherwise. Support fixtures independently of the mechanical ducts.
3.1.8
Support all lighting fixtures independently of the suspended ceiling.
3.1.9
Obtain the Consultants approval before making any changes to the layouts.
3.1.10
Install louvres after other construction work has been completed and ready for occupancy. Handle
with clean gloves, never with bare hands. Replace or clean to the Consultants satisfaction any
louvres which are finger printed or otherwise marked.
3.1.11
Install lamps only after luminaires have been cleaned.
3.1.12
Ensure that all lamps are suitable for luminaires before energization.
3.1.13
Ensure that lamps are of the type specified, and report any discrepancies to the Consultant.
3.1.14
Provide 10% spare lamps and 5% of Ballast, fuses, emergency kit for each and every type used.
These lamps are to be handed over to the Consultant on completion of works and issuance of
Preliminary Taking Over Certificate.
3.1.15
Standard Plaster Frames. Provide Plaster Frames for all recessed lighting fixtures installed in
plaster or drywall ceilings. Provide plaster frame designed and fabricated of such material to
preclude the possibility of staining the plaster.
3.1.16
Properly support and align fixtures and provide all necessary steel shapes for support of the
fixtures. Coordinate complete fixture installation with the building construction. Clean and lamp all
lighting fixtures with new lamps immediately prior to final inspection.
3.1.17
Adjust all incandescent fixture sockets to match the lamp specified and aim all adjustable fixtures
as directed by the Consultant.
3.1.18
Square and rectangular fixtures shall be mounted with sides, parallel with ceiling lines.
3.1.19
Orientate the fluorescent lamps of all 600 mm x 600 mm troffers and compact fluorescent
downlights within a single room in the same direction.
3.1.20
All fixtures shall be installed with caution so as to avoid any fingerprints or smudges on the
surfaces of parabolic louvers and downlight reflectors. Any fixtures with fingerprints or smudges
shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Consultant or replaced.
3.1.21
Where special fixtures are to be used in special ceilings, verify all ceiling systems and coordinate
fixture type and accessories prior to ordering fixtures. Coordinate and cooperate with ceiling
supplier in the preparation of ceiling system Shop Drawings.

Lighting Fixtures
July 2015
Page 4 of 5

3.1.22
Install fluorescent fixtures as recommended by the manufacturer or as necessary to provide exact

horizontal alignment, preventing horizontal or vertical deflection or angular jointing of fixtures
suspended in continuous rows.
3.1.23
Provide plug in ceiling roses for all lights mounted in a suspended ceiling. Location of plug in
ceiling rose shall be above ceiling such that it is accessible from the opening of the ceiling. Roses
that are too high or concealed by ducts etc. will not be accepted.

Lighting Fixtures
July 2015
Page 5 of 5


CENTRAL EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By
BEACH RESORT & SPA (JBRS) ON PLOT NO. 3324577, JUMEIRAH 1ST, DUBAI,
FOR GOVT. OF DUBAI REAL ESTATE CORPORATION
CENTRAL EMERGENCY LIGHTING
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 3
1.1
REFERENCE ............................................................................................................................. 3
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORKS ................................................................................................... 3
1.3
QUALITY CONTROL/ASSURANCE ...................................................................................... 4
1.4
SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................ 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................... 5

2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................... 5
2.2
MODULAR CENTRAL BATTERY PANELS ........................................................................... 6
2.3
CENTRAL MONITORING DEVICE ......................................................................................... 8
2.4
SLAVE EMERGENCY LUMINAIRE ........................................................................................ 8
2.5
SLAVE EXIT LUMINAIRE......................................................................................................... 8
2.6
DECORATIVE EXIT LUMINAIRE TYPE EDGE ILLUMINATED. ........................................ 9
2.7
HIGH FREQUENCY ELECTRONIC CONTROL GEAR ...................................................... 9
2.8
SYSTEM OF WIRING ............................................................................................................... 9
2.9
BMS INTEGRATION ................................................................................................................. 9
PART 3 -EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................................. 10

3.1
INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................... 10
3.2
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ...................................................................................... 10
3.3
TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION........................................................................................... 10
3.4
WARRANTY............................................................................................................................. 10
PART 4- FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .................................................................................................................. 11

July 2015
Page 1 of 10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Reference
1.2
Description of Works
1.2.1
Supply, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance during warrantee period of

the central battery emergency lighting system as specified hereafter, as indicated in the
relevant electrical system drawing and to CONSULTANT approval.
Scope of work shall include but not limited to the following:
1.
All slave emergency and exit luminaries complete with all accessories.
2.
System components required to connect one lamp of all light fixtures selected for
emergency lighting including light sensing module, address module etc.
3.
Central monitoring computer system including system software, printer, interfacing

modules and all related accessories in the control room.
1.2.2
The Emergency lighting system and all its components shall be designed and installed to
meet the local civil defence requirements and the respective DIN/VDE 0108 & BS5266
standards applicable to this project. The product shall be approved by Abu Dhabi Civil
Defence Authority.
1.2.3
Emergency lighting shall fulfill the following functions:

a)
Illuminate the escape routes.
b)
Indicate the escape route direction clearly
c)
Provide Exit signs on all Exits
d)
Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment and other life saving equipment
on the premises are illuminated during Power failure period of time.
1.2.4
The central battery panels shall be located at each floor in the electrical room with each
panel appropriately designed to ensure that failure of one panel shall not result in total
emergency lighting supply failure of the entire building.
1.2.5
The emergency back up duration time shall be 3 hours with 100% light output of connected
light fittings .
1.2.6
Indicate the escape route direction clearly as per the requirements of the NFPA.
1.2.7
Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment's and other life saving equipments on
the emises are illuminated as required.
1.2.8
Provide emergency illumination in Electrical rooms and substations.
1.2.9
Interface and intercommunication with other Extra Low Voltage (ELV) systems through the
Building Integration System (BIS).

July 2015
Page 2 of 10
1.3
1.3.1
The Quality Control/Assurance duties shall be performed by the Contractor. The system of
Quality Control/Assurance verification by the Contractor shall be in accordance with ISO
9000 standards of Quality Assurance.
1.3.2
All products used in the emergency lighting system shall be manufactured by an ISO9011
certified company, complying with the relevant VDE/DIN/BS/EN standards and shall bear the
CE certification for Electro-Magnetic compatibility. The product shall be field proven in the
Middle East.
1.3.3
Design Criteria
Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials
furnished under requirements of these specifications shall conform to latest publications or
standard rules of the following:
a)
DEWA regulations for electrical installation works.
b)
c)
Etisalat Standards and requirements.
d)
British standards and its related code of practices.
c)
British approvals service for Electric Cables (BASEC).
d)
The system shall be in compliance with all the requirements of European standards
EN DIN50081 & will have EMC compatibility as per EN 550011, 61000 (3-2) (4-2) (44), ENV50140 & EN50141
EN 60146
Series Semiconductor converters
EN 60598-1
Luminaries-Part 1: General requirements and tests ( IEC 598-1)
EN 60598-2-22
Part-2 : section 22: Luminaires for emergency lighting
EN 60896-1
Stationary lead acid batteries-General requirements and

method of test ( IEC 896-1)
EN 60529
Degree of protection provided by enclosures
EN 50171
Central power supply systems
BS 5266
Emergency lighting
BS 5499
Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols
1.3.4
The emergency lighting system and all its components shall be designed and installed to
meet the local civil defence requirements and the respective NFPA 101 standards applicable
to this Project.
1.3.5
The system shall have the approval of the Local Civil Defence Authority.
1.3.6
All products used in the emergency lighting system shall be manufactured by an IS0 9001
certified company, complying with the relevant VDE/DIN/BS/EN standards and shall bear the
CE certification for Electro-Magnetic compatibility.

July 2015
Page 3 of 10
1.3.7
All products shall be sourced either directly from the manufacturer or from authorized
Dealer/agent.
1.4
Submittals
1.4.1
Contractor shall submit all items in accordance with the requirements of Division 1,
Submittals and shall include but not be limited to the following:
a)
Model numbers of all components furnished on the job.
b)
Manufacturers original catalog and technical data sheets for all components.
c)
Input power requirements for all system components.
d)
Battery sizing calculation
e)
Complete engineered drawings indicating:
Manufacturer model numbers and specifications.
Dimensions, layouts, installation details.
Point-to-point wiring diagrams for all system devices.
Termination details for all system devices.
Single-line system architecture drawings representing the entire system.
Interfaces with all sub-systems.
Schedule of ballasts to be used for the various light fixtures
f)
Three (3) sets of the Manufacturers Users Manuals and Installation Manuals.
g)
Course outlines for each of the end user training programs. The course outlines
shall include the course duration, location, pre-requisites, and a brief description of
the subject matter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
System Description
2.1.1
General
The central battery system and associated slave luminaires will cover the Emergency & Exit
luminaires as detailed in the drawing and specifications. The Central Battery Panels will be of
modular nature with plug-in-components for the ease of maintenance and reduced downtime.
Emergency lighting will be appropriately installed throughout the building and paths of
egress to ensure safety for occupants and to facilitate safe evacuation from buildings in the
event of emergency conditions during loss of normal lighting through power failure. The
system will comply with international IES standards and relevant codes.
These emergency and exit fittings will be of the type suitable for central emergency systems
and will be control-wired for voltage sensing from the adjacent general lighting circuit.

July 2015
Page 4 of 10
Emergency lights will have minimum 180 minutes battery duration under power failure
conditions and installed to:
Clearly and unambiguously indicate routes for escape and exit from the buildings.
Provide sufficient illumination along escape routes to enable safe movement to

points of exit.
Illuminate corridor intersections, stairs and wherever a change in floor level occurs.
Provide adequate emergency lighting in plant and substation areas for safe
movement.
Illuminate where fire alarm call-points and fire fighting equipment is located.
Directional pictograph exit signs will be permanently illuminated and installed where they will
be easily viewable within buildings and at external exit doors. Exit signs will be internally
illuminated
2.2
Modular Central Battery Panels

Each central emergency battery supply panels shall be used for supply, automatic testing and
monitoring of maximum 20 no. Escape route, EXIT and safety luminaries in each circuit.
Minimum one number panel shall be provided in each floor of the building, however exact no.
of panels shall be determined as per the detailed design based on the CONSULTANT
approved product. Panels shall be located inside electrical rooms and a trunking shall be
provided inside elect. room as a riser to enable connection of panels located in different floors.
Input Voltage
Output mains
Output Emergency
:
:
:
220/240V AC
240V AC
240V DC
The battery backup required for the complete system is for a duration of three hours with 100%
light output on connected fittings.
a)
Mechanical Construction
Sheet steel powder coated housing to IP21. Separate compartment shall be provided for
batteries. Panel should be suitable for wall mounting and panel door will have transparent
window to view optical failure/status indication and shall be provided with printed diagram on
the internal cover.
The electronic compartment shall have large cabling compartment with cable entries from
top with four or more undrilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming cables and
looping circuits shall be connected on protected and fused terminals as per ENVDE0100. All
outgoing luminaries circuits shall be connected direct to relevant components via plug in
type terminals.
b)
Electrical Construction
The system shall be of modular construction with all modules being plug in type
encapsulated design. The outgoing circuits shall be fed through changeover modules. Each
module shall be capable of switching two separate circuits with maximum load of 3 amps or
20 number light fixtures connected to it. Connection of luminaries of all switching modes
shall be possible in each circuit. Change over modules shall have no load and short circuit
protection with independent fuses for mains and battery supply and shall have status
indication for operation and failure.

July 2015
Page 5 of 10
Each panel shall have maintenance free sealed, lead acid batteries, with 10 years service
life at 25 degree C, 120% capacity to manufacturer standard and with enough capacity to
light up all connected lights for 3 hours duration with 100% light output on all connected
luminaries and with sufficient nos. of converters forming 12 independent circuit suitable for
connecting maximum 20 nos. of luminaire on each circuit.
Where the space required for the batteries does not permit the installation of same in
standard enclosure, it shall be installed in a separate cabinet similar to the central battery
panel cabinet.
c)
Battery Charger
The plug-in-type battery charger should be high efficiency temperature controlled charger,
working to IU characteristics. It will have built in deep discharge protection for long Battery
life. It will be suitable for fast recharging based on Battery status and time controlled trickle
charging current. It will supervise the battery status such as low/high battery block voltage,
failures within charging circuit and relay the faults to control module.
The charger shall be designed for a 90% recharge of a fully discharged battery set within 20
hours.
It shall be complete with the following:
a)
Earth leakage monitoring
b)
LED indication for operation,charger ON, Booster ON, Mains Operation, Battery
capacity 10 %, 50%, 100% Charging failure, Insulation fault
c)
Push button to simulate earth leakage failures
Each panel shall be provided with a non-switched spur outlet next to the panel.
d)
Sub-circuit Monitoring
An electronically regulated monitoring loop output shall be included to monitor the mains
failure at distribution/sub-distribution board. The relevant distribution boards/sub-distribution
board should be fitted with subcircuit monitoring device.
e)
Control Module
Each panel will have plug-in-type freely programmable control module with two line liquid
crystal display and constant memory back up and has the following main functions:
1.
Monitor and control all test cycles and functions
2.
Indicate every status of the system and the connected luminaire
3.
Communicate and program the function of the addressable electronic ballast on every
slave luminaire
4.
Programming and status of the sub circuit monitoring inputs and the associated
luminaires
5.
Battery charge current.

July 2015
Page 6 of 10
It displays battery voltage level, battery charge current, required battery charging
time/duration time withdrawn battery current in test or emergency modes, charge failures,
interrupted battery charge circuit, luminaire failure with luminaire address, function test,
battery test. Both tests can be manually programmed. The control module shall be linked to
the central monitoring device installed at the control room and shall have three L.E.D.s for
status indication of mains supply ON/OFF, luminaire or unit failure and battery supply.
Programming of the control module shall be possible through a smart card and all the
information including the logbook shall be stored on smart card, which is readable on PC
directly.
2.3
Central Monitoring Device

The central monitoring shall be via a central group monitoring hardware & software,
monitoring & programming unit. The unit shall be in the form of a built in panel mounted
monitor, and keyboard. The unit shall operate with latest visualization software to give
detailed address & information of all luminaires connected to system. The program shall be
user friendly with visually clear fault indication screens on the monitor.
2.4
Slave Emergency Luminaire

(Suitable for connection across central battery system)
Ceiling Recessed Mounted (All False Ceiling Area)
It will be non maintained fully recessed type slave luminaire with addressable low loss
electronic ballast which can communicate with central control module. Luminaire housing will
be plastic polycarbonate housing and diffuser with downward light distribution and finishes to
CONSULTANT approval. For wattage and type of emergency lighting fixtures, please refer to
the floors layouts and legend drawing.
Protection class II, protection IP20
Supply voltage 230V/240V AC/DC
Protection shall be of IP54 at internal wet areas/bathrooms.
The luminaire shall comply with the requirements of EN60598
Electronic ballast shall comply with the requirements of EN60298/60294
EMC or EMI protection to EN55015
Surface Mounting Type (Plant Rooms and staircases)
The luminaire shall have ingress protection of IP54 or IP65 based on the location. Rest of the
features will be as detailed above but surface mounted type. For wattage and type of
emergency lighting fixtures, please refer to the floors layouts and legend drawing.
2.5
Slave Exit Luminaire

(suitable for connection across central battery system)
Ordinary Type (Service areas, plantrooms etc).
This luminaire will be of the same type as detailed in section 2.4 except following:
It will be maintained surface mounted type luminaire
Minimum viewing distance 30 meters

July 2015
Page 7 of 10
The diffuser shall have EXIT Legend in Arabic and English with running man and directional
arrow with colour conforming to ISO 3864.
2.6
Decorative Exit luminaire type edge illuminated.

Exit light type shall be maintained exclusive edge light with acrylic glass panel. The housing
will be slim metal housing with snap on facility panels. For wattage and type of emergency
lighting fixtures, please refer to the layouts and legend drawing.
The luminaire shall comply the requirements of EN60598
Electronic ballast shall comply with the requirements of EN60298/60294
EMC or EMI protection to EN55015
The luminaire should have facility for ceiling mounting or recessed ceiling mounting or wall
mounting with bracket or pendulum set single sided or double sided as per the requirements
and as indicated on the drawing.
2.7
High Frequency Electronic Control Gear

All safety luminaries to be connected to the central emergency battery system shall be with
high frequency electronic control gear.
The high frequency electronic ballast shall be with monitoring facility, easy accessable
address module, and shall have an automatic cut out fuse for failures within lamp circuit.
It shall be built to EN 60298/60294 and EN 60924/60925.
EMC protection shall be to EN 55015.
2.8
System of Wiring
Wiring, both power and control wiring between the central battery, substation panels and
luminaires shall be carried out in retardant Pirelli FP200/FP400 or equivalent cable of
suitable size as per the local civil defence requirements.
3 core fire resistant cables with earth wire shall be provided to feed substations from central
battery panel. Cable size selection details must be provided based on the electrical load of
each substation.
EL and EXIT lights shall be connected in same circuit as shown on drawings. Separate
wiring shall be carried out for AC System as required by the manufacturer.
For AC Systems separate fire proof cabling shall be provided for monitoring / control wiring
as required by the AC System manufacturer.
50% cross zoning (i.e., connect emergency / exit lights alternatively) shall be considered for
emergency lighting circuits in all floors as per Civil Defence requirements.
2.9
BMS Integration
Central battery emergency lighting system shall be integrated with BMS system as detailed in
BMS specification.

July 2015
Page 8 of 10
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
3.1.1
The emergency light shall be connected such that in case of power failure in any of the area,
the emergency light installed in that area shall be energized.
3.1.2
Wiring of the emergency light shall be carried out using fire resistant cable.
3.2
Testing And Commissioning
3.2.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for testing and commissioning of the installation in
accordance with all applicable documents in the Contract set.
a)
Testing shall be comprehensive and sufficient to demonstrate compliance with each

requirement and as per system manufacturer recommendations.
b)
A proposed test plan shall be submitted to the CONSULTANT or Owners

representative for approval before commencement of final test.
c)
Final tests shall be conducted in the presence of the CONSULTANT or Owners

representative.
3.3
Training And Instruction
3.3.1
Operator training shall consist of a two days course conducted on-site by a factory trained
professional instructor. Training conducted by installers, technicians, or project managers is
unacceptable.
3.3.2
Training materials shall consist of the following:

a)
Formal course outline and agenda
b)
Operator training student guide for each student.
c)
Hands-on practice with on-line equipment.
d)
Written examinations.
The training course shall be a minimum of two contiguous business days.

Additional equipment Video Imaging training sessions shall be made available to the Owner
if necessary, at no additional cost.
3.4
Warranty
3.4.1
All equipment furnished under this contract shall be warranted for a period of twelve (12)
months from the date of final Owner acceptance of the system.
a)
Respond to service requests on-site, if required.
b)
Replace or repair defective components as required.

July 2015
Page 9 of 10
PART 4- FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
4.1
Manufacturer's Field Services: Supervision of unit installation, connections, and adjustments

by a factory-authorized service representative. Report results in writing.
4.2
Tests: Perform tests listed below according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test unit
functions, operations, and protective features. Adjust to ensure operation complies with the
specifications. Perform tests on completion of unit installation and after building circuits have
been energized. Provide instruments to permit accurate observation of tests. Include the
following tests:
1.
Simulate Malfunctions: Verify protective device operation.
2.
Demonstrate low-battery-voltage shutdowns, and transfers -due to normal source

failure and restoration.
3.
Verify emergency-supply duration.
4.
Test for Successful Supply: Operate each type of load served by the unit for this
Project without symptoms of abnormal supply such as noise, vibration, or pulsation
of the load or its output. All light fixtures , ceiling roses, modules, wires, etc is to be
identified.
- End of Section -

July 2015
Page 10 of 10


LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.6
WORK INCLUDED............................................................................................................................................. 3
DESCRIPTION OF WORKS ................................................................................................................................ 3
QUALITY ASSURANCE ..................................................................................................................................... 3
CODES AND STANDARDS ................................................................................................................................. 3
SHOP DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................................ 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS.................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.1
2.2
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM........................................................................................................................... 4

DIMMING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................... 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................................... 10

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................... 10
TESTING & COMMISSIONING .......................................................................................................................... 10
SPARE PARTS/EXTRA MATERIALS ................................................................................................................. 11
WARRANTY ................................................................................................................................................... 11

July 2015
Page 1 of 10

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Work Included
1.1.1
1.2
The contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and maintain during warranty period intelligent
lighting control for the various areas as indicated in the lighting layout drawings and as specified herein.
System shall be complete with lighting control panels, photo cells, Presence Infrared Sensor (PIR),
override switches, all the required control and power cabling and terminations.
Lighting control shall be using PIR sensors, addressable relay/contactors, timers and photocells.
Location of the override lighting control switches shall be as instructed by the consultant.
All external lighting including but not limited to the following, shall be controlled by the intelligent lighting
control systems via photo cells and timers.
1.3
Roads and parking area lighting
Walkway lighting
Quality Assurance
Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under
requirements of these specifications shall conform to latest publications or standard rules of the
following:
a)
b)
Department of Civil Defense requirements
1.4
Codes and Standards

The following codes and standards to the extent specified herein, form a part of this specification.
When an edition date is not indicated for a Code or Standard the latest edition enforce at the time of
proposal submitted shall apply.
IEC 60947-4
IEC 60947-5-1, IEC337-1,
Contactors
IEC 60536
Indication lamps, Push buttons, switches
BSEN 60529
BSEN60439
Low voltage switchgear and control gear
BSEN 61008
BSEN 60898
Miniature circuit breakers
BS7671
17TH Edition, IEE wiring regulations

July 2015
Page 2 of 10

SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following drawings and documents related with each electrical system
for Consultant approval:
Test Certificates.
1.6
Shop Drawings
Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings including but not limited to the following for
CONSULTANT approval:
a)
Single line system architecture drawings representing the entire system and including all
system components.
b)
Point to point wiring diagrams for all system devices.
c)
Floor layout drawings indicating all system components such as control panels routing of
network cabling, intelligent switches, etc.
d)
Interfacing details with all other systems including fire alarm.
e)
Typical installation details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.1.1
General
2.1.1.1
A two-wire bus cable shall link all the system devices (input, output, system support, and networking,
etc.) to each other. The bus cable shall be a twisted pair, screened /unscreened with solid conductors
and shall be capable of handling information exchange and supplying power to the bus devices. The
bus cable shall be laid in the building in the form of a linear, star or tree structure similar to the power
mains. The system shall support free wiring topology.
2.1.1.2
The system shall be completely de-centralized and programmable. The programming shall be
implemented via a computer located at a control location and having access level passwords. Any
device in the system shall be accessed for programming from the PC location without having to
manipulate the device locally.
Each device in the system shall be addressable via a software programmable physical address. Any
device in the system shall communicate with any other device via software programmable group
addresses. Each individual device will respond to only those group addresses for which they are
programmed to do so. There shall be a non-volatile memory storing the physical address, group
addresses & other software parameters for every device, thus making it intelligent.
2.1.1.3
It shall be possible to program any of the devices on-line at the working site without affecting any of the
system devices or the system operation as well as off-line prior to dispatch of the material to site.
2.1.1.4
The entire system shall consist of bus lines connected to each other via line couplers that act as
network filters and also provide communication between devices in different lines. In the event of
failure of a device in one line, only the control functions controlled by that device shall be affected and
the device failure report shall be printed out with the date and time of failure.

July 2015
Page 3 of 10

2.1.1.5
Power supply module shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturers. In case of power
failure, the operation and programming of the system shall not be impaired.
2.1.1.6
The diagnostic modules shall scan the system for any faults in the bus wiring, failure of any of the
devices and generate reports displaying the physical address of non-communicating devices.
2.1.1.7
Each of the devices shall have a built-in push button along with a LED. The LED shall lit in the event
the push button is pressed and if there is power to the device, thus depicting that the device is
communicating in the system.
2.1.2
Control System Concept
2.1.2.1
The programmable lighting management system shall consists of three levels of control:
2.1.3
a)
Central PC software for occupancy based control and manual override by the operator. The
software shall consist of graphics based overview of the entire building, floors and going up to
the individual rooms. It shall have the necessary PIR sensors to control the circuits in the form
of various groups.
b)
All other circuits which are controlled based on daylight, local switches, etc. shall at all times be
working in the standalone Auto mode with monitoring and override control possible from the
central PC.
Lighting Control Concept

The low voltage system switches shall have indication for On and Off status with Red and Green
colors with a possibility to reverse them via software. In the case of circuits switched in parallel from
multiple signals, the switch LED shall display the true status of the circuit based on the latest signal
sent to the particular circuit. It shall be possible to control any circuit in the system from any of the
switch channels to ensure all channels are available for entire control of the system.
Lighting control at various areas shall meet DM green building requirements and shall be generally as
indicated hereunder:
2.1.3.1
2.1.3.2
2.1.3.3
2.1.3.4
Back of House Corridors

a)
All lighting circuits shall be controlled through motion sensors and programmable timer channel.
b)
Actual time schedule shall be programmable as per End-user requirements.
Staircase
a)
Lighting control shall be by timer and intelligent push button switch.
b)
All lights, which shall be ON by the push button switch shall be automatically turned OFF after a
predetermined time period which is programmable be the end-user.
Parking and Driveways

a)
All lighting circuits shall be controlled through motion sensors and programmable timer
channel.
b)
Actual time schedule shall be programmable as per end user requirements
Service Lobbies and Service Corridors

a)
All lighting circuits shall be controlled through motion sensors and programmable timer
channel.

July 2015
Page 4 of 10

b)
Actual time schedule shall be programmable as per end use requirements.
c)
Additional lighting control modules shall be provided so that at least 75% of the lighting in
corridors and common areas shall be switched off when the areas are unoccupied. Override
switches shall be located at space entrance.
2.1.3.6 Front of House Areas including Entrances, Corridors and Lift Lobbies
The lighting control strategy for front of house areas shall be done in accordance with the lighting
consultant and end user requirements.
2.1.3.4
Offices, LV room, Transformers room, Plant rooms, Main Kitchen, Laundry, Stores
All lighting circuits shall be controlled via local conventional switches.
2.1.3.5
External Lighting
The lighting control strategy for front of house areas shall be done in accordance with the lighting
consultant and end user requirements
2.1.4
Central Controller Software
2.1.4.1
The Central PC will comprise of Pentium IV with 21 monitor with at least 2.0 GB RAM and 250 GB
hard disk or a configuration required by the graphics software.
2.1.4.2
The software shall administer various access levels for different user accounts to ensure responsibility
and accountability in the operation of the system.
2.1.4.3
The software shall provide customized graphics screens giving a full graphics display of the entire
building along with floor plans, partition layouts, circuit layouts in the individual rooms, etc.
2.1.4.4
The software shall provide real time monitoring of the entire system and shall display active status of
each lighting circuit along with the run time hours and generate maintenance schedules when the
circuits have reached their threshold set points for run hours.
2.1.4.5
It shall be possible for the user to access any individual room for monitoring and controlling the lighting
circuits. The various screens shall be freely linked to each other be reached by a navigator.
2.1.4.6
Each circuit shall be graphically customized to contain operational characteristics available in the
system or by a link to an external database. This information shall be displayed by passing the mouse
cursor over the respective circuits.
2.1.4.7
The software shall have the interface to import and administrate graphics files having standard formats
such as Bitmap (BMP), Windows Metafile (WMF) and Enhanced Metafile (EMF). Further, it shall be
possible to add a huge variety of active elements to these files for visualization and easy
understanding.
2.1.4.8
The software shall enable repeat interrogatory sweeps to be programmed through the night or any
other times to extinguish lighting which may have been left on locally.
2.1.4.9
The timer library in the software shall be programmable. It shall have the necessary timer modules to
control any of the circuits individually or in the form of groups, which can be selected and changed as
and when desired. It shall be possible to pre-program the time channels in advance with special holiday
programs, weekly programs, etc. up to the year 2040.
2.1.4.10 The system shall be interlocked with the fire alarm system so as to switch all lights ON in case of fire.

July 2015
Page 5 of 10

2.1.5
Lighting Control Modules (For On-Off Switching Control)
2.1.5.1
The lighting control modules shall be DIN rail mounted consisting of either four or eight individually
programmable integral relays (contactors).
2.1.5.2
Each of these contactors shall be rated 16 A/AC1, suitable for switching loads with high switch-on
peaks, and capable of switching resistive, inductive, incandescent, and fluorescent loads without any
derating. It shall also have a capacity load rating of at least 200 microfarads.
2.1.5.3
The output states of each of the four relays shall be displayed on the front. Each of these relays shall
be latch-on type with manual operation (override) possible even without power to the system.
2.1.5.4
In the event of power failure or bus wiring failure or control module failure, each of the four relays shall
attain a pre-programmed fail-safe position (On, Off or As it is).
2.1.5.5
The control modules shall be capable of been programmed with different applications to suit site
requirements. The application for which a relay has been programmed shall apply irrespective of the
signal from which it is switched.
2.1.5.6
Each of the relays shall be capable of being programmed with its own On and Off delays which is
applicable irrespective of the signal from which the relays are switched.
2.1.5.7
The control modules shall receive its operating power supply from the same bus cable without any
other power supply.
2.1.5.8
Each of the control module shall have its own individual address and shall be capable of being
programmed from the central PC for the purpose of changing parameters without the need to access
the module locally.
2.1.6
Lighting Control Panels (LCPS).

There shall be a dedicated Lighting Control Panel (LCP) for every DB. The LCP shall house the system
devices and the related control equipment depending on the no. of circuits being controlled. This is to
ensure the power wiring between the DBs and the control modules inside the LCPs is kept to a
minimum. The LCPs shall be surface mounted IP65 polycarbonate enclosures together with built-in
DIN-rails for easy installation of the control equipment.
2.1.7
Presence Infrared Sensors (PIR)

Presence sensor device with sensor angle 180 degrees is used to send switch-on commands to
actuators via the i-bus EIB. The switch-off behaviour is defined in the actuator. Twinlight sensor and
after-running time are adjustable; manual operation for ON / AUTOMATIC / OFF must be possible.
Installation recessed ceiling mounted, wall mounted or external weather proof mounting to engineers
approval. Supplier must provide all mounting accessories required.
Sensing
Passive infrared motion detector 180 horizontal
Power supply
Via EIB Bus / C Bus Ambient temperature
Operation
5C to + 45C
Storage
25C to + 55C
Coverage
Minimum 18m range
Transport
25C to + 70C

July 2015
Page 6 of 10

Operating and display elements
1 slide switch
1 adjustment potentiometer 1 adjustment potentiometerProtection type
OFF / AUTOMATIC / ON
(can be locked in automatic mode)
For Twilight sensor : 51000 lux.
For afterrunning time:10s to 17min.
IP 20 according to DIN 40 050
Attached to the flush-mounted bus couple
Note :
Equivalent C Bus technology also acceptable.
2.1.8
System Programming
The contractor shall allow for programming the system to operate as per the Consultant instruction at
site and shall allow for reprogramming of the system if necessary during the maintenance period in
accordance to the end user requirements.
2.2
Dimming System
2.2.1
General
The contractor shall supply, install and commission dimmer racks as specified hereunder and as
indicated on the drawings and inline with the specialist lighting designer drawings and specifications
for all front of house areas including F&B outlets, function and public spaces, etc.
2.2.2
Dimmer Modules Cases

Dimmer Modules shall be encased in Anodised Aluminium or polycarbonate ABS cases with solid
aluminium chases cases. The power control circuitry shall be protected from accidental interference
by means of a one section cover. All adjustment potentiometers where required shall be accessible
through this cover to allow the setting of lighting levels and maximum/minimum levels.
Units shall be completely pre-wired by the manufacturer. The contractor shall be required to provide
input feed wiring, load wiring and control wiring which terminates to a set of clearly marked low voltage
terminals.
Units shall contain input miniature circuit breakers rated for electrical safety and protection.
Units shall contain a bypass switch which enables the power to bypass the load control circuitry.
Internal wire used within the units shall be to British Standards and have a 105 deg. C temperature
rating. All wiring shall be harnessed with cable ties or wire ducts at sufficient intervals to present a
neat orderly appearance. All connections made during installation shall be clearly labelled terminals.
Encapsulated thyristor pairs/ IGBTs shall be used to control the power applied to the load. They shall
be capable of withstanding surges without impairment to performance.
The units shall be voltage regulated so that a + 10% change in line voltage shall cause no more than
a + 0.5% change in output voltage.
The units shall provide a smooth and continuous "squarelaw" dimming characteristics throughout the
operating range.
The units shall be 98% or greater efficiency at full intensity and full load.

July 2015
Page 7 of 10

Units shall operate at 0-40 deg. C ambient environment and racks shall be cooled by natural
convection or by forced ventilation.
The units shall incorporate filtering circuits that reduce RF1 interface to levels deemed acceptable by
EN50081-1, EN50082-1, IEC1000-2-2
The units shall be derated by 50% when used for controlling inductive loads so as to avoid nuisance
tripping of MCBs. They should also be capable of controlling Fluorescent Loads with suitable ballasts.
Dimmer modules shall be rated as shown in the load schedules and shall be provided for each circuit
as a single channel control.
2.2.3
Dimmer Racks
Dimmers must be housed in sheet steel purpose built racks which will accept plug in dimmer modules,
microprocessors and primary circuit MCB. The rack should be wired for front access with connections
for extra low voltage control and load wiring, separate gland plates should be provided at top and
bottom of rack for control and mains/load wiring.
Earth leakage protection should be provided as incomer.
2.2.4
Microprocessors
Control of the dimmers shall be through channel microprocessors linked with addressable control
plates.
Microprocessors shall be of high reliability with self checks to ensure system integrity in all
environments. Storage of default levels shall be through non volatile memory, that retains these
settings even when power is switched off. It shall be possible to programme a minimum of 100
scenes. The control signal to the dimmer modules shall be 0.5V.
A 2 wire balanced data high way is to be used between control plates and the microprocessors.
The microprocessor shall be capable of receiving programmed instructions from the control plates to
control.
a)
Level Intensities
b)
Fade Rates
c)
Individual Scenes
d)
Individual Channels/Circuits
e)
Link scenes with preprogrammed scenes fading from one to another on a time basis.
The system shall be interlocked with the fire alarm system such that in case of fire the lighting level
shall go up to full intensity regardless of the set illumination level.
2.2.5
Hand Held Programmer

A hand held programmer shall be supplied for programming of the system.
The unit shall be designed for ease of operation and shall not require complex programming.
The unit shall be capable of programming lighting level information, fade rates and link scenes for all
dimmer channels on a particular data highway.

July 2015
Page 8 of 10

Programming can be performed either 'on line' or 'off line'.
2.2.6
Dimmer Controls
Multiple Scene control with illuminated Led Push buttons giving 'scene 1; scene 2; scene 3; scene 4;
off plus individual raise/lower push buttons for each circuit being controlled from the plate and with a
jack socket to accept the data plug from the hand held programmer shall be used. The plate finish of
the controller shall be similar to the adjacent electrical accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
Design, manufacture and method of installation of all system components shall conform to latest rules
and requirements of the following:
a)
Local Electricity Authority
b)
Civil Defense
c)
Relevant BS codes
d)
IEE wiring regulations
e)
CIBSE
Contractor shall install all lighting control system equipment shown on the relevant drawings and
required as per the specifications described in this section, all as per manufacturers
recommendations and complying with the above regulations.
3.2
Testing & Commissioning

a)
Check for installation of lighting control panels a site.
b)
Check for installation of devices in the panel and in the field.
c)
Check the wiring and termination of the bus cable for all the system devices.
d)
Check the wiring and termination of the circuits in the lighting control panel.
e)
Manually override each circuit using the override On-Off switch provided for each circuit in the
relay output module.
f)
Test the respective lighting circuits to be ON as per the Electrical Load Schedule provided by
the M & E contractor.
g)
Switch On the power supply to the lighting control panel with system devices.
h)
Program the presence sensors as per Consultant requirements for standalone operation of the
lighting control system.
i)
Switch ON & OFF the individual gang of the LV Push Button Switches & check that the
respective programmed circuits are switched ON & OFF accordingly.
j)
Switch ON the power supply for standalone operation of the Lighting Control System.
k)
Demonstrate and explain the system operation to the site technicians.
l)
Hand-over the control system to Consultant authorized personnel.

July 2015
Page 9 of 10

3.3
Spare Parts/Extra Materials
3.3.1
The contractor shall supply to the owners stores spare parts for two years operation, from the date of
final handing over of the project, as generally, but not limited to the items listed hereunder:
3.4
a)
A minimum of 1% of the total number of PIR sensors, switches, contactors, etc. for any other
accessories used in the project.
b)
Any other items as recommended by the manufacturer to cover the period indicated above
and to consultant approval.
Warranty
From the date of issuance of the Taking over certificate the system must be unconditionally
warranted for minimum of 2 years.
- End of Section -

July 2015
Page 10 of 10


BALLASTS
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

BALLASTS
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
Reference ........................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2
Description of Works .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.3
Quality Control/Assurance ................................................................................................................. 3
1.4
Codes and Standards......................................................................................................................... 3
1.5
Submittals ........................................................................................................................................... 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1
Materials ............................................................................................................................................. 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................................... 5

3.1
H.I.D. Ballasts..................................................................................................................................... 5
3.2
Execution ............................................................................................................................................ 5

Ballasts
July 2015
Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Reference
1.2
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of various ballasts for the light fixtures as per the
light fixture schedule and details provided in specification.
1.3
1.3.1
following:
1.3.2
The manufacturer of the fluorescent ballasts shall provide a full 5 years manufacturer's warranty.
1.4
Codes and Standards

Fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be of warm start type and shall comply in all respects with the
following standards:
a)
EN60928 General requirements and safety, alternating current AC
b)
IEC60929 Operation and performance, alternating current AC
c)
EN60924 General requirements and safety, direct current DC
d)
IEC60925 Operation and performance, direct current DC
e)
EN61000-3-2 Harmonic suppression
f)
EN61547 Immunity
g)
EN55015 Interference suppression < 30 MHz
h)
IEC55022 Interference suppression > 30 MHz
i)
Suitable for use in emergency lighting installations in accordance with VDE0108
j)
ENEC tested
k)
CE mark
1.5
Submittals
1.5.1

recommendations(from the equipment manufacturer), catalogues etc.

Ballasts
July 2015
Page 2 of 4

1.5.2
Test Reports
Consultant. Provide other tests reports necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety,
1.5.3
1.5.4
Shop Drawings
Detailed shop drawings shall be submitted indicating typical installation details and wiring diagrams
of the various ballasts and their connection in light circuits
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
High Frequency Electronic Ballasts (Fixed Output):
High frequency electronic ballast must be used for fluorscent lights and metal halide of 150W and
less.
The operating temperature range should be -25C to +50C but preferably +60C.
a)
The ballast should have constant light output independent of voltage fluctuations in mains
voltage (198-254V)
b)
It shall be operating in the voltage range 198-254V 50/60Hz
c)
The ballast shall be suitable for DC voltage in the range of 154-310V (lamp start 200-310V).
d)
The ballast shall have a non-audible noise level less than 28dB.
e)
The ballast shall have a power factor of > 0.95
f)
Every ballast shall be distinctively marked with the month and year of manufacture in
addition to the standard markings. The standard markings have to include country of origin.
Only European, U.S.A. and Australian country of origin is acceptable.
g)
The operating frequency has to be equal or greater than 42kHz.
h)
It must have safe switch off of defective lamps and safe shut down when the lamp comes to
the end of its lamp life
i)
It must have automatic re-start after lamp replacement
j)
The ballast must have overvoltage protection 320V AC for 1 hour
k)
For safety reasons the ballast has to start within the following time:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
l)
0.5 seconds for T5 lamps

1.5 seconds for TC-L compact lamps
1.0 seconds for TC-D, TC-S, TC-T compact lamps
The T5 ballasts must have built in cut-off technology (cut-off of the filament heating)

Ballasts
July 2015
Page 3 of 4

2.1.2
High Frequency Electronic Ballasts:

a)
The ballast shall have constant light output independent of fluctuating supply voltage
b)
The ballast shall be switched via the mains or with digital control signal
c)
The ballast shall have a disturbance free precise control with a digital signal (DSI) or/and be
able to be controlled by a standard push-to-make (momentary/bell press) switch
d)
It shall have fully electronic lamp management and digital communication with ASIC, thereby
ensuring
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Safe switch off of defective lamps

Safe shut down when the lamp comes to the end of its lamp life
Automatic re-start after lamp replacement
Reliable start of the lamp without nuisance flickering and noise
e)
The ballast shall have a non-audible noise level less than 28dB.
f)
The ballast shall have a power factor of > 0.92
g)
The operating temperature range should be -25C to +50C but preferably +60C
h)
Every ballast shall be distinctively marked with the month and year of manufacture in
addition to the standard markings. The standard markings have to include country of origin.
Only European, U.S.A. and Australian country of origin is acceptable.
i)
The operating frequency shall be 40-100kHz
j)
For safety reasons the ballast has to start within the following time:
i.
1.5 seconds with AC and 0.6 s with DC for T5 and TC-DD lamps
ii.
iii.
0.6 seconds for TC-L, TC-F compact lamps (with 1x55W, 2x55W, 2x18W in 1.5 s with
AC)
iv.
0.6 seconds for TC-D/E, TC-S/E, TC-T/E compact lamps
k)
The T5 ballast must have built in cut-off technology (cut-off of the filament heating).
l)
High frequency electronic ballast must be labelled as confirming to an international standard

approved by DEWA/DM.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
H.I.D. Ballasts
Ballasts shall be totally encapsulated, constant voltage, regulated output type, matched to their
respective lamp with improved power factor not less than 0.9.
3.2
Execution
Install the ballasts as per approved shop drawings, Local Electricity Authority requirements and to
Consultant approval.
-

Ballasts
End of Section July 2015

Page 4 of 4


LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
WORK INCLUDED .................................................................................................................................. 3
1.2
SCOPE OF WORK .................................................................................................................................. 3
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................................................... 3
1.4
CODES AND STANDARDS.................................................................................................................... 3
1.5
SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................................... 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS............................................................................................................................................. 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................................ 9
3.1
INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................................................... 9
3.2
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................................ 9

July 2015
Page 1 of 9

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1
Compliance with sections of Electrical specifications, General and documents referred to therein.
1.1.2
1.2
SCOPE OF WORK
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the complete lightning protection system as
specified hereafter and as indicated in the related electrical system drawings. Scope of work shall
include but not limited to the following:
Lightning protection system of the building consist of air terminal networks, down conductors,
earthing networks, bonding to all metal works, all related accessories, thermo weld joints and
terminations and connection to building main earthing system.
Protection of all electronic equipment within the building against the transient over voltage caused
by lightning.
Site earthing network ring interconnecting the earthing system of each building
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
the following:
a)
BS EN 62305:206 protection against lightning.
b)
c)
d)
Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings (IEE), (BS) London.
1.4
CODES AND STANDARDS

When an edition date is not indicated for a Code or Standard the latest edition enforce at the time of
proposal submitted shall apply.
BS EN 62305 (I IV): 2006
CENELEC Standard for lighting protection
BS EN 50164-1 : 2000 -
Lighting protection components (LPC)

connection component.
part-1: Requirement for
BS EN 50164-2 : 2000
Lighting protection components (LPC)

conductor and earth electrodes.
part- 2: Requirement for
CP 1013
BS Code of Practice Earthing
BS 7671
BS Requirement for Electrical Installation
BS 7430
BS for earthing system, material and testing.

July 2015
Page 2 of 9

BS 2784 & BS 970
BS for earthing material, solid copper rods and accessories.
Local Electricity Authority
The system shall be installed by a Contractor licensed to carry out such installations and be in
compliance with BS EN 62305 latest edition.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
a)
The Contractor shall submit workshop drawings and documents related to lightning
protection system for Engineer approval as specified in Section 16010.
b)
The Contractor shall submit fully detailed shop drawing for the air termination network, down
conductors, earth termination network and bonding and shall be responsible to provide all
the necessary accessories to integrate the system with the architectural finish of the
building.
c)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
The lightning protection installation shall consist of air termination network, down conductors,
earthing and bonding to prevent side flashing.
The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall submit the Risk Evaluation and the achieved
Lightning Protection Level (LPL) calculation based on BS EN 62305 Part 2. In the absence of
such an evaluation employment of LPL - I will be deemed mandatory. The Specialist Lightning
Protection Installer shall then submit the shop drawings based on the achieved LPL and shall
employ the air termination network consisting of mesh of either 10m x 10m or less, in co-ordination
with rolling sphere (size as per the protection level). All the service entries to the structure i.e. power
line, telecom line, gas line, water line etc. shall be protected by installing current surge protectors
(either 25KA or 18.75KA or 12.5 KA rating), depending on the Lightning Protection Level (LPL) to
be used to bring down the risk (R) below the tolerable risk level (RT) .
The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall use 25x3 mm bare copper tape of 99.99% purity
(complying with BS EN 13601), (or PVC coated as the case may require, complying with the same)
to form the air-termination mesh on the uppermost part of the structure (typically the roof) and ring
conductor around the structure (the spacing between the ring conductors shall depend on the size
of the rolling sphere) to prevent from side flashes.
Air termination network should be extended and its determined by using rolling sphere method.
This method involves rolling an imaginary sphere of 20m or 30m or 45m or 60m radius (depending
on the Lightning Protection Level to be used) over structure to require protection.
Any roof (e.g. staircase) on top of the main roof shall have air termination network and it shall be
connected to lower roof network.
All the fixing clips for the copper tape shall be metallic (complying with Class H of the electrical
testing based on BSEN 50164) and shall be fixed at an interval of 500mm (1000 mm fixing distance
for fixing conductors on vertical surface up to 20m from the ground level and on the horizontal
surface i.e. roof).
The down conductors shall be placed around the periphery of the building. Re-enforcing bars shall
not be used as down conductors neither clamped to it.
The composite glass panel shall be bonded to all the down conductors at the various slab levels as
per the rolling sphere spacing by using bi-metallic clamps complying to BSEN 50164.

July 2015
Page 3 of 9

The earthing shall be done as per local authorities requirements. A minimum of 2400 mm solid
copper electrode shall be provided with each down conductor separately. However, the Specialist
Lightning Protection Installer shall submit the calculation for deciding the number of earth rods in
each earth pit. Wherever the soil resistivity is low (typically below <20 m), the Specialist Lightning
Protection Installer must use either solid copper rods or stainless steel rods to ensure the longitivity
of the earth termination network.
The complete Lightning Protection System measured at any point, should not exceed 10 ohms.
With the test clamp disconnected, the resistance of each individual earth should be no more than
ten times the number of down conductors in the complete system.
The LV and the IT earth should in no case exceed 1 ohm.
The terminated head of each electrode shall be located in a light weight inspection pit. If clear earth
is not available, then the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer has to install the earth pit inside the
building using double flange earth electrode seals.
The double flange earth seals should be designed for use in concrete slabs of nominal thickness
from 300mm to 5000mm thick, The seal will withstand water pressure up to 80 psi equal to a 55
meter head of water. The earth seal flange shall be free from dust / debris, grease/paint before
pouring of the concrete. A specialist installer should be employed to do the installation or shall be
done under the supervision of the manufacturer or the manufacturers authorised representative.
Specialist Lightning Protection Installer also has to ensure, based on BSEN 62305 IV, that
suitable co-ordinated over-voltage surge protection devices with an extra low let through voltage
are used for protecting any terminal devices i.e. DBs feeding critical services or even the local
critical electrical gadget.
All metallic parts protruding outside the extended air termination network (e.g. balcony hand rails
etc) shall be connected to the air termination using suitable clamps (material complying to BSEN
50164) at every floor wherever the horizontal conductor is applied. The equipments on the roof (i.e.
Chiller units etc) shall be protected using vertical air terminals of suitable height so that it provides
the zone of protection. This air terminal shall be installed at a suitable separation distance so that
the partial lightning current doesnt flow through the equipment. The cable from the equipment shall
be protected using an over voltage protector. The equipment shall not be bonded to the air
termination network. Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall give the calculation of the suitable
separation distance.
The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall install suitable surge protectors at local power
distribution boards feeding vulnerable equipment, in order to protect these against transients
generated downstream of the protectors in 1, above. (These transients may be the result of
inductive coupling or electrical switching.)
Protectors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of:
BS EN 62305:2006 Electrical & Electronics Systems Protection within structures (Part 4),
BS 2914:1972 Specification for surge diverters for alternating current power circuits,
IEEE C62.41-1991 Recommended practice on surge voltages in low voltage AC power

circuits.
Protectors for a given Location Category shall be rated for a High Exposure Level (as defined by BS
EN 62305 - 4), unless contrary information is available.

July 2015
Page 4 of 9

The protector must not interfere with or restrict the systems normal operation. It should not:
corrupt the normal mains power supply
break or shutdown the power supply during operation
have an excessive earth leakage current.
The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of no less than 10kA (8/20:s waveform)
between any two conductors (phase to neutral, phase to earth and neutral to earth).
The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment susceptibility levels. Unless
otherwise stated, the peak transient let-through voltage shall not exceed 600 volts, for protectors
with a nominal working voltage of 230 or 240 volts, when tested in accordance with BS EN 62305
Part - 4 (6kV 1.2/50 s open circuit voltage, 3kA 8/20s short circuit current).
This peak transient let-through voltage shall not be exceeded for all combinations of conductors:
Phase to neutral
Phase to earth
Neutral to earth.
Mains protectors (installed in shunt/parallel) should have continuous indication of its protection
status and the presence of power.
Status indication should clearly show per phase:
Full protection present
Reduced protection - replacement required
No protection - failure of protector.
Remove indication of status (including loss of phase/supply) should also be possible via a volt free
contact.
The status indication should warn of protection failure between all combinations of conductors,
including neutral to earth. (Otherwise a potentially dangerous short circuit between neutral and
earth could go undetected for some time.) This should include early warning of excessive neutral to
earth voltages.
The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must comply with
the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.
The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall also install transient overvoltage protectors on all
data communication/signal/telephone lines in order to protect equipment connected to the line,
against transient overvoltages. (Where data lines link equipment in separate buildings, transient
overvoltage protectors should be installed at both ends of the line in order to protect both pieces of
equipment.)
Protectors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of:
BS EN 62305:2006 Electrical & Electronics Systems Protection within structures (Part 4),
CCITT IX K17 Tests on power fed repeaters using solid-state devices in order to check
the arrangements for protection from external interference.

July 2015
Page 5 of 9

Protectors shall be rated for Location Category - High Exposure Level (as defined by BS EN 62305
4 : 2006), unless contrary information dictates a lower Exposure Level.
The protector must not impair the systems normal operation. It should not:
Suppress the systems normal signal voltage
Restrict the systems bandwidth or signal frequency
Introduce excessive in-line resistance
Cause signal reflections or impedance mismatches (high frequency systems only).
The protector will have a low transient let-through voltage for tests conducted in accordance with
BS en 62305 -4 : 2006 (5kV 10/700s test).
This let-through performance will be provided for all combinations of conductors:
Signal line to signal line
Signal line to screen/earth.
The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of 10kA.

The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must comply with
the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.
The protector manufacturer should allow for the facility to mount and earth large numbers of
protectors through an accessory combined mounting and earthing kit.
Materials
Materials shall comply in weight, size and composition with the requirements of
BS EN 50164.
All surge protection devices to be used shall be from the same manufacturer who supplies the
structural lightning protection.
Surge protectors shall be manufactured for the specific type and voltage of the electrical service
and shall provide clamping for both normal (L-N) and common (L-N-G) mode protection.
Bonding
Lightning Protection Installer shall ensure proper co-ordination between the Structural , Civil ,
Electrical and the Cladding Specialist Lightning Protection Installer
All installation details shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to commencement of work. The
Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall obtain an inspection certificate from the manufacturer
or its authorized representative towards the satisfactory installation of the system and that proper
material in accordance to the above standard has been used.
Testing
On completion of the installation or of any modification to it, the following isolated and combined
measurement and / or checks has to be made and the results recorded in a lightning protection
system logbook.
The resistance to earth of each local earth electrode and in addition the resistance to earth of the
complete earth termination system.
July 2015
Page 6 of 9

Each local earth electrode has to be measured in isolation and the test point between the down
conductor and the earth electrode in the disconnected position (isolated measurement)
A further measurement has to be taken with the test point in the connected position (combined
measurement).
The results of visual check of all conductors, bonds and joints and their measured electrical
continuity.
If the resistance to earth of a lightning protection system exceeds 10 ohms, the value must be
reduced. Necessary remedial action needs to be taken to reduce the value below or equal to 10
ohms.
The shop drawings must be approved by the manufacturer or the manufacturers authorized
representative, which has to be used for installation afterwards to ensure total adherence to the
standards and requirements. Also the manufacturer or the manufacturer-authorized representative
will have to survey and certify the installation to ensure the standards.
The manufacturer or the manufacturers authorized representative will certify the bill of materials,
provided by the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer for the project.
The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer must submit the Test Certificates of the materials used
as per BSEN 50164, which should be attested in original by the manufacturer or the manufacturers
authorized representative.
Records
The person has to keep on site or the following records, responsible for the upkeep of the
installation:
a)
Approved shop drawings, showing the nature, dimensions, materials and position of all
component parts of the lightning protection system.
b)
The nature of the soil and any special earthing arrangements.
c)
The type and position of the earth electrodes, including reference electrodes.
d)
The test conditions and the result obtained.
e)
Any alteration, additions or repairs to the system.
f)
The name of the person responsible for the installation upkeep.
g)
A label should be attached at the origin of the electrical installation, worded as follows
h)
This structure is provided with a lightning protection system in accordance with BSEN
62305 and BSEN 50164 and the bonding to the services and the main equi-potential
bonding should be maintained accordingly
Maintenance
The periodic inspections and tests recommended will show what maintenance, if any is needed.
Tests have to be repeated at fixed intervals, as mentioned in the BSEN 62305 Part III.

July 2015
Page 7 of 9

Particular attention should be given to the following :
a)
Evidence of corrosion or conditions likely to lead to corrosion
b)
Alterations and additions to the structure which may effect the lightning protection system
(e.g. erection of radio and television aerials, installation of crane tracks, glass / window
cleaning system etc)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.1.1
Coordinate installation of lightning protection system with installation of other building systems and
components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures, metal bodies requiring bonding to
lightning protection system, and building finishes.
3.1.2
The system shall be installed by a contractor licensed to carry out such installations and be in
compliance with BS EN 62305 latest edition.
3.13
Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends and
narrow loops.
3.1.4
When different metal to be connected a bimetallic clamp shall be used.

Bond roof vents, flashing and any other metal masses projecting through the roof to the grid.
3.1.4
Thermo weld all connections between cables, aerial terminals and ground rods. Compression type
connectors may be used where approved by the Consultant.
3.1.5
Measure the resistance of the complete installation and submit for review to the Consultant.
3.1.6
Test clamps shall be provided in each inspection pit to allow for testing and commissioning.
3.1.7
Bond each copper down conductor throughout its length to the building reinforcement bar with
spacing not more than 1.5 metre (All bonding to reinforcement bar shall be using manufacturers
standard materials and tools for the same).
3.1.8
Concrete inspection pits with cover shall be installed flush with finished floor level and be fully
accessible.
3.2
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
3.2.1
General
a)
The complete installation shall be tested and inspected to ensure that it complies with the
requirements of this Specification, the IEE Wiring Regulations, British Standards and the
Local Authorities. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with the IEE Wiring
Regulations and to the satisfaction of the Engineer
b)
The inspection and tests shall be carried out in the same sequence as set out in the IEE
Wiring Regulations, Local Authorities and Engineer requirements and in such time as to
allow any remedial work to be completed prior to Practical Completion.
c)
Tests shall be carried out strictly in accordance with a programme to be agreed with the
Engineer prior to commencement of such tests. Facilities shall be provided for witnessing of
such tests.
d)
All instruments necessary for inspection and testing shall be supplied and shall be properly
calibrated and operated by personnel skilled in their use.

July 2015
Page 8 of 9

e)
Allowance shall be made for disconnection or similar operations to satisfy the requirements
for testing, etc., and the reinstatement of the installation.
f)
Measure earth resistance not less than 2 full days after the last trace of precipitation, and
without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
with out any chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural earth resistance.
g)
Where resistance to earth exceeds specified values, notify the Engineer. The same and
include recommendations to reduce earth resistance and to accomplish recommended work.
h)
Restore surface features, at areas disturbed by work of this section. Restore areas disturbed
by trenching, storing of dirts, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition.
- End of Section -

July 2015
Page 9 of 9


EARTHING SYSTEM
Revision History
00
Jul 2015
JB/HA
YS/YA
JH
Rev.
Date
Prepared By
Checked By
Approved By

EARTHING SYSTEM
INDEX
PART 1 - GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................3
1.1
WORK INCLUDED ..............................................................................................................................3
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK ....................................................................................................................3
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................................................3
1.4
CODES AND STANDARDS ...................................................................................................................4
1.5
SUBMITTALS .....................................................................................................................................4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................................................................................................4
2.1
EARTHING SYSTEM MATERIALS .........................................................................................................4
2.2
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................................................................5
PART 3- EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................................7

3.1
GENERAL .........................................................................................................................................7
3.2
INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................................7
3.3
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ..........................................................................................................8
PART 4 -SOIL SURVEY AND CALCULATIONS .........................................................................................9

Earthing System
July 2015
Page 1 of 8

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Work Included
1.2
Description of Work
Supply, Installation, testing, and commissioning of complete earthing system as specified hereafter
and as indicated in the related electrical system drawings. Scope of work shall include but not
limited to the following for building:
1.3
a)
Main earthing system of the building consist of ECC condutctors, earth bars, earth pits, all
related accessories including bonding and terminations .
b)
Earthed equipontential bonding of all exposed and extraneous conductive parts
c)
Earthing system for the telephone and data communication system including ECC
conductors, earth bars, earth pits, all related accessories including bonding
and
terminations.
d)
Clean earth arrangement for the power distribution and power outlets feeding computer
terminals and related equipment, medical equipment.
e)
Substation earthing system including transformer neutral earthing
f)
Earthing system for the external electrical services including Pump rooms of water features,
external lighting poles, etc.
Quality Assurance
the following:
a)
Local electricity Authority regulations for electrical installation works.
b)
c)
Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings (IEE), (BS) London.
d)
British Standards.
1.3.1
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer. Submit qualifications for approval.
1.3.2
Comply with BS EN 62305 (Protection of Structures against Lightning) when interconnecting with
lightning protection system in addition to BS 7430 : Code of Practice for Earthing.
1.3.3
Products shall be sourced either directly from manufacturer or from manufacturer's authorized
dealer/agent.

Earthing System
July 2015
Page 2 of 8

1.4
Codes and Standards

When an edition date is not indicated for a Code or Standard the latest edition enforce at the time
of proposal submitted shall apply.
1.5
CP 1013
BS Code of Practice Earthing
BS 7671
BS Requirement for Electrical Installation
BS 7430
BS for earthing system, material and testing.
BS 2784 & BS 970
BS for earthing material, solid copper rods and accessories.
Local electricity Authority
Submittals
system for Consultants approval:
a)
b)
c)
Test Certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Earthing System Materials

Earthing system materials shall include but not limited to the following:
2.1.1
a)
Bonding Conductors
b)
Earth continuity conductors
c)
150mm2 earth bar risers.
d)
150mm2 copper tape.
e)
Earth grid bar.
f)
Thermal welding kits and accessories.
g)
Lugs, terminals, clamps, accessories etc.
h)
Earth pits, earth wells and related accessories
i)
Any other material indicated on the drawing or required by BS7430, BS7671.
Wire and cable earthing conductors

a)
Material: copper - Only copper wire for both insulated and bare earthing conductors in direct
contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
b)
Equipment earthing conductors: Insulated with green/yellow color insulation

Earthing System
July 2015
Page 3 of 8

c)
Earthing electrode conductors: Stranded copper cable
d)
Bare copper conductors shall conform to the following:

Solid conductors: ASTM B3
Assembly of Stranded conductors: ASTM B8
Tinned conductors: ASTM B33
2.1.2
2.1.3
Miscellaneous Conductors
a)
Earthing Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section
b)
Braided Bonding Jumbers: Copper tape, braided bare copper wire, terminated with copper
ferrules
c)
Bonding Straps: Soft copper, 1 mm thick and 50 mm wide, except as indicated
Connector Products
Pressure Connectors
High conductivity plated units
Bolted Clamps
Heavy duty type
Exothermic-Welded Connections :
2.1.4
Selected as per manufacturers written instructions for specific

types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected
items.
Earthing Electrodes
Earthing Rods: Copper
Plate Electrodes: Copper, square or rectangular shape. Minimum 3 mm thick, size as indicted.
2.2
Technical Requirements
2.2.1
The complete installation covered by this specification shall be efficiently bonded back to the main
switchboards through the metal sheathing of cables, the steel conduit, the trunking system and
earth wires/bars.
2.2.2
The nominal cross-sectional area of all earth continuity conductors shall be in accordance with the
IEE regulations and to Local electricity Authority approval. The earth wire size shall be equal to the
phase wire if the conductor cross section is less than 16 square millimeter and shall have half of
the phase conductor size for sizes higher than 16 square millimeter.
2.2.3
A 150mm earth bar riser shall be installed in each electrical rooms and shall be connected to a
6mm x 50mm x length (as shown on the plan). Earth bar with enough number of ways and
mounted on high impact uPVC channel with disconnecting link provided in each electrical room and
shall be connected to the individual switchboard earth bar through a cable sized in accordance to
IEE Regulations and to the equipotential bonding conductor connecting metal conduits, trunking
systems, metal frames, enclosures, cable sheaths, A/C duct work, pipe riser etc.
A clean earth 150mm copper bar riser shall as well be installed and shall be connected to clean
earth bar similar to the earth bar specified above and installed in each electrical room. This bar
shall provide clean earth to all the clean earth power outlets.
All clean earth bars shall have 20% spare connectivity space for the use of operators IT specialist.

Earthing System
July 2015
Page 4 of 8

A clean earth connection bar shall have a visible bar above server room raised floor and also one
below the raised floor to run along the length of the void for use by the oeprators specialist IT team.
All clean earth termination small power outlets shall be coloured red for ease of identification.
2.2.4
The above mentioned earth bars riser shall be connected through 150mm2 copper tape to
separate earth pits with removable concrete cover.
2.2.5
All such earth pits and wells shall be connected together and with the lightning protection system
pit in order to create an earth grid extending throughout the site in the form of an earth ring with
branches connected to the equipment and building to be earthed. The earth grid shall comprise
copper earthing cable with green/yellow PVC sheathing.
2.2.6
All switchboards, metal conduit and trunking systems, metal frames, enclosures, lighting fittings
and cables sheaths shall be bonded together and connected through 16mm2 PVC cable to the
earth bar of the appropriate switchboard. Similarly all earth pins and metallic plates of socket
outlets, switches, accessories and enclosures shall be bonded to earth with earth continuity
conductors. Each individual earth path shall be electrically continuous throughout its length from
the farthest point of the associated part of the system back to the main earth.
2.2.7
Where separate pieces of apparatus connected to different phase are, of necessity erected or
positioned less than two meters apart, an equipotential bonding conductor of single core 70mm2
PVC sheathed shall be installed between such pieces of apparatus.
2.2.8
In the substations, earth grid bus shall be provided and shall connect all the electrical equipment to
the earth pit.
2.2.9
The star point of the transformers shall be solidly earthed through separate earth well and to Local
electricity Authority approval.
2.2.10
All earthing cables shall be installed in accordance with the relevant requirements called for in the
cables section of this specification.
2.2.11
All wires and cables shall be protected against mechanical stress and corrosion. All joints between
wires and earthing metal work shall be mechanically sound and bimetallic connector shall be used
wherever necessary.
2.2.12
All bonding leads shall be carried out using threaded fittings, lockout/hardware, thermite welding or
any other method approved by the Consultant.
2.2.13
A test connection link shall be provided for testing purpose.

a)
Earthwell
Earthwells shall be provided if required only to provide the earth grid at the chiller yard and
at substations. Earth well with 100mm diameter GS pipe shall be driven upto the water
table. An earth bar shall be welded to the top of the earth well for branch connections. The
well shall be protected by a concrete housing with MS or concrete cover of 250mm x 250mm
x 10mm at grade level.
b)
Earth pits
20mm diameter copper earth rod shall be driven to a minimum depth of 6M and an earth bar
shall be provided to the top of the earth pit for branch connections. Earth pit shall be
protected by concrete housing and MS or concrete cover at grade level. Bentonite shall be
provided in the pit around the earth rod.
The number /depth of pits shall be sufficient to make the system resistance less than one
ohm.

Earthing System
July 2015
Page 5 of 8

Earth cables shall be buried at a minimum depth of 500mm after coordinating the same with
other services.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1
General
3.1.1
The whole of the earthing and bonding shall be installed and tested as specified, in accordance
with the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations, as per Local electricity Authority requirements
and to the Consultants approval.
3.1.2
All enclosures, equipment, exposed conductive parts, extraneous conductive parts, metallic
trunking, metallic conduits, metallic cable trays and other metalwork, other than any live part,
forming protection to or part of the electrical installation, including apparatus and appliances, shall
be effectively bonded to earth.
3.1.3
Provide an earth bar 650 mm long and 90 mm width as minimum on the wall of each electrical,
mechanical, telecom and plant rooms and connect to the enclosure and ground buses of all
equipment in the room. Earth bar sizes sahll be according to authority requiremetns and to
Engineers approval.
3.1.4
Remove non-conductive coatings from threads or other contact surfaces to ensure good electrical
continuity.
3.1.5
Protect all exposed grounding conductors from mechanical damage.
3.1.6
All joints shall be of thermo weld and soldered joints are not permitted.
3.1.7
For telephone/data and other communication system, provide a minimum 25 Sq.mm insulated
earthing conductor in raceway from earthing electrode system to each service location, terminal
cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. Terminate the earthing conductor on
earthing bus at wiring closets, service location and central equipment location. Terminate earthing
conductor on cabinet earthing terminal.
3.1.8
All metal poles supporting outdoor lighting fixtures shall be earthed using earth rod and earth pit.
3.2
Installation
Drive earth rods until tops are 50mm below finished floor or final grade, except as otherwise
indicated and interconnect with earthing electrode conductors without damaging copper coating or
exposing steel.
Route the earthing conductors along the shortest and straight paths possible, avoiding obstructing
access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact or damage.
Lay the underground earthing conductors at least 500 mm below grade.
Provide insulated copper earthing conductors in conduit from buildings main earthing bus to main
metal water service entrances to building and connect to the water service pipes by earthing clamp
connectors. Do not install an earthing jumber across dielectric fittings.
Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment earthing conductors of
associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, etc. Use braided type bonding straps.
3.2.1
Connections
Make connections such that possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Connectors,
connection hardware, conductors and connection methods shall be selected such that metals in
direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

Earthing System
July 2015
Page 6 of 8

Use electroplated, or hot tin coated materials to assure high conductivity and to make contact
points closer in order of galvanic series.
Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration
of moisture to contact surfaces.
Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression
connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by manufacturer of connectors. Provide embossing
die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been
adequately compressed on earthing conductor.
Where insulated earthing conductors are connected to earthing rods or earthing bars, insulate
entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.
Tighten screws and bolts for earthing and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturers published torque tightening values.
3.3
3.3.1
General
a)
The complete installation shall be tested and inspected to ensure that it complies with the
requirements of this Specification, the IEE Wiring Regulations, British Standards and the
Local Authorities. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with the IEE Wiring
Regulations and to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
b)
The inspection and tests shall be carried out in the same sequence as set out in the IEE
Wiring Regulations, Local Authorities and the Consultants requirements and in such time
as to allow any remedial work to be completed prior to Practical Completion.
c)
The earth resistance shall not exceed 1 ohm.
d)
All the portal frames shall be ring earthed 50mm size and all the joint to be 35mm size and
to be connected to the main earth pit.
e)
Tests shall be carried out strictly in accordance with a programme to be agreed with the
Consultant and DIRE Engineer prior to commencement of such tests. Facilities shall be
provided for witnessing of such tests.
f)
All instruments necessary for inspection and testing shall be supplied and shall be properly
calibrated and operated by personnel skilled in their use.
g)
Allowance shall be made for disconnection or similar operations to satisfy the requirements
for testing, etc., and the reinstatement of the installation.
h)
Measure earth resistance not less than 2 full days after the last trace of precipitation, and
without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
with out any chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural earth resistance.
i)
Where resistance to earth exceeds specified values, notify the Consultant the same and
include recommendations to reduce earth resistance and to accomplish recommended work.
j)
Restore surface features, at areas disturbed by work of this section. Restore areas disturbed
by trenching, storing of dirts, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition.

Earthing System
July 2015
Page 7 of 8

PART 4 -SOIL SURVEY AND CALCULATIONS
4.1
The Contractor shall carry out an earth resistivity survey on site. This shall detail the methods and
instruments used and the results of the surveys. Based on the results the Contractor shall propose
for the resistivities to be used in the design of the earthing system.
4.2
The surveys shall show the variation of resistivity across the site and with the depth below the site.
The Contractor shall consider if there is a need to model the resistivity in two layers and if there is
any advantage in the use of long rods. The surveys shall also determine the depth and nature of
any underlying rock, which may limit the depth for driving earth rods or if boring will be necessary
for installing earth rods.
4.3
The report should also state if there are any indications that the ground is corrosive to copper or if
there is any risk of galvanic corrosion on other metal structures in the neighbourhood.
- End of Section -

Earthing System
July 2015
Page 8 of 8
Prepared by
Ian Banham & Associates
P. O. Box: 23901
Dubai, U. A. E
R0 : AUGUST 04, 2015
LOAD SCHEDULE
M/S. DUBAI PROPERTIES
FOR
AT PLOT NO.3920529 JBR, MARSA, DUBAI
PROPOSED 2B + G + 10 STOREY HOTEL BUILDING
LV - MDB - 2
LV - MDB - 3
LV - MDB - 4
LV - MDB - 5
4P
4P
4P
4P
4P
SP/
TP
SET @ 0.85
2500
SET @ 0.85
2500
SET @ 0.85
2500
SET @ 0.85
2500
SET @ 0.85
2500
BY DEWA
BY DEWA
BY DEWA
BY DEWA
BY DEWA
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD PER PHASE
50
50
50
50
50
RATING - AMPS
FAULT PVC/XLPE
ACB MCCB MCB DUTY SWA/PVC/SC
KA
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
Type of Meter (Rating of Incomer) :

(1) UPTO 60A
(1 PHASE)
CONSULTANTS : M/S. IAN BANHAM AND ASSOCIATES

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
PLOT : 3920529
356.80
401.54
446.59
410.88
437.55
347.01
398.46
438.83
407.69
429.80
1069.10
1202.10
1331.50
1233.00
1315.60
2076.15 2053.36 2021.79 6151.30
2x1C 150 365.29
2x1C 150 402.10
2x1C 150 446.08
2x1C 150 414.43
2x1C 150 448.25
FAX : 04 - 370 5888

.../...(4) HV CT .../...A
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
TOTAL
2400/5A CTM
2400/5A CTM
2400/5A CTM
2400/5A CTM
2400/5A CTM
ACTUAL LOAD (3 PH)6,151.30...kW
5536.17
962.19
1081.89
1198.35
1109.70
1184.04
REMARKS
AREA : JBR, MARSA, DUBAI
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 1
KWH METER
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
MAXIMUM
ECC
SIZE - 1C R-PHASE Y-PHASE B-PHASE TOTAL DEMAND 1 Ph 3 Ph LV CT HV CT
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
kW
(1) (2) (3) (4)
M/S. IAN BANHAM & ASSOCIATES
DEMAND FACTOR0.90 MAX. DEMAND5,536.17kW TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD (3 PHASE)6,151.30kW TOTAL BUILD - UP AREA .........
LV - MDB - 1
OUTGOING
INCOMER
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
CONSULTANT
SUMMARY
SR.
NO
PROPOSED 2B + G + 10 STOREY HOTEL BUILDING DETAILS OF CONNECTED LOAD/MAX. DEMAND
OWNER
PLANNED COMPLETION DATE :
PROJECT
IAN BANHAM & ASSOCIATES
INCOMER - 1
INCOMER - 2
SMDB-4 - KIT
SMDB - 6N
SMDB - 7N
SMDB - 8N
SMDB - RN
DB - RMU
DB - TR
CAPACITOR BANK
TP
SP
SP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
4P
4P
SP/
TP
SET @ 0.85
(D.O.T)
SET @ 0.85
2500
1000
40
40
500
400
400
400
350
400
400
1C 120
1C 150
4C 240
4C 300
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
3x4C 240
2C 10
2C 10
2x4C 150
4C 300
2.20
--
79.85
63.50
61.00
61.00
50.00
60.00
60.00
--
--
79.30
58.50
61.00
61.00
50.00
60.00
60.00
2.20
1.40
240.50
185.50
188.00
188.00
150.00
180.00
180.00
448.25
437.55
429.80
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
FAX : 04 - 370 5888

(4) HV CT .../...A
* REFER SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR ELCB RATING
(3) LV CT
TOTAL
2400/5A CTM
ACTUAL LOAD (3 PH)...kW
1315.60
365kVAR CAPACITOR BANK
--
1.40
81.35
63.50
66.00
66.00
50.00
60.00
60.00
3x1C 120
1C 10
1C 10
2x1C 70
1C 150
1C 150
1C 150
4C 300
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 300
1C 150
4C 300
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
3920529
JBR, MARSA, DUBAI
PROVISION FOR MOBILE GENERATOR WITH ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INTERLOCK
2x1C 150
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 2
LV ROOM
BASEMENT-1
KWH METER
REMARKS
1 Ph 3 Ph LV CT HV CT
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
PLOT
AREA
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
SIZE -1C R-PHASE Y-PHASE B-PHASE TOTAL
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
XLPE/SWA/PVC
BY GENERATOR SUPPLIER
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
FAULT PVC/XLPE
ACB MCCB MCB DUTY SWA/PVC/SC 2/4x1C
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
2500
50
BY DEWA
CONNECTED TO TRANSFORMER # 1
MCC - CHW
LV MDB - 1
FIRE FIGHTING PUMP
OUTGOING
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SR.
NO
LV MDB - 1
CONSULTANT
LV MDB REF
OWNER
PROJECT
INCOMER - 1
INCOMER - 2
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
3x4C 240
4C 300
3x1C 120
1C 150
1C 95
1C 150
4C 300
4C 185
2x1C 70
2x4C 150
XLPE/SWA/PVC
66.67
44.23
63.50
66.66
125.82
44.00
66.67
45.24
58.50
66.67
126.61
44.00
200.00
135.00
185.50
200.00
380.50
132.00
414.43
410.88
407.69
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
FAX : 04 - 370 5888

(4) HV CT .../...A
(3) LV CT
TOTAL
2400/5A CTM
1233.00
66.66
45.53
63.50
66.67
2x1C 150 128.07
2x4C 300
44.00
XLPE/SWA/PVC
1C 95
4C 185
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
3920529
JBR, MARSA, DUBAI
2x1C 150
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 3
LV ROOM
BASEMENT-1
KWH METER
REMARKS
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
XLPE/SWA/PVC
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
PLOT
AREA
LV MDB - 2
1000
CAPACITOR BANK
TP
400
TP
400
320
TP
500
800
320
TP
SMDB - 9N
TP
(D.O.T)
SET @ 0.85
2500
SMDB - 4N1
SMDB - 1FB
TP
SET @ 0.85
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
FAULT PVC/XLPE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
2500
50
BY DEWA
PROVISION FOR SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT
SMDB - 2N3
TP
4P
4P
SP/
TP
FIRE HYDRANT PUMP
OUTGOING
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SR.
NO
LV MDB - 2
CONSULTANT
LV MDB REF
OWNER
PROJECT
INCOMER - 1
INCOMER - 2
SMDB - 10N
CAPACITOR BANK
TP
TP
TP
TP
4P
4P
SP/
TP
SET @ 0.85
1600
(D.O.T)
SET @ 0.85
2500
1000
400
800
2x1C 150 126.67
1C 150
3x1C 120
2x4C 300
4C 300
3x4C 240
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
60.17
126.66
259.76
55.17
126.67
256.99
176.50
380.00
775.00
446.08
446.59
438.83
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
2400/5A CTM
1331.50
61.16
4x1C 150 258.25
4x4C 300
XLPE/SWA/PVC
3920529
JBR, MARSA, DUBAI
2x1C 150
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 4
LV ROOM
BASEMENT-1
KWH METER
REMARKS
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
PLOT
AREA
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
XLPE/SWA/PVC
50
50
50
50
50
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
FAULT PVC/XLPE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
2500
50
BY DEWA
SMDB - G - FB
LV MDB - 3
MDB - E
OUTGOING
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SR.
NO
LV MDB - 3
CONSULTANT
LV MDB REF
OWNER
PROJECT
INCOMER - 1
INCOMER - 2
SMDB - B2-KIT-1
SMDB - B2-KIT-2
SMDB - B1N2
SMDB - B1N4
SMDB - G1N
SMDB - ST - KIT
SMDB - G2 - KIT
SMDB - 1N1
SET @ 0.85
(D.O.T)
SET @ 0.85
2500
1000
320
320
200
400
160
250
400
320
200
1C 150
1C 70
4C 300
4C 150
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
3x4C 240
4C 185
4C 185
4C 95
4C 300
3x1C 120
1C 95
1C 95
1C 50
1C 150
1C 35
1C 95
4C 185
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 70
1C 50
4C 95
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
3920529
JBR, MARSA, DUBAI
53.00
51.66
30.67
64.07
23.50
37.90
58.33
51.66
30.75
48.20
51.68
30.67
64.67
23.55
38.20
58.32
51.67
31.50
154.00
155.00
92.00
192.00
71.20
115.20
175.00
155.00
92.70
402.10
401.54
398.46
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
2400/5A CTM
1202.10
52.80
51.66
30.66
63.26
24.15
39.10
58.35
51.67
30.45
2x1C 150
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 5
LV ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
KWH METER
REMARKS
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
PLOT
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
XLPE/SWA/PVC
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
FAULT PVC/XLPE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
2500
50
BY DEWA
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
4P
4P
SP/
TP
AREA
LV MDB - 4
10 CAPACITOR BANK
SMDB - B2N1
OUTGOING
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SR.
NO
LV MDB - 4
CONSULTANT
LV MDB REF
OWNER
PROJECT
INCOMER - 1
INCOMER - 2
TP
TP
TP
TP
SMDB - 2N1
SMDB - 2N2
SMDB - 3N1
SMDB - 3N2
SMDB - SPA
SMDB - 4N2
SMDB - 5N
SMDB - 10N1
10 LANDSCAPING
11 AV EQUIPMENT
12 FAADE LIGHTING
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SMDB - 1N2
TP
4P
4P
SP/
TP
OUTGOING
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SR.
NO
LV MDB - 5
SET @ 0.85
(D.O.T)
SET @ 0.85
2500
160
225
225
225
160
250
200
200
200
160
160
250
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1C 35
1C 50
4C 70
4C 95
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
--
--
4C 120
4C 70
4C 150
4C 95
--
--
--
1C 70
1C 35
1C 70
1C 50
1C 50
1C 35
4C 70
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 95
1C 70
4C 150
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
3920529
JBR, MARSA, DUBAI
26.66
33.33
33.34
35.33
20.00
38.70
30.00
33.68
30.90
20.50
25.00
37.85
26.67
33.34
33.33
35.33
20.00
37.60
30.00
28.13
29.90
20.50
25.00
37.00
26.67
33.33
33.33
35.34
20.00
37.70
30.00
27.69
25.20
20.60
20.00
37.15
80.00
100.00
100.00
106.00
60.00
114.00
90.00
89.50
86.00
61.60
70.00
112.00
2x1C 150
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 6
CONT'D
PROVISION
PROVISION
PROVISION
2400/5A CTM
LV ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
KWH METER
REMARKS
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
PLOT
AREA
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
XLPE/SWA/PVC
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
FAULT PVC/XLPE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
2500
50
BY DEWA
CONSULTANT
LV MDB REF
OWNER
PROJECT
INCOMER - 1
INCOMER - 2
(D.O.T)
SET @ 0.85
2500
SET @ 0.85
1000
XLPE/SWA/PVC
3x4C 240
50
50
REV.
0
DATE
May 26, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
3920529
JBR, MARSA, DUBAI
3x1C 120
365.29
356.80
347.01
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
1069.10
2x1C 150
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 7
TOTAL
LV ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
KWH METER
REMARKS
1 Ph 3 Ph 3 Ph LV/HV CT
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
PLOT NO
LENGTH
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
OF
CABLE
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
(Mtrs)
RATING - AMPS
FAULT PVC/XLPE
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
mm
mm
KA
2500
50
BY DEWA
TP
4P
4P
SP/
TP
AREA
DEMAND FACTOR0.90 MAX. DEMAND962.19kW TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD (3 PHASE)1,069.10kW TOTAL BUILD - UP AREA .........
LV MDB - 5
13 CAPACITOR BANK
OUTGOING
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SR.
NO
LV MDB - 5 (CONT'D)
CONSULTANT
LV MDB REF
PROPOSED 2B + G + 10 STOREY HOTEL BUILDDETAILS OF CONNECTED LOAD/MAX. DEMAND

OWNER
PROJECT
INCOMER - 2
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SMDB - B2E3
SMDB - B2E4
SMDB - B1E3
SMDB - B1E4
SMDB - DU
SMDB - G1E
SMDB - UPS
10 SMDB - 3E1
11 SMDB - RE
:
(D.O.T)
1600
250
125
160
160
63
160
100
200
125
225
160
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
XLPE/SWA/PVC
FIRE PROOF
XLPE/SWA/PVC
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
4C 150
4C 50
4C 70
4C 70
4C 16
4C 70
4C 35
4C 95
4C 50
4C 120
4C 70
4x4C 300
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1C 70
1C 25
1C 35
1C 35
1C 16
1C 35
1C 16
1C 50
1C 25
1C 70
1C 35
2x1C 300
258.25
39.50
19.67
24.40
21.35
8.00
22.74
13.66
30.33
19.66
34.33
24.61
259.76
40.00
19.66
25.60
21.45
8.00
21.94
13.67
30.33
19.67
34.34
25.10
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
775.00
118.50
59.00
75.00
64.00
24.00
66.50
41.00
91.00
59.00
103.00
74.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
LV ROOM
BASEMENT-1
256.99
39.00
19.67
25.00
21.20
8.00
21.82
13.67
30.34
19.67
34.33
24.29
STANDBY GENERATOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 8
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
RATING - AMPS
FAULT PVC/XLPE
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
CABLE SIZE
LENGTH
2/3/4C
OF
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
mm
CABLE (Mtrs)
mm
KA
1600
4x4C 300
2x1C 300
50 XLPE/SWA/PVC
CONSULTANT
DEMAND FACTOR MAX. DEMAND...kW TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD (3 PHASE)775.00kW TOTAL BUILD - UP AREA .........
CONNECTED TO
TP
SMDB - B2 - KIT - E
MDB - E
TP
SMDB - B2E1
4P
4P
SP/
TP
OUTGOING
INCOMER - 1
MDB - E
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
MDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
SP - 3
SP - 4
100
100
100
100
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 35
4C 35
4C 35
4C 35
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 150
60.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
60.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
180.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
CHW PUMPROOM
60.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 9
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
400
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 300
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
SP - 2
MCC - CHW
TP
SP - 1
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
MCC - CHW
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
MCC REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
DB - B2AC
DB - B1N3
DB - B2N3
40
40
40
63
80
1C 10
1C 10
4C 10
4C 10
1C 10
1C 16
1C 16
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 10
4C 16
4C 25
1C 50
30.45
4.65
3.90
4.00
7.20
10.70
30.75
4.45
3.70
4.00
8.50
10.10
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
92.70
13.10
11.30
12.00
23.80
32.50
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
31.50
4.00
3.70
4.00
8.10
11.70
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 10
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
200
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 95
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
DB- B2L1
SMDB - B2-N1
TP
DB- B2N1
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - B2-N1
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10 SPARE
11 SPARE
12 SPARE
20
20
32
32
32
32
32
32
63
63
80
80
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25
4C 25
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1C 16
1C 16
1C 120
51.67
1.67
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.66
6.67
10.00
10.00
51.66
1.66
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.67
6.66
10.00
10.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
155.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
9.00
9.00
9.00
20.00
20.00
30.00
30.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
51.67
1.67
1.66
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.67
6.67
10.00
10.00
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 11
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
350
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 240
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
DB - B2-KIT-2
SMDB - B2-KIT-1
TP
DB - B2-KIT-1
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - B2-KIT-1
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10 SPARE
11 SPARE
12 SPARE
30
20
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
20
32
32
32
32
32
32
63
63
100
100
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1C 150
58.35
1.67
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.67
6.67
13.34
13.33
58.33
1.67
1.66
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.67
6.67
13.33
13.33
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
175.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
9.00
9.00
9.00
20.00
20.00
40.00
40.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
58.32
1.66
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.66
6.66
13.33
13.34
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 12
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
400
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 300
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
SMDB - B2 - KIT-2 CONNECTED TO
TP
SPARE
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - B2 - KIT-2
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
DB - B2N2
DB - B2L2
63
40
32
160
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 16
4C 10
4C 6
4C 70
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 10
1C 6
1C 35
1C 70
39.10
8.40
5.70
2.66
22.34
37.90
8.00
4.90
2.67
22.33
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
115.20
24.50
15.70
8.00
67.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
1ST BASEMENT
38.20
8.10
5.10
2.67
22.33
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 13
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
250
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 150
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
FAHU - KIT-2
SMDB - B1N2
TP
AHU EVENVE
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - B1N2
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
DB - G2N
DR - G2-ENT
80
63
40
40
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 25
4C 16
4C 10
4C 10
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 10
1C 10
1C 35
24.15
10.00
6.30
2.65
5.20
23.50
10.00
6.85
2.65
4.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
71.20
30.00
20.00
8.00
13.20
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
23.55
10.00
6.85
2.70
4.00
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
1ST BASEMENT
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 14
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
160
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 70
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
DB - B1N4
SMDB - B1N4
TP
DB - B2N4
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - B1N4
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
DR - G - ADD
DR - G - ENT
DB - 6N
DB - 9N
SPARE
63
40
63
80
80
80
100
--
1C 10
4C 10
--
1C 16
4C 16
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
1C 16
4C 25
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 25
4C 25
4C 35
1C 150
63.26
6.66
5.60
8.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
13.00
64.07
6.67
6.00
7.80
10.00
10.00
10.00
13.60
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
192.00
20.00
18.00
24.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
40.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
64.67
6.67
6.40
8.20
10.00
10.00
10.00
13.40
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 15
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
400
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 300
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
DB - G1L
SMDB - G1N
TP
DB - G1N
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - G1N
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
20
20
32
32
40
40
63
80
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1C 16
1C 50
30.66
1.67
1.66
2.00
2.00
3.33
3.34
6.66
10.00
30.67
1.66
1.67
2.00
2.00
3.34
3.33
6.67
10.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
92.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
10.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
30.67
1.67
1.67
2.00
2.00
3.33
3.33
6.67
10.00
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 16
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
200
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 95
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
SPARE
SMDB - ST - KIT
TP
DB - ST - KIT
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - ST - KIT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10 SPARE
11 SPARE
12 SPARE
20
20
32
32
32
32
32
32
63
63
80
80
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1C 16
1C 120
51.66
1.66
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.67
6.66
10.00
10.00
51.66
1.67
1.66
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.66
6.67
10.00
10.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
155.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
9.00
9.00
9.00
20.00
20.00
30.00
30.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
51.68
1.67
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.67
6.67
10.00
10.00
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 17
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
350
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 240
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
SPARE
SMDB - G2-KIT
TP
DB - G2 - KIT
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - G2-KIT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10 SPARE
11 SPARE
12 SPARE
PROJECT
40
63
63
63
80
80
80
80
100
100
100
100
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
KA
CONSULTANT
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3.34
6.66
6.67
6.67
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
13.34
13.33
13.33
13.34
3.33
6.67
6.66
6.67
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
13.33
13.33
13.34
13.33
3.33
6.67
6.67
6.66
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
13.33
13.34
13.33
13.33
10.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
40.00
40.00
40.00
40.00
ELECTRICAL
CONT'D
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 18
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
TP
SPARE
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - G-FB
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
15 SPARE
16 SPARE
20
20
40
40
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
--
--
--
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
--
126.67
1.67
1.66
3.33
3.33
126.66
1.66
1.67
3.33
3.34
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
380.00
5.00
5.00
10.00
10.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
126.67
1.67
1.67
3.34
3.33
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
30
30
30
30
30
RATING - AMPS
FAULT PVC/XLPE
KA
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
14 SPARE
SMDB - G-FB
TP
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - G-FB (CONT'D)
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
13 SPARE
SR.
NO
SMDB REF
PAGE - SCH - 19
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
DB - B2E2
CCU
CU
MDB - E
40
40
40
40
40
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4x1C 25
4x1C 25
4C 10
4C 10
4C 10
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 35
24.61
5.84
6.17
3.20
4.40
5.00
25.10
5.83
6.17
2.90
5.20
5.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
74.00
17.50
18.50
8.00
15.00
15.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
24.29
5.83
6.16
1.90
5.40
5.00
TOTAL
UVR+TIMER+CONTACTOR
UVR+TIMER+CONTACTOR
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 20
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
160
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 70
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
DB - B2E1
SMDB - B2E1
TP
GSM EQUIPMENT
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - B2E1
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10 SPARE
11 SPARE
12 SPARE
MDB - E
20
20
20
32
32
32
40
40
40
40
40
63
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 16
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1C 16
1C 70
34.33
1.67
1.67
1.66
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.33
3.34
3.33
3.33
3.34
6.66
34.34
1.67
1.66
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.34
3.33
3.33
3.34
3.33
6.67
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
103.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
20.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
34.33
1.66
1.67
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.33
3.33
3.34
3.33
3.33
6.67
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 21
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
225
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 120
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
SPARE
SMDB - B2-KIT-E
TP
DB - KIT-E
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - B2-KIT-E
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
TP
TP
TP
BEF - 1
BEF - 1
BMF - 1
BMF - 1
SUMP PIT - 4
CONNECTED TO
MDB - E
20
40
32
32
32
40
40
20
20
20
20
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
4C 10
4C 6
4C 6
4C 6
4C 10
4C 10
4C 4
4C 4
4C 4
4C 4
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
1C 10
1C 6
1C 6
1C 6
1C 10
1C 10
1C 4
1C 4
1C 4
1C 4
1C 25
19.66
0.66
2.00
2.00
2.67
2.66
3.00
3.00
1.33
1.34
0.50
0.50
19.67
0.67
2.00
2.00
2.66
2.67
3.00
3.00
1.34
1.33
0.50
0.50
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
59.00
2.00
6.00
6.00
8.00
8.00
9.00
9.00
4.00
4.00
1.50
1.50
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
19.67
0.67
2.00
2.00
2.67
2.67
3.00
3.00
1.33
1.33
0.50
0.50
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 22
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
125
30
FIRE PROOF
4C 50
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
SMDB - B2E3
TP
TP
WTP - 2
11 SPARE
TP
WTP - 1
TP
TP
WATER CIRCULATION PUMP
10 DB - B2E3
TP
WATER CIRCULATION PUMP
TP
TP
INCOMER
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - B2E3
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
CW - BP - 1
CW - CP - 1
CW - BP - 1
SUMP PIT - 1
BEF - 1
BEF - 1
BMF - 1
10 BMF - 1
11 DB - B2E4
12 SPARE
MDB - E
32
40
32
32
32
32
20
32
20
40
20
40
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
4C 10
4C 6
4C 6
--
1C 10
1C 6
1C 6
1C 6
1C 6
4C 6
4C 6
1C 4
4C 4
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
1C 6
4C 6
1C 4
1C 10
1C 4
1C 10
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 4
4C 10
4C 4
4C 10
1C 50
30.33
2.00
2.00
2.67
2.66
3.00
3.00
0.66
2.34
0.34
5.66
1.00
5.00
30.33
2.00
2.00
2.66
2.67
3.00
3.00
0.67
2.33
0.33
5.67
1.00
5.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
91.00
6.00
6.00
8.00
8.00
9.00
9.00
2.00
7.00
1.00
17.00
3.00
15.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
30.34
2.00
2.00
2.67
2.67
3.00
3.00
0.67
2.33
0.33
5.67
1.00
5.00
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 23
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
200
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 95
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
HW - SP - 2
SMDB - B2E4
TP
HW - SP - 1
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - B2E4
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
BMF - 2
DB - B1E3
SPARE
MDB - E
32
40
32
40
40
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
--
4C 10
4C 6
4C 10
4C 10
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
1C 10
1C 6
1C 10
1C 10
1C 16
13.66
2.00
2.00
2.33
3.67
3.66
13.67
2.00
2.00
2.34
3.66
3.67
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
41.00
6.00
6.00
7.00
11.00
11.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
13.67
2.00
2.00
2.33
3.67
3.67
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
1ST BASEMENT
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 24
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
100
30
FIRE PROOF
4C 35
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
BEF - 2
SMDB - B1E3
TP
BEF - 2
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - B1E3
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
BMAF - 2
DB - B1E4
DB - G2E
DB - 1E2
DB - 2E2
SPARE
MDB - E
20
40
40
40
40
32
40
40
1C 10
4C 10
--
1C 10
4C 10
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
1C 10
4C 10
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
1C 10
4C 10
1C 6
1C 10
1C 10
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 6
4C 10
4C 10
1C 35
22.74
1.66
6.01
2.00
1.40
2.00
2.34
3.67
3.66
21.94
1.67
5.31
2.00
1.30
2.00
2.33
3.66
3.67
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
66.50
5.00
16.50
6.00
4.00
6.00
7.00
11.00
11.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
21.82
1.67
5.18
2.00
1.30
2.00
2.33
3.67
3.67
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
1ST BASEMENT
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 25
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
160
30
FIRE PROOF
4C 70
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
BEF - 2
SMDB - B1E4
TP
BEF - 2
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - B1E4
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
MDB - E
40
40
40
40
40
40
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
--
--
--
1C 16
8.00
1.33
1.33
1.34
1.33
1.33
1.34
8.00
1.33
1.34
1.33
1.33
1.34
1.33
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
24.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
8.00
1.34
1.33
1.33
1.34
1.33
1.33
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 26
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
63
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 16
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
SPARE
SMDB - DU
TP
SPARE
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - DU
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
DB - 2E1
DB - 3E1
DB - 4E1
DB - 6E
DR - G - ENT - G
MDB - E
40
63
40
40
40
40
40
1C 10
1C 10
1C 16
1C 10
4C 10
4C 10
4C 16
4C 10
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 10
4C 10
4C 10
1C 35
21.35
2.70
6.66
2.00
2.00
3.39
2.00
2.60
21.45
2.65
6.67
2.00
2.00
3.43
2.00
2.70
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
64.00
8.00
20.00
6.00
6.00
10.00
6.00
8.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
21.20
2.65
6.67
2.00
2.00
3.18
2.00
2.70
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 27
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
160
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 70
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
DB - 1E1
SMDB - G1E
TP
DB - G1E
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - G1E
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
DB - B242
DB - 6U
DB - SERVER
SPARE
MDB - E
32
100
40
40
40
40
--
--
1C 16
4C 35
--
1C 10
4C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 10
4C 10
4C 10
1C 35
24.40
2.00
13.30
1.70
1.80
2.70
2.90
25.60
2.00
13.40
2.40
2.30
2.60
2.90
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
75.00
6.00
40.00
6.50
6.50
8.00
8.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
25.00
2.00
13.30
2.40
2.40
2.70
2.20
TOTAL
REMARKS
UPS ROOM
BASEMENT-1
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 28
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
160
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 70
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
DB - G2U
SMDB - UPS
TP
DB - G1U
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - UPS
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
DB - 1 - GR10
DB - 1 - GR11
DB - 1 - GR12
DB - 1 - GR13
DB - 1 - GR14
DB - 1 - GR15
DB - 1 - GR16
DB - 1 - GR17
DB - 1 - GR18
DB - 1 - GR19
DB - 1 - GR20
DB - 1 - GR21
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 1N1
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 95
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
CONT'D
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 29
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
320
4C 185
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
DR - 1N1
DB - 1N1
DB - 1L1
SPARE FOR AV
10 SPARE FOR AV
11 SPARE FOR AV
32
32
32
40
100
40
40
40
--
--
--
PVC/SC
XLPW/SWA/PVC
XLPW/SWA/PVC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
4x1C 16
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
--
--
--
4C 35
4C 10
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
1C 16
1C 16
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 95
52.80
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.30
13.20
3.30
--
5.00
53.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.30
13.40
3.30
5.00
--
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
154.00
6.00
9.00
9.00
10.00
40.00
10.00
5.00
5.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
48.20
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.40
13.40
3.40
--
--
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 30
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
FAULT PVC/XLPE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
320
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 185
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
SP
DB - 1 - GR23
SMDB - 1N1
SP
DB - 1 - GR22
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 1N1 (CONT'D)
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
TP
DB - 1 - GR02
DB - 1 - GR03
DB - 1 - GR04
DB - 1 - GR05
DB - 1 - GR06
DB - 1 - GR07
DB - 1 - GR08
DB - 1 - GR09
DB - 1N2
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
125
XLPW/SWA/PVC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
XLPW/SWA/PVC
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
4C 10
4C 50
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 10
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 25
1C 70
37.85
3.85
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
19.00
37.00
3.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
19.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
112.00
10.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
57.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
37.15
3.15
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
19.00
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 31
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
250
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 150
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
SP
DB - 1 - GR01
SMDB - 1N2
TP
FAHU - PODIUMS
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 1N2
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10 SPARE
11 SPARE
12 SPARE
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 1 - FB
20
32
32
32
40
40
40
63
63
80
80
100
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
KA
CONSULTANT
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1.34
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.33
3.33
3.34
6.67
6.66
10.00
10.00
13.34
1.33
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.33
3.34
3.33
6.66
6.67
10.00
10.00
13.33
1.33
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.34
3.33
3.33
6.67
6.67
10.00
10.00
13.33
4.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
20.00
20.00
30.00
30.00
40.00
CONT'D
400/5A CTM
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 32
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
20
20
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
--
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
66.67
1.33
1.33
66.66
1.33
1.34
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
200.00
4.00
4.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
66.67
1.34
1.33
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 33
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
30
30
30
RATING - AMPS
FAULT PVC/XLPE
KA
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
14 SPARE
SMDB - 1 - FB
TP
13 SPARE
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 1 - FB (CONT'D)
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
DB - 2 - GR10
DB - 2 - GR11
DB - 2 - GR12
DB - 2 - GR13
DB - 2 - GR14
DB - 2 - GR15
DB - 2 - GR16
DB - 2 - GR17
DB - 2 - GR18
DB - 2 - GR19
DB - 2 - GR20
DB - 2 - GR21
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 2N1
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 35
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
CONT'D
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 34
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
160
4C 70
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
40
40
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 10
1C 10
1C 35
25.00
--
5.00
25.00
5.00
--
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
70.00
5.00
5.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
20.00
--
--
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 35
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
FAULT PVC/XLPE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
160
4C 70
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
SP
DB - 2 - GR23
SMDB - 2N1
SP
DB - 2 - GR22
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 2N1 (CONT'D)
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
TP
DB - 2 - GR03
DB - 2 - GR04
DB - 2 - GR05
DB - 2 - GR06
DB - 2 - GR07
DB - 2 - GR08
DB - 2 - GR09
DB - 2N2
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
XLPE/SWA/PVC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
4C 10
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 10
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 35
20.50
5.50
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
20.50
5.50
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
61.60
16.60
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
20.60
5.60
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 36
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
160
4C 70
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
SP
DB - 2 - GR02
SMDB - 2N2
SP
DB - 2 - GR01
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 2N2
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
FAHU - PODIUM
FAHU - ADD
AHU - LOUNGE BAR
AHU - LOBBY
AHU - OFFICE-2
AHU - PREFUNCTION
DB - 2N1
10 DB - 3N1
:
40
40
125
80
100
125
32
200
80
80
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 10
4C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 25
1C 16
4C 25
4C 50
1C 16
4C 35
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
1C 25
4C 50
1C 6
1C 50
1C 16
1C 16
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 6
4C 95
4C 25
4C 25
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
128.07
5.90
6.00
17.34
10.83
14.00
17.33
2.00
31.34
11.67
11.66
125.82
4.90
4.75
17.33
10.84
14.00
17.34
2.00
31.33
11.66
11.67
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
380.50
16.00
16.00
52.00
32.50
42.00
52.00
6.00
94.00
35.00
35.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
126.61
5.20
5.25
17.33
10.83
14.00
17.33
2.00
31.33
11.67
11.67
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 37
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
CABLE SIZE
LENGTH
2/3/4C
OF
kW
kW
kW
kW
KA
CABLE (Mtrs)
mm
mm
mm
800
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
2x4C 300
1C 300
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
CAL - K
SMDB - 2N3
TP
CAL - G
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 2N3
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
DB - 3 - GR09
DB - 3 - GR10
DB - 3 - GR11
DB - 3 - GR12
DB - 3 - GR13
DB - 3 - GR14
DB - 3 - GR15
DB - 3 - GR16
DB - 3 - GR17
DB - 3 - GR18
DB - 3 - GR19
DB - 3 - GR20
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 3N1
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 50
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
CONT'D
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
3RD FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 38
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
200
4C 95
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
DB - 3N1
40
40
40
XLPE/SWA/PVC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
4C 10
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 10
1C 16
1C 16
1C 50
30.90
5.90
--
5.00
29.90
4.90
5.00
--
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
86.00
16.00
5.00
5.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
25.20
5.20
--
--
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
3RD FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 39
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
FAULT PVC/XLPE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
200
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 95
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
SP
DB - 3 - GR22
SMDB - 3N1
SP
DB - 3 - GR21
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 3N1 (CONT'D)
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
TP
DB - 3 - GR08
DB - 3 - GR01
DB - 3 - GR02
DB - 3 - GR03
DB - 3 - GR04
DB - 3 - GR05
DB - 3 - GR06
DB - 3 - GR07
DB - 3N2
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
20
63
XLPE/SWA/PVC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
4x1C 16
4x1C 6
4x1C 25
4C 10
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 10
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 6
1C 16
1C 50
33.68
5.85
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
2.00
1.67
9.16
28.13
5.30
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
2.00
1.66
9.17
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
89.50
16.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
5.00
27.50
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
27.69
4.85
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
2.00
1.67
9.17
TOTAL
1BR-5
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
3RD FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 40
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
200
4C 95
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
KEF - 3
SMDB - 3N2
TP
AHU - SPA
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 3N2
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10 SPARE
20
20
20
32
32
32
32
40
40
80
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1C 16
1C 50
30.00
1.00
1.34
1.66
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
4.00
4.00
10.00
30.00
1.00
1.33
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
4.00
4.00
10.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
90.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
12.00
12.00
30.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
30.00
1.00
1.33
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
4.00
4.00
10.00
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 41
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
200
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 95
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
SPARE
SMDB - SPA
TP
DB - SPA
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - SPA
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SEF - 3
SEF - 4
MAF - 2
MAF - 2
SPF - 3
MAF - 3
DB - 3E1
CONNECTED TO
32
40
32
32
20
20
40
40
20
20
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
--
4C 10
4C 6
4C 6
4C 4
4C 4
4C 10
4C 10
4C 4
4C 4
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
1C 10
1C 6
1C 6
1C 4
1C 4
1C 10
1C 10
1C 4
1C 4
1C 25
19.67
2.00
2.00
2.34
2.67
0.66
0.67
4.16
4.50
0.33
0.34
19.66
2.00
2.00
2.33
2.66
0.67
0.66
4.17
4.50
0.34
0.33
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
59.00
6.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
2.00
2.00
12.50
13.50
1.00
1.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
19.67
2.00
2.00
2.33
2.67
0.67
0.67
4.17
4.50
0.33
0.33
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
3RD FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 42
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
125
30
4C 50
FIRE PROOF
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
SMDB - 3E1
TP
TP
SEF - 2
10 SPARE
TP
SEF - 2
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 3E1
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
SP
SP
SP
TP
TP
TP
DB - GR - 06
DB - GR - 02
DB - GR - 03
DB - GR - 05
DB - 4CR1
DB - 4LS1
DB - 4N1
63
80
80
40
40
40
40
63
40
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
4x1C 16
4x1C 25
4x1C 16
4C 16
4C 25
4C 25
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 95
45.53
7.20
10.00
11.00
--
--
5.00
2.67
7.00
2.66
44.23
5.90
10.00
11.00
--
5.00
--
2.66
7.00
2.67
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
135.00
20.00
30.00
33.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
8.00
21.00
8.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
1BR - GAR
2BR - GAR
1 BR - GAR
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
45.24
6.90
10.00
11.00
5.00
--
--
2.67
7.00
2.67
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 43
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
320
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 185
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
DB - GR - 04
SMDB - 4N1
TP
DB - GR - 01
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 4N1
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
SP
SP
SP
SP
TP
TP
LIFT
LIFT
LIFT CONTROL
LIFT CONTROL
LIFT CONTROL
LIFT CONTROL
CONNECTED TO
LIFT
DB - 4CR2
DB - 4LS2
SMDB - 4N2
63
80
20
20
20
20
40
40
40
40
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 16
4C 25
1C 16
1C 16
1C 4
1C 4
2C 4
2C 4
1C 4
2C 4
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
1C 4
2C 4
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 10
4C 10
4C 10
4C 10
1C 70
38.70
6.70
10.00
1.00
--
--
1.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
37.60
6.60
10.00
--
--
1.00
--
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
114.00
20.00
30.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
37.70
6.70
10.00
--
1.00
--
--
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 44
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
250
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 150
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
TP
LIFT
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 4N2
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10 SPARE
11 SPARE
12 SPARE
20
20
32
32
32
40
40
40
63
63
80
80
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1C 16
1C 120
50.00
1.34
1.66
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.00
6.00
10.00
10.00
50.00
1.33
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.00
6.00
10.00
10.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
150.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
9.00
9.00
9.00
18.00
18.00
30.00
30.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
50.00
1.33
1.67
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.00
6.00
10.00
10.00
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 45
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
350
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 240
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
SPARE
SMDB - 4 - KIT
TP
DB - 4 - KIT
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 4 - KIT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
DB - 5 - GR03
DB - 5 - GR04
DB - 5 - GR05
DB - 5 - GR06
DB - 5 - GR07
DB - 5 - GR08
DB - 5 - GR09
DB - 5 - GR10
DB - 5 - GR11
DB - 5 - GR12
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
2x1C 10
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 10
1C 35
20.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
20.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
60.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
20.00
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
5TH FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 46
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
160
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 70
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
SP
DB - 5 - GR02
SMDB - 5N
SP
DB - 5 - GR01
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 5N
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
DB - T - GR01
DB - T - GR36
DB - T - GR10
DB - T - GR13
DB - T - GR22
DB - T - GR02
DB - T - GR03
DB - T - GR04
DB - T - GR05
DB - T - GR06
DB - T - GR07
DB - T - GR08
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 06N,07N
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
KA
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
4x1C 16
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
6.00
2.50
2.50
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
6.00
--
2.50
2.50
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
6.00
--
--
2.50
2.50
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
7.50
7.50
CONT'D
1BR - S
1BR - S
1BR - S
1BR - C
1BR - C
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
6TH FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 47
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
4x1C 16
CONSULTANT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
DB - T - GR09
DB - T - GR11
DB - T - GR12
DB - T - GR14
DB - T - GR15
DB - T - GR16
DB - T - GR17
DB - T - GR18
DB - T - GR19
DB - T - GR20
DB - T - GR21
10 DB - T - GR23
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB -
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
RATING - AMPS
FAULT PVC/XLPE
KA
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
CONT'D
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 48
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
2x1C 16
CONSULTANT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
CONNECTED TO
10 DB - T - GR25
11 DB - T - GR26
11 DB - T - GR27
11 DB - T - GR28
12 DB - T - GR29
12 DB - T - GR30
12 DB - T - GR31
13 DB - T - GR32
13 DB - T - GR33
13 DB - T - GR34
14 DB - T - GR35
SMDB - 06N,07N
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
66.00
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
61.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
188.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
6TH FLOOR
61.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 49
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
RATING - AMPS
FAULT PVC/XLPE
KA
CONSULTANT
SP
10 DB - T - GR24
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 06N,07N (CONT'D)
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
DB - 9 - GR01
DB - 9 - GR21
DB - 9 - GR35
DB - 9 - GR10
DB - 9 - GR13
DB - 9 - GR16
DB - 9 - GR02
DB - 9 - GR03
DB - 9 - GR04
DB - 9 - GR05
DB - 9 - GR06
DB - 9 - GR07
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 08N,09N
40
40
40
40
40
40
63
63
63
40
40
40
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
KA
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 25
2x1C 25
2x1C 25
4x1C 16
4x1C 16
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
6.00
2.50
2.50
2.50
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
6.00
--
2.50
2.50
2.50
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
6.00
--
--
2.50
2.50
2.50
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
7.50
7.50
7.50
CONT'D
1BR - S
1BR - 5
1BR - S
1BR - C
1BR - C
1BR - C
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
8TH FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 50
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
4x1C 16
CONSULTANT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
DB - 9 - GR08
DB - 9 - GR09
DB - 9 - GR11
DB - 9 - GR12
DB - 9 - GR14
DB - 9 - GR15
DB - 9 - GR17
DB - 9 - GR18
DB - 9 - GR19
10 DB - 9 - GR20
10 DB - 9 - GR22
10 DB - 9 - GR23
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB -
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
RATING - AMPS
FAULT PVC/XLPE
KA
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
CONT'D
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 51
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
2x1C 16
CONSULTANT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
CONNECTED TO
11 DB - 9 - GR25
11 DB - 9 - GR26
12 DB - 9 - GR27
12 DB - 9 - GR28
12 DB - 9 - GR29
13 DB - 9 - GR30
13 DB - 9 - GR31
13 DB - 9 - GR32
14 DB - 9 - GR33
14 DB - 9 - GR34
SMDB - 08N,09N
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
63.50
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
63.50
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
185.50
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
8TH FLOOR
58.50
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 52
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
RATING - AMPS
FAULT PVC/XLPE
KA
CONSULTANT
SP
11 DB - 9 - GR24
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 08N,09N (CONT'D)
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
SP
SP
SP
TP
SP
SP
SP
SP
DB- 10 - GR15
DB- 10 - GR01
DB- 10 - GR16
DB- 10 - GR30
DB- 10 - GR04
DB- 10 - GR05
DB- 10 - GR08
DB- 10 - GR11
DB- 10 - GR02
DB- 10 - GR03
DB- 10 - GR06
DB- 10 - GR07
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 10N
40
40
40
40
63
63
63
63
40
40
40
63
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
KA
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
4x1C 16
2x1C 25
2x1C 25
2x1C 25
4x1C 16
4x1C 16
4x1C 16
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
--
5.00
--
--
6.00
--
--
6.00
2.50
2.50
2.50
6.66
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
6.00
--
2.50
2.50
2.50
6.67
--
--
5.00
--
--
6.00
--
--
2.50
2.50
2.50
6.67
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
7.50
7.50
7.50
20.00
CONT'D
1BR - S
1BR - S
1BR - S
1BR - S
IBR-C
IBR-C
1BR - C
PH
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
10TH FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 53
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
4x1C 25
CONSULTANT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
DB- 10 - GR09
DB- 10 - GR10
DB- 10 - GR12
DB- 10 - GR13
DB- 10 - GR14
DB- 10 - GR17
DB- 10 - GR18
10 DB- 10 - GR19
10 DB- 10 - GR20
10 DB- 10 - GR21
11 DB- 10 - GR22
11 DB- 10 - GR23
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB -
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
RATING - AMPS
FAULT PVC/XLPE
KA
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
CONT'D
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 54
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
2x1C 16
CONSULTANT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
12 DB- 10 - GR26
12 DB- 10 - GR27
13 DB- 10 - GR28
13 DB- 10 - GR29
40
40
40
40
40
40
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
PVC/SC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
2x1C 16
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
61.16
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
60.17
5.00
--
--
5.00
--
--
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)

(2) UPTO 125A
(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
176.50
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
10TH FLOOR
55.17
--
--
5.00
--
--
5.00
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 55
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
CABLE SIZE
2/4x1C
2/3/4C
mm
mm
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
RATING - AMPS
FAULT PVC/XLPE
KA
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
SP
12 DB- 10 - GR25
SMDB - 10N
SP
11 DB- 10 - GR24
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 10N (CONT'D)
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
LIFT
LIFT
LIFT
LIFT CONTROL
LIFT CONTROL
LIFT CONTROL
LIFT CONTROL
LIFT CONTROL
SPARE
20
20
20
20
20
20
63
63
63
63
63
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
--
2C 4
2C 4
--
1C 4
1C 4
1C 4
1C 4
2C 4
2C 4
1C 4
2C 4
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
1C 16
4C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
1C 16
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 16
4C 16
4C 16
4C 16
1C 70
35.33
--
--
1.00
--
--
1.00
6.67
6.66
6.67
6.67
6.66
35.33
--
1.00
--
--
1.00
--
6.66
6.67
6.67
6.66
6.67
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
106.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
10TH FLOOR
35.34
1.00
--
--
1.00
--
--
6.67
6.67
6.66
6.67
6.67
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 56
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
kW
kW
kW
kW
mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
225
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 120
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
LIFT
SMDB - 10N1
TP
LIFT
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - 10N1
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
REF - 1
REF - 2
DB - RN
DB - CR
SPARE
:
32
80
40
20
32
125
250
--
--
1C 16
4C 25
--
1C 10
4C 10
1C 4
1C 6
1C 25
1C 70
XLPE/SWA/PVC
4C 4
4C 6
4C 50
4C 150
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
XLPE/SWA/PVC
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
81.35
2.00
12.00
3.85
1.67
3.00
19.33
39.50
79.85
2.00
12.00
2.35
1.66
3.00
19.34
39.50
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
240.50
6.00
36.00
8.00
5.00
9.00
58.00
118.50
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
ROOF
79.30
2.00
12.00
1.80
1.67
3.00
19.33
39.50
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 57
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
CABLE SIZE
LENGTH
2/3/4C
OF
kW
kW
kW
kW
KA
CABLE (Mtrs)
mm
mm
mm
500
30 XLPE/SWA/PVC
2x4C 150
1C 150
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
FAHU - 1
SMDB - RN
TP
FAHU CORRIDOR
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - RN
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
TP
TP
TP
TP
SEF - 1
SEF - 1
SEF - 1
SEF - 1
MAF - 1
MAF - 1
SEF - 1
LIFT CONTROL
SPARE
LPF - 1
SPF - 2
SPF - 4
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - RE
40
40
32
63
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
--
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
4C 10
4C 10
4C 6
--
2C 4
2C 4
2C 4
2C 4
2C 4
2C 4
2C 4
2C 4
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 10
1C 10
1C 6
--
1C 4
1C 4
1C 4
1C 4
1C 4
1C 4
1C 4
1C 4
1C 70
4.50
4.50
2.00
8.34
--
1.00
--
--
0.50
--
--
0.50
4.50
4.50
2.00
8.33
1.00
--
--
1.00
--
--
0.50
--
4.50
4.50
2.00
8.33
--
--
1.00
--
--
0.50
--
--
13.50
13.50
6.00
25.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
CONT'D
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
ROOF
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 58
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
ECC
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
FAULT PVC/XLPE
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
250
30
FIRE PROOF
4C 150
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
TP
INCOMER
TP
TP
10 SPARE
11 FIREMEN LIFT
MDB - E
63
32
40
40
FIRE PROOF
--
FIRE PROOF
FIRE PROOF
4C 16
--
4C 10
4C 10
30
30
30
30
CABLE (Mtrs)
OF
LENGTH
1C 16
--
1C 10
1C 10
1C 70
39.50
6.66
2.00
5.00
4.50
40.00
6.67
2.00
5.00
4.50
REV.
0
DATE
August 4, 2015
(2) UPTO 125A

(3 PHASE)
(3) LV CT
(1) UPTO 60A

(1 PHASE)
.../...
TEL : 04 - 370 5777
118.50
20.00
6.00
15.00
13.50
(4) HV CT .../...A
FAX : 04 - 370 5888
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
ROOF
39.00
6.67
2.00
5.00
4.50
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 59
KWH METER
(1) (2) (3) (4)
LOCATION
CONNECTED LOAD - KW
ECC
mm
kW
kW
kW
kW
RATING - AMPS
CABLE SIZE
FAULT PVC/XLPE
2/3/4C
KA
mm
mm
250
30
FIRE PROOF
4C 150
(N/A)
CONSULTANT
CONNECTED TO
TP
SPF - 5
SMDB - RE
TP
SPF - 5
OUTGOING
SP/
TP
SMDB - RE (CONT'D)
CIRCUIT
FEEDER
DB NO.
SMDB REF
SR.
NO
PROJECT
LOAD DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
R2
B1
Y1
32
20
32
32
20
20
32
20
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
20
20
20
20
20
20
32
32
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
6
6
4
6
TRAINING ROOM
TRAINING ROOM
ELECT ROOM
SCREENING
HOUSE KEEPING MANAGER
6
4
HR MANAGER
HUMAN RESOURCE
DIRECTOR
DIR OF ENGINEER
M&E WORKSHOP
7
M&E WORKSHOP
M&E WORKSHOP
5
7
STAFF CAF
STORAGE
PARAYER ROOM
UNIFORM ISSUENACE-2
UNIFORM ISSUENACE-2
UNIFORM ISSUENACE-1
CORRIDOR
UNIFORM ISSUENACE-1
CORRIDOR
DIR OF SOR
HOUSE KEEPING MANAGER
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2N1
SMDB - B2N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
CONNECTED LOADS/POINTS
RATING SR. CKT MCB CKT ECC
LTG LTG ISOL SPUR 15A 13A W/H W/M H/D
OF ELCB NO. NO. RTG WIRE WIRE
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
mm
AmP. mm
1
R1
32
4.0
4.0 LOST AND FOUND
5
FCU
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
1.20
0.80
1.20
1.40
1.20
0.80
0.80
1.00
1.20
1.20
1.20
1.40
1.00
0.80
0.80
1.20
CONT'D
0.80
0.80
0.60
1.40
1.40
0.80
0.80
1.00
RING
RING
RING
RING
RING
RING
RING
RING
RING
RING
RING
RING
RING
RING
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 60
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
32
32
32
32
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 25...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
LIFT LOBBY
SPARE
2
3
CLEAN LINEN HOLDING
LOCKER ROOM
VIP LIFT LOBBY
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2N1 (CONT'D)
SMDB - B2N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
25
R9
20
4.0
4.0 AHU ROOM
2
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
10.70
1.30
0.60
0.40
11.70
1.30
1.20
0.40
32.50
10.10
1.30
0.40
0.80
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 61
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
16
10
10
10
10
10
16
10
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
2.5
2.5
9
9
7/2
HUMAN RESOURCE
HUMAN RESOURCE
HUMAN RESOURCE
6
6
PRAYER ROOM
PRAYER ROOM
6
7
LAUNDRY
LAUNDRY
UNIFORM
LAUNDRY
1
4
LIFT
CLEAN LINEN HOLDING
2
2
LIFT
LIFT
LIFT
21
17
WASHROOM
10
12
WASHROOM
WASHROOM
WASHROOM
CORRIDOR
11
CORRIDOR
SPARE
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2L1
SMDB :
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 CORRIDOR
7
FCU
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.05
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.90
0.70
0.60
0.10
0.50
0.60
0.10
0.70
0.45
0.30
0.60
0.40
0.10
1.05
0.70
1.10
CONT'D
0.90
0.30
0.60
0.05
0.10
0.85
0.70
0.90
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 62
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
10
10
10
10
16
10
10
10
10
10
16
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4C 16...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
R12
Y11
32
34
R11
31
33
Y10
B10
30
28
29
B9
R10
27
Y9
26
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
10
MALE WORKSHOP
MALE WORKSHOP
1C 16...mm
MALE WORKSHOP
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
6
9
MALE WORKSHOP
8
12
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
9
7
KITCHEN
KITCHEN
15
AHU ROOM
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2L1 (CONT'D)
SMDB :
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
25
R9
10
2.5
2.5 TRAINING ROOM
6
40A
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
7.20
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
8.10
1.00
0.60
0.90
0.90
23.80
8.50
0.50
1.20
0.90
1.50
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 63
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
Y6
17
19
R6
16
18
Y5
B5
15
13
14
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
20
B3
R4
Y3
10
20
R3
20
20
Y2
B2
20
20
20
20
B1
R2
Y1
R1
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PRAYER ROOM
PRAYER ROOM
STORE ROOM
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
M&E ENGINEERING
HUMAN RESOURCES
TRAINING ROOM
HOUSE KEEPING
HOUSE KEEPING
HOUSE KEEPING
CORRIDOR
UPS ROOM
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
CU - ECC
MALE LOCKER
1C 10...mm
SPARE
LIFT LOBBY
FCU
SORTING ON SOILED LINEN
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2AC1
SMDB - B2N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
mm
AmP. mm
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
4.00
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
4.00
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
12.00
4.00
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 64
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
17
R7
Y6
16
19
R6
15
18
Y5
B5
14
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
2
3
3
AHU ROOM
CORRIDOR
LOADING BAY
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CORRIDOR
SECURITY OFFICE
STRONG
CCTV ROOM
STRONG
CORRIDOR
EHS PUMPROOM
ETS ROOM
FCU
HOTEL WASTE HOLDING
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
4
2
CAR PUMP ROOM
ETS ROOM
CORRIDOR
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2N2
SMDB - B1N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
mm
AmP. mm
1
R1
32
4.0
4.0 RECEIVING OFFICE
8
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.20
0.40
0.60
0.40
1.60
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.60
0.80
CONT'D
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.80
RING
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 65
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
R12
Y11
32
34
R11
31
33
Y10
B10
30
28
29
B9
R10
27
Y9
26
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
1
1
1
STORES
LIFT LOBBY
CU - ECC
STORES
SERVICE LIFT LOBBY
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
FCU
STORES
1C 10...mm
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2N2 (CONT'D)
SMDB - B1N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm2 mm2
25
R9
20
4.0
4.0 STORES
40A
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
5.70
0.50
0.50
5.10
0.50
0.50
15.70
4.90
0.50
0.50
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 66
10
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
10
B3
R4
Y3
10
10
R3
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Y2
B2
10
10
B1
R2
Y1
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
--
--
2.5
2.5
--
2.5
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
--
--
2.5
2.5
--
2.5
CORRIDOR
LIFT SHAFT
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
CORRIDOR
SPARE
SPARE
CORRIDOR
SPARE
CORRIDOR
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2L2
SMDB - B1N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
mm
AmP. mm
1
R1
16
2.5
2.5 CORRIDOR
11
FCU
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.30
1.10
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.10
0.70
0.70
ELECTRICAL
CONT'D
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.50
0.60
0.60
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 67
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
43
Y14
41
42
B13
38
R14
Y13
37
40
R13
36
39
Y12
B12
35
B11
R12
Y11
32
34
R11
31
33
Y10
B10
30
28
29
B9
R10
27
Y9
26
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2L2 (CONT'D)
SMDB - B1N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
10
--40A
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
8.40
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
8.10
1.00
0.70
0.70
0.70
24.50
8.00
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
PAGE - SCH - 68
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
20
20
32
32
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
5
3
PARKING
STORE ROOM
SPARE
PARKING
STORE ROOM
PARKING
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2N3
SMDB - B2N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
1.00
0.80
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
1.00
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
CONT'D
0.60
0.60
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
RING
RING
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 69
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
--
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
R12
Y11
32
34
R11
31
33
Y10
B10
30
28
29
B9
R10
27
Y9
26
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
1
1
1
1
1
CORRIDOR
STORE
FIRE PUMPROOM
ELECT ROOM
PUMPROOM
CU - ECC
STORE
1C 10...mm
STORE
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
BLANK
FCU
FIRE PUMPROOM
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2N3 (CONT'D)
SMDB - B2N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
20
--40A
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
4.65
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.15
4.00
--
0.50
0.50
0.25
13.10
4.45
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.25
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 70
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
20
20
20
20
20
32
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2
2
3
PARKING AREA
PLANT ROOM
MEP
SPARE
SPARE
PARKING AREA
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2N4
SMDB - B1N4
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.60
1.00
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
CONT'D
0.30
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
RING
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 71
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
R12
Y11
32
34
R11
31
33
Y10
B10
30
28
29
B9
R10
27
Y9
26
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
1
1
1
1
PUMPROOM
FAN ROOM
PUMPROOM
PANTRY
CU - ECC
PLANT ROOM
1C 10...mm
MEP
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
FCU
MEP
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2N4 (CONT'D)
SMDB - B1N4
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
20
--40A
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
5.20
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.30
4.00
0.20
0.50
0.50
0.30
13.20
4.00
0.20
0.50
0.50
0.30
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 72
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
DRIVER ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
PANTRY
PANTRY
PANTRY
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
Fed From
DB NO
SMDB - B2N1
DB - B1N3
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
1ST BASEMENT
0.80
0.60
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.80
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
CONT'D
0.30
0.80
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 73
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
R12
Y11
32
34
R11
31
33
Y10
B10
30
28
29
B9
R10
27
Y9
26
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
CU - ECC
PARKING3
1C 10...mm
STORE
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
FCU
DRIVER TOILET
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B1N3 (CONT'D)
SMDB - B2N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
20
--40A
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
3.90
0.50
0.20
3.70
0.50
0.30
11.30
3.70
0.50
0.30
TOTAL
REMARKS
kW
ELECT ROOM
1ST BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 74
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
17
R7
Y6
16
19
R6
15
18
Y5
B5
14
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
--
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PARKING AREA
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
PARKING AREA
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
SMDB DB - B1N4
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
mm
AmP. mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
2.65
0.40
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
2.70
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
8.00
2.65
0.60
0.25
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
TOTAL
REMARKS
kW
ELECT ROOM
1ST BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 75
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
Y8
B8
23
24
20
20
20
32
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
16
10
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
R8
22
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
CU - ECC
UPS ROOM
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
GSM ROOM
NURSE OFFICE
ELECT ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 10...mm
CONTROL ROOM
SPARE
5/2
UPS ROOM
NURSERY
ELECT ROOM
4
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
GENERATOR
ELECT + GSM ROOM
13
STORE-5
10
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2E1
SMDB - B2E1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 CORRIDOR
9
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.10
0.1/0.05
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
4.40
0.80
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.90
0.40
0.20
0.90
5.40
0.40
1.20
0.40
0.40
0.50
0.40
0.80
1.30
15.00
5.20
0.40
0.80
0.40
0.40
0.60
0.80
0.80
1.00
kW
TOTAL
RING
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 76
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
--
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
10
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
--
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
2.5
--
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
2.5
4
2
5
ELECT + TEL ROOM
STORE-3
CORRIDOR
BLANK
ELECT ROOM
ELECT ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
STORE-1
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
CORRIDOR
ELECT + TEL ROOM
CORRIDOR
BLANK
CORRIDOR
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2E2
SMDB - B2E1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 CORRIDOR
10
FCU
0.20
0.20
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.40
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.30
1.00
--
ELECTRICAL
--
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.40
CONT'D
0.40
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.50
0.60
0.10
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 77
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
4.0
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
43
Y14
41
42
B13
38
R14
Y13
37
40
R13
36
39
Y12
B12
35
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
26
27
R9
25
4.0
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SUMP PUMP
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2E2 (CONT'D)
SMDB - B2E1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm2 mm2
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
1.50
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
3.20
0.50
1.90
0.50
8.00
2.90
0.50
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
PAGE - SCH - 78
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
ELECT ROM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2E4
SMDB - B2E4
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
mm
AmP. mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
2.00
0.40
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
2.00
0.40
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
6.00
2.00
0.40
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 79
REV.
0
40A SP 100mA
40A SP 100mA
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
10
10
10
--
2.5
--
2C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
C11
11
C8
C9
C7
C10
C6
C5
10
C4
C3
C2
--
2.5
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC + 1C 10...mm
SPARE
CU - ECC
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
TOTAL LOAD
1.40
0.30
0.20
0.60
1.40
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
RMU ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 80
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
RMU ROOM
0.10
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.30
FCU
LOCATION :
SPARE
2
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - RMU
LV-MDB-1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A SP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
C1
10
2.5
2.5 RMU ROOM
6
REV.
0
40A SP 30mA
40A SP 100mA
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
20
20
10
--
4.0
2.5
2C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
C12
12
C8
C11
C7
11
C6
C9
C5
C10
C4
C3
10
C2
--
4.0
2.5
XLPE/SWA/PVC + 1C 10...mm
SPARE
TRANSFORMER T
TRANSFORMER T
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - TR
LV-MDB-1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A SP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
C1
10
2.5
2.5 TRANSFORMER T
8
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
0.10
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
2.20
0.20
0.40
0.80
0.80
2.20
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
TRANSFORMER ROOM
BASEMENT FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 81
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - SERVER
SMDB - UPS
:
:
Rating of Incomer
100A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
20
---
FCU
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
SERVER ROOM
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
CONT'D
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 82
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 35...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
43
Y14
41
42
R14
40
Y13
38
B13
37
39
B12
R13
36
Y12
35
Y11
32
B11
R11
31
R12
B10
30
34
Y10
29
33
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - SERVER (CONT'D)
SMDB - UPS
:
:
Rating of Incomer
100A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
20
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
13.30
0.80
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
13.30
0.80
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
40.00
13.40
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
TOTAL
REMARKS
kW
SERVER ROOM
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 83
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
20
20
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
2
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G1N
SMDB - G1N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
100A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
20
4.0
4.0 CORRIDOR
3
FCU
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
0.60
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
0.40
CONT'D
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
1.15
0.60
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 84
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 35...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
1
1
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CU - ECC
SERVICE LOBBY
1C 16...mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
GARBAGE ROOM
FCU
CORRIDOR
SATELLITE KITCHEN
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G1N (CONT'D)
SMDB - G1N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
100A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
25
R9
20
4.0
4.0 ENTRANCE
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
13.00
1.15
1.15
1.15
0.30
0.30
0.30
13.40
0.90
1.15
1.15
1.15
0.30
0.30
40.00
13.60
0.90
1.15
1.15
1.15
0.30
0.30
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 85
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G1L
SMDB - G1N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
CONT'D
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 86
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
43
Y14
41
42
R14
40
Y13
38
B13
37
39
B12
R13
36
Y12
35
Y11
32
B11
R11
31
R12
B10
30
34
Y10
29
33
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G1L (CONT'D)
SMDB - G1N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
10.00
0.65
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
10.00
0.65
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
30.00
10.00
0.65
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 87
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DR - G-ADD
SMDB - G1N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
CONT'D
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 88
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
43
Y14
41
42
R14
40
Y13
38
B13
37
39
B12
R13
36
Y12
35
Y11
32
B11
R11
31
R12
B10
30
34
Y10
29
33
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DR - G-ADD (CONT'D)
SMDB - G1N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
10.00
0.65
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
10.00
0.65
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
30.00
10.00
0.65
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 89
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DR - G - ENT
SMDB - G1N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
CONT'D
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 90
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
43
Y14
41
42
R14
40
Y13
38
B13
37
39
B12
R13
36
Y12
35
Y11
32
B11
R11
31
R12
B10
30
34
Y10
29
33
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DR - G - ENT (CONT'D)
SMDB - G1N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
10.00
0.65
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
10.00
0.65
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
30.00
10.00
0.65
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 91
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - ST - KIT
SMDB - ST - KIT
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
20
---
FCU
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
CONT'D
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 92
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
Y14
41
43
R14
40
42
Y13
B13
39
37
38
B12
R13
36
Y12
35
Y11
32
B11
R11
31
R12
B10
30
34
Y10
29
33
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - ST - KIT (CONT'D)
SMDB - ST - KIT
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
32
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
10.00
0.95
0.95
0.85
0.85
10.00
0.95
0.95
0.85
0.85
30.00
10.00
0.95
0.95
0.85
0.85
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 93
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G2N
SMDB - B1N4
:
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
CONT'D
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 94
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 16...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
CU - ECC
KITCHEN
1C 16...mm
KITCHEN
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
FCU
LOBBY
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G2N (CONT'D)
SMDB - B1N4
:
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
25
R9
20
4.0
4.0 LOBBY
1
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
6.30
0.30
0.95
0.85
0.20
6.85
0.30
0.85
0.85
0.85
20.00
6.85
0.30
0.85
0.85
0.85
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 95
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DR - G2-ENT
SMDB - B1N4
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
CONT'D
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 96
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
Y14
41
43
R14
40
42
Y13
B13
39
37
38
B12
R13
36
Y12
35
Y11
32
B11
R11
31
R12
B10
30
34
Y10
29
33
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DR - G2-ENT (CONT'D)
SMDB - B1N4
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
10.00
0.95
0.95
0.85
0.85
10.00
0.95
0.95
0.85
0.85
30.00
10.00
0.95
0.95
0.85
0.85
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 97
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G2-KIT
SMDB - G2 - KIT
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
CONT'D
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 98
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
Y16
B16
47
48
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
R16
46
Y15
B15
44
45
B14
R15
43
Y14
41
42
R14
40
Y13
38
B13
37
39
B12
R13
36
Y12
35
Y11
32
B11
R11
31
R12
B10
30
34
Y10
29
33
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G2-KIT (CONT'D)
SMDB - G2 - KIT
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
10.00
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
10.00
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
30.00
10.00
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 99
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
Y6
17
19
R6
16
18
Y5
B5
15
13
14
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
ELECT ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G1E
SMDB - G1E
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
2.60
0.40
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
2.70
0.50
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
8.00
2.70
0.50
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 100
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DR - G-ENT-E
SMDB - G1E
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
2.70
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
2.65
0.40
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
8.00
2.65
0.40
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.45
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 101
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
Y6
17
19
R6
16
18
Y5
B5
15
13
14
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
ELECT ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G2E
SMDB - B1E4
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
1.40
0.40
0.40
0.30
0.30
1.30
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
4.00
1.30
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 102
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
Y8
B8
23
24
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
32
32
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
R8
22
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
FCC
FCC
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1
6
TELE ROOM - 5F
TELE ROOM - 5F
TELE ROOM - 3F
1
TELE ROOM - 3F
1
TELE ROOM - 2F
TELE ROOM - 4F
TELE ROOM - 2F
TELE ROOM - 4F
1
1
TELE ROOM - 1F
TELE ROOM - 1F
TELE ROOM - GF
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G1U
SMDB - UPS
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
20
4.0
4.0 TELE ROOM - GF
1
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
2.90
0.30
0.30
0.30
1.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
2.20
0.50
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
8.00
2.90
0.30
0.30
0.30
1.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
TOTAL
RING
RING
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 103
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
TELE ROOM - B1
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
TELE ROOM - B1
TELE ROOM - 3F
1
TELE ROOM - 3F
1
TELE ROOM - 2F
TELE ROOM - 4F
TELE ROOM - 2F
TELE ROOM - 4F
1
1
TELE ROOM - 1F
TELE ROOM - 1F
TELE ROOM - GF
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - G2U
SMDB - UPS
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
20
4.0
4.0 TELE ROOM - GF
1
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
2.70
0.70
0.60
0.60
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
2.70
0.70
0.60
0.60
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
8.00
2.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
GROUND FLOOR
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 104
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
4P
30mA
R4
Y4
10
11
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
32
32
32
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
17
R7
Y6
16
19
R6
15
18
Y5
B5
14
B4
B3
R5
Y3
13
R3
12
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
CU - ECC
4
4
6
6
6
TELE ROOM
SECURITY OFFICE
SECURITY OFFICE
DIR OF SECURITY
CCTV ROOM
CCTV ROOM
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1
1
TELE ROOM
TELE ROOM
1C 10...mm
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - B2U2
SMDB - UPS
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
20
4.0
4.0 TELE ROOM
1
40A
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
1.80
0.20
1.20
0.20
0.20
2.40
0.20
1.20
0.80
0.20
6.50
2.30
0.10
1.20
0.80
0.20
kW
TOTAL
RING
RING
RING
REMARKS
ELECT ROOM
2ND BASEMENT
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 105
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
Y6
17
19
R6
16
18
Y5
B5
15
13
14
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
TELE ROOM - 9F
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
TELE ROOM - 9F
1
TELE ROOM - 8F
TELE ROOM - 10F
TELE ROOM - 8F
TELE ROOM - 10F
1
1
TELE ROOM - 7F
TELE ROOM - 7F
TELE ROOM - 6F
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 6U
SMDB - UPS
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
20
4.0
4.0 TELE ROOM - 6F
1
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
6TH FLOOR
1.70
0.90
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
2.40
0.90
0.90
0.20
0.20
0.20
6.50
2.40
0.90
0.90
0.20
0.20
0.20
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 106
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
20
20
20
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
2
2
STORAGE
CORRIDOR
STORAGE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 1N1
SMDB - 1N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
100A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
20
4.0
4.0 STORAGE
3
FCU
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.40
0.60
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.40
CONT'D
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.40
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 107
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 35...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
Y14
41
43
R14
40
42
Y13
B13
39
37
38
B12
R13
36
Y12
35
Y11
32
B11
R11
31
R12
B10
30
34
Y10
29
33
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
1
CORRIDOR
PANTRY
CU - ECC
CORRIDOR
1C 16...mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
CORRIDOR
FCU
CORRIDOR
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 1N1 (CONT'D)
SMDB - 1N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
100A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
20
---
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
13.20
0.70
0.50
0.50
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
13.40
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
40.00
13.40
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 108
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
Y8
B8
23
24
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
R8
22
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DR - 1L1
SMDB - 1N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
3.30
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
3.40
0.50
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
10.00
3.30
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 109
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
Y8
B8
23
24
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
R8
22
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DR - 1L1
SMDB - 1N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
3.30
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
3.40
0.50
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
10.00
3.30
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 110
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
AHU ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 1N2
SMDB - 1N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 AHU ROOM
8
FCU
0.20
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
0.25
0.25
0.40
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.80
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
CONT'D
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 111
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
R12
Y11
32
34
R11
31
33
Y10
B10
30
28
29
B9
R10
27
Y9
26
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
1
1
1
AHU ROOM
AHU ROOM
CORRIDOR
CU - ECC
CORRIDOR
1C 10...mm
CORRIDOR
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
FCU
CORRIDOR
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 1N2 (CONT'D)
SMDB - 1N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
20
--40A
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
3.85
0.50
0.50
0.15
3.15
0.50
0.50
0.15
10.00
3.00
0.50
0.30
0.20
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 112
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
16
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
8
10
2
AHU ROOM
AHU ROOM
LIFT SHAFT
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
4
11
AHU ROOM
LIFT SHAFT-5-6
LIFT SHAFT-7-8
LIFT SHAFT-3,4
SPARE
SPARE
8
3
STORE + LINEN ROOM
UNASSIGNED
ELECT + TELE ROOM
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 2N1
SMDB - 2N3
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 CORRIDOR
6
FCU
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.1/0.05
0.05
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
0.10
0.15
0.15
0.10
1.10
0.20
0.30
0.30
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.15
0.80
CONT'D
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.80
0.20
0.15
0.30
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 113
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
32
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UNASSIGNED
AHU ROOM
AHU ROOM
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
CORRIDOR
FCU
STORE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
3
5
MEP
CORRIDOR
MEP
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 2N1 (CONT'D)
SMDB - 2N3
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
25
R9
20
4.0
4.0 AHU ROOM
4
0.50
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
6.00
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.10
0.10
0.10
1.00
0.80
5.25
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.60
16.00
4.75
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.30
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.60
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
RING
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 114
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
LIFT SHAFT-1,2
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
10
AHU ROOM
10
LIFT SHAFT-1,2
AHU ROOM
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 2N2
SMDB - 2N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 AHU ROOM
10
FCU
0.05
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.20
1.00
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
1.00
CONT'D
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.20
1.00
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 115
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
CU - ECC
CORRIDOR - 2F
1C 10...mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
CORRIDOR - 2F
FCU
CORRIDOR - 2F
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 2N2 (CONT'D)
SMDB - 2N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
10
---
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
5.50
0.50
0.40
0.40
5.60
0.50
0.20
0.40
16.60
5.50
0.50
0.40
0.40
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 116
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
14
B5
13
15
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2
3
3
STORAGE
CORRIDOR
STORE ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
MEP
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
4
3
STOREY
MEP
MEP & STORE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 3N1
SMDB - 2N3
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 CORRIDOR
8
FCU
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
3RD FLOOR
0.60
0.60
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.80
0.30
0.60
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.40
CONT'D
0.30
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 117
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
1
1
1
1
1
CORRIDOR
LIVING ROOM
STORAGE
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CU - ECC
STORAGE
1C 10...mm
CORRIDOR
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
FCU
CORRIDOR
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 3N1 (CONT'D)
SMDB - 2N3
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
20
---
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
3RD FLOOR
5.90
0.15
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.25
0.25
0.25
5.20
0.15
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.25
0.25
0.25
16.00
4.90
0.15
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.25
0.25
0.25
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 118
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
4P
100mA
10
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
R7
Y6
17
19
R6
16
18
Y5
B5
15
13
14
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
10
B3
R4
Y3
10
10
R3
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Y2
B2
10
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 3N2
SMDB - 3N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
--40A
FCU
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
3RD FLOOR
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
CONT'D
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
0.35
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 119
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
--
--
--
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
R12
Y11
32
34
R11
31
33
Y10
B10
30
28
29
B9
R10
27
Y9
26
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
1
1
1
1
1
1
CORRIDOR - 3F
CORRIDOR - 3F
CORRIDOR - 3F
CORRIDOR - 4F
CORRIDOR - 4F
CORRIDOR - 4F
CU - ECC
GYM - 3F
1C 10...mm
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
AHU ROOM - 3F
FCU
AHU ROOM - 3F
SPARE
SPARE
CORRIDOR
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
STORE - 4F
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 3N2 (CONT'D)
SMDB - 3N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
25
R9
20
4.0
4.0 AHU ROOM - 3F
4
40A
0.50
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
3RD FLOOR
5.85
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
--
0.15
0.10
0.80
4.85
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.15
--
0.15
0.10
0.15
16.00
5.30
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.15
--
0.15
0.10
0.60
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 120
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
Y6
17
19
R6
16
18
Y5
B5
15
13
14
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
ELECT ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 1E1
SMDB :
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
2.00
0.10
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
2.00
0.20
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
6.00
2.00
0.20
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 121
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
Y6
17
19
R6
16
18
Y5
B5
15
13
14
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
ELECT ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 1E2
SMDB - B1E4
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
1ST FLOOR
2.00
0.40
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
2.00
0.40
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
6.00
2.00
0.40
0.40
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 122
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
R7
Y6
17
19
R6
16
18
Y5
B5
15
13
14
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
2.5
2.5
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2
2
STORE
STORE
HW - CP-2
HW - CP-1
SPARE
SPARE
ELECT ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
3
2
CORRIDOR
4/2
STORE
ELECT + TELE ROOM
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 2E1
SMDB - G1E
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 CORRIDOR
7
FCU
1.00
1.00
0.20
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.1/0.05
0.05
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
0.34
0.33
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.10
0.35
0.33
0.34
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.10
0.15
CONT'D
0.33
0.33
0.30
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.10
0.50
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 123
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
10
2.5
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
26
27
R9
25
2.5
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SS - CP - 1
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 2E1 (CONT'D)
SMDB - G1E
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
2.00
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
3.39
0.67
3.18
0.66
10.00
3.43
0.67
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 124
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
R7
Y6
17
19
R6
16
18
Y5
B5
15
13
14
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
Y3
B3
R3
R4
B2
Y2
10
B1
R2
Y1
10
20
20
20
20
20
32
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
2.5
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
--
2.5
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
--
6
4
STAIRCASE-4
STAIRCASE-5
MAF - L
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
ELECT - 2-4 F
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
STAIRCASE-3
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 2E2
SMDB - G1E
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 TELE + ELECT ROOM
4
FCU
2.00
0.20
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
0.67
0.50
1.20
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.66
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.20
0.50
CONT'D
0.67
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.30
0.50
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
RING
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 125
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
10
10
2.5
2.5
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
26
27
R9
25
2.5
2.5
FIRE PROOF +
SEF - 2
SEF - 2
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 2E2 (CONT'D)
SMDB - G1E
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
2.00
2.00
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
2ND FLOOR
6.01
0.67
0.67
5.18
0.66
0.66
16.50
5.31
0.67
0.67
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 126
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
Y6
17
19
R6
16
18
Y5
B5
15
13
14
B4
R5
12
Y4
11
10
B3
R4
Y3
10
10
R3
10
10
Y2
B2
10
10
10
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
ELECT ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
TELE+ELECT ROOM
1C 10...mm
4/3
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 3E1
SMDB - G1E
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 CORRIDOR
8
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
0.1/0.05
0.05
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
3RD FLOOR
2.00
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
2.00
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
6.00
2.00
0.25
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.55
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 127
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
STORES
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
6
2
STORAGE
HOUSE KEEPING
STORES
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 4N1
SMDB - 4N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 MEP + HOUSE KEEPING
8
FCU
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.20
0.80
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.60
CONT'D
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 128
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
32
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 16...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
R12
Y11
32
34
R11
31
33
Y10
B10
30
R10
28
29
B9
Y9
27
26
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
STORAGE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LIFT LOBBY
CORRIDOR
LIFT LOBBY
MEP
HOUSE KEEPING
STORAGE
LIFT LOBBY
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
HOUSE KEEPING
FCU
CORRIDOR
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
2
2
HOUSE KEEPING
STORAGE
MEP
HOUSE KEEPING
MEP
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 4N1 (CONT'D)
SMDB - 4N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
25
R9
20
4.0
4.0 MEP
2
0.50
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
7.20
0.50
0.50
1.00
0.40
0.40
0.60
0.60
0.40
6.90
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.30
0.40
0.20
0.40
1.40
20.00
5.90
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
RING
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 129
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 4LS1
SMDB - 4N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
CONT'D
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 130
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 25...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
43
Y14
41
42
R14
40
Y13
B13
38
39
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 4LS1 (CONT'D)
SMDB - 4N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
10.00
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
10.00
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
30.00
10.00
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 131
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
17
R7
Y6
16
19
R6
15
18
Y5
B5
14
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
R1
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 4CR1
SMDB - 4N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
FCU
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
CONT'D
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 132
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 25...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
26
27
R9
25
4.0
4.0
4.0
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 4CR1 (CONT'D)
SMDB - 4N1
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm2 mm2
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
3.00
3.00
3.00
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
11.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
11.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
33.00
11.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 133
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
17
R7
Y6
16
19
R6
15
18
Y5
B5
14
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
R1
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 4CR2
SMDB - 4N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
FCU
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
CONT'D
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 134
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
4.0
4.0
4C 25...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
26
27
R9
25
4.0
4.0
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
4TH FLOOR
4TH FLOOR
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 4CR2 (CONT'D)
SMDB - 4N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm2 mm2
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
3.00
3.00
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
10.00
1.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
1.00
30.00
10.00
1.00
1.00
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 135
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 4LS2
SMDB - 4N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
SPARE
1
R1
10
---
FCU
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
CONT'D
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 136
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4C 16...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
43
Y14
41
42
R14
40
Y13
B13
38
39
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 4LS2 (CONT'D)
SMDB - 4N2
:
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
10
---
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
6.70
0.20
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
6.70
0.20
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
20.00
6.60
0.10
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 137
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
22
23
24
Y7
B7
20
21
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
STORE
2
2
3
MEP - 6F
MEP - 6F
STORE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
MEP
LIFT SHAFT
STORE
MEP
MEP
6
3
LIFT SHAFT
STORE
LIFT SHAFT
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 6N
SMDB - G1N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 LIFT SHAFT
6
FCU
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.05
0.05
0.05
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
6TH FLOOR
0.40
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.30
0.20
0.30
0.30
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.20
0.10
0.30
CONT'D
0.40
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.30
0.20
0.30
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 138
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 16...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
R15
43
Y14
41
42
R14
40
Y13
B13
38
39
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
27
26
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
CU - ECC
MEP - 8F
1C 16...mm
2
3
MEP - 8F
1
1
1
1
1
CORRIDOR - 6F
CORRIDOR - 7F
CORRIDOR - 7F
CORRIDOR - 8F
CORRIDOR - 8F
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
FCU
CORRIDOR - 6F
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
3
2
STORE - 2F
MEP - 8F
MEP - 2F
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 6N (CONT'D)
SMDB - G1N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm2 mm2
25
R9
20
4.0
4.0 MEP - 2F
2
0.50
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
6TH FLOOR
8.00
0.50
0.50
0.70
0.80
0.80
0.60
0.40
0.40
8.20
0.50
0.50
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
24.00
7.80
0.50
0.50
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.40
0.40
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 139
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
17
R7
Y6
16
19
R6
15
18
Y5
B5
14
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2
3
MEP - 10TH
STORE - 10TH
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
3
2
MEP - 10TH
MEP - 9TH
STORE - 9TH
MEP - 9TH
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
2
3
MEP
STORE
MEP
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
SMDB - G1N
DB - 9N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
mm
AmP. mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 STORE
3
FCU
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
9TH FLOOR
0.95
0.40
0.40
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.15
0.30
0.90
0.60
0.60
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.10
CONT'D
0.90
0.40
0.40
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.10
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 140
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
R12
Y11
32
34
R11
31
33
Y10
B10
30
28
29
B9
R10
27
Y9
26
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
1
1
1
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CU - ECC
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
FCU
CORRIDOR
1C 10...mm
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 9N (CONT'D)
SMDB - G1N
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm2 mm2
25
R9
20
4.0
4.0 CORRIDOR
40A
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
9TH FLOOR
5.60
0.50
0.50
6.40
0.50
0.50
18.00
6.00
0.50
0.50
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 141
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
4.0
4.0
--
--
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
1C 10...mm
CU - ECC
MEP
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
FCU
CORRIDOR
SPARE
SPARE
ROOF
ROOF
ROOF
ROOF
SPARE
SPARE
6
6
ROOF
10
ROOF
ROOF
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - RN
SMDB - RN
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
mm
AmP. mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 ROOF
10
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.50
0.50
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.10
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
ROOF
3.85
0.15
0.50
0.80
0.80
0.60
1.00
1.80
0.15
0.15
0.15
0.60
0.15
0.60
8.00
2.35
0.15
0.50
0.15
0.40
0.15
1.00
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 142
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
17
R7
Y6
16
19
R6
15
18
Y5
B5
14
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
R1
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
ROOF
ROOF
ROOF
ROOF
ROOF
ROOF
ROOF
ROOF
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - CR
SMDB - RN
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
LTG LTG ISOL 16A 15A 13A W/H W/M H/D
POINTS
S/O S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
FCU
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
CONT'D
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 143
REV.
0
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
20
20
20
20
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4C 25...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
32
R12
Y11
31
34
R11
30
33
Y10
B10
29
B9
R10
28
Y9
26
27
R9
25
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
ROOF
ROOF
ROOF
ROOF
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - CR (CONT'D)
SMDB - RN
:
:
Rating of Incomer
80A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
LTG LTG ISOL 16A 15A 13A W/H W/M H/D
POINTS
S/O S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm2 mm2
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
12.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
12.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
36.00
12.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 144
REV.
0
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
R8
Y8
B8
21
22
23
24
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4C 10...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y7
B7
20
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
--
--
--
--
--
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
ELECT + TELE ROOM
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
ELECT ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
1C 10...mm
3
4/2
CORRIDOR
SPARE
4
4
STAIR - 4
STAIR - 5
LIFT LOBBY
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 4E
SMDB - G1E
:
:
Rating of Incomer
40A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
SIZE SIZE
IN
mm
AmP. mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 ELECT + TELE ROOM
4/2
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
0.20
0.1/0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.1/0.05
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
4TH FLOOR
2.40
0.30
0.80
0.30
0.30
0.20
0.50
1.90
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.50
0.20
6.00
1.70
0.50
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.15
0.15
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 145
40A
4P
30mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
40A
4P
100mA
Y7
B7
R8
Y8
B8
20
21
22
23
24
B6
R7
19
Y6
17
18
R6
16
Y5
B5
14
15
B4
R5
13
Y4
11
12
B3
R4
Y3
R3
10
Y2
B2
B1
R2
Y1
32
32
32
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
--
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
--
4.0
4.0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
SPARE
ELECT ROOM
ELECT ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
ELECT + TELE ROOM
CORRIDOR
3
4/2
CORRIDOR
3
STAIR - 6
4/2
STAIR - 4
ELECT + TELE ROOM
CORRIDOR
1/2
ELECT + TELE ROOM
STAIR - 2
CORRIDOR
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 6E
SMDB - G1E
:
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm
mm
1
R1
10
2.5
2.5 ELECT + TELE ROOM
4/2
FCU
0.20
0.20
0.05
0.1/0.05
0.05
0.1/0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.1/0.05
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
6TH FLOOR
1.20
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.50
0.15
0.40
0.50
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.15
0.40
0.15
CONT'D
1.20
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.15
0.50
0.40
0.15
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
RING
RING
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 146
REV.
0
4P
30mA
R16
Y16
B16
45
46
47
48
32
32
--
--
4C 16...mm
DATE
August 2, 2015
CABLE SIZE:
Y15
B15
44
B14
41
R15
Y14
40
43
R14
39
42
Y13
B13
38
B12
R13
37
Y12
35
36
B11
R12
Y11
32
34
R11
31
33
Y10
B10
30
28
29
B9
R10
27
Y9
26
--
--
XLPE/SWA/PVC +
SPARE
SPARE
1C 16...mm
CU - ECC
PROJECT
:
DB NO
Fed From
DB - 6E (CONT'D)
SMDB - G1E
:
:
Rating of Incomer
63A TP ISOLATOR
:
ROOM/AREA
POINTS
O/L S/O S/O
IN
SIZE SIZE
AmP. mm2 mm2
SPARE
25
R9
32
--40A
FCU
TOTAL LOAD
TOTAL LOAD
PER PHASE
kW
CCU OVEN UNIT
ELECT ROOM
6TH FLOOR
6.75
1.00
6.70
1.00
20.00
6.55
1.15
LOAD PER CKT.

KILO WATTS
LOCATION :
kW
TOTAL
REMARKS
ELECTRICAL
PAGE - SCH - 147

Volume 2 - Part 4 - MEP Electrical Specifications

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Volume 2 - Part 4 - MEP Electrical Specifications

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

JBR

JBR 5 Star Hotel

Volume 1: Condition of Contract

Volume 3: Bill Of Quantities

Volume 5: Other Documents

Proposed 2B + G + 10 Storey Hotel Building on Plot No. 3920529

DIVISION 13 & 16 - ELECTRICAL

MEP Final Specification

Proposed 2B + G + 10 Storey Hotel Building on Plot No. 3920529

Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm System

General Requirements of Electrical Services

Pre-commissioning and Commissioning

Conductors and Cables

Raceway and Boxes

Electronic Soft Starters

Variable Frequency Controllers

DIESEL GENERATOR SETS

Automatic Power Factor Improvement Plant

Low Voltage Switchboard

Enclosed Bus Assemblies

Central Emergency Lighting

Lighting Control and Dimming System

Lightning Protection System

Division 13 & 16 - Electrical

DIVISION 13 - SECTION 13850

MEP Final Specification

Proposed 2B + G + 10 Storey Hotel Building on Plot No. 3920529

Work Included ............................................................................................................................................... 3

Description of Work ...................................................................................................................................... 3

Codes And Standards .................................................................................................................................. 5

System Description ....................................................................................................................................... 7

System of Wiring ......................................................................................................................................... 23

Civil Defence Remote Monitoring System................................................................................................. 23

PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................................... 24

Type of Cables ............................................................................................................................................ 24

Cabling and Wiring ..................................................................................................................................... 24

Testing and Commissioning ....................................................................................................................... 25

Division 13 - Section 13850

Proposed 2B + G + 10 Storey Hotel Building on Plot No. 3920529

Compliance with sections of Division I, General and documents referred to therein.

Conform to General Requirements for Electrical Services of Division 26.

Fire detection and alarm operations

Two-way supervised firefighters phone operations

Supervised automatic voice alarm operations

Security and Door Access System

Fire fighting/sprinkler system

Lighting Control system

Central monitoring for emergency and exit lighting.

All audio / visual systems in fire zone

All kitchen hood fire suppression system

All staircase pressurization system

All smoke control (and make up air) system

Division 13 - Section 13850

Proposed 2B + G + 10 Storey Hotel Building on Plot No. 3920529

Local Electricity Authority regulations for electrical installation works.

Department of Civil Defence requirements

Manufacturers Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems and with a record of

Installer qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized and certified representative of

Division 13 - Section 13850

Proposed 2B + G + 10 Storey Hotel Building on Plot No. 3920529

Codes And Standards

Module 14 of Rixos Guidelines.

Fire Officers Committee